JP2022171909A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing a fraudulent act to control means from a back side of the game machine.

SOLUTION: A protection cover member 140 for covering a setting key 501 provided in a main control device 110 from a back side of a Pachinko machine 10 is mounted to a right-side plate 11d of an outer frame 11, and the setting key 501 is configured not to be exposed to the back side of the Pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140 in a situation in which an inner frame 12 is closed to the outer frame 11. In a situation in which the inner frame 12 is open to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 installed on the back of the inner frame 12 is exposed to a front side of the Pachinko machine 10 following rotation of the inner frame 12 and a front frame 14, and becomes a state for permitting immediate operation by a person concerned with a hall.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 67

COPYRIGHT: (C)2023,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine such as a pachinko machine.

Conventionally, a plurality of control means for executing various game settings and processes are arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, and when the opening/closing body on which each control means is mounted is closed, the player touches the control means. configured in such a way that it cannot

On the other hand, a person involved in the hall opens the opening/closing member outside the opening hours of the hall, and performs various settings and maintenance work for the control means (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-024202 A

However, in such a game machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that the control means will be tampered with from the back side of the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts against control means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 has an opening/closing body supported by a supporting body so as to be openable/closable, and a first control means and a second control means for controlling a game on the back side of the opening/closing body of the game machine. Control means are mounted. At least part or all of the first control means on the back side of the game machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body. At least part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut against a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back surface of the gaming machine.

According to the game machine of claim 1, the opening/closing body is supported by the supporting body so as to be opened and closed, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the opening/closing body of the game machine. be. At least part or all of the first control means on the back side of the game machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body. At least part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut against a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back surface of the gaming machine. As a result, the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means covering the first control means and the second control means, respectively, is eliminated, and there is no room for wires or the like to enter the inside of the game machine from the back side of the game machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Further, when the opening/closing body is released from the supporting body by forming the first protecting means provided on the opening/closing body so as to overlap the second protecting means provided on the supporting body in the direction of the back surface of the game machine. Even so, since the first protective means of the opening/closing body and the second protective means of the supporting body do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the game machine is improved without increasing unnecessary maintenance work or the like. It has the effect of being able to

1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of a game board of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine. (a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and valid line setting of a display screen, and (b) is a diagram showing an example of an actual display screen. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller; FIG. It is the figure which showed typically the structure of various counters, a pending|holding ball storage area, and a pending|holding ball execution area. (a) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot random number table, (b) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a jackpot type table, (c) is the number of balls held is 2 (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a variation pattern table for big hits in the case of , and (d) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a (normal) variation pattern table for losing when the number of held balls is 2 and (e) is a diagram schematically showing an example of a deviation (probability variable) variation pattern table when the number of held balls is two. It is the figure which showed typically an example of the number-of-balls table. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flow chart showing switch reading processing executed by an MPU in a main control unit; It is a flow chart which shows the start prize-winning processing performed by MPU in a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing variation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing fluctuation start processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 10 is a flow chart showing a role product ratio management main process executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller; It is a flow chart which shows a part of setting information reception processing executed by the role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows a part of setting information reception processing executed by the role product ratio management chip in the main controller. 10 is a flow chart showing a role product ratio calculation process executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows inspection result output processing executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller. Fig. 10 is a flow chart showing a start-up process performed by the MPU in the audio ramp controller; 4 is a flow chart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing command determination processing executed by an MPU in an audio lamp control device; 4 is a flow chart showing a variable display process executed by the MPU in the audio ramp control device; (a) is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (b) is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, (c) is a flow chart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. It is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a main controller in the second embodiment. 10 is a flow chart showing winning information saving processing executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a flow chart which shows inspection result output processing executed by a role product ratio management chip in the main controller. It is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine in the third embodiment. 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; 4 is a flowchart showing role ratio processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing role ratio main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a flowchart which shows the role ratio process performed by MPU in the main control unit in 4th Embodiment. 4 is a flowchart showing role ratio main processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 5th Embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a base display device, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device. (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying a base value, which is stored in an external work area of a RAM in the MPU of a main control unit; 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of value data; FIG. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing base value processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing base value calculation processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing part of base value display processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing the remaining part of the base value display process executed by the MPU in the main controller; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 6th Embodiment. (a) is a front view of the setting key when the setting key is in the off state, and (b) is a front view of the setting key when the setting key is in the on state. A diagram showing the start-up modes of the pachinko machine and the states of the RAM erase switch, the setting key, and the door open switch when the pachinko machine is powered on to start up in each start-up mode. is. (a) is a diagram showing the role of the RAM erase switch and the setting key in the setting change mode, and (b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key in the setting confirmation mode. 4A and 4B are schematic diagrams schematically showing various examples of display contents of the base display device in a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode; FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when an error history is displayed on the base display device; (a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the arrangement of the LEDs of the first pattern display device, and (b) is a case of notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2 in the round number notification LED. A lighting pattern, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, a lighting pattern for notifying that the setting is being changed, and a lighting for notifying that the setting is being checked. It is a figure showing a pattern. 1 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of a pachinko machine; FIG. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the data stored in the external work area of RAM in MPU of a main control unit. 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing base display processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process performed by MPU in the main controller of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a schematic diagram which showed typically the data stored in the internal work area of RAM in MPU of a main control unit. FIG. 10 is a diagram for explaining startup modes set in correspondence with each startup operation when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change or setting confirmation; 4 is a flow chart showing start-up processing executed by an MPU in a main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting change processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flowchart showing setting confirmation processing executed by the MPU in the main controller; 4 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU in the main control unit; It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. (a) is a left front perspective view of a protective cover in a ninth embodiment as seen from the left front, and (b) is a right rear perspective view as seen from the right rear of the protective cover in a ninth embodiment. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment. It is a left front perspective view for demonstrating the attachment method of the protective cover member with respect to an outer frame in 9th Embodiment. It is a front view of the protective cover member attached to the outer frame and this outer frame in 9th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a front view of a board box of a main controller in a ninth embodiment; FIG. 68 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine taken along line AA of FIG. 67; 74 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of the main control device and the protective cover member in the B area of FIG. 73; FIG. It is a left front perspective view which expand|deploys and shows an inner frame and a front frame with respect to the outer frame which attached the protective cover member in 9th Embodiment. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the tenth embodiment and the information of each of the RAM erase switch and the setting key at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine for starting up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode are shown. It is a diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in a tenth embodiment; FIG. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine in the eleventh embodiment and the information of each of the RAM erase switch and the setting key at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine for starting up in the start-up mode for each start-up mode are shown. It is a diagram. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical structure of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing startup processing executed by an MPU in a main controller in an eleventh embodiment; FIG. It is a rear view of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment. It is a right view of the pachinko machine in 12th Embodiment.

<First embodiment>
BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, referring to FIGS. 1 to 26, a first embodiment in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter simply referred to as "pachinko machine") 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of a game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG.

The pachinko machine 10, as shown in FIG. and an inner frame 12 supported so as to be openable and closable. In order to support the inner frame 12, the outer frame 11 is provided with metal hinges 18 at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame 12 is supported toward the front side so that it can be opened and closed.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails and winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back side. A pinball game is performed by the balls flowing down the front surface of the game board 13 . The inner frame 12 includes a ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) that shoots a ball to the front area of the game board 13 and a shooting unit that guides the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a to the front area of the game board 13. A rail (not shown) or the like is attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 covering the front upper side and a lower tray unit 15 covering the lower side are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower tray unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached at two upper and lower positions on the left side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). 14 and a lower tray unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side. The locking of the inner frame 12 and the locking of the front frame 14 are unlocked by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation. The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a door opening switch 208g (see FIG. 6) for detecting that either the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is unlocked and opened (the door is opened). there is

The front frame 14 is assembled with decorative resin parts, electrical parts, and the like, and has a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening at its substantially central portion. A glass unit 16 having two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front frame 14, and the front side of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.例文帳に追加

An upper tray 17 for storing balls projects forward from the front frame 14 and is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. The bottom surface of the upper tray 17 is inclined downward to the right when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1). A frame button 22 is provided on the left side of the upper surface of the upper plate 17 when viewed from the front.

The frame button 22 is a button that is pressed by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), which will be described later. In addition, the frame button 22 is also used as an operation button for allowing the player to select the content of the so-called super ready-to-win effect, which is one aspect of the variable effect.

The variable effect is a effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and as will be described later, the ball fired to the front area of the game board 13 is a specific winning hole (second starting hole 64b to be described later. 2.) is triggered by entering the ball (starting winning), and after the symbol (the third symbol described later) is variably displayed for a predetermined time, the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed determines the starting winning. This is an effect for presenting the player with the result of the lottery (whether it is a big hit or not).

A stage is a performance mode in which various performances displayed on the third pattern display device 81 are unified. One stage is provided. Various effects, such as the variable effects described above and the ready-to-win effects executed during the variable effects, are designed to be performed according to the themes given to each stage.

The stage is changed when the player presses the frame button 22 during a period in which the variable effect is not performed or during a high-speed change in which the third symbol is displayed in a high-speed change invisible to the player. Each time the frame button 22 is operated, the stage is repeatedly changed in the order of "town stage"→"empty stage"→"island stage"→"town stage"→ . In addition, immediately after the power is turned on, the initial stage is set to "town stage".

Further, when the normal ready-to-win effect is started in the variable effect performed by the third pattern display device 81, when the normal ready-to-win is developed into the super ready-to-win, the selection screen of the super ready-to-win` effect mode during the normal ready-to-win is displayed as the third pattern. It is configured to be displayed on the display device 81 .

On the selection screen, a plurality of effect mode candidates that can be selected as the super ready-to-win effect mode are displayed, and one of the effect mode candidates is selected. When the frame button 22 is pressed by the player while the selection screen is displayed, the selected effect mode candidate is changed. Then, the performance mode of super ready-to-win is determined based on the performance mode candidate selected when developing to super ready-to-win, and super ready-to-win is executed by the third pattern display device 81 according to the performance mode.

In the present embodiment, the frame button 22 is configured as a button to be pressed. , rearward, rightward and leftward). Then, based on the direction in which the control lever is tilted, the selection of the production stage may be changed, or the super ready-to-win production mode may be selected.

Light-emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the front frame 14 (for example, corner portions). These light emitting means are controlled to change the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking in response to changes in the game state such as when a big win is made or when a predetermined ready-to-win state is reached, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminated portions 29 to 33 containing light emitting means such as LEDs are provided on the periphery of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these electric decoration parts 29 to 33 function as production lamps such as big win lamps, and the respective electric decoration parts 29 to 33 are lit by lighting or blinking of built-in LEDs at the time of a big win or a ready-to-win production. Alternatively, it flashes to indicate that the jackpot is in progress or that the player is in the process of reaching one step before the jackpot. In addition, a display lamp 34 having a built-in light emitting means such as an LED or the like and capable of displaying when a prize ball is being paid out or when an error occurs is provided in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front.

A small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized on the lower side of the right electric decoration part 32, and a pasting space K1 (see FIG. ) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more splendor, a plated member 36 made of ABS resin, which is plated with chrome, is attached to the area around the electric decorations 29-33.

A ball rental operation unit 40 is arranged below the window portion 14c. The ball rental operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41 , a ball rental button 42 and a return button 43 . When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with banknotes, cards, etc. inserted into a card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the balls are released according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display section 41 is an area in which the balance information of the card or the like is displayed, and the built-in LED is turned on to display the remaining amount in numbers as the balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain lending balls based on information recorded on a card or the like (recording medium), and lending balls are supplied to the top tray 17 as long as the card or the like has a balance. be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit.

A pachinko machine in which balls are directly lent to the upper tray 17 from a ball leasing device or the like without going through the card unit, that is, a so-called cash machine, does not require the ball leasing operation unit 40. A decorative seal or the like may be added to the installation portion to make the parts configuration common. It is possible to achieve commonality between a pachinko machine using a card unit and a cash machine.

In the lower tray unit 15 positioned below the upper tray 17, a lower tray 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper tray 17 is formed in a substantially box-like shape with an open upper surface. there is On the right side of the lower tray 50, an operation handle 51 operated by the player to hit the ball to the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball shooting unit 112a is permitted to be driven. a touch sensor 51a for the purpose, a push-button stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball during the pressing operation, and a variable resistor for detecting the amount of rotation operation of the operation handle 51 from changes in electrical resistance. (not shown) are built-in.

When the operating handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of operation. A ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes with the movement of the ball, and is thereby hit to the front surface of the game board 13 with a flight amount corresponding to the player's operation. The ball shooting interval of the ball shooting unit 112a is set at about 0.6 seconds. Further, when the operating handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball extraction lever 52 is provided at the lower front portion of the lower tray 50 for operation when discharging the balls stored in the lower tray 50 downward. The ball extracting lever 52 is always biased to the right, and when it is slid to the left against the bias, the bottom opening formed in the bottom of the lower tray 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball extracting lever 52 is normally performed with a box (generally called a "senryo box") placed below the lower tray 50 to receive the balls ejected from the lower tray 50 . The operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower tray 50 as described above, and the ashtray 53 is attached on the left side of the lower tray 50 .

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 includes a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape when viewed from the front, a large number of nails, pinwheels and rails 61 and 62 for guiding the ball, a first normal winning opening 63a, 2nd normal winning opening 63b, 1st starting opening 64a, 2nd starting opening 64b, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit 80, etc. can be attached to The first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing. and fixed from the front side of the game board 13 with wood screws or the like. Also, the front center portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. As shown in FIG. Mainly referring to FIG. 2, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described below.

On the front surface of the game board 13, an outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is erected, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. An arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed by is erected. The outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by the inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62, and the front and rear sides are surrounded by the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1). A game area is formed in which a game is played by the behavior of . The game area is the front surface of the game board 13 and is a substantially circular area defined by the two rails 61 and 62 and the arc member 70 (where a winning opening is arranged and a shot ball is area).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball shot from the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) to the upper part of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left part in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning into the ball guide passage again. be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flying portion of the ball. is attenuated and rebounded toward the center. Between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62, a resin-made arc member 70 is formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60 .

A first pattern provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area when viewed from the front (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is provided. The first symbol display device 37 provides display corresponding to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the game state of the pachinko machine 10. FIG.

The plurality of LEDs 37a indicate, by the lighting state of the LEDs 37a, the variable display performed when the ball enters (start winning) into either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b, or the variable display. As a stop pattern after the end, a pattern corresponding to the result of the lottery performed for the start winning prize is indicated by the lighting state, or a variation among the balls entered in the first start opening 64a or the second start opening 64b. The lighting state indicates the number of held balls, which is the number of balls that have not been executed (held balls). The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot and an error display. The LEDs 37a are configured to emit different colors (for example, red, green, and blue), and various game states of the pachinko machine 10 can be suggested with a small number of LEDs by combining the emitted colors.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, whether or not a ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b is a big win or not is determined (big win lottery), and if it is determined to be a big win, the type of the big win. is also determined. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variable jackpot, a 2R probability variable jackpot, and a 15R normal jackpot are prepared.

The LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the variation executed with the ball entering the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b. In the case of a jackpot, a pattern corresponding to the jackpot type is displayed.

Here, the “15R probability variable jackpot” is a probability variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and the “2R probability variable jackpot” is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds. It is a variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after . In addition, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and a short time state for a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). .

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of the subsequent jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, a time during the so-called probability fluctuation (during probability change, probability change state), in other words, a special game state (jackpot ). The high-probability state (during variable probability, variable probability state) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the hit probability of the second symbol described later is increased and the ball is likely to enter the second start port 64b.

On the other hand, the "low probability state" refers to the time when the probability is not variable, and the jackpot probability is normal, that is, the state in which the jackpot probability is lower than when the probability is variable. In addition, the time-saving state (during time-saving) of the "low-probability state" is a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased while the jackpot probability remains unchanged, resulting in the second start port 64b. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to enter.

In addition, instead of changing the probability of winning the second symbol, depending on the game state of the pachinko machine 10, the time when the electric accessory described later attached to the second start port 64b is opened, or one time by the second symbol It is also possible to change the number of times the electric accessary is opened by winning. Specifically, in the time saving state, the time for which the electric accessory associated with the second start port 64b is opened is made longer than in the case other than the time saving state, or the number of times the electric accessory is opened per time. may be made larger than in the case other than the time saving state. Also, in the time-saving state, at least two of increasing the winning probability of the second symbol, lengthening the opening time of the electric accessory, and increasing the number of times of opening the electric accessory may be performed at the same time. good.

A first normal winning opening 63a is provided on the lower left side of the game area, and a second normal winning opening 63b is provided on the lower right side of the game area. When the ball enters the first normal winning opening 63a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first normal winning opening switch 208c is turned on. 8 balls are paid out as prize balls. Further, when the ball enters the second ordinary winning opening 63b, the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second ordinary winning opening switch 208d is turned on. As a result, 8 balls are paid out as prize balls. The number of prize balls when the balls enter the first normal prize opening 63a and the number of prize balls when the balls enter the second normal prize opening 63b are not necessarily the same. The number of prize balls may be different, such as 8 balls for the latter.

A variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third pattern display device 81 and a second pattern display device 83 . The third symbol display device 81 is triggered by entering a ball into one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b (starting winning), and while synchronizing with the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 , and a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply referred to as "display device") that performs variable display (variable effect) of the third pattern. The second pattern display device 83 is provided with a second pattern display device 83 composed of an LED that variably displays the second pattern triggered by passage of the ball through the through gate 67 . A center frame 86 is arranged in the variable display device unit 80 so as to surround the outer periphery of the third pattern display device 81 .

The third pattern display device 81 is composed of, for example, an 8-inch large liquid crystal display. and three symbol columns to the right are displayed.

Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row to variably display the third symbol on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 . In the pachinko machine 10, the game state is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 under the control of the main controller 110, while the decorative display corresponding to the display of the first symbol display device 37 is performed. It is performed by the third pattern display device 81 . Incidentally, instead of the display device, for example, the third symbol display device 81 may be configured using a reel or the like.

Here, the display contents of the third pattern display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a drawing for explaining the display screen of the third pattern display device 81, and FIG. 4(a) is a diagram schematically showing area division setting and effective line setting of the display screen, FIG.4(b) is the figure which illustrated the actual display screen.

The third pattern consists of 10 types of main patterns numbered from "0" to "9". Each main design consists of a back design made of a wooden box with a number from "0" to "9". , Large numbers are added to almost the entire front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main designs with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) have attached designs that imitate characters such as planes, wrapping cloths, helmets, etc. that fill the front of the wooden box. An even number is added to the lower right side of the accessory pattern in a small green color so as to be displayed in front of the accessory pattern.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result by the main controller 110 (see FIG. 5), which will be described later, is a big hit, the same main symbols are aligned on the activated line L1. ) is performed, and the jackpot is generated after the variable display is finished. When shifting to a high-probability state (probability-variable state) after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main patterns (corresponding to "high-probability patterns") to which odd numbers are added are aligned on the effective line L1. On the other hand, when shifting to a low-probability state after the end of the jackpot, a variable display is performed in which main symbols (corresponding to "low-probability symbols") to which even numbers are added are aligned on the activated line L1.

As shown in FIG. 4(a), the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into two upper and lower parts, and the lower two-thirds display the third symbol (main symbol) in a variable display (variation effect). The main display area Dm is the main display area Dm, and the upper one-third of the other area is the sub display area Ds for displaying an advance notice effect, characters, and the like. In addition, in the central part of the lower base side of the display screen of the third symbol display device 81, a reserved ball number display area Db for displaying the number of reserved balls is provided.

The main display area Dm is divided into three left, middle, and right display areas Dm1 to Dm3. The symbol row Z1 is displayed in the display area Dm1, and the symbol row Z2 is displayed in the display area Dm2. A symbol row Z3 is displayed in Dm3.

The above-described third symbols are displayed in a prescribed order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. That is, the main symbols are arranged in ascending or descending numerical order in each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 is periodically scrolled from top to bottom to perform variable display. In particular, the left symbol row Z1 is arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in descending order, and the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3 are arranged so that the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbols are displayed in three stages of upper, middle and lower stages for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of the main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third pattern is displayed on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1→right symbol row Z3→middle symbol row Z2 in each variation effect. Stop is displayed. When the third symbol is stopped, if a combination of big winning symbols (combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the activated line L1, a big winning moving image is displayed as a big winning.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is evenly divided into three sub-areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the horizontal direction. The small areas Ds1 to Ds3 are areas for displaying characters and preview effect images, respectively. The images displayed in each of the small areas Ds1 to Ds3 give the player a feeling of anticipation of a big win as a result of the variable display performed in the main display area Dm. The number of retained balls display area Db is the number of retained balls, which is the number of balls (held balls) for which the variable display (variation effect) has not been performed among the balls that have entered the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. This is the area that displays

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 4(b), a total of nine main patterns of the third pattern are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the secondary display area Ds, moving images are displayed in the left small area Ds1 and the right small area Ds3, suggesting to the player that the state is more likely to transition to a big win than usual. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character (in this embodiment, a boy wearing a headband) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes performs a special action different from the predetermined action, or usually a black boy. A notice effect is performed by changing the color of the hair, the color of the usually white headband, and the appearance of another character.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first start port 64a or the second start port 64b while the variation effect (variation display) is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), The number of times the ball is entered is suspended up to a maximum of 4 times. The number of reserved balls is displayed by the first pattern display device 37, and is also indicated in the number of reserved balls display area Db. In the reserved ball number display area Db, one reserved ball number pattern ("●" pattern) is displayed for each reserved ball number, and the number of reserved balls is displayed according to the number of displayed reserved ball number patterns. .

That is, when one reserved ball number pattern is displayed in the reserved ball number display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved ball numbers is one ball, and when four reserved ball number patterns are displayed, the reserved ball number pattern is displayed. Indicates that the number of balls is 4 balls. Further, when the number of reserved balls pattern is not displayed in the number of reserved balls display area Db, it indicates that the number of reserved balls is 0, that is, the number of reserved balls does not exist.

In the present embodiment, the number of ball entries into the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b is configured to be suspended up to four times in total. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls in the reserved number of balls display area Db, the number of reserved balls is indicated by a number in a part of the third pattern display device 81, or an area divided into four is displayed for the number of reserved balls. It may be displayed in a different mode (for example, color or lighting pattern). Further, since the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37, the third symbol display device 81 may not display the number of reserved balls. Furthermore, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four holding lamps indicating the number of holding balls, which is the maximum holding number, and the number of holding balls may be displayed according to the number of holding lamps in the lighting state.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description is continued. The second pattern display device 83 performs a variable display by alternately lighting up a symbol "O" and a symbol "X" as display symbols (second symbols) each time the ball passes through the through gate 67. be. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at a predetermined symbol (symbol of "○" in this embodiment), the electric accessory provided at the second start port 64b is displayed for a predetermined time. is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The number of times the ball passes through the through gate 67 is reserved up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is displayed by the first symbol display device 37 and the second symbol reservation lamp 84 is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 corresponding to the maximum number of holding lamps are provided, and arranged symmetrically below the third symbol display device 81 . Then, the number of reservations is displayed according to the number of the second symbol reservation lamps 84 lit.

In addition, the variable display of the second pattern is performed by switching between lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second pattern display device 83 as in the present embodiment. A part of the display device 81 may be used. Similarly, instead of turning on the second symbol reserve lamp 84, the variable display of the second symbol may be performed by a part of the third symbol display device 81. FIG. Also, the passage through the through gate 67 is not limited to 4 times as in the case of the second starting port 64b, but is 3 times or less or 5 times or more (e.g., 8 times). can be set to Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display of the second symbol reservation lamp 84 may not be performed.

A first starting port 64a is provided below the variable display unit 80, and a second starting port 64b is provided below the first starting port 64a. The first starting port 64a is provided with an opening into which a ball can enter upward. The opening of the first starting port 64a is always open, allowing the ball to enter. When the ball enters the first starting port 64a, the first starting port switch 208a (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the first starting port switch 208a. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and the third pattern display device 81 displays the variation of the third pattern. executed. The first starting hole 64a is also one of the winning holes from which three balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

On the other hand, the second starting port 64b is provided with an electric accessory having two blades covering the opening through which the ball enters the second starting port 64b. The electric accessory opens and closes the two blades to open the second starting port 64b (enlarged state) or close it (reduced state). Normally, the second starting port 64b is in a closed state in which the wings of the electric accessory are closed (the wings stand up), and the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b, or the ball cannot enter the second starting port 64b. It is in a difficult state.

Then, when the variable display on the second symbol display device 83 stops at the symbol "O", the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is operated for a predetermined period of time. From the state in which the wings of the electric accessory stand up while the electric accessory is being operated. It will be in a substantially V-shaped (inverted V-shaped) movable state, and the second starting port 64b will be in an open state. When the second starting port 64b is opened, a ball can enter the second starting port 64b, or a ball can easily enter the second starting port 64b compared to the closed state. In other words, as a result of the variable display on the second symbol display device 83, the ball is entered into the second starting port 64b when it stops at the symbol "○" and wins, and the second starting port 64b is opened. Then, a state can be created in which many big winning lotteries can be performed.

When the ball enters the second starting port 64b, the second starting port switch 208b (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control is caused by turning on the second starting port switch 208b. A jackpot lottery is performed by the device 110 (see FIG. 5), and the display corresponding to the lottery result is shown by the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37, and the third pattern display device 81 displays the variation of the third pattern. executed. The second starting hole 64b is also one of the winning holes from which two balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter.

A variable prize winning device 65 is provided below the second starting port 64b, and a horizontally long rectangular large prize winning port (also called a large opening or specific prize winning port) 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery by the main controller 110 becomes a big win, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so that the big win stops after a predetermined time (fluctuation time) elapses. A stop symbol corresponding to the big win is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the big win. After that, the game state transitions to a special game state (jackpot) in which the ball is likely to win. As this special game state, the normally closed big winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls are won).

The large winning opening 65a is closed after a predetermined period of time has passed, and after the closure, the large winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined period of time. The opening and closing operation of the big winning opening 65a can be repeated up to, for example, 15 times (15 rounds).

Specifically, the variable winning device 65 includes a horizontally long rectangular opening/closing plate that covers the big winning opening 65a, and a big winning opening solenoid (not shown) for opening and closing forward with the lower side of the opening/closing plate as an axis. and The big winning opening 65a is normally in a closed state in which the ball cannot or hardly wins a prize. In the event of a big win, the large winning opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening/closing plate to the lower front side to temporarily form an open state in which the ball easily enters the large winning opening 65a, and the open state and the normal closed state are formed. It operates to alternate between states.

When a ball enters the big winning slot 65a, a big winning slot switch 208e (see FIG. 6) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the number of times the big winning slot switch 208e is turned on is counted. , the number of winning balls in the big winning opening 65a is counted, and the conditions for closing the big winning opening 65a are determined. Also, 12 balls are paid out as prize balls due to the turn-on of the big winning hole switch 208e. By repeating the open state and closed state of the big prize winning port 65a due to the big win, many balls are likely to enter the big winning prize port 65a, and the player can appreciate the game value (game value). As a grant, a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out. This state is one form of a special game state that is advantageous to the player.

Incidentally, the special game state is not limited to the form described above. A specific winning opening and a large open opening to be opened and closed separately from the specific winning opening are provided in the game area, and when the LED 37a corresponding to the big win is lit on the first pattern display device 37, the specific winning opening is opened for a predetermined time. A game state in which the large opening is opened for a predetermined time and a predetermined number of times with the entry of a ball into the specific winning port as a special game state may be formed as a special game state.

Through gates 67 are provided on the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, respectively. The through gate 67 is provided with a through hole (not shown) through which a ball passes in the vertical direction. When the ball launched into the game area passes through the through gate 67, a through gate switch (not shown) provided in the through hole is turned on. Ordinary design) hit lottery will be held.

As a result of the lottery of the second pattern (normal pattern) performed for the ball that passed through the through gate 67, if it is determined to be a hit, the second pattern is displayed on the second pattern display device 83 and then " After the "○" symbol is stopped and displayed, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated. As a result, the wings of the electric accessory, which make it difficult for the ball to enter the second starting port 64b, move from a substantially vertically upright state to a substantially V shape (inverted V shape), and the ball moves for a predetermined time. can be entered into the second starting port 64b, or a state in which the ball can enter more easily than in the closed state.

Affixing spaces K1 and K2 for affixing certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13. can be viewed through a small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Furthermore, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66 . Balls that have not entered any of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided through the out opening 66 to a ball discharge path (not shown). Also, the balls that enter the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a are guided to the ball discharge path after passing through the switches provided for each winning opening for detecting the entry of the ball. be. The ball guided to the ball discharge path passes through an out switch 208f (see FIG. 6) for detecting the guided ball, and is then discharged to an island facility (not shown) where the pachinko machine 10 is installed. .

Here, a ball shot into the game area of the pachinko machine 10 always enters one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66.例文帳に追加Therefore, the balls entering the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and the out-opening 66 are guided to the ball discharge path and always pass through the out-switch 208f. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, the number of balls shot into the game area (the number of balls used in the game) can be grasped. Also, the out switch 208f detects a ball that has actually passed through the game area and entered one of the winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a or the out opening 66. In other words, a ball that was shot into the game area but got caught somewhere in the game area and was not used in the game as a result is not detected. Therefore, by counting the number of balls detected by the out switch 208f, it is possible to prevent the balls not used in the game from being counted as the balls shot into the game area.

The game board 13 is provided with a large number of nails for appropriately distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the balls, and various members (accessories) such as windmills.

As shown in FIG. 3, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is mainly provided with control board units 90 and 91 and a back pack unit 94 . The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main controller 110), an audio lamp control board (audio lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

The back pack unit 94 includes a back pack 92 forming a protective cover and a dispensing unit 93 as a unit. In addition, each control board has an MPU as a 1-chip microcomputer that manages each control, a port that communicates with various devices, a random number generator that is used for various lotteries, and is used for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit or the like is mounted as required.

The main board is also provided with an inspection terminal 207a (see FIG. 5) to which an inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the game machine, such as the ratio of accessories, can be connected. The inspection terminal 207a is normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94, and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the inspection terminal 207a, and the inspection terminal 207a may be exposed from the opening. When the connector of the cable connected to the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection device 300 can inspect the game performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the accessory ratio.

The main control device 110, the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114, the payout control device 111, the firing control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. . Each of the board boxes 100 to 104 has a box base and a box cover that covers the opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected to each other to accommodate each controller and each board.

In addition, the board box 100 (main controller 110) and the board box 102 (dispensing control device 111 and firing control device 112) connect the box base and the box cover in an unopenable manner (caulking structure) by a sealing unit (not shown). consolidation). A sealing seal (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. The sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is peeled off in order to open the circuit board boxes 100, 102, or if the circuit board boxes 100, 102 are forcibly opened, the box base and the box cover may be damaged. cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether the substrate boxes 100, 102 have been opened.

The dispensing unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the top of the back pack unit 94 and open upward, a tank rail 131 connected to the lower side of the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a tank rail 131 downstream of the tank rail 131. and a payout device 133 which is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and which pays out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 5). ing. The tank 130 is successively replenished with balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall, and a payout device 133 pays out the required number of balls as appropriate. A vibrator 134 for applying vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131 .

The payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the firing control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor control knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasure switch 122. The state recovery switch 120 is operated to eliminate ball clogging (return to normal state) when a dispensing error such as a ball clogging in the dispensing motor 216 (see FIG. 5) occurs. The operating knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when the pachinko machine 10 is to be returned to its initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG.

The main control unit 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer that is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 includes a ROM 202 storing various control programs and fixed value data to be executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 202. A RAM 203 and other various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission/reception circuit are incorporated.

The main control unit 110 controls the main operations of the pachinko machine 10, such as setting of a jackpot lottery, variable display (variable effect) in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of the display results in the second symbol display device 83. Execute the process. The main processing of this pachinko machine 10 is executed by the MPU 201, and the RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer for storing various counters for controlling these processings.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. Then, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 via a bus line 204 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 205 includes the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, and the lower side of the opening/closing plate of the big prize opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large winning opening solenoid for opening and closing driving to the front side and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected, and the MPU 201 sends various commands and control signals to these through the input/output port 205. to send.

In addition, various commands are transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers by the data transmission/reception circuit in order to instruct the sub-controllers such as the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113 to operate. Such commands are sent in only one direction from the main controller 110 to the sub-controllers.

Also, the input/output port 205 has a group of switches and a group of sensors including various switches for detecting a ball that has entered each winning hole and a ball guided to the ball discharge path through each winning hole and out hole. etc., and a RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply 115, which will be described later. Various processes are executed based on SG2.

The main controller 110 is provided with a role ratio management chip 207 that manages information about the ratio of the pachinko machine. The character ratio management chip 207 is connected to the MPU 201 via the bus 206, receives information necessary for managing the character ratio from the MPU 201, and processes and stores the received information to obtain the character of the pachinko machine 10. It is a microchip (integrated circuit) that manages information about ratios.

An inspection terminal 207 a is connected to the role product ratio management chip 207 . The inspection terminal 207a is configured to be connectable to an external inspection device 300 for inspecting the performance of the game machine, such as the ratio of the characters and the like. Information on the role product ratio managed by the role product ratio management chip 207 and information on other inspections are transmitted to the inspection device 300 . The inspection device 300 can determine whether or not the character product ratio of the pachinko machine 10 is within the normal range based on the information regarding the character product ratio received via the inspection terminal 207a.

Here, a detailed configuration of main controller 110 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of main controller 110. As shown in FIG.

As described above, the input/output port 205 is connected to the RAM erase switch circuit 253 on the input side, and has the solenoid 209, the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 38, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, the second symbol display device 38, In addition to the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113 being connected, various switches 208 connected on the input side include a first starting port switch 208a for detecting a ball that has won the first starting port 64a, and a second starting port switch 208a. 2nd start opening switch 208b for detecting the ball that has won the starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c for detecting the ball that has won the first normal winning opening 63a, and the second normal winning opening 63b. 2nd normal winning hole switch 208d for detecting the ball that has won the big winning hole 65a, the big winning hole switch 208e for detecting the ball that has won the big winning hole 65a, the balls that have won the respective winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, 65a and an out switch 208f for detecting a ball entering the out port 66 and guided to the ball discharge path, and detecting that at least one of the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 is locked and opened. A door opening switch 208g is connected.

The input/output port 205 includes a start 1 port 205a to which the output of the first start switch 208a is input, a start 2 port 205b to which the output of the second start switch 208b is input, and a first normal winning switch 208c. General 1 port 205c to which the output is input, General 2 port 205d to which the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d is input, Big winning opening port 205e to which the output of the big winning opening switch 208e is input, Out switch An out port 205f to which the output of 208f is connected and a door opening port 205g to which the output of the door opening switch 208g is connected are provided.

The MPU 201 executes switch read processing (see FIG. 11) for checking the states of various switches in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10) that is executed every 2 milliseconds. In the switch reading process, the MPU 201 refers to the first 1 port 205a, the first 2 port 205b, the general 1 port 205c, the general 2 port 205d, the big winning port 205e and the out port 205f, and and the presence or absence of balls guided to the ball discharge path, the number of winning balls in each winning hole and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds (i.e., number of balls fired into the playing area). Then, the number of each ball counted and the game state at that time (whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (so-called door) is open, whether there is an error state, etc.) are displayed. It is set in the character product ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. The character ratio management chip 207 calculates and manages the character ratio based on the number of balls. Whether or not the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

The ROM 202 of the MPU 201 stores at least a jackpot random number table 202a, a jackpot type table 202b, a stop pattern table 202c, a fluctuation pattern table 202d, a ball number table 202e, and trigger information data 202f. The main controller 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 by various counters stored in the RAM 203 and various tables 202a to 203d stored in the ROM 202. FIG. Also, the prize ball number table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are data used for managing the character ratio in the character ratio management chip 207, and when the power of the main controller 110 is turned on, the character ratio It is sent to the management chip 207 .

Here, with reference to FIG. 7, counters and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 will be described. These counters, etc. are mainly used to set the jackpot lottery, the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and the lottery of the display result of the second symbol display device 83. It is used in MPU 201 of control device 110 . In the description of various counters, various tables 202a to 202d stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110 will also be described with reference to FIG.

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first winning random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the number counter used for selecting the jackpot symbol are used. A per-type counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3, a variation type counter CS1 used for variation pattern selection, and a first initial value random number counter CINI1 used for initial value setting of the first per random number counter C1 are used. .

Also, the second winning random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the second symbol display device 83, and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4. Each of these counters is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), and some counters are updated irregularly during the main processing (see FIG. 17). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in a counter buffer set in a predetermined area of the RAM 203 . Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 is provided with a reserved ball storage area 203b consisting of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). The values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are stored in accordance with the timing of the ball entering the second starting port 64b.

Each counter will be described in detail. The first hit random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (eg, 0 to 899), and reaches 0 after reaching the maximum value (eg, 899 in the case of a counter that can take a value of 0 to 899). It is configured to return to When the first winning random number counter C1 is updated once, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1. The random number counter C1 is updated.

The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter that is updated within the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, if the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter that can take values from 0 to 899, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter that ranges from 0 to 899. This first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once each time the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 17).

The value of the first winning random number counter C1 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball wins either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b ( At the timing of starting winning), the value of the first winning random number counter C1 at that time is the first winning random number counter storage area of one of the reserved first to fourth areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. 203b1. The value of the random number for the jackpot is set by the jackpot random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserve area is set by the jackpot random number table 202a. If it matches the value of the random number that will be a big hit, it will be determined as a big hit.

Details of the jackpot random number table 202a will now be described with reference to FIG. 8(a). FIG. 8A is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of the jackpot random number table 202a. A jackpot random number table 202a is for a low probability state used when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a low probability state (a period in which the probability is not variable), and the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is a jackpot from the low probability state. It is divided into two types, one for high probability state used in the case of high probability state (during probability change) with high probability. The number of random numbers to be the big wins included in each of the low-probability state and the high-probability state is set differently. In this way, by varying the number of random numbers that result in a big win, the probability of a big win is changed between the low-probability state and the high-probability state.

The first winning random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter ranging from 0 to 899. FIG. In the first winning random number counter C1, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big win in the low probability state is 3, and the value "7,307,582" is stored in the big winning random number table 202a. ing.

On the other hand, the number of random number values (jackpot random number values) that become a big hit in the case of a high probability state is 30, and the values are 28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322 , 354, 390, 420, 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are stored in the jackpot random number table 202a. .

In addition, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers for the low-probability state and the jackpot random numbers for the high-probability state stored in the jackpot random number table 202a are not duplicated. have set. Here, if there is a value that becomes a jackpot random value regardless of the state of the pachinko machine 10, the value is likely to be predicted from the outside, so there is a possibility that the jackpot will be illegally awarded. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, depending on the situation (that is, depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in a high probability state or a low probability state), by changing the value of the random number that becomes a big win, Since it is possible to make it difficult to predict the random number value, fraud can be suppressed.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description is continued. The first hit type counter C2 determines the jackpot type when it becomes a jackpot. In the case of a counter that can take a value, it is configured to return to 0 after reaching 99). The value of the first winning type counter C2 is, for example, periodically updated (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball starts either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the value of the first winning type counter C2 at that time is the first winning random number counter C1 among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 of the same reservation area as the reservation area to be stored.

Here, if the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in one reservation area in the reservation ball storage area 203b is not a random number that becomes a big hit, that is, if it is a random number that becomes an outlier, the variation pattern in the variation effect Also, the type of stop symbol (hereinafter referred to as "stop type") is the one at the time of loss. On the other hand, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in one reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number for a big win, the variation pattern and the stop type in the fluctuation effect will be those at the time of the big win. . In this case, the variation pattern and stop type at the time of the big win are determined corresponding to the big win type indicated by the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area.

The value of the first win type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of this embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0-99. The jackpot type is determined based on the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type table 202b stored in the ROM202. Here, with reference to FIG.8(b), the jackpot classification table 202b is demonstrated. FIG.8(b) is the figure which showed typically an example of the jackpot classification table 202b. As shown in FIG. 8B, the jackpot type table 202b is a table in which the jackpot types and the values of the first hit type counter C2 are associated with each other.

As the jackpot type, as described above, "15R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds, and 100 There is a "15R normal jackpot" that is a time-saving state during the number of fluctuations, and a "2R probability variable jackpot" that shifts to a high probability state after the maximum number of rounds hits two rounds.

In the jackpot type table 202b, each jackpot type is associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 that determines the jackpot type. In the example of FIG. 8(b), the value of the first per type counter C2 "0 to 39" is associated with the 15R probability variable jackpot, and the value of the first per type counter C2 "40 to 39" is associated with the 15R normal jackpot. 79” is associated, and the value of the first hit type counter C2 “80 to 99” is associated with the 2R probability variable jackpot.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value for a big win, the big winning type associated with the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area is determined from the big winning type table 202b. . For example, if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "20", "15R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type, and if the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "60", the jackpot type is " If "15R normal jackpot" is determined and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90", "2R probability variable jackpot" is determined as the jackpot type.

Thus, in this embodiment, when the jackpot is achieved, the 15R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, the 15R normal jackpot is selected with a probability of 40%, and the 2R variable jackpot is selected with a probability of 20%. . The probability that each jackpot type is selected when a jackpot is won is appropriately set depending on the model. Then, according to the set probability, the jackpot type table defines the value of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type.

In addition, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed according to the game state of the pachinko machine 10 . In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to each game state is prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the number of values of the first hit type counter C2 associated with each jackpot type may be changed.

Also, the probability that the jackpot type is selected may be changed depending on the starting hole into which the ball is entered. That is, as the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that becomes a jackpot when the ball enters the first starting port 64a, For example, the "15R variable variable jackpot" is 40%, the "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, and the "2R variable variable jackpot" is 20%. As the probability of each jackpot type selected when the value of the first random number counter C1 is a random number that becomes a jackpot, for example, "15R variable jackpot" is 55%, "15R normal jackpot" is 40%, and "2R variable jackpot" is selected. ” may be 5%.

In this case, a jackpot type table corresponding to the first start port 64a and a jackpot type table corresponding to the second start port 64b are prepared, and in each jackpot type table, the first hit type associated with each jackpot type The number of values of the counter C2 may be changed. Then, in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b, the values of the various counters stored in each area are the winning prizes for either the first starting opening 64a or the second starting opening 64b. A flag indicating whether it is stored together is also stored, and based on the flag, the jackpot type used when determining the jackpot type based on the first hit type counter C2 stored in each area. A table may be selected. Alternatively, a flag is separately provided in a form corresponding to each of the first to fourth reserved areas, and the values of various counters stored in the corresponding areas are determined by the flags of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b. The jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type based on the first win type counter C2 stored in each area based on the flag indicating which start port is stored with the winning prize. A table may be selected.

Returning to FIG. 7, the description of the various counters continues. The stop pattern selection counter C3 is configured such that it is incremented by one within a range of 0 to 99, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In this embodiment, the stop pattern selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of loss displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the occurrence of the ready-to-win, the final stop symbol shifts by one before and after the ready-to-win symbol. There are three stops: "Reach out of front and back" that stops at the same time, "Reach other than front and rear out" in which the final stop symbol stops outside the front and back of the reach symbol after the same reach occurs, and "Complete out of reach" that does not occur ( production) pattern is selected.

The value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 is updated, for example, periodically (once per timer interrupt processing in this embodiment), and the ball enters either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. At the timing of winning (starting winning), the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 at that time is stored in the first hit random number counter C1 among the first to fourth reserved areas provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 of the same reservation area as the reservation area.

The ROM 202 is provided with a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c having different ranges of random numbers for selecting the stop type, corresponding to the stop pattern selection counter C3. The reason why a plurality of stop pattern tables 202c are prepared is to change the selection ratio of the stop type according to whether the current state of the pachinko machine 10 is a high probability state or a low probability state.

For example, in a high-probability state, the stop pattern table 202c with a wide random number range of 0 to 89 corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is selected so that the ready-to-win effect is not selected unnecessarily because the jackpot is likely to occur. This makes it easier for people to choose “completely out”. In this stop pattern table 202c, the "front-rear out-of-reach reach" is narrowed to 98 and 99, and the "non-front-rear out-of-rear reach" is also narrowed from 90 to 97, making it difficult to select the "front-rear out-of-rear reach" or the "non-rear-rear out-of-rear reach". Become.

In addition, in the low probability state, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "complete failure" is set to 0 to 79 in order to secure the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b. , the narrow stop pattern table 202c is selected, making it difficult to select "completely off". In this stop pattern table 202c, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is widened from 80 to 97, and "Reach other than front-rear deviation" is more likely to be selected. Therefore, in the low-probability state, it is possible to perform many ready-to-win displays with a long performance time, so that the time for the ball to enter the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b can be secured, and the variation by the third symbol display device 81 Display can be easily continued. In the latter stop pattern table 202c as well, the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "outside reach" is set to 98,99.

The fluctuation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated once each time a timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10), which will be described later, is executed, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the main process (see FIG. 17). Also, at the timing when the ball wins (starts winning) either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 at that time is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. It is stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the same reservation area as the reservation area in which the first hit random number counter C1 is stored among the reserved first to fourth areas.

The variation type counter CS1 is used to determine the variation pattern. That is, when the MPU 201 performs the variation effect based on the various counters stored in one reservation area, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the variation type counter storage area 203b4 of the reservation area and the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ROM 202 The variation pattern is determined by the variation pattern table 202d. Determination of the variation pattern is, specifically, determination of the variation time of the pattern variation. The voice ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 are based on the variation pattern (variation time) determined by the variation type counter CS1, the reach type and the fine pattern of the third pattern displayed on the third pattern display device 81 A variation mode is determined, and the presence or absence of execution of the notice performance and the execution mode of the notice performance are determined.

Details of the variation pattern table 202d will now be described with reference to FIGS. 8(c) to 8(e). The pachinko machine 10 is provided with, as the variation pattern table 202d, a big win variation pattern table 202d1 used at the time of the big win and loss variation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 used at the time of the loss. In addition, as the deviation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3, depending on whether the game state is a high probability state at the time of the time saving state or the probability change, or a low probability state at the normal time excluding the time saving state, for the loss (probability change) A fluctuation pattern table 202d3 and a deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 are prepared.

Further, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 is respectively a table referred to when the number of held balls is 0 (that is, when there is no held ball), a table referred to when the number of held balls is 1, A table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 2, a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 3, and a table referred to when the number of reserved balls is 4 are separately provided.

It should be noted that, as in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to prepare a variation pattern table for each number of reserved balls. may be provided. For example, each of the variation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3 may be divided into a table that is referenced when the number of held balls is less than 3 and a table that is referenced when the number of held balls is 3 or more. . Further, the condition of the number of reserved balls for determining the table to be referred to may be different in each of the fluctuation pattern tables 202d1 to 202d3. For example, the big hit variation pattern table 202d1 includes a table to be referred to when the number of retained balls is less than 3 and a table to be referred to when the number of retained balls is 3 or more. A different table 202d2 may be prepared for each number of held balls, and a single table may be prepared for the variation pattern table 202d3 for loss (probability variation) regardless of the number of held balls.

FIG. 8(c) is a diagram schematically showing an example of the big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, among the big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 stored in the ROM 202. FIG.

The big-hit variation pattern table 202d1 is divided into groups (groups) based on the big-hit type regardless of the number of held balls. Specifically, as a jackpot type, it is divided into a 15R jackpot common that is referred to when a 15R variable jackpot and a 15R normal jackpot is determined, and a dedicated 2R variable jackpot that is referred to when a 2R variable jackpot is determined. there is A value of the variation type counter CS1 is associated with each of the divided groups.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 is a value (big winning random value) that becomes a big hit, the variation pattern according to the big winning type corresponding to the value of the first winning type counter C2 stored in the same reservation area. Determines the group (group) to be referred to in the big hit variation pattern table 202d1. In the group (group) of the big win variation pattern table 202d1, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the same reservation area is determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area. be done.

In common with the 15R jackpot, three variation patterns, variation A with a variation time of 30 seconds, variation B with a variation time of 60 seconds, and variation C with a variation time of 90 seconds, are selectable, and each variation pattern is associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1.

The variation A is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called normal reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach with a short variation time. The variation B is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 performs a so-called super reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the normal reach. Super reach includes, for example, reach that develops from normal reach, and long reach that has a long reach time. The variation C is a variation pattern in which the third symbol display device 81 executes a so-called special reach in which the third symbols are aligned after a reach having a longer variation time than the super reach. The special reach includes, for example, a reach that develops further after the super reach, and a special reach that develops from the normal reach different from the super reach.

In the example shown in FIG. 8(c), the correspondence between the variation pattern and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of pending balls is 2 is 0 to 10 for variation A, variation 11 to 99 for B, and 100 to 198 for variation C. Since the 15R jackpot common table is selected in the case of the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot, it is easy to select the variation C in which the special reach is executed in order to give the player a sense of expectation. It's becoming However, it is possible to provide a game property in which a big win can be expected from any reach by structuring such that variation A in which normal reach is performed and variation B in which super reach is performed are also selected.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, a large number of different effects are prepared for each reach. The image displayed on the back side of the character) is rapidly changed and displayed, and a certain character is suddenly displayed. Includes multiple reach with different production contents, such as those with is added. In the main control unit 110, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, only the fluctuation A, the fluctuation B, and the fluctuation C are determined as fluctuation patterns, and the sound ramp control device 113 and the display control device 114 control each fluctuation A to A detailed variation pattern corresponding to C is determined. According to the detailed variation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation effect.

Only the "2R fluctuation" fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 59 seconds is selectably prepared exclusively for the 2R probability variable jackpot. In the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, even if it corresponds to any number of pending balls, in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, as shown in FIG. 0 to 198) are associated with 2R variations. That is, when the jackpot variation type is the 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R variation is always selected as the variation pattern.

When the 2R variation is selected by the main controller 110, a detailed variation pattern corresponding to the 2R variation is determined by the sound ramp controller 113 and the display controller 114. FIG. Therefore, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is determined as the jackpot type in the main controller 110, the third symbol display device 81 executes a fluctuation effect according to a detailed fluctuation pattern corresponding to the 2R fluctuation. In the pachinko machine 10, characters such as "chicken" or "girl" are displayed in the small areas Ds1 and Ds3 of the third pattern display device 81 as detailed variation patterns corresponding to the 2R variation, and finally A variation pattern in which the third symbol stops at a specific symbol, and a variation pattern in which the third symbol finally stops at a particular symbol with the lighting or blinking of a particular lamp are included.

Although the variation pattern at the time of the big win is determined using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be determined using a plurality of other variation type counters. For example, whether or not to add a notice effect that foretells the start of a jackpot or a ready-to-win effect before the start of the change or during the change effect may be determined by another variation type counter, and when the reach is established, the last It may be determined by another variation type counter how many symbols the third symbol to be stopped is to be shifted and stopped (for example, one symbol is shifted before and after, etc.).

Also, in the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1, a group dedicated to the 2R probability variation jackpot is provided, but in the pachinko machine 10, when the 2R probability variation jackpot is achieved, only the "2R variation" variation pattern is selected. Without providing a group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 may define only the correspondence between the variation type counter CS1 and the variation pattern when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is achieved. In this case, when the jackpot type is a 2R probability variable jackpot, the 2R fluctuation may be determined as the fluctuation pattern without referring to the jackpot fluctuation pattern table 202d1.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, only "2R variation" is selected when a 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, but one variation pattern is selected from a plurality of variation patterns when a 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved. You may do so. In this case, like the group common to the 15R jackpot, even in the group dedicated to the 2R probability variable jackpot, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with the fluctuation pattern selected when the 2R probability variable jackpot occurs, and a certain reservation area The variation pattern associated with the stored value of the variation type counter CS1 may be determined as the variation pattern in the variation performance reserved in the reservation area.

FIG. 8D schematically shows an example of a failure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 that is referenced when the number of held balls is 2, out of the failure (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 stored in the ROM 202. Fig. 3 shows.

As shown in FIG. 8(d), the deviation (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2 is dedicated to complete deviation, which is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, and forward-backward deviation reach and forward-backward deviation. It is divided into groups (groups) based on the common reach that is referred to when the reach is determined and the stop type at the time of loss, and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 corresponds to each of the divided groups. is attached.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is not a value for a big win (random value for a big win), that is, when it is a value that becomes an outlier, the game state is normal except for the time-saving state. When in the low probability state, the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserve area according to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reserve area as the first hit random number counter C1. A variation pattern corresponding to the value of is determined from the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2.

Two variation patterns, a variation D with a variation time of 7 seconds and a variation E with a variation time of 10 seconds, are selectable for the complete outlier, and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is set for each variation pattern. are mapped. When the variation D or the variation E is selected as the variation pattern, the third symbol display device 81 executes a variation effect in which the high-speed variation of the third symbol is started and then stopped without reaching reach. As shown in FIG. 8(d), in the loss (normal) variation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each variation dedicated to complete loss and the value of the variation type counter CS1 when the number of held balls is 2 is as follows: 0 to 98, and the variation E is 99 to 198.

In addition, in common to reach, there are three variations A to C described above, that is, variation A in which normal reach is performed by the third symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 30 seconds, and super reach with a variation time of 60 seconds. Three variation patterns, variation B executed by the 3-symbol display device 81 and variation C executed by the 3-symbol display device 81 with a variation time of 90 seconds, are prepared so as to be selectable. In the outlier (normal) fluctuation pattern table 202d2, the correspondence between each fluctuation common to the reach when the number of held balls is 2 and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for fluctuation A and 99 to 190 for fluctuation B. , the variation C is 191-198.

FIG. 8(e) schematically shows an example of the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3, which is referenced when the number of balls held is 2, out of the loss (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 stored in the ROM 202. Fig. 3 shows.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d3 is referred to when complete deviation is determined as the stop type at the time of deviation, similar to the deviation (normal) variation pattern table. Fluctuation D and variation E can be selected as a variation pattern only for complete deviation, and refer to when reach other than front and rear deviation reach and front and rear deviation reach is determined, and fluctuations A to C can be selected as variation patterns Reach common, It is divided into groups (groups) based on the stop type at the time of deviation, and in the divided groups, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is associated with each selectable fluctuation pattern.

When the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in a certain reservation area is a value that does not result in a big win, that is, a value that is out of the game, when the game state is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, According to the stop type corresponding to the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the same reservation area, the variation pattern corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reservation area is the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern. Determined from table 202d3.

As shown in FIG. 8(e), in the loss (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3, the correspondence between each variation exclusively for complete loss when the number of held balls is 2 and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is as follows: 0 to 190, and the variation E is 191 to 198. In addition, when the number of held balls is 2, the correspondence between each variation in common reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is 0 to 98 for variation A, 99 to 190 for variation B, and 191 to 198 for variation C. ing. In other words, the correspondence between each variation common to reach and the value of the variation type counter CS1 is the same between the deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3.

On the other hand, when the game state is in the time saving state or the high probability state at the time of probability variation, the ball is likely to enter the second start port 64b, and the complete deviation (variation E) with a long variation time is often executed. If so, it takes a long time to start the next variable display, and the player may be put in a waiting state and feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is not preferable for the hall because the operating rate is lowered.

Therefore, if the game state is completely out when it is in a time-saving state or a high-probability state at the time of probability variation, it is a complete outage with a shorter fluctuation time than when it is in another game state (normal state except for time-saving state) ( In order to facilitate the selection of variation D), a deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 and a deviation (probable variation) variation pattern table 202d3 are configured. As a result, by starting the next variable display early, it is possible to reduce the possibility of making the player feel uncomfortable. Moreover, it is possible to suppress an extreme decrease in the operating rate.

Although the variation pattern at the time of deviation is selected using only the variation type counter CS1, it may be selected using a plurality of variation type counters (selecting whether or not to display an advance notice, etc.). In addition, the selection of the type of loss is configured to be divided into a (normal) variation pattern table for loss and a (probability variation) variation pattern table for loss, but even if the game state is normal, there are multiple held balls (for example , 3 or more if the maximum is 4), since the variation display may be ended early, the selection may be made by referring to the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table.

In addition, since the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the front-rear out-of-reach reach or the front-rear out-of-rear reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the game state, Normal) The fluctuation pattern table 202d2 and the deviation (probability variation) fluctuation pattern table 202d3 do not include a group common to reach, and these fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 are referred to only when the stop type is completely off. In addition, a variation pattern table may be separately prepared which is referred to when the stop type is either the front-rear out-of-order reach or the non-rear-out-of-rear reach regardless of the game state.

In the pachinko machine 10, the correspondence between the fluctuations A to C selected when the fluctuation type is the out-of-order reach or the non-out-of-order reach and the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is the same regardless of the gaming state. Although it is assumed that there is, it may be different depending on the game state.

Furthermore, in the fluctuation pattern tables 202d2 and 202d3 for each deviation shown in FIGS. 8(d) and 8(e), the fluctuation D and the fluctuation E are simply set as "complete deviation fluctuation", and the "complete deviation fluctuation" is selected. In this case, another table may be referenced to select variation D and variation E with a predetermined probability. Of course, also in this case, tables corresponding to the number of held balls may be prepared.

Returning to FIG. 7, the second hit random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter that sequentially adds 1 within the range of 0 to 250, for example, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 250). Further, when the second winning random number counter C4 completes one cycle, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4.

In this embodiment, the value of the second hit random number counter C4 is updated at each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 14), and is acquired when it is detected that the ball has passed through either the left or right through gate 67. There are 149 random numbers to be won, and the range is "5 to 153". That is, when the value of the obtained second winning random number counter C4 is within the range of "5 to 153", it is determined that a winning is occurring, and the second symbol display device 83 displays a "○" symbol as a stop symbol (second symbol). Along with the lighting display, the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b is activated, and the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined time.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 250), and once per timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10). It is updated and repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main processing (see FIG. 17).

In this way, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and the main controller 110 controls the big winning lottery and the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 according to the values of the counters and the like. Main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting of (fluctuation effect) and lottery of the display result in the second pattern display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. The prize ball number table 202e of the ROM 202 is a table that defines the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball enters (wins a prize) in each of the prize winning openings 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a. Details of the number-of-balls table 202e will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the number-of-balls table 202e.

As shown in FIG. 9, in the number-of-balls table 202e, the "starting opening type" includes the first starting opening 64a, the second starting opening 64b, the first normal winning opening 63a, the second normal winning opening 63b, and the big winning opening 65a. is defined, and for each winning hole, the "number of prize balls" corresponding to that winning hole is defined. Specifically, in the number-of-balls table 202e, the number of prize balls is associated with the first start opening 64a, the number of prize balls is associated with the second start opening 64b, and the number of prize balls is associated with the second start opening 64b. 8 prize balls are associated with the opening 63a, 8 prize balls are associated with the second normal winning opening 63b, and 12 prize balls are associated with the big winning opening 65a.

The prize ball number table 202e defines the number of prize balls corresponding to each winning hole for all the winning holes provided in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with winning holes other than the winning holes 63a, 63b, 64a, 64b, and 65a, the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning holes is included in the number of prize balls table 202e. is defined.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the number of prize balls is the same between the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b. Therefore, in the number-of-balls table 202e, the first normal winning hole 63a and the second normal winning hole 63b are combined, and the "starting hole type" is defined as "normal winning hole", and is associated with the "normal winning hole". The number of prize balls may be defined as 8. Also, if the number of prize balls of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b is the same as "3", the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b are combined in the number of prize balls table 202e. , the "starting opening type" may be defined as "starting opening", and the number of prize balls 3 may be defined in association with the "starting opening".

The number-of-balls table 202e is transmitted to the role-ratio management chip 207 during the initialization process of the MPU 201 executed when the main controller 110 is powered on, and Used when calculating ratios.

The trigger information data 202f is data that defines the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio in the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG. Although the details will be described later, the role product ratio management chip 207 calculates the role product ratio at the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f.

The role product ratio management chip 207 corresponds to three timings (trigger) as the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio. The first is the number of shot balls, and the role ratio management chip 207 calculates the role ratio each time the number of shot balls reaches a predetermined number. The second is the time, and the role product ratio management chip 207 calculates the role product ratio when a predetermined time comes. The third is the playing time, and the role product ratio management chip 207 calculates the role product ratio when the player's playing time has passed for a predetermined period of time.

In the trigger information data 202f, information indicating any one of “number of shots”, “time”, and “game time” is defined as the calculation timing (trigger) of the role product ratio in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the character ratio when the information indicating the "number of shots" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the character ratio A role product ratio is calculated in the management chip 207 .

When information indicating "time" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as "predetermined times", the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the character product ratio is calculated in the character product ratio management chip 207 .

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio, when the information indicating the "game time" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating two hours as the "predetermined time", the role ratio management chip 207 , the role product ratio is calculated.

The trigger information data 202f is sent to the character ratio management chip 207 together with the prize ball number table 202e during the initialization process of the MPU 201 that is executed when the main controller 110 is powered on. It is used when the management chip 207 determines a trigger for calculating the character product ratio.

The RAM 203 includes a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201, various flags and counters, I/O and a work area (work area) in which values such as are stored. The RAM 203 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. .

A power failure signal SG1 output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 when the power is shut off (including when a power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter). With this input, power-off occurrence information is set by the executed NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15). In the main processing of the MPU 201 (FIG. 17), when it is determined that there is power-off occurrence information, the stack pointer at that time and the values of each register are stored in the RAM 203 .

On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on due to the cancellation of the power failure; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203 . Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 20) when the power is turned off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed by the start-up process (see FIG. 19) when the power is turned on.

The RAM 203 further includes a reserved ball number counter 203a, a reserved ball storage area 203b, a reserved ball execution area 203c, a start 1 counter 203d, a start 2 counter 203e, a general 1 counter 203f, a general 2 counter 203g, a large winning opening counter 203h, an out It has at least a counter 203i.

The number of retained balls counter 203a is one of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b detected in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 14) which is periodically executed every 2 milliseconds. Based on the entering ball (start winning), the number of pending balls (number of waiting times) of the variable display performed by the first symbol display device 37 (variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81) is counted up to 4 times. It is a counter that Zero is set as an initial value of the reserved ball number counter 203a by the initial setting process (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after the power is turned on. Then, every time the starting winning prize is detected and the number of held balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to the maximum value of 4 (see S202 and S203 in FIG. 12). On the other hand, the number of pending balls counter 203a is decremented by 1 each time the variable effect is executed (see S305 in FIG. 13).

The value of the pending ball number counter 203a (that is, the pending ball number) is notified to the sound lamp control device 113 by the pending ball number command (see S205 in FIG. 12). The pending ball count command is a command sent from the main controller 110 to the sound lamp control device 113 each time the start winning is detected and the pending ball counter 203a is incremented by one.

The voice lamp control device 113 can acquire the value of the number of pending balls of the variable effect that is held by the main controller 110 by the number of pending balls command. As a result, in the audio lamp control device 113, it is possible to manage the suspension count of the variable effect without accessing the main control device 110. FIG. In addition, every time the start winning is detected, by transmitting a pending ball number command from the main controller 110 to the voice ramp control device 113, the pending ball number of the variable effect managed in the voice ramp control device 113 is reduced to noise. Even if the actual number of retained balls of the variable performance retained by the main controller 110 is deviated due to such influences, the deviation can be corrected by the command of the number of retained balls to be received next.

The audio lamp control device 113 transmits a display pending ball number command for notifying the pending ball number to the display control device 114 every time the internally managed pending ball number changes. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number pattern in the reserved ball number display area Db of the third pattern display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

Further, in this embodiment, when the main controller 110 transmits a pending ball number command to the sound lamp control device 113, in the pending ball number command, not only the value of the pending ball number counter 203a incremented by 1 , the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, and the stop pattern selection counter acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 6) in accordance with the start winning that triggered the addition of the pending ball number counter 203a. C3, each value of the variation type counter CS1 is also included.

That is, when there is a starting prize, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer in the main control device 110 , is communicated to the audio ramp controller 113 by the number of pending pitches command.

In the voice ramp control device 113, each value of the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 transmitted by the pending ball number command is changed based on each value. Pre-reading is performed before the performance is executed, and what the variable performance will be (whether or not a big hit will occur, how the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the execution of the variable performance. Execution of various effects can be determined based on the result of judgment by the look-ahead.

The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 acquired from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) upon detection of the start winning. A memory for storing each value. When the MPU 201 detects that the ball has entered either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (starting winning) in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 10), each counter from the counter buffer The values of C1 to C3 and CS1 are acquired and stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b. The reserved ball storage area 203b is divided into four reserved areas (first reserved to first 4 areas) (see FIG. 7).

The reserved ball execution area 203c stores data (counters C1 to C3, CS1 each value).

When the MPU 201 detects that it is the execution start timing of the variable effect, the big winning lottery and the setting of the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are executed. Of the data corresponding to each starting prize stored in the above-described reserved ball storage area 203b (values of counters C1 to C3 and CS1), the data corresponding to one starting prize is stored in this reserved ball execution area 203c. shift to It should be noted that the shift in this embodiment means moving data stored in one area to another area.

Here, with reference to FIG. 7 again, the details of the reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c will be described. The reserved ball storage area 203b and the reserved ball execution area 203c are used by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 to set the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variable effect) of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81. used by

For the setting of the jackpot lottery and the variable display (variation effect) of the first pattern display device 37 and the third pattern display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot lottery and the first hit random number counter C1 used for determining the jackpot type are used. A hit type symbol counter C2, a stop pattern selection counter C3 used to determine the stop type at the time of loss, and a variation type counter CS1 used to determine the variation pattern are used. The reserved ball storage area 203b stores the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 obtained from the counter buffer by the MPU 201 when the ball enters either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (start winning). Store each value.

The reserved ball storage area 203b is composed of four reserved areas (first to fourth reserved areas). Each of the four reservation areas (reservation first to fourth areas) has a first winning random number counter storage area 203b1 that stores the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and a first winning type counter C2 that stores the value. A per type counter storage area 203b2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203b4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

In this embodiment, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3, and the variation type counter storage area 203b4 are combined into one reserved ball storage area. 203b, a plurality of reserved ball storage areas may be provided, and each of the four areas 203b1, 203b2, 203b3, and 203b4 may be provided in one of the reserved ball storage areas.

As described above, in the reserved ball storage area 203b, up to four data (each value of each counter C1 to C3, CS1) obtained at the timing when the ball enters the second starting port 64b (start winning) is stored. However, in that case, data is stored in order from the area with the smallest area number (1st to 4th) among the vacant areas of the 4 reserved areas (1st to 4th reserved areas). That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize is stored, and the first reserved area stores the data corresponding to the oldest starting prize.

On the other hand, the reserved ball execution area 203c is composed of only one area. In this reserved ball execution area 203c, similarly to the reserved ball storage area 203b, a first winning random number counter storage area 203c1 for storing the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the value of the first winning type counter C2 are stored. A first hit type counter storage area 203c2, a stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3 for storing the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3, and a variation type counter storage area 203c4 for storing the value of the variation type counter CS1 are provided.

When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the data (the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1) stored in the first reserved area of the reserved ball storage area 203b are stored in this reserved ball. It shifts to each area 203c1 to 203c4 of the execution area 203c. Then, the data shifted to the holding ball execution area 203c is referred to in the variation start process (see FIG. 17), and a big winning lottery is performed based on the reference data, and the variation pattern and stop type corresponding to the lottery result are determined. decide. In the first symbol display device 37, under the control of the main controller 110, variation display is performed based on the determined variation pattern and stop type.

In addition, the variation pattern and the stop type determined here are notified to the audio lamp control device 113 by the variation pattern command and the stop type command, and are also notified to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113. . Then, under the control of the display control device 114, the third symbol display device 81 performs a variation effect based on the variation pattern and the stop type notified by the variation pattern command and the stop type command.

The details of data shift will be explained. When the MPU 201 determines that it is time to start executing the variable effect, the random value in the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1 of the first reservation area is transferred to the first hit random number counter storage area 203c1 of the reservation ball execution area 203c. shift. Similarly, the random number in the first winning type counter storage area 203b2 is shifted to the first winning type counter storage area 203c2, and the random number in the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203b3 is shifted to the stop pattern selection counter storage area 203c3. , the random number in the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 is shifted to the fluctuation type counter storage area 203c4.

When the shift of the data to the holding ball execution area 203c is completed, the holding first area becomes empty, so that each area (second to fourth) of the holding ball storage area 203b stores (holds). Shift processing is performed to pack the data into areas (first to third) whose area number is one smaller. In the present embodiment, data is shifted only for the reserved areas (first to fourth) in which data is stored (held) in the reserved ball storage area 203b.

Here, the data shift performed for each reserved area in the reserved ball storage area 203b will be described. For example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when it is determined to start the variable effect is "4", and data is stored in all areas (first to fourth) of the pending ball storage area 203b. do. In this state, the data in the first reserved area is shifted to the reserved ball execution area 203c, and when the first reserved area becomes empty, the MPU 201 transfers the data in the other areas (second to fourth) to the area Shift to area (1st to 3rd) with number 1 smaller. That is, the data in the second reserved area is shifted to the first reserved area, the data in the third reserved area is shifted to the second reserved area, and the data in the fourth reserved area is shifted to the third reserved area.

Further, for example, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a when the start determination of the variable effect is performed is "2", the MPU 201 shifts only the data in the second pending area to the first pending area. , to finish shifting the data. As described above, in the present embodiment, data shift processing is not performed for the reserved areas (third to fourth) in which data is not stored (held), so the number of data shifts can be reduced. can reduce the control burden.

Note that regardless of the presence or absence of data, each data in the reserved areas (second to fourth) may be shifted to an area with an area number one smaller. In that case, it becomes unnecessary to determine whether or not data is stored (retained) in the reserving areas (second to fourth), making it easier to create a program.

Returning to FIG. 6, the description is continued. A start 1 counter 203d is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the first start opening 64a, a start 2 counter 203e is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the second start opening 64b, and a general 1 counter 203f. is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the first normal winning prize opening 63a, a general 2 counter 203g is a counter for counting the number of balls that have won the second normal winning prize opening 63b, and a large winning prize opening counter 203h is for a large winning prize opening. The out counter 203i, which is a counter for counting the number of balls that have entered the winning opening 65a, is a counter for counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). be. All of these counters 203d to 203i are set to zero as initial values by the initial setting processing (S616 in FIG. 16) of the RAM 203 after power-on.

In addition, the MPU 201 performs the switch reading process (see FIG. 11) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) which is executed every 2 milliseconds. Referring to the port 205c, the normal 2 port 205d, the large winning opening port 205e and the out port 205f, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c and the second normal winning opening switch 208d. , the big winning opening switch 208e and the out switch 208f determine whether or not a ball has been detected. Then, when there is a winning in any of the winning openings (a ball is detected in the corresponding switch), the counter corresponding to the winning opening is incremented by 1, and the ball is detected in the out switch 208f. is detected, the out counter 203i is incremented by one.

The counting of the number of balls in the counters 203d to 203i continues for 0.5 seconds. Then, when 0.5 seconds have passed, the values of the counters 203d to 203h are set as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is set as out information, together with the information indicating the game state at that time, to the role product ratio management chip 207. be done. When the setting of the values of the counters 203d to 203i in the character ratio management chip 207 is completed, the values of these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to zero, and the prizes are won in the winning slots for the next 0.5 seconds. The number of balls drawn is counted for each winning hole, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. The number (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the role product ratio management chip 207 . As will be described later, the role product ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing of calculating the role product ratio. Until the timing to calculate the product ratio, or from the previous calculation of the role ratio to the next timing to calculate the role ratio, the number of balls that won each prize hole Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

In this way, the number of winning balls into the winning opening actually detected by the MPU 201 is input from the MPU 201 to the role ratio management chip 207. It is possible to accurately grasp the number of balls recognized as prize-winning.

In addition, if the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning hole and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). If the character ratio management chip 207 does not perform these calculations and only the character ratio management chip 207 counts them, even the character ratio management chip 207 can guide the winning to each winning opening and the ball discharge path at short intervals (for example, 2 millisecond intervals). The sphere must be monitored, which increases the processing load and may increase power consumption.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting results of the MPU 201 are set in the character ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. In addition, between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the character ratio is calculated for the first time, or between the time when the character ratio was calculated last time and the time when the next character ratio is calculated. A process of counting the number of winning balls in each winning hole and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning hole, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, the winning of each winning hole and the ball guided to the ball discharge path are monitored. It is necessary to perform such control, and processing is originally performed at intervals as short as 2 milliseconds. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, since the interval at which the balls are shot into the game area by the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is approximately 0.6 seconds, The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) are 0 or 1 in most cases, and a few balls at most. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, this counting process can suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 . Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole for 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). (number of

The character product ratio management chip 207 is provided with a CPU 261, a buffer 262, a first read/write memory 263, a second read/write memory 264, a setting register 265, and a real-time clock (hereinafter referred to as "RTC") 266. , which are connected to each other via bus 206 . The bus 206 is also connected to the MPU 201 and inspection terminals 207a.

Also, a large-capacity capacitor 267 is connected to the role product ratio management chip 207 . While power is being supplied to the main controller 110, the capacitor 267 is charged. The power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to perform processing associated with the power-off. Note that a chargeable/dischargeable secondary battery may be connected to the character product ratio management chip 207 instead of the capacitor 267 .

The CPU 261 is an arithmetic device that controls the operation of the role ratio management chip 207, and executes a control program stored in a ROM (not shown) provided in the role ratio management chip 207 to control the role in the pachinko machine 10. The material ratio management chip 207 is used to manage the material ratio. Since the CPU 261 manages the role product ratios in the role product ratio management chip 207 and the like, it is possible to flexibly cope with the function change and specification change of the role product ratio management chip 207 by changing the software.

RTC 266 outputs the current time. The RTC 266 incorporates a rechargeable secondary battery (not shown), and using the secondary battery as a power source, the RTC 266 keeps track of the current time and outputs the current time. The time output by the RTC 266 is referred to by the CPU 261 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is "time", and the time indicated by the RTC 266 is set in the trigger setting area. 265b, the process of calculating the character product ratio is executed. In addition, although the details will be described later, the first reading memory 263 stores jackpot information, door opening information, error information or When the after-hours information is added, the time at that time is read from the RTC 266, and the read time is added to each data together with each piece of information.

The buffer 262 is a memory for temporarily storing various types of information set by the MPU 201, and is composed of an SRAM (Static Random Access Memory) which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing data. The buffer 262 includes a start 1 buffer 262a, a start 2 buffer 262b, a general 1 buffer 262c, a general 2 buffer 262d, a big winning opening buffer 262e, an out buffer 262f, a buffer during jackpot 262g, a buffer during opening 262h, a buffer during error 262i, and the like. is provided at least.

The value of the first counter 203d set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the first buffer 262a. The value of the start 2 counter 203e set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the start 2 buffer 262b. The general 1 buffer 262c stores the value of the general 1 counter 203f set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. The value of the general 2 counter 203g set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the general 2 buffer 262d. The value of the big winning opening counter 203h set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is stored in the big winning opening buffer 262e. The out buffer 262f stores the value of the out counter 203i set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds.

When the gaming state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is during the jackpot, the information (jackpot information) is stored in the buffer 262g during the jackpot. When the game state set by the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds is that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is being opened, the open buffer 262h stores the information (door open information). If the game state set by the MPU 201 is in error at intervals of 0.5 seconds, the error buffer 262i stores the information (error information).

In the character product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 performs setting (writing) to various buffers provided in the buffer 262, and when an interrupt signal is received from the MPU 201, the CPU 261 performs setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19), which will be described later. reference). The setting information reception process counts the number of winning balls for each winning hole based on various information set in the buffer 262, and the balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the balls shot to the game area). are counted, and the number of balls is stored in the first read/write memory 263, and information on the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is also stored in the first read/write memory 263.

The setting register 265 is a register for setting a setting value necessary for the operation of the role product ratio management chip 207 . The setting register 265 is provided with at least a number-of-balls data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b.

A winning ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a. The trigger information data 202f stored in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 is set in the trigger setting area 265b. When the main controller 110 is powered on, the ball prize table 202e and the trigger information data 202f are sent to the character ratio management chip 207. FIG. Then, the CPU 261 sets the number-of-balls table 202e in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a, and sets the trigger information data 202f in the trigger setting area 265b.

The prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a is referred to by the CPU 261 when calculating the role ratio. Here, the number of prize balls for each winning hole is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is stored in the ROM 202 conventionally. Information on the number of prize balls is transmitted from the number of prize balls table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the character ratio management chip 207 each time power is supplied, and the number of prize balls data setting area of the character ratio management chip 207 265a, there is no need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the character ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Also, if the pachinko machine models are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio can be calculated accurately.

The trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is also referred to by the CPU 261, and it is determined whether or not the timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f has come. When it is determined, the process of calculating the role product ratio is executed. Here, the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the character ratio management chip 207 is determined by the character ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the character ratio management chip 207 that can record the information on the character ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability, probability variation rate, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 are taken into consideration. As in the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the character ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. Each time the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 to the role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio management chip 207 can execute a role product at a timing that matches the jackpot probability, probability variable ratio, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the continuous character product ratio and record it in the second read/write memory 264 .

Note that only the winning ball table 202e and the trigger information data 202f, which are transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on, are the winning ball number data. It is configured to be set in a setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b. The startup process is a so-called boot process, which is a non-user program that is not programmed by the user. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false winning ball table or trigger information data in the winning ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

The first read/write memory 263 is a memory for temporarily storing while accumulating the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 until the timing for calculating the character product ratio. The first read/write memory 263 is composed of a data readable/writable volatile memory such as an SRAM. Note that the first read/write memory 263 may be configured with a DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory), which is a volatile memory capable of reading and writing a larger amount of data.

The first reading memory 263 stores a start 1 counter 263a, a start 2 counter 263b, a general 1 counter 263c, a general 2 counter 263d, a big prize winning opening counter 263e, an out counter 263f, a jackpot data 263g, an opening data 263h, and an error. At least data 263i and after-hours data 263j are stored. These counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263 are all initialized to 0 by the CPU 261 based on the initialization signal transmitted from the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on ( See S710 in FIG. 18).

In addition, these counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263 are referred to by the role product ratio calculation process executed by the CPU 261 when the timing for calculating the role product ratio has come, and necessary processing is executed. After that, the CPU 261 initializes all to 0 again (S744 in FIG. 21). As a result, in the first read/write memory 263, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is accumulated and temporarily stored again until the next timing for calculating the character product ratio. .

The start 1 counter 263a is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first start opening 64a before the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 1 counter 203d indicating the number of balls that have won the first start hole 64a for 0.5 seconds in the start 1 buffer 262a, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the start 1 buffer 262a. (That is, the number of balls winning the first starting hole 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a.

The start 2 counter 263b is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second start port 64b until the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the start 2 counter 203e indicating the number of balls that have won the first start hole 64a for 0.5 seconds in the start 2 buffer 262b, the CPU 261 sets the value set in the start 2 buffer 262b. (That is, the number of balls winning the second starting hole 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first 2 counter 263b.

The normal 1 counter 263c is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the first normal prize winning opening 63a before the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the general 1 counter 203f, which indicates the number of balls that have won the first normal prize winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds, in the general 1 buffer 262c, the CPU 261 sets the general 1 buffer 262c. A value (that is, the number of balls winning in the first normal winning hole 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 1 counter 263c.

The normal 2 counter 263d is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b until the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the general 2 counter 203g that indicates the number of balls that have won the second normal prize winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds in the general 2 buffer 262d, the CPU 261 sets the general 2 buffer 262d. A value (that is, the number of balls winning in the second normal winning hole 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263d.

The big winning hole counter 263e is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls that have won the big winning hole 65a until the timing for calculating the role product ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the value of the big winning hole counter 203h, which indicates the number of balls that have won the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds, in the big winning hole buffer 262e, the CPU 261 sets the value in the big winning hole buffer 262e. The value (that is, the number of balls that have won in the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning hole counter 263e.

The out counter 263f is a counter for accumulating and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, balls shot to the game area) until the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. When the MPU 201 sets the out buffer 262f to the value of the out counter 203i that indicates the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 resets the value set in the out buffer 262f (that is, 0 .5 seconds) is added to the out counter 263f. When the trigger for calculating the character ratio set in the trigger setting area 265b is "number of shots", this out counter 263f is referred to, and the number of balls (number of shots) indicated by the out counter 263f is counted in the trigger setting area. When the "predetermined number of balls" set in 265b is exceeded, the CPU 261 executes the process of calculating the role product ratio.

When the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes a big win before the timing of calculating the role product ratio, the big win data 263g is the big win information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 has won a big win. It is the data specified together. When the MPU 201 sets the jackpot information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot as the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the jackpot buffer 262g, the CPU 261 combines the jackpot information with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 to generate the jackpot. It is added to the medium data 263g.

The open data 263h indicates that the pachinko machine 10 opens the door when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 (door) is open before the timing for calculating the accessory ratio. This is the data defined together with the time when the door is open, which indicates that the state has been reached. When the MPU 201 sets door open information indicating that the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open as the game state of the pachinko machine 10 in the open buffer 262h, the CPU 261 displays the door open information. is added to open data 263h along with the current time indicated by RTC 266.

The in-error data 263i provides in-error information indicating that the pachinko machine 10 is in error when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 becomes in error before the timing for calculating the role product ratio is reached. This data is specified together with the time of When the error buffer 262i is set by the MPU 201 to the error buffer 262i, the error information indicating that the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in error is set by the CPU 261 together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266. , is added to the in-error data 263i.

The after-hours data 263j is set (written) to the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 in the pachinko machine 10 when the setting (writing) to the buffer 262 is performed in a late-night time period (for example, between midnight and 6:00 in the morning), which is usually outside business hours. This data defines after-hours information indicating that some kind of action was performed in the middle of the night, together with the time at that time. When the MPU 201 sets (writes) to the buffer 262, the CPU 261 reads the time at that time from the RTC 266, and when it is determined that the time is in the midnight time zone, the after-hours information is Together with the current time indicated by RTC 266, it is added to after hours data 263j.

The second read/write memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, such as a flash memory, from which data can be read and written. The second read/write memory 264 only needs to hold stored data even when the power is turned off. (MRAM: Magnetoresistive Random Access Memory), resistance change type memory (ReRAM: Resistive Random Access Memory), or the like. In addition, while the second read/write memory 264 is composed of a DRAM, by continuing to supply the backup voltage from the power supply device 115 to the DRAM even while the power is off, data can be retained even while the power is off. You may make it

The second read/write memory 264 stores at least character ratio data 264a, continuous character ratio data 264b, shot ball number data 264c, and game state data 264d.

The role product ratio data 264a is data in which data representing the role product ratio calculated for each timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio is recorded together with the calculated time. The continuous role product ratio data 264b is data in which data representing the continuous role product ratio calculated at the same timing (trigger) is recorded together with the calculated time.

Here, the role ratio is the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player, which is paid out according to the winning of the second starting hole 64b and the big winning hole 65a in which the role is activated. It shows the ratio of the number of balls (prize balls), and is defined as 70% or less. In addition, the continuous role ratio is defined as the number of balls (prize balls) paid out in association with winning in the big winning hole 65a in which the role is continuously operated, out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player. It shows the ratio of the number of balls), and is defined as 60% or less.

Originally, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio refer to the above ratios in the case where the game ball trial shooting test is performed for 10 hours, but here, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b For each timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the CPU 261, the CPU 261 controls the timing until the timing is reached for the first time after the power is turned on, or between the previous timing and the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the second starting hole 64b and the big winning hole 65a out of the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out is calculated, It is recorded in the role product ratio data 264a together with the time of day. Also, the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the mouth 65a is calculated and recorded in the continuous role ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to pay out from the timing (trigger) of calculating the most recent role product ratio until the power is cut off. Based on the number of balls won (prize balls), the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be obtained without omission even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. A ratio can be calculated.

The number of balls that have won the first starting hole 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls that have won the second starting hole 64b indicated by the first counter 263b, The number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a indicated by the 1 counter 263c, the number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the large winning opening counter 263e indicated by the big winning opening counter 263e. The number of prize balls associated with each prize hole shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a for each of the number of balls that have won the prize hole 65a. By multiplying by , the number of balls paid out in accordance with the winning of the winning opening can be calculated for each winning opening. By totaling these, the total number of balls paid out to the player can be calculated.

As a result, the number of balls paid out with winning to the second start hole 64b and the number of balls paid out with winning to the big winning hole 65a with respect to the total number of balls paid out to the player By calculating the total ratio with the number of , the role ratio can be calculated. Further, by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out with winning to the big winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player, the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated.

The shot ball number data 264c is the total number of balls shot to the game area counted by the out-counter 263f of the first reading memory 263, for each timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio, and the time at that timing. Data recorded together. The total number of balls shot to the game area from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time or from the previous timing to the current timing is indicated by the out counter 263f. When the timing for calculating the character ratio has come, the value of the out counter 263f at that time is recorded in the shot ball number data 264c together with the time at that time indicated by the RTC 266.

The game state data 264d includes jackpot information, door opening information, error information, and overtime information stored in the first reading memory 263 during jackpot data 263g, during opening data 263h, during error data 263i, and during overtime data 263j. are recorded together with the time associated with each piece of information. When it is time to calculate the role product ratio, the jackpot information, the door opening information, and the jackpot information stored in the first reading memory 263 during jackpot data 263g, during opening data 263h, during error data 263i, and during overtime data 263j, The CPU 261 records the in-error information, the out-of-hours information, and the time associated with each information in the game state data 264d.

At this time, for example, if the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the game state is that the jackpot is continuously occurring, so the jackpot at the earliest time. Only the information and its time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, for the door open information, error information, and overtime information, if each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and the time is recorded in the game state data 264d. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

When recording jackpot information, door open information, error information, and out-of-hours information in the game state data 264d, the CPU 261 arranges (sorts) each piece of information from the oldest time information, and transfers the information to the game state data 264d. Record. When outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 outputs the information in the recorded order. As a result, each piece of information is output in chronological order from the oldest, so that the inspection device 300 can easily analyze changes in the game state with the lapse of time by analyzing the information in the order in which it is output.

However, the CPU 261 does not necessarily have to arrange each piece of information in order from the oldest piece of information and store it in the gaming state data 264d. In this case, when outputting the information recorded in the game state data 264d to the inspection device 300, the CPU 261 may read out the information recorded in the game state data 264d in order from the oldest time and transmit it to the inspection device 300. Alternatively, each piece of information may be output to the inspection device 300 in the order in which it was recorded, and the inspection device 300 may rearrange the pieces of received information from the oldest one.

The jackpot information, door opening information, error information and after-hours information stored in the first reading memory 263 during jackpot data 263g, during opening data 263h, during error data 263i and after-hours data 263j are respectively corresponded. All of them may be recorded in the game state data 264d together with the attached time. Although the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d is large, by outputting this to the inspection device 300, it is possible to analyze the operating state of the pachinko machine 10 while observing minute changes in the game state.

Here, the information on the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls shot into the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c are each stored in a predetermined number ( For example, 1024). In addition, the total number of jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (eg, 16384). When a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the newest information is replaced. is recorded. For example, the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, and the game state data 264d are configured like ring buffers, respectively, and the positions where information is written on each ring buffer are managed. A memory is separately prepared in the second read/write memory 264 or in a non-volatile memory provided separately from the second read/write memory 264, and by shifting the writing position by 1 each time information is written, the oldest information can be obtained. can be erased and the latest information can be recorded there. By setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each piece of data in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264 . Also, when the number of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can be analyzed including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. can be done. By preparing a memory in the second read/write memory 264 for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer, even if the power supply is cut off in the middle, the data can be restored after the power supply is turned on. New information can be added and recorded from the continuation of the information stored up to.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 controls the character product ratio data 264a and the continuous character product ratio data 264b recorded in the second read/write memory 264, The number of balls data 264c and the game state data 264d are transmitted to the inspection device 300 in order. When transmitting each data 264a to 264d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 transmits each information recorded in each data 264a to 264d (including recorded time information associated with each information). They are read in order and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . Just by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs, and the processing of transmitting each information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 is executed. can be completed. Therefore, the inspection device 300 analyzes the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information received from the pachinko machine 10, and fraud can be quickly and easily detected from the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Send to device 300 . On the other hand, if the data for transmitting information to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of information that can be recorded (predetermined number above), the memory that manages the position to write the information indicates. The position indicated in the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the reading position by 1 in order from the position next to the position (i.e., the position where the oldest time information is recorded) (i.e., the position where the information is written) , the position where the latest time information is recorded) are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Since the second reading memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, even if the power supply is turned off in the middle, the second reading memory 264 records the information regarding the character ratio etc. in the pachinko machine 10. continue to be Therefore, the inspection device 300 can receive and analyze information regarding the character product ratio and the like including information before the power is turned off.

Here, some of the fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big prize by increasing the number of prizes to be won. Also, there are those who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize winning opening 65a by some method or guiding the balls to the big winning prize opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio will increase.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the main controller 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, and the prize ratio management chip 207 obtains the winning information for each winning hole from the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. , the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio in the pachinko machine 10 are calculated at predetermined timings and recorded continuously. Then, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a , the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 are output to the inspection device 300 . As a result, by analyzing the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio in the inspection device 300, it is possible to discover the fraudulent act when it has been performed.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 , information on the number of balls shot into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300 . Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are high, the cause is investigated based on the information on the number of balls shot into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202 and the like. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to alter the winning information or the like input to the role product ratio management chip 207 . It is also difficult to falsify or delete the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio recorded in the character product ratio management chip 207 . Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated and output by the character product ratio management chip 207 .

In addition, the character object ratio management chip 207 is provided with a first reading memory 263 and a second reading memory 264. Based on the number of winning balls for each winning hole counted in , the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . Here, the second read/write memory 264 is composed of a non-volatile memory, but in general, non-volatile memory requires a large amount of power for writing, takes a long time to write, and is not durable from the viewpoint of durability. There is a limit on the number of writes. In this embodiment, the first reading memory 263 composed of a volatile memory and the second reading memory 264 composed of a non-volatile memory are separated. By performing the processing of counting and storing the number of winning balls for each winning opening at high speed, it is possible to count the winning balls in each winning opening without fail. Then, later, from the number of winning balls for each winning hole stored in the first reading memory 263, the process of calculating the role ratio and the continuous role ratio and recording them in the second reading memory 264 is performed at a predetermined timing ( Trigger), the number of times of writing to the second read/write memory 264 can be reduced, so it is possible to suppress the above-mentioned problems caused by the non-volatile memory.

Returning to FIG. 5, the description is continued. The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rental balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 storing control programs executed by the MPU 211, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 213 used as a work memory and the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area for storing the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211, and various flags and counters. , and a work area (work area) in which values such as I/O are stored. The RAM 213 is configured to retain (back up) data by being supplied with a backup voltage from the power supply 115 even after the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. As with the MPU 201 of the main controller 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured to receive a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when power is shut off due to a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, NMI interrupt processing (see FIG. 15) is immediately executed as power failure processing.

An input/output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 215 is connected to the main controller 110, the dispensing motor 216, the launch controller 112, and the like. Although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected with a prize ball detection switch for detecting paid prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout controller 111 but not to the main controller 110 .

The shooting control device 112 controls the ball shooting unit 112a so that the shooting strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51 when the main controller 110 issues a ball shooting instruction. The ball shooting unit 112a has a shooting solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the firing solenoid and the electromagnet are permitted to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operating handle 51, and the operating handle is activated under the condition that the stop switch 51b for stopping the shooting of the ball is turned off (not operated). A shooting solenoid is energized corresponding to the amount of rotation of the operating handle 51, and a ball is shot with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operating handle 51 at intervals of about 0.6 seconds.

The audio lamp control device 113 outputs audio from an audio output device (such as a speaker (not shown)) 226, outputs lighting and extinguishing from a lamp display device (electrical parts 29 to 33, display lamp 34, etc.) 227, changes production and continuous It controls the setting of the display mode of the effect performed by the third pattern display device 81 such as the advance notice effect.

The MPU 221, which is an arithmetic device, has a ROM 222 storing control programs executed by the MPU 221, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 223 used as a work memory and the like.

An input/output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 comprising an address bus and a data bus. The input/output port 225 is connected to the main controller 110, the display controller 114, the audio output device 226, the lamp display device 227, the frame button 22, and the like.

The sound lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, changes the stage of the effect displayed on the third pattern display device 81 or super reach. It controls the voice output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 and instructs the display control device 114 so as to change the effect mode of the hour.

When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the stage after the change is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the stage after the change on the third pattern display device 81. . Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third design, which is the main image to be displayed on the third design display device 81 .

When the frame button 22 is operated for a purpose other than changing the stage, such as changing the performance mode of super ready-to-win, a frame button operation command is transmitted to the display control device 114 . The display control device 114 displays an image corresponding to the operation of the frame button 22 on the third pattern display device 81 by receiving the frame button operation command.

The RAM 223 has a command storage area (not shown) that temporarily stores a command received from the main control device 110 until the process corresponding to the command is performed, and indicates that a variable effect should be started in the ON state. It has a fluctuation start flag (not shown) and the like.

The command storage area is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 25) of the sound lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area is read out, and the command determination process The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The fluctuation start flag is set to OFF as an initial value when power is turned on, and is turned ON when a stop type command output from main controller 110 is received (see S1005 in FIG. 25). Then, it is turned off when the variable display is set in the third symbol display device 81 (see S1102 in FIG. 26).

The display control device 114 is a device that controls the screen display of the third symbol display device (LCD) 81, and various screen displays such as variable display of the third symbol (fluctuation effect) and big win effect at the time of the big win are controlled by voice lamps. It controls according to a command transmitted from the control device 113 (main control device 110).

The display control device 114 includes an MPU 231, a ROM (program ROM) 232, a work RAM 233, a video RAM 234, a character ROM 235, an image controller 236, an input port 237, an output port 238, and bus lines 239 and 240. have. The input side of the input port 237 is connected to the output side of the sound lamp control device 113 , and the output side of the input port 237 is connected to the MPU 231 , the ROM 232 , the work RAM 233 and the image controller 236 . A video RAM 234 and a character ROM 235 are connected to the image controller 236 , and an output port 238 is connected via a bus line 240 . A third pattern display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 238 . Note that even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model with different jackpot lottery probabilities and the number of prize balls paid out per jackpot, there are models with exactly the same specifications for the pattern configuration displayed on the third pattern display device 81. Therefore, the display control device 114 is made a common component to reduce the cost.

The MPU 231 of the display control device 114 controls the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the sound lamp control device 113 and other various commands. The ROM 232 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data. The work RAM 233 is a memory for temporarily storing work data and flags used when the MPU 231 executes various programs.

The character ROM 235 is a memory that stores performance data (character information) such as patterns (background pattern and third pattern) displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a compressed format. The video RAM 234 has an area (not shown) for storing a plurality of character information read from the character ROM 235 in order to generate an image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81 in a decompressed form, and a plurality of decompressed data. A memory having a frame buffer area (not shown) for temporarily storing one frame of display data generated using at least part of character information until the data is displayed.

The image controller 236 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 231, the video RAM 234, and the output port 238 to intervene the reading and writing of data, and reads the display data stored in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 234 at a predetermined timing to display the third data. It is displayed on the pattern display device 81 .

The power supply device 115 includes a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power interruption due to power failure, etc., and a RAM provided with a RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3). and an erase switch circuit 253 . The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies necessary operating voltages to the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an overview, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volts supplied from the outside, various switches such as the various switches 208, solenoids such as the solenoid 209, a voltage of 12 volts for driving a motor, etc. A voltage of 5 volts for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, etc. are generated, and these 12 volts, 5 volts and backup voltages are supplied to the controllers 110 to 114 and the like as necessary voltages.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 at the time of power failure due to power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the voltage of stable DC 24 volts, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251, and determines that a power failure (power shutdown, power shutdown) has occurred when this voltage is less than 22 volts. Then, a power failure signal SG1 is output to the NMI terminals of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute NMI interrupt processing. Even after the stable DC voltage of 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts, the power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the driving voltage of the control system, for a time sufficient to execute the NMI interrupt processing. is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 18).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting a RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing backup data to the main controller 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the main controller 110 clears the backup data when the RAM erase signal SG2 is input, and controls the payout initialization command for clearing the backup data in the payout control device 111. Send to device 111 .

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 will be described with reference to the flow charts of FIGS. 10 to 17. FIG. The processing of the MPU 201 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started when the power is turned on, main processing that is executed after the startup processing, and startup processing that is started periodically (in this embodiment, at intervals of 2 milliseconds). There is a timer interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by input of the power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. Here, for convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt processing and the NMI interrupt processing will be explained first, and then the start-up processing and main processing will be explained.

FIG. 10 is a flow chart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 2 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, an external output process is executed (S101). In timer interrupt processing and main processing, based on various processing, commands to be transmitted to payout control device 111, sound lamp control device 113, etc. are generated and temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in RAM 203. . In the external output process of S101, output data such as commands stored in the command transmission ring buffer is transmitted to each sub-side control device (peripheral control device).

For example, it transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 the pending ball number command set in the starting winning process (see FIG. 12). In addition, it transmits to the sound ramp controller 113 the variation pattern command, the stop type command, the confirmation command, etc. set in the variation process (see FIG. 13) and the variation start process (FIG. 14) which is one process of the variation process. In addition, a ball shooting signal set for shooting a ball in the process of S111, which will be described later, is transmitted to the shooting control device 112. FIG.

Next, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S102), and then the large winning opening (large open opening) 65a of the variable winning device 65 is opened or closed in the case of the jackpot state. A large-opening opening/closing process for opening the door is executed (S103). That is, the big winning hole 65a is opened for each round in the big winning state, and it is determined whether the maximum opening time of the big winning hole 65a has passed or whether a specified number of balls have won in the big winning hole 65a. Then, when any one of these conditions is established, the big winning opening 65a is closed. The opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a are repeated for a predetermined number of rounds.

Next, display control processing of a second symbol (for example, a symbol of "o" or "x") by the second symbol display device 83 is executed (S105). Briefly, on the condition that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, the value of the second winning random number counter C4 is obtained at the timing of the passage, and the second pattern display device 83 changes the second pattern. Display is performed. Then, a lottery for the second symbol is carried out according to the value of the second winning random number counter C4, and when the second symbol is in the winning state, the electric accessory associated with the second starting port 64b is opened for a predetermined period of time.

Next, a switch reading process is executed (S106). That is, it reads the states of various switches 208 connected to the main controller 110, determines the states of the switches, and saves detection information (winning detection information). Also, a winning ball command corresponding to the number of winning balls to be transmitted to the payout control device 111 is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 based on the winning detection information. Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. Details of the switch reading process (S106) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S107). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899 in this embodiment). Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 . Similarly, 1 is added to the second initial random number counter CINI2, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (250 in this embodiment), it is cleared to 0, and the updated value of the second initial random number counter CINI2 is cleared. is stored in the corresponding counter buffer area of the RAM 203 .

Further, the first winning random number counter C1, the first winning type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1 and the second winning random number counter C4 are updated (S108). Specifically, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, the variation type counter CS1, and the second hit random number counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values. (899, 99, 99, 198, and 250 respectively in this embodiment) are cleared to 0 respectively. Also, when the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4 completes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 or the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is changed to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 or the second random number counter CINI2. The initial value of the second winning random number counter C4 is read, and the initial value is set to the first winning random number counter C1 or the second winning random number counter C4. Then, the updated values of the respective counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203. FIG.

Next, a process for displaying by the first symbol display device 37 and a variation process for setting a variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are executed (S109), and then the first start port 64a. And the starting prize-winning process associated with the winning to any one of the second starting ports 64b is executed (S110). The details of the variation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13, and the details of the starting winning process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After executing the starting prize-winning process, the firing control process is executed (S111), and further, other processes to be periodically executed are executed (S112), and the timer interrupt process ends. Note that the shooting control process is performed on the condition that the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51 and that the stop switch 51b for stopping shooting is not operated. This is a process of determining on/off of the . Then, when the ball shooting is on, in order to send the ball shooting signal to the shooting control device 112 , the information of the ball shooting signal is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 . As a result, the ball firing signal is transmitted to the firing control device 112 via the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Further, the other processing (S112) includes processing for determining whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in an error state. For example, in spite of the information of the ball launch signal being set in the process of S111, the ball guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the ball launched to the game area) is detected by the out switch 208f for a predetermined time or longer. If not, it is determined that there is a possibility of ball clogging and an error state exists. Also, when the abnormal payout signal is read in the process of S102, it is determined that the ball payout is in an error state. Furthermore, when it is determined that a large vibration is given to the pachinko machine 10 or a magnet is brought close to the pachinko machine 10, it is determined that there is a possibility that the game is fraudulent and that the game is in an error state. .

It should be noted that whether or not the pachinko machine 10 has been subjected to a large vibration is determined by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a vibration sensing sensor that senses vibration, and inputting the output of the vibration sensing sensor to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. This is done by reading the output of the vibration sensor in the process of S112. In addition, whether or not a magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10 is determined by providing a magnetism sensor for detecting changes in magnetism in the pachinko machine 10, and outputting the magnetism sensor output to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110. This is done by reading the output of the magnetic sensing sensor in the process of S112.

In the processing of S112, if it is determined that an error state exists, an error command including information on the error type is set in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203. FIG. As a result, an error command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next. Then, a warning sound corresponding to the error type can be output from the voice output device 226, the display lamp 34 can be lit and blinked, and an image corresponding to the error type can be displayed on the third pattern display device 81. .

Next, the switch reading process (S106), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart showing this switch reading process (S106).

In the switch reading process, first, the first start switch 208a, the second start switch 208b, the first normal winning switch 208c, the second normal winning switch 208d, the big winning switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. The output is read by referring to the first 1 port 205a, the first 2 port 205b, the general 1 port 205c, the general 2 port 205d, the big winning port 205e and the out port 205f of the input/output port 205, and the first starting port 64a, Detected information ( Winning detection information) is saved (S151). The winning of one ball and the determination of one ball guided to the ball discharge path are performed over three timer interrupt processes based on the outputs of the respective switches 208a to 208f.

Next, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a prize has been won by the processing of S151 among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the big winning port 65a. If there is a determined winning hole, the number of won balls is adjusted so that the number of prize balls corresponding to the winning hole (that is, the number defined by the prize ball number table 202e) is paid out. A prize ball command is set in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 203 (S152). Thereby, the prize ball command is transmitted toward the payout control device 111 by the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing to be executed next.

Then, based on the winning detection information, it is determined that a prize has been won by the processing of S151 among the first starting port 64a, the second starting port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, and the big winning port 65a. If there is a determined winning opening, the counter corresponding to the winning opening is set to 1 among the first 1 counter 203d, first 2 counter 203e, general 1 counter 203f, general 2 counter 203g, and big winning opening counter 203h. While counting up, if it is determined that there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, the out counter 203i is incremented by 1 (S153).

Next, it is determined whether or not 0.5 seconds have passed since the winning information (the values of the counters 203d to 203i and information on the game state of the pachinko machine 10) was set to the role product ratio management chip 207 last time ( S154). As a result, if 0.5 seconds have not passed (S154: No), the switch reading process is terminated as it is, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), the processing of S155 to S157 is executed. First, in the process of S155, the values of the start 1 counter 203d, the start 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h are used as winning information, and the value of the out counter 203i is used as out information. It is set in the role ratio management chip 207 together with the game state of the pachinko machine 10 (S155).

As a result, the value of the start 1 counter 203d is set in the start 1 buffer 262a of the role product ratio management chip 207, the value of the start 2 counter 203e is set in the start 2 buffer 262b of the role product ratio management chip 207, and the general 1 counter is set. The value of 203f is set in the normal 1 buffer 262c of the prize ratio management chip 207, the value of the normal 2 counter 203g is set in the normal 2 buffer 262d of the prize ratio management chip 207, and the value of the big winning opening counter 203h is the role. The value of the out counter 203i is set in the out buffer 262f of the character ratio management chip 207.

In this way, the counters 203d to 203i continue to count the number of balls for 0.5 seconds. is set in the character product ratio management chip 207 as out information together with information indicating the game state at that time. That is, in the pachinko machine 10, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole at intervals of 0.5 seconds, and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path ( That is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted, and the counted result is set in the role product ratio management chip 207 . As will be described later, the role product ratio management chip 207 accumulates these counted values for each value until the timing of calculating the role product ratio. Until the timing to calculate the product ratio, or from the previous calculation of the role ratio to the next timing to calculate the role ratio, the number of balls that won each prize hole Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted.

Suppose that the MPU 201 does not count the number of winning balls for each winning opening or the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Assuming that these counts are performed only by the character ratio management chip 207, even with the character ratio management chip 207, the winning to each winning opening and the guidance to the ball discharge path are performed at short intervals (for example, 2 millisecond intervals). The sphere must be monitored, increasing the processing load and possibly increasing power consumption.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the counting results of the MPU 201 are set in the character ratio management chip 207 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. In addition, between the time when the power is turned on and the time when the character ratio is calculated for the first time, or between the time when the character ratio was calculated last time and the time when the next character ratio is calculated. A process of counting the number of winning balls in each winning hole and counting the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) may be executed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in processing load and power consumption in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

On the other hand, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won in each winning hole, and also counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). Therefore, at intervals of 2 milliseconds when the timer interrupt processing is executed, the winning of each winning hole and the balls guided to the ball discharge path are monitored. It is necessary for the main control of the game such as prize ball determination, and is originally processed at a short time interval of 2 milliseconds. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, since the interval at which the balls are shot into the game area by the ball shooting unit 112a (see FIG. 5) is approximately 0.6 seconds, The number of winning balls and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (i.e., the number of balls used in the game) are 0 or 1 in most cases, and a few balls at most. Therefore, the amount of data required for the counters 203d to 203i provided in the RAM 203 may be small. Therefore, this counting process can suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 . Therefore, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have entered each winning hole for 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). (number of

The gaming state set by the process of S155 includes, for example, during a big win, during opening of the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14, and during an error. Whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is open is determined by the MPU 201 referring to the door opening port 205g and confirming the output of the door opening switch 208g.

Further, whether or not the game state is in error is based on the result determined by the process of S112 of the timer interrupt process. In the processing of S155, when it is determined that the game is in the error state in the processing of S112, information indicating that the game state is in error is set in the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG.

When the game state set by the processing of S155 includes the state of being a jackpot, the jackpot information is stored in the buffer 262g during the jackpot. When the middle buffer 262h stores door open information and the game state includes an error, the error information is stored in the error buffer 262i. These pieces of information are finally recorded in the game state data 264 d of the second read/write memory 264 in the role product ratio management chip 207 . When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information regarding the game state is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the information regarding the role product ratio. Therefore, when the inspection device 300 analyzes the character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and finds an incomprehensible tendency in the character ratio, the inspection device 300 searches for the cause by referring to the information indicating the game state. can be done.

After the processing of S155, an interrupt signal is transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 (S156). Based on this interrupt signal, the character ratio management chip 207 executes setting information reception processing (see FIG. 19), which will be described later, and based on the various information set in the buffer 262, , the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls shot to the game area) is counted, the number of these balls is stored in the first reading memory 263, and the pachinko machine Information about ten game states is also stored in the first read/write memory 263 .

After the process of S156, the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, the major prize winning opening counter 203h corresponding to each winning opening, and the out counter 203i corresponding to the out switch 208f are set to 0. is initialized (S157), the switch reading process is terminated, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When these counters 203d to 203i are initialized to 0 by the process of S157, the number of balls winning in each winning hole in the next 0.5 second is again counted by the counters 203d to 203h for each winning hole. Also, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game) is counted by the out-counter 203i.

In the process of S154, when this process is executed for the first time after power is supplied to the main controller 110, the winning prize information (the values of the counters 203d to 203i and the pachinko machine 10 game state information) is set, it is assumed that 0.5 seconds have passed (S154: Yes), and the process proceeds to S155. As a result, the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning hole detected before the power is turned off and the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path are set in the character ratio management chip 207 when the power is turned off. The values of the respective counters 203d to 203i of the RAM 203, which have not been set, can be set in the role product ratio management chip 207 immediately after the power is supplied on condition that they are held even during the power failure. Therefore, in the role product ratio management chip 207, it is possible to suppress recording omission of winning information and out information due to power failure.

Next, the starting winning process (S110), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. FIG. 12 is a flow chart showing the starting winning process (S110). In the start winning process, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (start winning). A process of storing (holding) the value of CS1 in the holding ball storage area 203b is executed. Further, the processing for transmitting the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 to be held together with the number of held balls to the sound lamp control device 113 is executed.

When the MPU 201 executes the starting winning process, first, it determines whether or not the ball has won the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (starting winning) (S201). Here, by the processing of S151 of the switch reading process (see FIG. 11), the first start opening switch 208a that detects winning to the first starting opening 64a and the second starting switch 208a that detects winning to the second starting opening 64b The result of whether or not there is a winning to the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b, which is determined based on the output signal from the opening switch 208b, is utilized.

When it is determined that the ball has won the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b (there has been a starting prize) (S201: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a It is determined whether or not the number of pending balls N of the variable effect that is present is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S202). Then, if there is no winning in either the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: No), or even if there is a winning in the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b If the number of held balls N<4 (S202: No), the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

On the other hand, if there is a winning to the first starting port 64a or the second starting port 64b (S201: Yes), and if the number of retained balls N<4 (S202: Yes), the value of the retained ball number counter 203a (retained 1 is added to the number of balls (N) (S203). Then, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 are read from the counter buffer (see FIG. 7) and provided in the reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. Among the reserved first to fourth areas, the first hit random number counter storage area 203b1, the first hit type counter storage area 203b2, and the stop pattern selection counter storage area of the area corresponding to the value indicated by the reserved ball number counter 203a 203b3 and the fluctuation type counter storage area 203b4 (S204).

Specifically, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after the addition by the process of S203 is "1", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are reserved in the respective storage areas of the first pending area. Also, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "2", each storage area in the second pending area, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "3", the third storage area If the value of the pending ball number counter 203a after addition is "4", the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 are stored in the storage areas of the fourth pending area.

Next, the value of the retained ball number counter 203a after addition by the processing of S203 (the number of retained balls N), the first winning random number counter C1 stored (reserved) in the retained ball storage area 203b by the processing of S204, the first winning In order to transmit the pending ball number command including the respective values of the type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the variation type counter CS1 to the sound lamp control device 113, the pending ball number command is sent to the command transmission ring provided in the RAM 203. Set in the buffer (S205). As a result, the pending ball number command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 by the external output process of S101 of the timer interrupt process to be executed next.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the reserved ball number command, it instructs the display control device 114 to display the reserved ball number pattern corresponding to the reserved ball number N in the reserved ball number display area Db (see FIG. 4). do. In addition, the voice ramp control device 113 uses the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holds-balls command to read ahead before the variable performance based on the values is executed, and how the variable performance is executed. (Whether it will be a big hit or not, what will happen to the variable time, etc.) is determined before execution of the variable performance. Execution of various effects can be determined based on the result of judgment by the look-ahead.

In the process of S205, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the number-of-holds-balls command may be the values read from the counter buffer in the process of S204. A value read out from the value stored (reserved) in 203b may be used.

After completing the process of S205, the process returns to the timer interrupt process.

Next, the variation process (S109), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing this variation process (S109). The variation processing (S109) controls the variation display in the first symbol display device 37 and the variation effect performed in the third symbol display device 81. FIG.

In this variation process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot is currently in progress (S301). During the big win includes the middle of the big win game displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and the first symbol display device 37 at the time of the big win and the middle of the predetermined time after the end of the big win game. As a result of determination, if the jackpot is in progress (S301: Yes), this process is terminated.

If the jackpot is not in progress (S301: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is fluctuating (S302), and if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is not fluctuating. (S302: No), then, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed after the variable display on the first symbol display device 37 is stopped (S303). As a result, if the predetermined time has not passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: No), this process is terminated. As a result, the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 for a predetermined period of time, so that the player can visually recognize the stop symbol.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S303, if a predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped (S303: Yes), the value of the reserved ball number counter 203a (the number of held balls N of the variable display held in the main controller 110) is greater than 0 (S304). As a result, if the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is not 0 (S304: Yes), it is determined that it is time to start executing the variable effect. The number of balls N) is subtracted by 1 (S305). This is because the variation start process (S307) starts the execution of one of the suspended variable effects, so that the number of suspended balls is reduced by one.

Next, shift processing is performed on the data stored in the reserved ball storage area 203b (S306). This data shift process is a process for sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth reserved areas of the reserved ball storage area 203b toward the reserved ball execution area 203c. The data in each area is shifted such as area 203c, reserved second area→reserved first area, reserved third area→reserved second area, reserved fourth area→reserved third area, and so on.

After the data shift process of S306, the variation start process for the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 is executed based on the values of various counters stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the data shift process. (S307), returning to timer interrupt processing. Note that the fluctuation start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 14 .

In the processing of S304, when it is determined that the value of the number of reserved balls counter 203a (the number of reserved balls N) is 0 (S304: No), the third symbol display device 81 is in a state where a demonstration effect is being performed. It is determined whether or not, that is, whether or not a demonstration is being performed (S308). In this determination process, after the demonstration command is transmitted to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113, until it is determined that the value of the pending ball number counter 203a (the pending ball number N) is greater than 0 Identifies the interval as being in demonstration.

If it is determined that the demo is not in progress (S308: No), the demo command to be transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S309), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing. On the other hand, if it is determined that the demonstration is being performed (S309: Yes), the process returns to timer interrupt processing. The demo command set in the process of S309 is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice It is sent to the lamp control device 113 . When receiving the demonstration command, the sound lamp control device 113 instructs the display control device 114 to display the demonstration effect on the third pattern display device 81 .

Here, the demo command is set when, as described above, there is not even a single held ball when the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped. Therefore, when the variable display is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after the variable stop, the third symbol display device 81 displays the demonstration effect.

If it is determined in the process of S308 that the demonstration is not being performed (S308: No), a process of determining whether or not a second predetermined time longer than the predetermined time has passed after the fluctuation is stopped is performed. After the fluctuation is stopped, the process of S309 may be executed to set the demonstration command when the second predetermined time has passed. Thus, when there is no reserved ball after the fluctuation is stopped, the stop pattern of the stopped fluctuation performance can be shown to the player for a relatively long time without immediately starting the demonstration performance.

In the processing of S302, when it is determined that the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S302: Yes), it is determined whether or not the change time has elapsed (S310). The display time during fluctuation of the first pattern display device 37 is determined according to the variation pattern selected by the variation type counter CS1 (determined according to the variation pattern command), and this variation time has elapsed. If not (S310: No), the display of the first symbol display device 37 is updated (S311), and the process returns to timer interrupt processing.

In this embodiment, among the LEDs 37a of the first pattern display device 37, from the start of the variation until the variation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is extinguished. At the same time, the green LED is lit, and if the green LED is lit, the green LED is extinguished and the blue LED is lit, and if the blue LED is lit, the blue LED is extinguished. At the same time, a display mode is set in which the red LED is turned on.

Note that the variation process is executed every 2 milliseconds, but if the lighting color of the LED is changed each time the variation process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the variation process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 200, the LED change the lighting color of That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 seconds. Note that the value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

On the other hand, if the fluctuation time of the first symbol display device 37 has passed (S310: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol is set for the first symbol display device 37 (S312). The stop symbols are set in advance by the variation start process (S307), which will be described later with reference to FIG. In the fluctuation start process, whether or not a big win is determined according to the value of the first winning random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c by the process of S306. Depending on the value of , after the jackpot, the pattern will be a 15R variable jackpot (a variable jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 15 rounds and then a high probability state after the jackpot) or a 2R variable jackpot (with a maximum number of rounds of 2 rounds after the jackpot and a high probability state). It is determined whether it is a pattern that will be a transitional variable jackpot) or a pattern that will be a 15R normal jackpot (a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a low probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds).

In this embodiment, when the 15R probability variable jackpot is achieved after the jackpot, the blue LED is lit, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is achieved, the red LED is illuminated, and when the 15R normal jackpot is achieved, the red LED and the blue LED are lit. , and the LED of . In addition, when it is out, the red LED and the green LED are turned on. Each LED is turned off when the next variable display is started, but it may be turned on only for several seconds after the variable display is stopped.

When the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 corresponding to the stop symbol is set in the process of S312, the stop symbol of the variable effect on the third symbol display device 81 is synchronized with the lighting of the LED on the first symbol display device 37. Then, a confirmation command is set (S313), and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. When the sound lamp control device 113 receives this confirmation command, it instructs the display control device 114 to stop the variable display of the third pattern in the third pattern display device 81 and to display the stop pattern. conduct.

Next, the fluctuation start process (S307), which is one process of the fluctuation process executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 14 is a flow chart showing the fluctuation start process (S307). In this fluctuation start process (S307), based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area, a "jackpot" or "loss" lottery (jackpot lottery) is performed, and the first symbol display device 37 And the effect pattern (variation pattern) of the variable effect performed by the third symbol display device 81 is determined.

In the fluctuation start process, first, a big hit is determined based on the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the big hit random number table 202a (see FIG. 8(a)). A lottery (win/fail judgment) process is performed (S401).

Whether or not it is a big win is determined based on the relationship between the value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the mode at that time. As described above, in the jackpot random number table 202a, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the normal low probability state, "7,307,582" is defined as the jackpot random number value. Further, when the game state (mode) that the pachinko machine 10 can take is in the high probability state, "28, 58, 85, 122, 144, 178, 213, 238, 276, 298, 322, 354, 390, 420 , 448, 486, 506, 534, 567, 596, 618, 656, 681, 716, 750, 772, 809, 836, 866, 892" are defined as jackpot random numbers.

In the processing of S401, the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the reserved ball storage area is compared with the jackpot random number value defined in the jackpot random number table 202a, and they match. In that case, it is determined to be a jackpot. As a result of the process of S401, when it is determined that it is a jackpot (S401: Yes), the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c and the jackpot type table 202b (FIG. 8(b) ), the display mode at the time of the big win is set (S402).

In this process, according to the jackpot type table 202b, the jackpot type associated with the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, that is, the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds after the jackpot. A 15R variable jackpot that shifts to a 15R normal jackpot that shifts to a low probability state after a jackpot of 15 rounds with the maximum number of rounds, or a 2R variable jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after a jackpot of 2 rounds with the maximum number of rounds. be discriminated. Then, based on the determined jackpot type, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) at the time of the jackpot in the first symbol display device 37 is set.

Further, in the third symbol display device 81, in order to stop and display various jackpot symbols corresponding to the jackpot types, the jackpot types (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot) are set as they are as stop types. The display mode at the time of the big hit in the 3-symbol display device 81 is set.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of the big hit is determined (S403), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the fluctuation time until the stop display in the display mode at the time of the big win is determined. In determining the variation pattern for the big win, first, the big win variation pattern table 202d1 (see FIG. 8(c)) to be used is selected according to the number of pending balls at that time indicated by the pending ball number counter 203a. Then, in the process of S402, when the 15R probability variable jackpot or the 15R normal jackpot is set as the jackpot type, it is stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group of "15R jackpot common" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1. Select the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1. That is, in this case, one of variation A, variation B, and variation C is selected.

In addition, when the 2R probability variable jackpot is set as the jackpot type in the process of S402, the variation type stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c in the group "only for 2R probability variable jackpot" of the selected jackpot variation pattern table 202d1 A variation pattern associated with the value of the counter CS1 is selected. In the present embodiment, only the 2R variation is selected in this case. Note that the relationship between the variation patterns (variation A, variation B, variation C, and 2R variation) and variation time is defined in advance by a table or the like.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S401 that it is not a big hit (S401: No), the display mode when the win is out is set (S404). In the process of S404, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the lost symbol, and based on the value of the stop pattern selection counter C3 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c, the third As the stop type to be displayed on the symbol display device 81, any one of front-rear out-of-reach reach, front-rear out-of-reach without reach, and complete out-of-order is set. In this embodiment, as described above, depending on whether the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is the high-probability state or the low-probability state, the value range of the stop pattern selection counter C3 corresponding to each stop type is Tables are set differently.

Next, the variation pattern at the time of deviation is determined (S405), and the process proceeds to S406. Specifically, in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the variation time until stop display of the lost symbol is determined. At this time, when the game state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal low probability state excluding the time-saving state, the deviation (normal) variation pattern table corresponding to the number of reserved balls at that time indicated by the number of reserved balls counter 203a. 202d2 (see FIG. 8(d)) is selected. In addition, when the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is in the time-saving state or the high-probability state at the time of probability variation, the deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 ( (see FIG. 8(e)) is selected.

Then, when complete deviation is set as the stop type in the processing of S404, the suspension A variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation D or variation E is selected.

In addition, in the processing of S402, when front-rear out-of-reach reach and reach other than front-rear out-of-order reach are set as the stop type, "common reach" of the selected deviation (normal) variation pattern table 202d2 or deviation (probability variation) variation pattern table 202d3 group, the variation pattern associated with the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the reserved ball execution area 203c is selected. That is, in this case, variation A, variation B, and variation C are selected. Then, the variation time is set based on the relationship between the variation pattern and the variation time defined in advance by a table or the like.

In the processing of S406, based on the variation pattern determined by the processing of S403 and S405, a variation pattern command for notifying the variation pattern to the display control device 114 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S406). Also, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the processing of S402 or S404 via the sound lamp control device 113 is set (S415), and the process returns to the change processing. These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are voiced in the processing of S101 of the timer interrupt processing (FIG. It is sent to the lamp controller 113 . Upon receiving the variation pattern command and the stop type command, the audio ramp control device 113 generates a display variation pattern command and a display type command based thereon, and transmits them to the display control device 114 .

FIG. 15 is a flow chart showing NMI interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 . The NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 203 . That is, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 . Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control being executed, starts the NMI interrupt processing, stores the power interruption occurrence information in the RAM 203 as the setting of the power interruption occurrence information (S501), and ends the NMI interruption processing. do.

Incidentally, the above NMI interrupt processing is also executed in the payout control device 111 in the same manner, and information on occurrence of power failure is stored in the RAM 213 by such NMI interrupt processing. That is, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like, a power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control being executed. Then, NMI interrupt processing is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S601). For example, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. Next, in order to wait for the sub-side control devices (peripheral control devices such as the sound lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to become operable, a wait process (one second in this embodiment) is executed. (S602). Then, access to the RAM 203 is permitted (S603).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) provided in the power supply 115 is turned on (S604), and if it is turned on (S604: Yes), the process proceeds to S614. On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), it is further determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605), and if not stored (S605: No). , there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally, so in this case as well, the process proceeds to S614.

If power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S605: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S606). If the judgment value does not match the RAM judgment value saved at the time of power shutdown, the backed-up data is destroyed.

Note that the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of the RAM 203, as will be described later in the processing of S706 in FIG. Instead of the RAM determination value, the validity of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the processing of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111, which is a sub-side control device (peripheral control device) (S614). When the payout control device 111 receives this payout initialization command, it clears the area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 203, sets the initial value, and becomes ready to start the game ball payout control. After transmitting the payout initialization command, main controller 110 executes the initialization process of RAM 203 (S615, S616).

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, such as when the hall starts operating. Therefore, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S615, S616) is executed. Also, if power failure occurrence information is not set, or if a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the RAM 203 initialization process (S615, S616) is executed in the same way. . In the RAM initialization process (S615, S616), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S615), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S616). After executing the initialization process of the RAM 203, the process proceeds to S610.

On the other hand, if the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on (S604: No), power failure occurrence information is stored (S605: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S607: Yes), while retaining the data backed up in the RAM 203, clear the power failure occurrence information (S608). Then, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the sub-side control device (peripheral control device) to the game state at the time of drive power interruption is transmitted (S609), and the process proceeds to S610. When the payout control device 111 receives this payout return command, the game ball payout control can be started while retaining the data stored in the RAM 213 .

In the processing of S610, an initialization signal is transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 (S610). Accordingly, upon receiving the initialization signal, the character object ratio management chip 207 executes initialization processing such as initializing all the buffer 262 and the first read/write memory 263 to 0 (S711 in FIG. 18), The character product ratio management chip 207 is initialized so that the character product ratio can be managed.

Next, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e is transmitted to the role-ratio management chip 207 (S611). As a result, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a in the character ratio management chip 207, and each prize when a prize is won in each prize opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, the character ratio and continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Here, the number of prize balls for each winning hole is determined by the model of the pachinko machine, and the information is stored in the ROM 202 conventionally. Information on the number of prize balls is transmitted from the number of prize balls table 202e stored in the ROM 202 to the character ratio management chip 207 each time power is supplied, and the number of prize balls data setting area of the character ratio management chip 207 265a, there is no need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the character ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Further, when the pachinko machine models are different, it is only necessary to change the ROM 202, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio can be calculated accurately.

Next, the information of the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 (S612). Thus, in the role ratio management chip 207, the trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b, and when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f comes, the pachinko machine 10 character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated.

Here, the timing (trigger) of the calculation of the character ratio management chip 207 is determined by the character ratio management chip 207 because there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the character ratio management chip 207 that can record the information on the character ratio management chip 207. It is preferable that the timing is not fixed, but that the jackpot probability, probability variation rate, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 are taken into consideration. As in the pachinko machine 10, the trigger information data 202f that defines the timing of calculating the character ratio determined in consideration of the jackpot probability, probability variation ratio, etc. in the pachinko machine 10 is stored in the ROM 202, and the power is supplied. Each time the trigger information data 202f is sent to the ROM 202 to the role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio management chip 207 can execute a role product at a timing that matches the jackpot probability, probability variable ratio, etc. of the pachinko machine 10. It is possible to calculate the ratio and the continuous character product ratio and record it in the second read/write memory 264 .

After the processing of S612, the interrupt is permitted (S613). Then, the process shifts to the main process, which will be described later.

Next, with reference to FIG. 16, main processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 after the startup processing described above will be described. FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing this main process. This main process is roughly divided into a counter update process and a power-off process.

In the main process, it is determined whether or not power-off occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S701). If the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information (S701: No), the power failure signal SG1 is not output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252, and the power is not shut off. Therefore, in such a case, updating of the first initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is repeatedly executed (S702, S703).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S702). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are incremented by 1 and cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value (899, 250 in this embodiment). . Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding counter buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S703) by the same method as the process of S108 (see FIG. 10), and the process proceeds to S701.

Here, while this main process is being executed, the timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 10 is activated and executed at predetermined time intervals (2 milliseconds in this embodiment). In the timer interrupt process, different processes are executed according to the state of the game. For example, during the big win, the opening and closing of the big winning opening 65a is controlled, and if the ball passes through the through gate 67, the display control of the second symbol by the second symbol display device 83 is performed. In addition, in the jackpot lottery executed when the variable display on the first pattern display device 37 is started, the number of jackpot random numbers to be compared with the obtained first hit random number counter C1 depending on whether it is in a high probability state or a low probability state. is different. Therefore, the time taken to execute one timer interrupt process changes according to the state of the game. Therefore, the remaining time from the end of one timer interrupt process to the execution timing of the next timer interrupt process is not constant, but changes according to the state of the game at that time.

The processes of S702 and S703, which are one process of the main process, are executed during the remaining time of this timer interrupt process. That is, the remaining time is used to repeatedly update the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2. The counter CINI2 (that is, the initial value of the first winning random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second winning random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly the fluctuation type counter CS1 can be updated randomly. . In particular, by randomly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2, the first winning random number counter C1 and the second winning random number counter C4 using these as initial values for updating are updated. can have randomness.

In the process of S701, if the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S701: Yes), the power is shut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. , the NMI interrupt process of FIG. 15 has been executed, so the power-off process after S704 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S704), and a power-off command indicating that the power has been cut off is sent to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the sound lamp control device 113) In addition, power-off information is transmitted to the role-product ratio management chip 207 (S705). Then, a RAM determination value is calculated and stored (S706), access to the RAM 203 is prohibited (S707), and the infinite loop continues until the power supply is completely cut off and processing cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203 .

Note that the process of S701 is executed at the timing when one cycle of the processes of S702 and S703 performed within the remaining time of the timer interrupt process ends. As a result, in the main processing of the main controller 110, at the timing when various settings by the timer interrupt processing are finished and when the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are finished updating, information on occurrence of power failure is confirmed. . Therefore, when returning from the power-off state, the process can be started from the process of S701 after the start-up process is completed. That is, the process can be started from the process of S701, as in the case of initialization in the start-up process.

Therefore, even if the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 are not saved in the stack area or the value of the stack pointer is not saved in the processing when the power is turned off, the stack pointer is saved in the initialization processing (S601). By setting to a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S701 can be started. As a result, the control load on main controller 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without malfunction or runaway of main controller 110 .

In the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a process to be executed periodically is executed by timer interrupt processing, and the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 are updated in the remaining time of the timer interrupt processing in the main processing. A part or all of the processing executed in the timer interrupt processing may be configured to be executed every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) in the main processing. For example, in the present embodiment, the timer interrupt processing was executed by the timer interrupt processing, read processing (S102), large open mouth opening and closing processing (S103), second pattern control processing (S105) and switch reading Part or all of the process (S106) may be configured to be executed every 2 milliseconds in the main process instead of the timer interrupt process.

In this case, a step for determining whether or not a predetermined time (2 milliseconds) has elapsed is provided in the main processing, and only when it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed, the processing to be executed at predetermined time intervals is executed. The counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 may be updated regardless of whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed. As a result, each of the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 is updated during the remaining time of the processing executed every predetermined time. Since the time required for the counters CINI1, CINI2, and CS1 can be updated at random even with such a configuration.

Next, each control process executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18 to 22. FIG. The processing of the CPU 261 can be broadly divided into main processing for managing the ratio of characters and items, which is started when the power is turned on, and reception of setting information, which is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information is set by the MPU 201. processing, and inspection result output processing that is executed based on the fact that the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a.

First, with reference to FIG. 18, the role product ratio management main processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing this role product ratio management main process. This role product ratio management main process is started when power is supplied to the role product ratio management chip 207 .

When the role product ratio management main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not an initialization signal has been received from the MPU 201 (S710). While it is determined that the initialization signal has not been received (S710: No), the determination of S710 is continued. Then, if it is determined that the initialization signal has been received (S710: Yes), the process proceeds to S711 and initialization is performed (S711). As a result, in the character product ratio management chip 207, at least the initialization of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 is completed, and the initialization of the character product ratio management chip 207 is executed after waiting for the stage where the game control by the MPU 201 can be started. will do.

In the initial setting of S711, when starting the operation of the character product ratio management chip 207, each device in the character product ratio management chip 207 is initialized. For example, the buffer 262 and the first read/write memory 263 are all initialized to zero. As a result, in the buffer 262, even if there is a buffer that is not set by the MPU 201 for each of the buffers 262a to 262i, meaningless data can be prevented from remaining in the buffer, and the meaningless data can be prevented from remaining in the buffer. Storage in the memory 263 can be prevented. In addition, in the first read/write memory 263, the number of balls that have won a prize in each winning hole and guidance to the ball discharge path are displayed from when the power is supplied to the role ratio management chip 207 to when the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached. It is possible to accumulatively count the number of balls hit (that is, the number of balls shot into the game area), and to store information about the game state during that time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the information of the number-of-balls table 202e has been received from the MPU 201 (S712). And while it is not received (S712:No), the process of S712 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S712: Yes), the received ball number table 202e is set in the ball number data setting area 265a (S713). As a result, the prize ball number table 202e is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a in the character ratio management chip 207, and each prize when a prize is won in each prize opening indicated by the prize ball number table 202e. Based on the number of balls, the character ratio and continuous character ratio of the pachinko machine 10 are calculated.

Next, it is determined whether or not information of the trigger information data 202f has been received from the MPU 201 (S714). And while it is not received (S714:No), the process of S714 is continued and performed. On the other hand, if it is determined that it has been received (S714: Yes), the received trigger information data 202f is set in the trigger setting area 265b. As a result, in the role ratio management chip 207, when the timing (trigger) for calculating the role ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b comes, the ratio of the pachinko machine 10 and the A continuous role ratio is calculated.

In this way, only the prize ball table 202e and the trigger information data 202f, which are transmitted during the start-up process (so-called boot process) executed by the MPU 201 when the main controller 110 is powered on, It is configured to be set in a number data setting area 265a and a trigger setting area 265b. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from setting a false winning ball table or trigger information data in the winning ball number data setting area 265a and the trigger setting area 265b.

Next, when the processing of S710 to S715 is completed, interrupt permission is set (S716). As a result, when an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set is received, the setting information reception process is executed, and an interrupt signal is generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a. An interrupt signal causes inspection result output processing to be executed.

When the interrupt signal is input at the same time, the setting information reception process is executed with priority over the inspection result output process. As a result, the latest winning information, out information, and information about the game state input from the MPU 201 are accumulated and stored in the role ratio management chip 207, and information such as the role ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Therefore, analysis by the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed including the latest information. On the other hand, when interrupt signals are input at the same time, inspection result output processing may be executed with priority over inspection apparatus output processing. In this case, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, it is possible to transmit the information regarding the role item ratio and the like to the inspection device 300. FIG.

Next, it is determined whether power-off information has been received from the MPU 201 (S717), and S717 is continuously executed unless power-off information is received (S717: No). Further, during this time, when the CPU 261 receives an interrupt signal from the MPU 201, the setting information reception process is executed prior to the process of S717, and an interrupt generated based on the connection of the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a is executed. When the input signal is received, inspection result output processing is executed.

As a result of the process of S717, when the power interruption information is received (S717: Yes), the power supply to the main controller 110 (character product ratio management chip 207) is cut off due to power failure or the like. Therefore, the role product ratio calculation process is executed (S718), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely cut off and the process cannot be executed. Details of the role product ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 .

Next, setting information reception processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. FIG. FIG. 19 is a flow chart showing this setting information reception process. This setting information receiving process is executed based on an interrupt signal received from the MPU 201 after winning information and the like are set by the MPU 201 .

The setting information reception process includes the winning information set in each buffer 262a to 262e by the MPU 201 (each value of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h) and This is a process of storing in the first reading memory 263 the out information (value of the out counter 203i) set in the out buffer 262f and the gaming state set in each of the buffers 262g to 262i. Further, when it is time to calculate the role ratio, it calculates the role ratio and the continuous role ratio based on the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263, and provides data regarding the number of shot balls and the game state. Together with this, a process of recording in the second read/write memory 264 is also performed.

First, refer to FIG. In the setting information reception process, first, it is determined whether or not there is door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720). If the opening buffer 262h contains door opening information (S720: Yes), the opening data 263h is set (added and stored) together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 ( S721).

If it is determined by the process of S720 that there is no door open information in the open buffer 262h (S720: No), and after the process of S721, then whether or not there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722). If there is error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: Yes), the error information is set (added and stored) in the error data 263i together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S723). .

If it is determined by the process of S722 that there is no error information in the error buffer 262i (S722: No), and after the process of S723, then the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is the midnight time zone (midnight 0 to 6:00 in the morning) (S724). Since the late-night hours are usually outside business hours, the fact that an interrupt signal was transmitted from the MPU 201 during the late-night hours and the setting information reception process was executed means that some kind of fraudulent act occurred during the late-night hours. It is also thought that Therefore, when it is determined that it is the late-night time zone by the processing of S724 (S724: Yes), in order to leave a record of that fact, the after-hours information is added to the after-hours data 263j at the current time indicated by the RTC 266. It is set (added and stored) together with the time (S725).

When it is determined that it is not the midnight time zone by the process of S724 (S724: No), and after the process of S725, it is then determined whether or not there is big win information in the buffer 262g during the big win (S726). If there is jackpot information in the jackpot buffer 262g (S726: Yes), the jackpot information is set (additionally stored) in the jackpot data 263g together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S727).

When it is determined that there is no jackpot information in the buffer 262g during the jackpot by the processing of S726 (S726: No), and after the processing of S727, the buffers 262a to 262f corresponding to the winning openings and the out switch 208f are set. The values obtained are added to the corresponding counters 263a to 263f of the first read/write memory 263 (S728).

Specifically, the value set in the first buffer 262a corresponding to the first starting hole 64a (that is, the number of balls winning the first starting hole 64a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the first counter 263a. As a result, the number of balls entering the first starting port 64a is accumulated in the first counter 263a. The value set in the start 2 buffer 262b corresponding to the second start port 64b (that is, the number of balls winning the second start port 64b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the start 2 counter 263b. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the second starting port 64b is accumulated in the first 2 counter 263b.

The value set in the general 1 buffer 262c corresponding to the first normal winning opening 63a (that is, the number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the general 1 counter 263c. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the first normal winning hole 63a is accumulated in the normal 1 counter 263c. The value set in the normal 2 buffer 262d corresponding to the second normal winning opening 63b (that is, the number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b for 0.5 seconds) is added to the normal 2 counter 263d. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the second normal winning hole 63b is accumulated in the normal 2 counter 263d. The value set in the big winning hole buffer 262e corresponding to the big winning hole 65a (that is, the number of balls winning the big winning hole 65a for 0.5 seconds) is added to the big winning hole counter 263e. As a result, the number of balls that have entered the big winning hole 65a is accumulated in the big winning hole counter 263e.

The counters 263a to 264f and the data 263g to 264j of the first read/write memory 263 store the initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the role ratio management chip 207 and the role ratio. It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, which is executed when the timing for calculation comes. As a result, in the first read/write memory 263, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is accumulated and temporarily stored again until the next timing for calculating the character product ratio. .

Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the description of the setting information winning process will be continued. After the process of S728, the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is referred to (S729). Then, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the "number of shots" (S729: "number of shots"), the value of the out counter 263f (that is, the game It is determined whether or not the number of balls shot into the area) is greater than or equal to the "predetermined number of balls" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f (S730). When the value of the out-counter 263f is equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached, and the role ratio calculation process is executed (S733). , S734. Details of the role product ratio calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 21 . On the other hand, if the value of the out-counter 263f is not equal to or greater than the "predetermined number of balls" (S730: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the character ratio by the number of shot balls, it is possible to calculate the character ratio and the continuous character ratio when a predetermined ball is always shot. Therefore, since it is possible to calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio at the stage where many balls enter various winning slots and the prize balls are played, the averaged role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated. can. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate fluctuations in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in a short period of time in a normal game, so that the inspection device 300 can more easily analyze cheating.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the character product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "time" (S729: "time"), the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is , whether or not the "predetermined time" (set value) included in the trigger information data 202f has been reached (S731). Here, being reached includes not only the case where the current time indicated by the RTC 266 matches the "predetermined time" but also the case where the "predetermined time" has passed for the first time.

If it is determined by the process of S731 that the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has reached the "predetermined time" (S731: Yes), it is determined that it is time to calculate the character ratio. Then, the role product ratio calculation process is executed (S733), and the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the current time indicated by the RTC 266 has not reached the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio according to the current time, the role ratio is reliably calculated by the arrival of the predetermined time even under the condition that the pachinko machine 10 does not play many games. And the continuous accessory ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the reliably calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

In the process of S729, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is "game time" (S729: "game time"), the player at the pachinko machine 10 It is determined whether or not the cumulative time (game time) during which the game has been played has reached or exceeded the "predetermined time" included in the trigger information data 202f (S732).

Here, the game time can be calculated, for example, by the following method. That is, a game time counter is provided in the first read/write memory 263 . The game time counter, like other counters and data stored in the first read/write memory 263, undergoes an initial setting process (see FIG. 18) executed when power is supplied to the character product ratio management chip 207, It is initialized to 0 in S744 (see FIG. 21), which will be described later, when the timing for calculating the character ratio has come. Then, in the setting information receiving process, the value of the out buffer 262f is checked, and when a value of 1 or more is set, the ball guided to the ball discharge path is detected, that is, the ball is in the game area. Since it means that it has been fired, the game time counter is incremented by one. The setting information reception counter is activated by an interrupt signal transmitted from the MPU 201 at intervals of 0.5 seconds. Therefore, the game time can be calculated by adding 0.5 seconds to the value of the game time counter.

When it is determined that the game time has reached the "predetermined time" or more by the process of S732 (S732: Yes), it is determined that the timing for calculating the role ratio is reached, and the role ratio calculation process is executed. (S733), the process proceeds to S734. On the other hand, if the game time is less than the "predetermined time" (S731: No), the process proceeds directly to S734.

The accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio are originally calculated by performing a trial shooting test of game balls for 10 hours. By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the role ratio according to the game time, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio that are close to the original definition can be calculated by the role ratio management chip. Analysis can be performed using the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio that are close to the original definition.

In the process of S734, the buffer 262 is initialized to all 0 (S734). As a result, even if there are buffers that are not set for the buffers 262a to 262i in the next setting of winning information, out information and game information from the MPU 201, it is possible to prevent meaningless data from remaining in the buffers. It is possible to prevent the meaningless data from being stored in the first read/write memory 263 . After the process of S734, the setting information reception process is terminated.

Next, the role product ratio calculation processing (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing this role product ratio calculation process. The character ratio calculation process is a process of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the information stored in the first reading memory 263 and recording it in the second reading memory 264. The timing of calculating the character ratio ( trigger) (see FIG. 20), and also when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18).

In the role product ratio calculation process, first, the role product ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first reading memory 263, and the current time indicated by the RTC 266 is added to the role product ratio data 264a. (S740). Next, the continuous role product ratio is calculated from the values of the counters 263a to 263f stored in the first read/write memory 263, and is added to the continuous role product ratio data 264b and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S741). ).

The role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated as follows. That is, the number of balls that have won the first starting hole 64a indicated by the first counter 263a stored in the first reading memory 263, and the number of balls that have won the second starting hole 64b indicated by the first counter 263b. , the number of balls that have won the first normal winning opening 63a indicated by the normal 1 counter 263c, the number of balls that have won the second normal winning opening 63b indicated by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the number of winning balls indicated by the big winning opening counter 263e. The prize associated with each winning hole shown in the prize ball number table 202e (see FIG. 9) set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a By multiplying the number of balls, the number of balls paid out for each winning hole is calculated as a result of winning the winning hole. Then, by summing these, the total number of balls paid out to the player is calculated.

The total number of balls paid out to the player is divided into the number of balls paid out with winning in the second starting hole 64b and the number of balls paid out with winning in the big winning hole 65a. By calculating the ratio of the number and the total, the role ratio is calculated. Further, the continuous accessory ratio is calculated by calculating the ratio of the number of balls paid out accompanying the winning to the big winning opening 65a to the total number of balls paid out to the player.

Originally, the role ratio and the continuous role ratio refer to the above ratios in the case where the test shooting test of the game ball is performed for 10 hours, but in this embodiment, the trigger information data set in the trigger setting area 265b For each timing (trigger) for calculating the role product ratio shown in 202f, the player receives a signal from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the second starting port 64b and the big winning port 65a to the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out is calculated as the role ratio. is recorded in the role product ratio data 264a together with the time at that time. Also, the total number of balls (prize balls) paid out to the player from the time the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The ratio of the number of balls (prize balls) paid out with winning to the mouth 65a is calculated as the continuous role ratio, and recorded in the continuous role ratio data 264b together with the time at that time.

In addition, even when the power is cut off, the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to pay out from the timing (trigger) of calculating the most recent role product ratio until the power is cut off. Based on the number of balls won (prize balls), the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded in the character ratio data 264a or the continuous character ratio data 264b together with the time at that time. . As a result, after the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated and recorded, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be obtained without omission even with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. A ratio can be calculated.

Next, the value of the out-counter 263f indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is added to the shot ball number data 264c and recorded together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 (S742). Furthermore, various jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information stored in the jackpot data 263g, opening data 263h, error data 263i, and overtime data 263j are associated with each piece of information. The time (the time when the information was stored) is arranged (sorted) in order from the oldest time information, and added to the game state data 264d and recorded (S743).

In the process of S743, for example, if the jackpot information is stored in the jackpot data 263g at intervals of less than one second, it means that the jackpot is continuously occurring as the game state, so the oldest time Only the jackpot information and its time are recorded in the game state data 264d. Similarly, for the door open information, error information, and overtime information, if each information is stored in each data 263h to j at intervals of less than 1 second, the oldest time information and the time is recorded in the game state data 264d. As a result, the storage capacity required for the game state data 264d can be reduced.

As described above, when the character ratio management chip 207 receives the winning information, the out information, and the information about the game state from the MPU 201, the first reading memory 263 accumulates and temporarily stores these information, Each time the timing (trigger) for calculating the character product ratio is reached, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263, and added to the second reading memory 264. Record. This makes it possible to manage the role product ratio and the like with a small storage capacity and to transmit information on the role product ratio and the like to the inspection device 300 .

In addition, the second reading memory 264 also stores the times when they were recorded in the second reading memory 264 with respect to the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. Further, in the second reading memory 264, not only the character ratio and the consecutive character ratio, but also information indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area is recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the time when the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. In addition, information on the game state (jackpot information, door opening information, error information, overtime information) is recorded together with the time when each information was stored in the first reading memory 263 and stored in the second reading memory. H.264. Therefore, as a result of analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio in the inspection device 300, if there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the changed character ratio or the continuous character ratio By analyzing the total number of balls shot into the game area and the game state around the time recorded in the second reading memory 264, the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio can be investigated.

Here, the information on the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the total number of balls shot into the game area that can be recorded in the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, and the number of shot balls data 264c are each stored in a predetermined number ( For example, 1024). In addition, the total number of hit information, door open information, error information, and overtime information that can be recorded in the game state data 264d is also limited to a predetermined number (eg, 16384). When a predetermined number of pieces of information have already been recorded in the role ratio data 264a, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, or the game state data 264d, the oldest information is deleted, and the newest information is replaced. is recorded.

Specifically, the continuous role ratio data 264b, the shot ball number data 264c, and the game state data 264d are each configured in a ring buffer, and a memory for managing the position where information is written on each ring buffer is prepared. By shifting the writing position by 1 each time information is written, it is possible to erase the oldest information and record the newest information there.

By setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each piece of data in this way, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264 . Also, when the number of information to be recorded in each data reaches the upper limit, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded, so that the inspection device 300 can be analyzed including the latest state of the pachinko machine 10. can be done.

After the processing of S743, the first read/write memory 263 is initialized to all 0 (S744). As a result, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored while accumulating until the next timing for calculating the role item ratio is reached by the first read/write memory 263. .

When the process of S744 ends, the role product ratio calculation process ends.

Next, inspection result output processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this inspection result output process. This inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, data in the second read/write memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 .

When the inspection result output process is executed, first, all the character product ratios recorded in the character product ratio data 264a and the character product ratios associated with each character product ratio are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The recorded time is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the character product ratio with the oldest recording time (S751).

Specifically, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is not satisfied in the role product ratio data 264a, the CPU 261 first writes the information of the role product ratio to the role product ratio data 264a. From the position where the information is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information on the character ratio at the latest time is recorded). They are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the role product ratio data 264a, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, The position where the information on the role product ratio at the oldest time is recorded) is shifted by 1 in order, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the role of the latest time) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the product ratio was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the information of the character product ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Next, all the continuous role product ratios recorded in the continuous role product ratio data 264b and the times when the continuous role product ratios were recorded in the second reading memory 264, which are associated with the respective continuous role product ratios, are recorded. , and output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest recorded time (S752).

Specifically, when the continuous role product ratio data 264b does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded, the CPU 261 first stores the continuous role product ratio information in the continuous role product ratio data 264b. is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the position where the latest continuous role ratio information is recorded). Information on the product ratio is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the continuous role product ratio data 264b, when the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (i.e. , the position where the information of the continuous role product ratio at the oldest time is recorded), the position where the information is written is shifted by 1 in order, and the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the latest time) The information recorded until the position where the information of the continuous role product ratio is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the information of the continuous role product ratio is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Next, the information on the number of balls (the number of shot balls) shot to all the game areas recorded in the shot ball number data 264c, and the information on the number of shot balls associated with the information on the number of shot balls are displayed as the second. 2. The time recorded in the reading memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the character product ratio with the oldest recording time (S753).

Specifically, when the number of shot balls data 264c does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded, the CPU 261 first writes information on the number of shot balls to the number of shot ball data 264c. The information on the number of shot balls recorded from the position where the information is written to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (that is, the position where the information on the number of shot balls at the latest time is recorded) They are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the shot ball number data 264c, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information (that is, The position where information on the number of balls fired at the oldest time is recorded) is shifted by 1 in order, and the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where the information is written (i.e., the latest time of firing) The information recorded up to the position where the information on the number of balls was recorded) is sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the information on the number of shot balls is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

Next, all the jackpot information, door open information, error information, and overtime information recorded in the game state data 264d, and the time when the information associated with each information was stored in the first reading memory 263 are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S754).

Specifically, if the game state data 264d does not satisfy the upper limit number (predetermined number) of information that can be recorded, the CPU 261 starts recording the information from the position where the information was first written in the game state data 264d. The information recorded up to the position indicated by the memory managing the writing position (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . On the other hand, in the game state data 264d, if the upper limit number (predetermined number) of recordable information is satisfied, the position next to the position indicated by the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the most The position indicated by the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the read position by 1 in order from the position where the information of the old time is recorded (that is, the position where the information of the latest time is recorded) ) are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As described above, in the game state data 264d, each piece of information about the game state is arranged (sorted) from the oldest time information and recorded in the game state data 264d. Therefore, the information about the game state is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

By the processing of S751 to S754, each piece of information is output in order from the oldest one, so the inspection device 300 analyzes each piece of information in the order in which it is output, so that the role item ratio, It is possible to easily analyze changes in the continuous role ratio, the number of shot balls, and the game state.

After the process of S754, the test result output process is terminated.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the main control unit 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the role ratio management chip 207 calculates the role ratio and the continuous role ratio. to record. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a , the information on the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 .

Here, some of the fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big prize by increasing the number of prizes to be won. Also, there are those who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize winning opening 65a by some method or guiding the balls to the big winning prize opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the inspection device 300 analyzes the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, so that if a fraudulent act has been performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. can be found.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 , information on the number of balls shot into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300 . Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are high, the cause is investigated based on the information on the number of balls shot into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110 and housed in one board box 100 together with the MPU 201, ROM 202 and the like. As a result, it is difficult for a fraudulent person to alter the winning information or the like input to the role product ratio management chip 207 . Therefore, high reliability can be maintained for the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated and output by the character product ratio management chip 207 .

In addition, since the MPU 201 is not made to manage the role ratio and the like, but the dedicated role ratio management chip 207 for managing the role ratio and the like is provided, an increase in the processing load on the MPU 201 can be suppressed, and the game can be played as the main part of the game. The MPU 201 can be devoted to such control.

Also, the character ratio management chip 207 is provided with a prize ball number data setting area 265a, and when power is supplied, the prize ball number table 202e stored in the ROM 202 is set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. Then, the character ratio management chip 207 calculates the character ratio and the continuous character ratio using the prize ball number table 202e set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a. As a result, there is no need to store information on the number of prize balls that differs for each model in the ROM of the role product ratio management chip 207 at the manufacturing stage. Therefore, the production of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be simplified. Also, if the pachinko machine models are different, the ROM 202 may be changed, and even if the pachinko machines of different models use the same role product ratio management chip 207, the role product ratio can be calculated accurately.

Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 23 to 27. FIG. The processing of the MPU 221 can be broadly classified into startup processing that is started upon power-on and main processing that is executed after the startup processing.

First, referring to FIG. 23, start-up processing executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, an initial setting process is executed upon power-on (S801). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is ON, the power-off processing in S915 (see FIG. 24) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (instantaneous power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure"). ) is started during execution (S802). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 24, when the audio lamp control device 113 receives a power-off command from the main controller 110 (see S912 in FIG. 24), it executes power-off processing in S915. Before the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing flag is turned on, and after the power-off processing is completed, the power-off processing flag is turned off. Therefore, whether or not the power-off processing of S915 is being executed can be determined by the state of the power-off processing flag.

If the power-off processing flag is off (S802: No), the startup process this time was started after the power was completely shut off, or after a momentary power failure occurred and the power was shut off in S915. Either it was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started when only the MPU 221 of the sound lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise (without receiving a power off command from the main controller 110). be. Therefore, in these cases, it is checked whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803).

Destruction of data in the RAM 223 is confirmed as follows. That is, in a specific area of the RAM 223, data as a keyword "55AAh" is written by the process of S806. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area is checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data destruction in the RAM 223. Conversely, if it is not "55AAh", it can be confirmed that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed. If data destruction of RAM223 is confirmed (S803: Yes), it will transfer to S804 and will start initialization of RAM223. On the other hand, if destruction of data in the RAM 223 is not confirmed (S803: No), the process proceeds to S808.

It should be noted that if the startup process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power cut). ), it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S803: Yes), and the process proceeds to S804. On the other hand, whether the current start-up processing was started after a momentary power failure occurred and after the execution of the power-off processing in S915 was completed, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 was reset due to noise or the like. If the operation is started with the above, the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, so it is determined that the data in the RAM 223 is normal (S803: No), and the process proceeds to S808.

If the power-off processing flag is on (S802: Yes), the startup process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and the audio lamp control device 113 It is started by resetting the MPU 221 of . In such a case, the memory state of the RAM 223 is not necessarily correct because the power-off process is in progress. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process proceeds to S804 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the processing of S804, the storage area of the entire range of RAM 223 is checked (S804). As a checking method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, read for each byte to confirm whether it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined that the data is normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte is performed in the order of "0FFh", "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". All storage areas of the RAM 223 are cleared to 0 by this read/write check of the RAM 223 .

If the read/write check is normal for all storage areas of the RAM 223 (S805: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set RAM destruction check data (S806). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data destruction. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read/write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S805: No), the abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified (S807), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. Abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the display lamp 34 . In addition, it is possible to output a sound by the sound output device 226 to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or to transmit an error command to the display control device 114 and display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. can be

In the processing of S808, it is determined whether or not the power-off flag is turned on (S808). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S915 is executed (see S914 in FIG. 24). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off processing of S915 is executed, the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the startup processing this time is instantaneous. This is the case where the process is started after the power failure has occurred and the execution of the power-off process in S915 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S808: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared (S809) in order to initialize each process of the sound lamp control device 113, and after setting the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), an interrupt Permission is set (S811), and the process proceeds to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main controller 110 .

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S808 is reached with the power-off flag turned off is that the current start-up process was started after the power supply was completely shut off, for example. This is the case where the processing has been reached, or only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 has been reset due to noise or the like (without receiving a power-off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S808: No), skipping S809, which is processing for clearing the work area of the RAM 223, proceeds to S810, sets the initial value of the RAM 223 (S810), and sets interrupt permission. Then (S811), the process proceeds to the main process.

The reason why the clearing process of S809 is skipped is that when the process of S808 is reached from S804 via the process of S806, all storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the process of S804, When only the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and start-up processing is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the audio lamp control device 113 This is because the control of can be continued.

Next, with reference to FIG. 22, main processing executed by the MPU 221 in the audio ramp control device 113 after startup processing of the audio ramp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was executed last time (S901), and if 1 millisecond or more has not passed (S901: No) , S902 to S908 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S910. In the processing of S901, it is determined whether or not 1 millisecond has passed because S902 to S908 do not need to be processed in a short cycle (within 1 millisecond), whereas the variable display processing of S910 is performed. This is because the command determination processing in step S911 is preferably performed in a short cycle. By executing the process of S911 in a short period, it is possible to prevent the command transmitted from the main controller 110 from being missed, and by executing the process of S910 in a short period, the command received by the command determination process can be prevented. Based on this, it is possible to make settings related to variable production without delay.

In the process of S901, when it is determined that 1 millisecond or more has passed since the process of S901 was last executed (S901: Yes), the process proceeds to S902. If the process of S901 is executed for the first time after the start-up process shown in FIG. 21, the process proceeds directly to S902.

In the processing of S902, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processing of S903 to S911 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S902). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the display lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited in the process of S906 described later (S903), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S904). In the power-on notification process, when the power is turned on, it is notified that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds). will be Also, a command may be sent to the display control device 114 to notify that power is supplied on the screen of the third pattern display device 81 . Note that if the power is not turned on, the process proceeds to S905 without notifying by the power-on notification process.

Next, frame button input monitoring/effect processing is executed (S905). In this frame button input monitoring and effect processing, input as to whether or not the frame button 22 operated by the player has been pressed is monitored in order to enhance the effect of the effect, and the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. This is the process of setting to perform production. In this process, when the operation of the frame button 22 by the player is detected, a frame button operation command is set to notify the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated.

In addition, when the frame button 22 is pressed during the period when the variable effect is not executed or during the high-speed fluctuation period, the process of changing the stage is performed, and instead of the frame button operation command, the back image of the display control device 114 is changed. Set command. By including information about the type of the back image corresponding to the changed stage in the back image change command, the display control device 114 changes the back image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 to an image corresponding to the stage. A process to change to is performed. In addition, when a notice character appears at the start of the variable display, by pressing the frame button 22, the expected value of the big win due to this change is displayed, and by pressing the frame button 22 during the ready-to-win performance, the expectation for the big win is displayed. Alternatively, the frame button 22 may be used as a determination button for selecting one ready-to-win effect out of a plurality of ready-to-win effects. Note that if the frame button 22 is not arranged, the process of S905 is omitted.

When the frame button input monitoring/effect processing (S905) ends, the lamp editing processing is executed (S906), and then the sound editing/output processing is executed (S907). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81 . In the sound editing/output process, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third pattern display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the processing of S907, liquid crystal effect execution management processing is executed (S908). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, based on the variation pattern command transmitted from the main controller 110, the time required for the variation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 and the time synchronized therewith are set. The lamp editing process of S906 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process, and the sound editing/output process of S907 is also synchronized with the time required for the variable display performed by the third symbol display device 81. executed in time. After the process of S908, the process proceeds to S910.

In the process of S910, in order to display the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, a variation pattern command for display is generated based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110, and the command is sent to the display control device 114. Executes variable display processing, which is processing set for transmission. The details of this variable display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Then, after the variable display process, a command determination process for performing a process according to the command received from the main controller 110 is performed (S911). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the process of S911 is completed, it is determined whether or not the work RAM 233 stores power failure occurrence information (S912). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from main controller 110 . If power-off occurrence information is stored in the processing of S912 (S912: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing flag are turned on (S914), and the power-off processing is executed (S915). After the power-off processing is executed, the power-off processing in progress flag is turned off (S916), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power-off processing, interrupt processing is prohibited, each output port is turned off, and outputs from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are turned off. In addition, the memory of information on occurrence of power failure is also erased.

On the other hand, if the power-off occurrence information is not stored in the process of S912 (S912: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S913), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S913: No), the process returns to S901, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S913: Yes), the process is looped infinitely to stop execution of subsequent processes.

Here, since the main processing is not executed when it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change after that. Therefore, since the player can know that an abnormality has occurred, the player can call the hall clerk or the like and ask them to repair the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the RAM destruction may be notified by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 .

Next, the command determination process (S911) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a flow chart showing this command determination process (S911). This command determination process (S911) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp controller 113, and as described above, determines the command received from the main controller 110. .

In the command determination process, first, from the command storage area provided in the RAM 223, among the unprocessed commands, the first command received from the main controller 110 is read and analyzed, and a variation pattern command is received from the main controller 110. (S1001). Then, when it is determined that the variation pattern command is received (S1001: Yes), the variation pattern is extracted from the variation pattern command (S1002), and the process returns to the main process. The variation pattern extracted here is stored in the RAM 223, and in the variation display process (see FIG. 26) described later, a variation pattern command for display is issued to the display control device 114 to notify the start of the variation effect and the variation pattern. Used when setting.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the variation pattern command has not been received (S1001: No), then it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1003). When it is determined that the stop type command has been received (S1003: Yes), the stop type is extracted from the stop type command (S1004), the fluctuation start flag is set to ON (S1005), and the process returns to the main process. .

It should be noted that the stop type command indicates the stop type of the variable effect in which the variation pattern is indicated by the variation pattern command after the main controller 110 transmits the variation pattern command when starting the variable effect. This command is always sent from 110 . By setting the fluctuation start flag to ON by the process of S1005, in the fluctuation display process executed later, based on the fluctuation pattern extracted from the previously received fluctuation pattern command and the stop type extracted from the stop type command , generate a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of these variation patterns and stop types, and execute processing for transmitting them to the display control device 114 .

As a result of the process of S1003, if it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S1003: No), then it is determined whether or not the pending ball number command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1006). Then, when it is determined that the pending ball number command has been received (S1006: Yes), the value of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 included in the pending ball number command (that is, the suspended variable effect is suspended) number of balls) is extracted and stored in the RAM 223 of the audio lamp controller 113 (S1007).

Here, the reserved ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 when the ball wins (start winning) in either the first starting hole 64a or the second starting hole 64b. Each time, the value of the number of pending balls stored in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113 can be matched with the value of the number of pending balls counter 203a of the main controller 110 by the processing of S1007. Therefore, even if the value of the number of pending balls of the voice lamp control device 113 deviates from the value of the number of pending balls counter 203a of the main control unit 110 due to the influence of noise, etc., the pending ball of the voice ramp control device 113 is The value of the number counter 223 a can be modified to match the value of the reserved ball number counter 203 a of the main controller 110 .

Next, the values of the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop pattern selection counter C3, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 included in the received pending ball number command are extracted and stored in the RAM 223 (S1008).

The values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 included in the reserved ball number command are obtained from the counter buffer in the main controller 110 when the ball wins (starts winning) the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b. It is what was done. The sound ramp control device 113 can perform prefetch processing by referring to the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 stored in the RAM 223 . That is, when the suspended variable performance is executed, the result of the variable performance (whether it will be a big hit, what the variable time will be, etc.) is determined before the variable performance is executed, Execution of various effects can be determined.

Next, a display pending ball number command for notifying the display controller 114 of the value of the pending ball number stored in the RAM 223 by the processing of S1007 is set (S1009), and the process returns to the main process. The display pending ball number command set here is temporarily stored in a command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by command output processing (S902) of the main processing. As a result, the display control device 114 executes a process to display the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the reserved ball number on the third symbol display device 81 .

As a result of the process of S1006, if it is determined that the command for the number of reserved balls has not been received (S1006: No), then it is determined whether or not a confirmation command has been received from the main controller 110 (S1010). The confirmation command is a command for confirming and displaying the variable effect being executed on the third symbol display device 81 . If it is determined that the confirmation command has been received (S1010: Yes), a display confirmation command for notifying the reception of the confirmation command is set to the display control device 114 (S1011), and the process returns to the main process. . The display confirmation command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving the confirmation command for display, the variable effect being executed by the third pattern display device 81 is stopped, and the stop type corresponding to the stop type command for display is previously indicated. By displaying the stop pattern, it is determined and displayed.

As a result of the process of S1010, if it is determined that the definite command has not been received (S1010: No), it is determined whether or not another command has been received, and the process corresponding to the received command is executed. (S1012), it shifts to the main process. For example, if the other command is a command used in the sound lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is a command used in the display control device 114, the command is displayed and controlled. A command is set to be sent to the device 114 . The demonstration command received from the main controller 110 is set as a display demonstration command by the processing of S1013, and after being temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, the command output processing of the main processing (S902) is performed. ) to the display control device 114 .

Next, the variable display process (S910) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 26 is a flow chart showing this variable display process (S910).

This variable display process (S910) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 24) executed by the MPU 221 in the sound lamp control device 113, and as described above, the third symbol display device 81 displays the variable effect. In order to do so, a display variation pattern command and a display stop type command are generated based on the variation pattern command and the stop type command received from the main controller 110, and these commands are set to be transmitted to the display control device 114. It is a process to

In the variable display process, first, it is determined whether or not the variable start flag provided in the RAM 223 is ON (S1101). If it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is not on (that is, is off) (S1101: No), it means that the stop type command has not been received from the main controller 110, so this fluctuation display process is executed. End and return to main processing.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag is on (S1101: Yes), the fluctuation start flag is turned off (S1102), and the fluctuation pattern command extracted from the fluctuation pattern command in the process of S1002 of the command determination process (see FIG. 25) A variation pattern in the variation effect is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1103). The variation pattern extracted here is the variation time. In the audio ramp control device 113, a plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns are prepared for each fluctuation time, and one detailed fluctuation is selected from the plurality of detailed fluctuation patterns prepared for the extracted fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). A pattern is determined by lottery, and a display variation pattern command for notifying the determined detailed variation pattern to the display control device 114 is set (S1104).

The display variation pattern command set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. In the display control device 114, by receiving this display variation pattern command, the third pattern display device 81 performs the variation display of the third pattern in the detailed variation pattern indicated by this display variation pattern command. , start the display control of the variable effect.

Next, the stop type in the variable effect extracted from the stop type command in the process of S1004 of the command determination process (see FIG. 23) is acquired from the RAM 223 (S1105). Then, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the extracted stop type is set (S1104). The stop type command for display set here is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. The display control device 114 sets a stop pattern corresponding to the stop type indicated by the display stop type command when the variable effect executed by the display change pattern command set by the processing of S1105 is to be displayed. do.

Next, the number of held balls in the RAM 223 is decremented by 1 as the held balls are consumed (that is, the variable display corresponding to the held balls is set) according to the setting of the display variation pattern command. (S1107), a display pending ball count command for notifying the display controller 114 of the updated pending ball count value is set (S1108). Then, it returns to the main processing.

The display reserved ball number command set by the processing of S1108 is temporarily stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is transmitted to the display control device 114 by the command output processing (S902) of the main processing. . The display control device 114 executes a process of causing the third symbol display device 81 to display the number of reserved ball symbols corresponding to the number of reserved balls indicated by the command for the number of reserved balls for display. Therefore, the player can recognize the number of reserved balls by counting the number of reserved ball number symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 .

Next, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. The processing of the MPU 231 can be broadly classified into main processing that is repeatedly executed after power is turned on, command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, and processing for one frame from the image controller 236. There is V interrupt processing that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when image drawing processing is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes main processing, and executes command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing in accordance with reception of a command and detection of a V interrupt signal. If command reception and V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, command reception processing is preferentially executed. As a result, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the sound lamp control device 113 and execute the V interrupt process.

First, the main processing executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(a). FIG. 27(a) is a flow chart showing this main process. The main process is started when the power is turned on, and continues to be executed until the power is turned off.

When the power is turned on and the main processing is executed by the MPU 231, first, the initialization processing is executed (S1401). Specifically, first, processing for initializing the MPU 231 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 233 and the video RAM 234 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 235 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the video RAM 234 . Furthermore, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 234, and stored in an area in the video RAM 234 different from the area in the video RAM 234 in which the decompressed character information is stored. Write the extracted character information in the prepared frame buffer area. In addition, other necessary settings for initialization are performed.

When the initial setting process is completed, the interrupt permission is set (S1402), and thereafter the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. Accordingly, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S1402, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 27(b). FIG. 27(b) is a flow chart showing the command interrupt processing. As described above, when a command is received from the audio lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes command interrupt processing.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S1501), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by command determination processing of V interrupt processing, which will be described later, and processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 27(c), V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 27(c) is a flow chart showing the V interrupt processing. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are executed, and after specifying the image to be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the image is drawn. and instructs the image controller 236 to display.

As described above, this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 236 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the image controller 236 and sent to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing processing for one frame is completed. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is issued to the image controller 236 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 236 does not receive an instruction to draw the next image before the image drawing processing or display processing is completed. It is possible to prevent an image from being developed in accordance with a new drawing instruction in a frame buffer storing image information being displayed.

In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 27(c), first, a command determination process (S1602) is executed. In this command determination process (S1602), the contents of the command from the sound lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area by the command interrupt process are analyzed, and the process corresponding to the command is executed. For example, when the display variation pattern command is stored, the image is drawn so that the variation effect is executed on the third symbol display device 81 according to the detailed variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern table command. and start controlling the display.

When the stop type command for display is stored, during high speed fluctuation ( While the variable display of the third pattern is performed so that the content of the third pattern cannot be recognized by the player), the third pattern being displayed is replaced. When the confirmation command for display is stored, image drawing and display are controlled so that the confirmation display is performed in the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 .

Now, in this command determination process (S1602), all the commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because command determination processing is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when V interrupt processing is executed, and there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during those 20 milliseconds. be. In particular, when main controller 110 decides to start a variable effect, there is a high possibility that a display variable pattern command, a stop type command, and the like are stored in the command buffer area at the same time. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly comprehend the mode of the variable performance and other effects selected by the main controller 110 and the sound lamp control device 113, and to obtain a performance image corresponding to the mode. is displayed on the third pattern display device 81, the drawing of the image can be controlled.

After the command determination process (S1602) ends, display setting process (S1603) is executed. In the display setting process (S1603), based on the type of screen to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 determined by the command determination process (S1602), etc., one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is selected. specifically identify the content of the image.

After the display setting process (S1603) is executed, task processing is executed (S1064). In this task processing, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the third display device 281 specified by the display setting processing (S1603), characters (sprites, display objects) forming the image are selected. Along with specifying the type, various parameters required for drawing such as the display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite).

Then, drawing processing is executed (S1504). In this drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined in the task process (S1503), are transmitted to the image controller 236. FIG. As a result, the image controller 236 executes image drawing processing in accordance with these pieces of information, and displays an image drawn in accordance with the information received 1V before on the third pattern display device 81 together with the drive signal. Control is performed to transmit the image data to the third pattern display device 81 .

After that, after executing other necessary processing, for example, processing for updating various counters provided in the display control device 114 (S1505), the V interrupt processing ends.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, the main control unit 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, the winning information is obtained from the MPU 201, and the role ratio management chip 207 Calculate and record the product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a , the information on the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 .

Here, some of the fraudsters illegally open the electric accessory of the second starting port 64b by some method, or guide the ball to the second starting port 64b. There are those who try to increase the chances of winning a big prize by increasing the number of prizes to be won. Also, there are those who try to obtain many prize balls by illegally opening the opening/closing plate of the big prize winning opening 65a by some method or guiding the balls to the big winning prize opening 65a. If there is such a fraudulent act, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio will increase.

On the other hand, since the pachinko machine 10 is configured as described above, the inspection device 300 analyzes the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, so that if a fraudulent act has been performed, the fraudulent act can be detected. can be found.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 , information on the number of balls shot into the game area and information on the game state are also recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 and output to the inspection device 300 . Therefore, if the analysis by the inspection device 300 shows that the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are high, the cause is investigated based on the information on the number of balls shot into the game area and the information on the game state. be able to.

<Second embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a second embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 30. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the role product ratio, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated based on the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263. is calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the trigger (timing) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b occurs, each recorded in the first reading memory 263 The values of the counters 263a to 263e are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 as they are, and the values of the counters 263a to 263e recorded in the second read/write memory 264 are output to the inspection apparatus 300 as they are.

The pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment are assigned the same reference numerals as those of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 28 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main controller 110 in the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment. The electrical configuration of the main controller 110 of the second embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment in that the second read/write memory 264 of the character material ratio management chip 207 stores the character material ratio data 264a of the first embodiment and The point is that winning counter data 264e is recorded in place of the continuous role product ratio data 264b.

Also, in the second embodiment, the meaning of the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is different from that in the first embodiment. That is, in the second embodiment, the trigger information data 202f indicates the trigger (timing) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 in the second read/write memory 264. FIG. The meaning of the trigger information data 202f is different from that of the first embodiment, and the content itself is the same as that of the first embodiment.

That is, in the trigger information data 202f, the values of the respective counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 as triggers (timings) for "number of shots", "time", " Information indicating either "game time" is defined.

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined number of balls" which is the timing for calculating the character ratio when the information indicating the "number of shots" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "number of shots" and information indicating 500 balls as the "predetermined number of balls", the first reading is performed each time the number of shot balls reaches 500. The values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the memory 263 are recorded in the second read/write memory 264. FIG.

When information indicating "time" is defined, the trigger information data 202f also defines information indicating "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "time" and information indicating 12:00, 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00 as "predetermined times", the time is 12:00. , 17:00, 19:00, and 22:00, the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 are recorded in the second read/write memory 264.

The trigger information data 202f defines information indicating the "predetermined time" which is the timing for calculating the role product ratio, when the information indicating the "game time" is defined. For example, if the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "game time" and information indicating two hours as the "predetermined time", the first read/write memory 263 , are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 .

Winning counter data 264e is generated at the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 at each timing (trigger) when the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first reading memory 263 are recorded in the second reading memory 264. The total number of balls that won the first starting port 64a counted, the total number of balls that won the second starting port 64b counted by the first 2 counter 263b, and the first normal counted by the general 1 counter 263c The total number of balls winning the winning opening 63a, the total number of balls winning the second ordinary winning opening 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d, and the winning number of the big winning opening 65a counted by the big winning opening counter 263e. It is data recorded together with the total number of balls played and the time at the recording timing.

Counters 263a to 263e corresponding to each winning opening indicate the total number of balls won in each winning opening during the period from when the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. is indicated by When it is time to record the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in the first read/write memory 263 in the second read/write memory 264, the values of the counters 263a to 263e at that time are indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. is recorded in the winning counter data 264e together with the time of .

The winning counter data 264e is associated with one time, and the total number of balls winning the first starting hole 64a, the total number of balls winning the second starting hole 64b, and the winning balls winning the first normal winning hole 63a at that time. The total number of balls, the total number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b, and the total number of balls winning the big winning opening 65a may be recorded.

Also, in the winning counter data 264e, there is an area for recording the total number of winning balls in the first starting opening 64a, an area for storing the total number of winning balls in the second starting opening 64b, and a winning amount in the first normal winning opening 63a. An area for recording the total number of balls won, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won the second normal prize opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have won the big prize opening 65a are provided, and a first reading memory is provided. When the timing (trigger) for recording the values of the counters 263a to 263e stored in 263 in the second reading memory 264 comes, the total number of balls that have won in the corresponding winning opening for each area is calculated. The winning counter data 264e may be configured to be recorded together with the time in the timing.

Here, the information on the total number of balls that have entered each winning hole that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e is limited to a predetermined number (for example, 16384). For example, in association with one time, the total number of balls winning the first starting opening 64a at that time, the total number of balls winning the second starting opening 64b, the total number of balls winning the first normal winning opening 63a, When the winning counter data 264e is configured to record the total number of balls winning the second normal winning opening 63b and the total number of winning balls winning the big winning opening 65a, a predetermined number of pieces of information are already recorded in the winning counter data 264e. If so, the oldest information will be deleted and the newest information will be recorded there. For example, the winning counter data 264e may be configured like a ring buffer, a memory may be separately prepared for managing the position where information is written on the ring buffer, and the position where information is written may be shifted by 1 each time information is written. , the process of erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information there can be realized. Thus, by setting an upper limit on the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in the winning counter data 264e, it is possible to suppress an increase in the storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264. FIG. Also, when the number of information to be recorded in the winning counter data 264e reaches the upper limit, by erasing the oldest information and recording the latest information, the latest information including the state of the pachinko machine 10 can be stored in the inspection device 300. Analysis can be performed.

An area for recording the total number of balls that have won the first starting hole 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won the second starting hole 64b, and the total number of balls that have won the first normal winning hole 63a are recorded. , an area for storing the total number of balls that have won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have won in the big winning opening 65a. Alternatively, a ring buffer may be configured for each area, an upper limit may be set for the number of pieces of information that can be recorded in each area, and control may be performed as described above. As a result, when the number of information to be recorded reaches the upper limit in each area, the oldest information is erased and the latest information is recorded. Analysis can be performed.

When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt occurs to the CPU 261, and the CPU 261 reads the winning counter data 264e, the shot ball number data 264c, and the game state data recorded in the second reading memory 264. 264d are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 in order. When transmitting each data 264e, 264c, 264d to the inspection apparatus 300, the CPU 261 transmits each information recorded in each data 264e, 264c, 264d (including recorded time information associated with each information). , are read out in the order in which they were recorded, and are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 .

Specifically, when the data to be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 does not satisfy the upper limit number of recordable information (predetermined number), the CPU 261 first adds information to the data. The information recorded from the position where is written to the position indicated in the memory that manages the position where information is written (that is, the position where the latest time information is recorded) is sequentially read and inspected. Send to device 300 . On the other hand, if the data for transmitting information to the inspection apparatus 300 satisfies the upper limit number of information that can be recorded (predetermined number above), the memory that manages the position to write the information indicates. The position indicated in the memory that manages the position to write the information by shifting the reading position by 1 in order from the position next to the position (i.e., the position where the oldest time information is recorded) (i.e., the position where the information is written) , the position where the latest time information is recorded) are sequentially read out and transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . As a result, the information is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the information of the oldest time.

An area for recording the total number of balls that have won the first starting hole 64a, an area for storing the total number of balls that have won the second starting hole 64b, and the total number of balls that have won the first normal winning hole 63a are recorded. , an area for storing the total number of balls that have won in the second normal winning opening 63b, and an area for recording the total number of balls that have won in the big winning opening 65a. By reading the information for each area as described above, the total number of balls that have won the winning opening is output to the inspection device 300 in order from the oldest time information for each winning opening. Become.

Next, referring to FIG. 29, the winning information saving process (S718, S733) executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 29 is a flow chart showing this winning information saving process. In the first embodiment, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 when the timing (trigger) for calculating the character ratio has come (see FIG. 20) and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18) Although the character ratio calculation process of calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio from the second read/write memory 264 is executed (see FIG. 21), in the second embodiment, it is stored in the first read/write memory 263 When the timing (trigger) for recording each information obtained in the second read/write memory 264 has come (see FIG. 20), and when the power is turned off (see FIG. 18), instead of the character ratio calculation process, the winning Execute information saving processing. This winning information saving process is a process of recording each piece of information stored in the first reading memory 263 in the second reading memory 264 .

In the winning information storage process, first, the values of the counters 263a to 263e corresponding to the winning openings stored in the first reading memory 263 are combined with the current time indicated by the RTC 266, and stored in the second reading memory 264. It is recorded in addition to the winning counter data 264e (S761). As a result, for each combination timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b, the power is turned on until the timing is reached for the first time, or from the previous timing to the current timing. The total number of balls that won the first starting hole 64a counted by the starting 1 counter 263a of the first reading memory 263 and the second starting hole 64b counted by the starting 2 counter 263b The total number of winning balls, the total number of winning balls in the first normal winning opening 63a counted by the normal 1 counter 263c, and the total number of winning balls in the second normal winning opening 63b counted by the normal 2 counter 263d. The total number and the total number of balls winning the big winning opening 65a counted by the big winning opening counter 263e are additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264. FIG.

In addition, even when the power is turned off, the electric power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to perform the recording from the most recent timing (trigger) at which the second read/write memory 264 is recorded. Secondly, the total number of balls entering the first opening 64a counted by the first counter 263a of the first reading memory 263, and the total number of balls entering the second opening 64b counted by the first 2 counter 263b. , the total number of balls that entered the first normal prize opening 63a counted by the general 1 counter 263c, the total number of balls that entered the second normal prize opening 63b counted by the general 2 counter 263d, and the big prize. The total number of balls winning the big winning opening 65a counted by the opening counter 263e is additionally recorded in the second reading memory 264.例文帳に追加As a result, even with respect to the winning of each winning slot during the time when it is determined that the power supply is turned off from the timing (trigger) at which the most recent recording to the second reading memory 264 is performed, the winning of each winning slot is not omitted. The total number of balls played can be recorded in the second reading memory 264 for each winning hole.

In subsequent S742 to S744, the same processing as S742 to S744 of the role product ratio calculation processing of the first embodiment (see FIG. 21) is executed, and the winning information saving processing is terminated.

Next, inspection result output processing executed by the CPU 261 in the role product ratio management chip 207 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a flow chart showing this inspection result output process. Similar to the first embodiment, this inspection result output process is executed based on an interrupt signal input to the CPU 261 when the connector of the cable connecting the inspection device 300 is inserted into the inspection terminal 207a. In the inspection result output process, data in the second read/write memory 264 is output to the inspection device 300 .

When the inspection result output process in the second embodiment is executed, first, the number-of-balls table 202e set in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a is output to the inspection device 300 (S771). Next, all the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole recorded in the winning counter data 264e is recorded together with the time when the information was recorded in the second reading memory 264, which is associated with each information, and the recording time. are output to the inspection apparatus 300 in order from the oldest information (S772). In S753 and S754 executed following the process of S772, the same processes as S753 and S754 of the inspection result output process of the first embodiment are executed, and the inspection result output process is finished.

The inspection device 300 calculates the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio based on the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole output in S772 and the winning ball number table 202e output in S771. Then, the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio are analyzed. Then, when the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are high as a result of analysis by the inspection device 300, the cause is sought based on information regarding the number of balls shot into the game area and information regarding the game state. be able to. In addition, by the processing of S772, the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning hole is output in order from the oldest time, so the inspection device 300 analyzes each information in the output order , changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio over time can be easily analyzed.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment, every time the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f stored in the trigger setting area 265b occurs in the role product ratio management chip 207, The values of the counters 263a to 263e that count the total number of winning balls for each winning hole stored in the first reading memory 263 are sequentially recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264. When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the information indicating the total number of winning balls for each winning hole recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264 is stored in the winning ball number table 202e. are transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300.

In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the second embodiment obtains the total number of balls that have won the respective winning holes for all the winning holes, and records it in the second read/write memory 264 . Therefore, compared to the case where the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated as in the first embodiment are recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the required storage capacity of the second read/write memory 264 is increased. Since the total number of winning balls for each winning hole is transmitted to the device 300, as a result of the analysis by the inspection device 300, if there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, the inspection device 300 By referring to the total number of winning balls for each winning hole, the cause can be grasped more accurately.

In addition, the information indicating the total number of balls won in each winning hole transmitted to inspection device 300 is associated with the time when the information was recorded in second read/write memory 264, and transmitted to inspection device 300. be. Therefore, in the inspection device 300, as a result of analyzing the character ratio and the continuous character ratio based on the information indicating the total number of balls that have won in each winning hole, when there is a large change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio , specify the time when the total number of balls that won the winning openings used to calculate the changed role ratio or continuous role ratio was recorded in the second reading memory 264, and around that time, By analyzing the total number of balls that have entered each winning slot, the total number of balls that have been shot into the game area, or the game state, it is possible to find the cause of the change in the character ratio or the continuous character ratio.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment can produce the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Third Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a third embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 34. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments, the main controller 110 is provided with the role ratio management chip 207, and the role ratio management chip 207 manages the information on the ratio of the pachinko machine 10. explained. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the MPU 201 manages information on the role product ratio. Further, the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment is provided with a role ratio display device 400, and information regarding the role ratio is displayed on the role ratio display device 400. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first or second embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals as those of the first or second embodiment. and description thereof is omitted.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment differs from the pachinko machines 10 of the first and second embodiments in that the configuration of the main controller 110 is different. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first and second embodiments.

As described above, the main controller 110 of the third embodiment is not provided with the character product ratio management chip 207, and the MPU 201 manages information on the character product ratio. Specifically, the role product ratio management main process executed by the CPU 261 of the role product ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment is executed in the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201. . At this time, each counter and data stored in the first read/write memory 263 of the role product ratio management chip 207 are stored in the RAM 203 in the third embodiment.

Also, the second read/write memory 264 provided in the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main controller 110 in such a manner as to be connected to the input/output port 205 . Further, in the third embodiment, the RTC 266 provided in the character product ratio management chip 207 in the first and second embodiments is incorporated (not shown) in the MPU 201 .

Furthermore, an inspection terminal 207 a to which the inspection device 300 is connected is connected to the input/output port 205 . When the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207 a via a cable and a connector, the MPU 201 executes inspection result output processing, and information on the role item ratio and other information on the inspection are transmitted to the inspection device 300 .

Also, the role ratio display device 400 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 . The role ratio display device 400 is composed of, for example, a plurality of 7-segment displays, and is arranged on the main board that constitutes the main controller 110 . That is, when the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is viewed, the display screen of the role ratio display device 400 is assembled so that it can be seen. Note that the display screen of the role ratio display device 400 may be assembled so that it can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 .

The role ratio display device 400 displays the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, or information related to the role ratio and the continuous role ratio (eg, base value, etc.). The information on the role ratio and the continuous role ratio displayed on the role ratio display device 400 may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out for winning prizes for each prize opening, or information indicating all prize winnings. The total number of balls paid out by winning to the mouth, the total number of balls paid out by winning to the winning mouth (second starting mouth 64b and the big winning mouth 65a) where the role is activated, and the role are continuous It may be information indicating the total number of balls paid out as a result of winning into the winning opening (large winning opening 65a) operated by Information indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area (the number of shot balls) may be included in the information on the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio displayed on the role ratio display device 400 . The role ratio display device 400 is composed of a liquid crystal display with a predetermined number of pixels, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like, instead of the 7-segment display, and the character ratio, continuous character ratio, or , information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio may be displayed.

The MPU 201 has a built-in ROM 202 and a RAM 203, as well as a plurality of registers 200 that store various data in the hierarchy closest to an ALU (Arithmetic Logic Unit), which is the heart of the MPU 201. FIG. The plurality of registers 200 are used for general purposes in a variety of situations, such as temporarily holding values during computation and storing memory addresses required for processing. Various registers such as general-purpose registers and accumulator registers for accumulating and summing the results of operations performed by the ALU are included.

The plurality of registers 200 also includes a flag register 200a (also referred to as a status register or the like) configured with a flag indicating overflow due to ALU calculation, a flag indicating an interrupt state, and the like. The contents of flag register 200a can be updated each time one instruction is executed due to the nature of the register.

The RAM 203 is provided with an inner working area 203x and an outer working area 203y, each of which has a working area (inner working area 203x1, outer working area 203y1) and a stack area (inner stacking area 203x2, outer stacking area 203y2). ) are provided.

This is because, while the MPU 201 performs the main control of the game, when the MPU 201 is configured to manage the information on the role ratio, it is stored in the RAM 203 and used for the main control of the game such as various counters This is because it is necessary to prevent the data from being erroneously destroyed by various counters and data stored in the RAM 203 and used for managing information on the role product ratio. In other words, the various counters and data used for the main control of the game must be protected with high priority in order to protect the interests of the players. In addition, the data saved in the stack area of the RAM 203 when the main control of the game is performed can be used to continue the main control of the game without any problem after the processing related to the management of the information on the character ratio is performed on the way. must be protected to ensure that it is done.

Therefore, the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 stores various counters and data used for main control of the game in the inner work area 203x1 of the use area 203x, and also stores the stack area when performing the main control of the game. data to be saved in the stack area 203x2 in the used area 203x. On the other hand, the MPU 201 stores various counters and data used for managing information on the role product ratio in the outside work area 203y1 of the outside use area 203y. The data to be saved is saved in the outside stack area 203y2 of the outside use area 203y. As a result, the various counters and data used for the main control of the game, and the data saved in the stack area when performing the control can be reliably protected.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, it is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the third embodiment. The timer interrupt processing is periodic processing that is repeatedly executed, for example, every 4 milliseconds. The MPU 201 executes this timer interrupt processing to perform various types of processing that should be executed periodically.

In this timer interrupt process, first, a game process for main control of the game is executed (S2001). For example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 described in the first embodiment are executed in the process of S2001. That is, the main control of the game includes a lottery for big wins, setting of variable display, opening and closing control of the big winning opening (large opening) 65a at the time of big winning, winning lottery for the second symbol display device 83, and the like. . As described above, the MPU 201 uses the use area inner area 203x (inner work area 203x1 and inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S2001.

Next, role ratio processing for managing information on the role product ratio is executed (S2002). Details of the role ratio processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S2002, the timer interrupt processing ends.

As described above, in the timer interrupt process of the present embodiment, the game process is performed first, and then the role ratio process is performed, so that the main control of the game, which is the important control, is preferentially executed.

Next, details of the role ratio processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing the role ratio processing. In this role ratio processing, first, interrupts are prohibited (S2011), then the flag register 200a is saved in the inner stack area 203x2 by the PUSH instruction (S2012), and then the role ratio main processing is executed by the CALL instruction. Then, the subroutine program is read out and the role ratio main process is executed (S2013). Details of the role ratio main process will be described later with reference to FIG. It should be noted that the MPU 201 uses the used area 203x of the RAM 203 to execute the processing at the stage of the processing of S2011 and S2012.

When the process of S2013 ends and the subroutine program of the role ratio main process returns to this role ratio process, then the flag register 200a saved in the inner stack area 203x2 is restored by a POP instruction (S2015), Permission is granted (S2016), and then the role ratio process is terminated. It should be noted that the MPU 201 also executes the processing of S2015 and S2016 using the used area 203x of the RAM 203 .

In the process of S2012, the load (LD) instruction is used to save the flag register 200a to the inner work area 203x1, and in the process of S2014, the load (LD) instruction is used to save it to the inner work area 203x1. The flag register 200a may be restored.

Next, with reference to FIG. 34, details of the role ratio main process (S2013) executed by reading out the subroutine program in the role ratio process (S2002) (see FIG. 33) will be described. FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing the role ratio main process.

In the role ratio main process, first, a load (LD) command is used to set the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 to the start position of the outer stack area 203y2 (S2021). As a result, data is saved in the outer stack area 203y2 in subsequent processing. Further, the MPU 201 uses the outer work area 203y1 as the work area of the RAM 203 after this process. That is, the MPU 201 uses the outer work area 203y1 to store various counters and data, and uses the outer stack area 203y2 as necessary.

Next, among the registers 200, the registers 200 (except for the flag register 200a) used in the processing relating to the role product ratio are individually loaded into the areas determined for each of the outer work areas 203y1 by a load (LD) instruction. Save (S2022). Then, a process relating to the role product ratio is executed (S2023).

In the process of S2023, for example, in the first embodiment or the second embodiment, the same process as the role product ratio management main process (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 of the role product ratio management chip 207 is executed. , and also executes processing for controlling the display of the role ratio display device 400 . Also, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output processing executed by the CPU 261 of the role product ratio management chip 207 of the first embodiment or the second embodiment (see FIGS. 22 and 30). , may be executed in the process of S2023.

After the processing of S2023 is completed, the stack pointer (not shown) of the MPU 201 is set to a fixed address in the inner stack area 203x2 by a load (LD) instruction (S2024). As a result, in subsequent processing, data starts again in the inner stack area 203x2.

Here, the role ratio processing (S2002) in which the role ratio main processing (S2013) is executed is the game processing (S2001) that executes the main control of the game in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. done after it is finished. Further, the timer interrupt processing is read when the counter update processing (S702 to S703) is not executed in the infinite loop (loop of S701 to S703) of the main processing (FIG. 17) executed by the MPU 201. and executed.

Therefore, when the process of S2024 is executed, the inner stack area 203x2 contains the data saved when the main process transitions to the timer interrupt process and the flag register 200a saved by the process of S2012. (However, if the flag register 200a is saved to the inner work area 203x1 by a load instruction, it does not exist in the inner stack area 203x2), and the number of saved data is fixed. Therefore, in the processing of S2012, when the stack pointer is specified at the position stacked in the inner stack area 203x2, the position can be specified reliably only by setting the fixed address for the stack pointer. Before moving the stack pointer from the inner stack area 203x2 to the outer stack area 203y2 (before executing the process of S2012), there is no need to save the value of the stack pointer indicating the inside of the inner stack area 203x2. It is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the RAM 203 due to the saving.

Next, by the processing of S2022, the values of the registers 200 individually saved in the determined areas of the outer work area 203y1 are transferred from the determined areas of the corresponding outer work area 203y1 by the load (LD) instruction. By reading and setting in the corresponding register 200, it is restored (S2025). Then, after the process of S2025, the role ratio main process is ended, and the process returns to the role ratio process. Also, after the process of S2025 is completed, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 as the work area of the RAM 203. FIG. That is, the MPU 201 uses the inner work area 203x1 to store various counters and data, and uses the inner stack area 203x2 as necessary.

In this way, when the MPU 201 executes the process (S2023) related to the character product ratio, each process is executed using the area outside the use area 203y (the outside work area 203y1 and the outside stack area 203y2). At the stage of shifting to the process of S2023 using the outside area 203y, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the registers 200 used in the process relating to this character product ratio are individually saved in the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. do. Then, before the process of S2023 is completed and the MPU 201 returns to the process using the inside area 203x, the registers 200 saved in the outside work area 203y1 are returned to the corresponding registers 200 individually. After that, a game process for main control of the game is executed using the use area inner area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2).

Here, from the game processing for mainly controlling the game using the inside area 203x of the usage area, the processing related to the character ratio using the area 203y outside the usage area is performed, and then the game using the inside area 203x of the usage area is performed again. When returning to the game processing that performs the main control of the game, it is necessary to protect the interests of the player and that the main control of the game must be continued without problems. The processing must not be affected by processing related to character ratios. Therefore, the RAM 203 is divided into an area within the use area 203x used for the processing of main control of the game and an area outside the use area 203y used for the processing relating to the character ratio. However, the register 200 has a smaller capacity than the RAM 203, and there is also a register 200 whose purpose of use is specified. It is impossible or difficult to separate

Also, before and after performing the processing relating to the role ratio, in other words, the game processing that mainly controls the game using the inside area 203x of the usage area is shifted to the processing relating to the ratio of the role using the area outside the usage area 203y. The contents of the register 200 are made the same between the step of making a transition from the process relating to the character product ratio using the area outside the use area 203y to the game process for performing the main control of the game using the inside area 203x of the use area. Therefore, there is also a demand to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed between them.

On the other hand, before performing the processing related to the character product ratio using the area outside the use area 203y, the contents of all the registers 200 are collectively saved to the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH command, and the processing related to the character product ratio is performed. A method of collectively returning all the registers 200 from the outer stack area 203y2 using a POP instruction after the execution is also conceivable. However, in this case, in order to save the contents of all the registers 200, it is necessary to set the capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 large in advance. must be transformed.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the MPU 201 is provided with a Of the registers 200 obtained, the registers 200 used in the process relating to the role ratio are individually saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and after the process relating to the role ratio process is executed, the area outside the use area 203y is saved. When shifting (returning) from the process relating to the role product ratio to be used to the game process of performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area, the registers 200 evacuated to the outside work area 203y1 are individually returned. As a result, the stage of shifting from the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the usage area to the processing relating to the character ratio using the area 203y outside the usage area and the role using the area 203y outside the usage area Since the content of the register 200 can be the same at the stage of shifting from the process relating to the object ratio to the game process for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area, the game performing the main control of the game can be performed. It can be ensured that the processing is unaffected by the processing of interest ratios performed in between.

In addition, the stage of shifting from the game processing for mainly controlling the game using the inside area 203x to the processing related to the role product ratio using the area outside the area 203y, At the stage of transitioning from the processing relating to the ratio to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area is performed, instead of saving/restoring the contents of all the registers 200, the process relating to the character product ratio is performed. Since the contents of only some of the registers 200 that are used in this case are saved/restored, the capacity of the RAM 203 (external work area 203y1) required for saving the contents of those registers can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and secure a large area for storing other data in the external work area 203y1.

Note that the register 200 that is not used in the process relating to the role product ratio is not affected by the process relating to the role product ratio in the first place, and its contents are kept before and after the processing relating to the role product ratio is executed. Therefore, without saving/restoring the contents of the registers 200 that are not used in the process relating to the role product ratio, only the contents of some registers 200 used in the process relating to the role product ratio are saved/restored. It is possible to ensure that the game processing for main control of the game is not affected by the processing relating to the accessory ratio executed between them.

However, since the flag register 200a is a register used for all instructions executed by the MPU 201, it is of course a register used for the process relating to the character ratio. is exceptionally not evacuated. This is because, in the role ratio processing shown in FIG. 33, the content of the flag register 200a is changed only by reading the role ratio main processing (S2013), and the game processing for executing the main control of the game is shifted to the processing relating to the role ratio. This is because the value of the flag register 200a at the time when the game process is completed cannot be saved at the stage of the process of S2022.

Therefore, in this embodiment, before reading the role ratio main processing (S2013) in the role ratio processing shown in FIG. 33, only the flag register 200a is saved in the inner stack area 203x2, , restores only the flag register 200a from the inner stack area 203x2. As a result, the value of the flag register 200a at the end of the game process can be reliably restored after the process relating to the role product ratio is executed.

In addition, the stage of shifting from the game processing for mainly controlling the game using the inside area 203x to the processing related to the role product ratio using the area outside the area 203y, Since the save/restore of the register 200 is performed individually for each register at the stage of shifting from the processing relating to the ratio to the game processing in which the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area is performed, the game is improved. Only the register 200 that needs to be saved/restored in order to ensure that the main control game process is not affected by the process related to the role ratio executed between (that is, the register 200 used for the process related to the role ratio) register 200) can be individually specified and saved/restored.

In addition, since the register 200 is saved in the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, the required capacity of the outer stack area 203y2 can be reduced and a large capacity of the outer work area 203y1 can be secured. In some MPUs 201, the stack area and work area are specified in advance depending on the model (type). Such an MPU 201 has a function of clearing (initializing to 0) the contents of the RAM 203 itself when data is further saved and stacked beyond the area of the stack area designated in advance. be. On the other hand, by saving the register 200 to the outer work area 203y1 instead of the outer stack area 203y2, it is possible to prevent the outer stack area 203y2 from being quickly filled with stacked data. Therefore, in the MPU 201 having such a function, it is possible to prevent the RAM 203 from being cleared due to further stacking of data beyond the predetermined area of the outer stack area 203y2.

In addition, since the register 200 is saved using the load (LD) instruction rather than using the PUSH instruction/POP instruction, the save location can be fixed by the program. Therefore, while performing the processing related to the role product ratio, the area where the register 200 is saved is clearly avoided, and the outside work area 203y1 is programmed to use the main control of the game. The contents of the register 200 used in processing can be reliably protected.

In addition, when all the registers 200 are used in the processing relating to the role product ratio, all the registers 200 are individually saved/restored to a predetermined area of the outer work area 203y1 using a load (LD) command. You can let it run. This also provides the effect of retracting the register 200 to the outer work area 203y1.

Also, when saving some of the registers 200 used in the process related to the role product ratio, they are saved to a determined area of the outer stack area 203y2 using the PUSH instruction individually, and The registers 200 saved in the area where the data is stored may be individually restored using the POP instruction. As a result, the capacity of the RAM 203 required for saving the contents of the registers can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the capacity of the RAM 203 and secure a large area for storing the outer work area 203y1. In this case, when restoring the register 200 that was saved using the POP instruction, it is necessary to use the LIFO method, that is, the register 200 that was later saved by the PUSH instruction must first be restored by the POP instruction. .

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment and the second embodiment can produce the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Fourth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fourth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the main controller 110 shifts from the game processing for mainly controlling the game using the area 203x within the usage area to the processing relating to the character ratio using the area 203y outside the usage area. At the stage of doing, the register 200 used in the processing regarding the character ratio is individually saved, and after the processing regarding the character ratio is completed, the processing regarding the character ratio using the area 203 y outside the use area is changed to the inside of the use area. A case has been described in which the evacuated registers 200 are individually restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, in the main controller 110, in the character object processing (S2002) executed in the timer interrupt processing (FIG. 32), the use area area 203x is used. During the execution of the process, at the stage of reading the character product main process (S2013) for executing the process related to the character product ratio using the area outside the use area 203y with the CALL command, the register 200 used in the process related to the character product ratio are individually cleared to 0, and the character object main process (S2013) is read out with a CALL command. Also, in the main character product processing (S2013), when the main character product processing (S2013) using the area outside the use area 203y is terminated and the process returns to the process using the area inside the use area 203x, the process relating to the character product ratio is performed. After clearing the registers 200 used in 1 to 0 individually, the process returns to the role ratio process.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to third embodiments. Description is omitted.

Compared to the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 of the fourth embodiment has a role ratio process (S2002), which is one process of the timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110. A part of the process differs from a part of the role ratio main process (S2013) which is one process of the role ratio process (S2002).

FIG. 35 is a flow chart showing role ratio processing (S2002) in the fourth embodiment. In this role ratio process, first, after executing the same processes of S2011 and S2012 as in the third embodiment, all the registers 200 (except the flag register 200a) used in the process relating to the role ratio are executed. are cleared to 0 using a load (LD) instruction individually. Then, it proceeds to the process of S2013, reads out a subroutine program for executing the role ratio main process using the outside area 203y with the CALL command, and executes the role ratio main process. Then, the same processing of S2014 and S2015 as in the third embodiment is executed, and then the role ratio processing is terminated.

Next, FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing role ratio main processing (S2013) in the fourth embodiment. In this role ratio main process, first, the same S2021 process as in the third embodiment is executed, then the same S2023 process as in the third embodiment (that is, the process regarding the role ratio) is executed, Next, the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the role product ratio are individually cleared to 0 (S2041). Then, the same processing of S2024 as in the third embodiment is executed to end the role ratio main processing using the area 203y outside the usage area, return to the role ratio processing, and perform the processing using the area 203x within the usage area. Run.

In this fourth embodiment, in the register 200 used in the processing relating to the character product ratio using the outside area 203y, the value is changed by the processing relating to the character product ratio, and the value is left in the corresponding register 200 as it is. On the other hand, even if the MPU 201 executes a game process that mainly controls a game using the use area 203x, it is assumed that the game process is not affected. In this case, originally, the MPU 201 is provided at the stage of shifting from the game processing that performs the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to the processing related to the role product ratio using the area 203y outside the use area. of the registers 200 used in the processing related to the character ratio, and after executing the processing related to the character ratio, the processing related to the character ratio using the area outside the use area 203y is changed to the inside of the use area There is no problem even if the evacuated register 200 is not restored at the stage of shifting to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x. However, in this case, since the value of the register 200 changes before and after the processing relating to the character ratio, it is impossible for an external person to judge whether or not this is really a problem.

Therefore, as in the present embodiment, first, in the role ratio process, the game process that mainly controls the game using the area 203x within the use area is shifted to the process related to the role ratio using the area outside the use area 203y. That is, before reading the subroutine program for executing the role ratio main processing with the CALL command, once all the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the role ratios performed in the role ratio main processing are individually set to 0. clear to Then, in the role ratio main process, after executing the process relating to the role ratio, from the process relating to the role ratio using the area outside the use area 203y, to the game process of performing the main control of the game using the area inside the use area 203x , all the registers 200 used in the process related to the role ratio (that is, the same register 200 as the register 200 cleared to 0 before executing the role ratio main process) are individually set to 0. clear. As a result, the stage of shifting from the game process of performing the main control of the game using the area 203x within the use area to the process relating to the character ratio using the area outside the use area 203y (the stage of reading the role ratio main process); a stage of transitioning from the process relating to the role ratio using the area outside the use area 203y to the game process of performing the main control of the game using the area inside the use area 203x (the stage of returning from the role ratio main process to the role ratio process); , the contents of register 200 can be made identical at first glance. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by the processing related to the accessory ratio executed between them. Note that the contents of the register 200 that is not used in the processing relating to the role ratio is not changed before and after the processing relating to the role ratio and is kept, so even if the unused register 200 is not cleared to 0, It becomes the same at both stages.

Here, in the fourth embodiment, in the processing of S2031 and S2041, a case has been described in which the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the character product ratio are individually cleared to 0, but it is not always necessary to clear them to 0. For example, even if the same predetermined value is stored in the processes of S2031 and S2041, the above effect can be obtained. However, immediately after the power is turned on and the reset input to the MPU 201 is released (at the stage when software initialization is not executed), all registers are initialized to 0. Therefore, S2031 and S2041 2, it is desirable to individually clear (initialize) to 0 the registers 200 used in the process relating to the character product ratio. In addition, by individually clearing the registers 200 used in the processing relating to the character product ratio to 0, it can be grasped at a glance that the registers 200 have been cleared to 0.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to third embodiments can produce the same effect as that of the configuration.

<Fifth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a fifth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 to 44. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, instead of the role ratio display device 400 provided in the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment or the fourth embodiment, four 7-segment displays (lower right of the 7-segment part There is provided a base display 401 (see FIG. 38(a)) consisting of 401a, 401b, 401c, 401d (including dot segments provided on the side). The base value of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed on the base display device 401 as one piece of information regarding the role product ratio.

The base value is the number (percentage) of balls paid out (prize balls) to 100 balls in the normal time except for the big hit, the high probability (probability variable) time, and the time saving time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the number of out balls guided from the game area to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls hit into the game area, in other words, the number of balls used in the game). hereinafter referred to as "total number of outs") reaches 60,000, the base value for the 60,000 balls is measured and stored.

Then, on the base display device 401, the base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60000 (hereinafter referred to as the "real-time base value") and the previous (most recent) total out number In addition to the base value measured when the number of outs reached 60000 (hereinafter referred to as the "previous base value"), one before the previous time (the time before last) was measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 The base value (hereinafter referred to as the "previous base value") and the base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 (hereinafter referred to as the "previous (referred to as the “time base value”) is switched and displayed every predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In addition to the real-time base value, multiple past base values (previous base value, two-previous base value, two-previous base value) are also displayed, making it possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. In addition, the timing of the fraud can also be made predictable to some extent.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. is turned on for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). In the base display device 401, if some segments do not light up due to disconnection or other failure, the base value and the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk of making an erroneous judgment as to whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 every time the power is turned on for a predetermined period, it is possible to check whether all the segments can be normally turned on. It can be easily determined whether the display of 401 is performed normally.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment can be used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely new in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand table. When starting up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. . When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, there is a case where a ball is put into each winning hole by hand and the prize balls are dispensed during a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is different from the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not the normal base value. In addition, by performing the display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the first to fourth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fourth embodiments. Description is omitted.

FIG. 37 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the third embodiment in that the role ratio display device 400 is connected to the main controller 110 in the third embodiment, whereas the fifth embodiment is connected to the main controller 110. In the embodiment, the base display device 401 is connected to the main controller 110 . This base display device 401 is for displaying the base value of the pachinko machine 10 as described above.

In the role ratio display device 400 according to the third embodiment, together with the role ratio of the pachinko machine 10, the base value of the pachinko machine 10 may be switched and displayed every predetermined period. Further, in the present embodiment, the inspection terminal 207a does not necessarily have to be provided, and the configuration for outputting the information on the character object ratio to the inspection device 300 is not necessary. Also, if the information on the character product ratio is not output to the inspection device 300, the second reading memory 264 may be omitted.

Details of the base display device 401 will now be described with reference to FIG. First, FIG. 38( a ) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the base display device 401 . The base display device 401 is composed of four 7-segment displays 401 a to 401 d arranged in a horizontal line and arranged on the main substrate constituting the main controller 110 . That is, the display screen of the base display device 401 is assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, so that four-digit numbers or alphabetic characters can be confirmed. Note that the pachinko machine 10 may be assembled so that the display screen of the base display device 401 can be seen from the front side.

Each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d has a 7-segment portion and a dot segment provided on the lower right side of the 7-segment portion. Of the four 7-segment displays 401a-401d, the base display device 401 uses the left two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b as identification segments and the right two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d as ratio segments. do. The identification segment is used to indicate identification information for specifying the content displayed in the ratio segment. A ratio segment is used to display the ratio of the content specified by the identification information indicated by the identification segment.

FIG. 38(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing display contents on the base display device 401. As shown in FIG. As described above, the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value measured in real time during the period until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, and The previous base value measured in , and the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 one before the previous time (the time before last), and the base value measured one time before the time before last ) The second-last base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 is switched every 5 seconds and displayed.

When the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, "bL." is displayed in the identification segment, and the real-time base value being measured is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "bL." in the identification segment, the viewer can be made aware that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the real-time base value.

When displaying the previous base value on the base display device 401, "b1." is displayed in the identification segment, and the previous base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b1." in the identification segment, it is possible to make the viewer recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the previous base value.

In the base display device 401, when displaying the base value before last, "b2." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value before last is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b2." in the identification segment, it is possible for the viewer to recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value the time before last.

In the base display device 401, when displaying the base value before last, "b3." is displayed in the identification segment, and the base value before last is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. By displaying "b3." in the identification segment, it is possible for the viewer to recognize that the number displayed in the ratio segment is the base value two times before.

In this way, the base display device 401 displays base values for a plurality of times in the past (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) in addition to the real-time base value. Here, the real-time base value is a base value that is measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60000, as described above. Here, in a hall, a game is generally played with about 10,000 to 20,000 balls being hit out of one pachinko machine 10 per day. That is, the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the last time measured for 60,000 balls indicate the base values over several days, about 3 to 6 days. If the real-time base value is not displayed on the base display device 401, it will take about 3 to 6 days to measure the base value for 60000 spheres. It could be the base value from 3-6 days ago. Therefore, if there is any fraudulent activity after the previous base value measurement, the next 3 to 6 days during which the base values for the next 60,000 balls are measured and displayed on the base display device 401, that Fraud may go undetected. On the other hand, by displaying the real-time base value on the base display device 401, it is possible to show the current base value as a preliminary value. You can discover the possibility that there was an act.

On the other hand, the real-time base value is the base value measured in real time when the total number of outs is less than 60000, as described above. As described above, the base value is the number (proportion) of balls paid out (prize balls) to 100 balls under normal conditions. The real-time base value may fluctuate depending on (for example, the normal state happened to continue for a long time, the big win state happened to occur frequently, the probability variable state happened to continue for a long time, etc.). Therefore, if only the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity.

On the other hand, the last base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the last time measured for 60,000 balls show the base values over several days, about 3 to 6 days, No matter what game state the pachinko machine 10 follows for the corresponding several days, the base value of the previous game, the base value of the previous game, and the base value of the game before the previous game can be averaged. Therefore, by displaying not only the real-time base value on the base display device 401 but also the base values measured for 60,000 balls such as the previous base value, it is possible to make a more accurate determination of the presence or absence of fraud. can.

On the other hand, when only the previous base value is displayed as the base value measured for 60000 balls, it is assumed that a player who happened to be accustomed to the pachinko machine 10 played a game during the period during which the previous base value was measured. Then the base value will generally be low. Therefore, even if only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401, it may be difficult to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. On the other hand, as the base values measured for 60,000 balls, not only the previous base value, but also multiple base values such as the base value before the last time and the base value before the time before last are displayed. , it is possible to determine whether or not the base value has fluctuated based on the player's familiarity with the game. Therefore, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of fraudulent activity more accurately.

In this embodiment, the base display device 401 switches and displays the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the time before last every 5 seconds. may be increased, and display may be switched between a mode in which the real-time base value and the previous base value are simultaneously displayed and a mode in which the second-previous base value and the second-last base value are simultaneously displayed at predetermined intervals. Also, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the time before last base value, and the time before last base value may all be displayed on the base display device 401 at the same time.

Further, in the present embodiment, as base values measured for 60,000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401, three base values, ie, the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value are displayed. , but it is also possible to display two values, the previous base value and the base value of the time before last, or in addition to the base value of the previous time, the base value of the time before last, and the base value of the time before last, the base value of the time before last It is also possible to further display the base value of the time before last measured when the total number of out-outs reached 60000 one time before (the time before the time before before). That is, as the base values measured for 60000 spheres to be displayed on the base display device 401, any number of 2 or more base values may be displayed.

Returning to FIG. 37, the description continues. The base display device 401 is connected to a base display device control circuit 402 provided in the main controller 110 and connected to the input/output port 205 . The base display device control circuit 402 drives and controls each of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d of the base display device 401 based on the drive/control signal from the MPU 201, thereby providing various displays as shown in FIG. It displays.

In the processing for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the processing is performed using the non-use area 203y of the RAM 203. FIG. That is, the information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is stored in the outside work area 203y1 of the outside use area 203y. Here, with reference to FIG. 39, the details of the information necessary for displaying the base value on the base display device 401, which is stored in the outside work area 203y1, will be described. First, FIG. 39(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing information necessary for displaying the base value stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203. FIG.

Information necessary for displaying the base value stored in the outside work area 203y1 includes a total out count counter 203j, a low-probability payout count counter 203k, a real-time base value data 203l, a previous base value data 203m, and a two-previous base value data. 203n, second-last base value data 203o, new startup flag 203p, and display type counter 203q are prepared at least.

Of these, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-previous base value data 203n, the two-previous base value data 203o, and the new startup flag 203p are Even if the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is being operated, the information is retained without being initialized (cleared). As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the real-time base value measurement that has been performed before the operation is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. can be made Further, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the base value before the previous base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 .

On the other hand, in the fifth embodiment, a RAM all-erase switch (not shown) is provided in the board box 100 housing the main board, and only when the power is turned on while the RAM all-erase switch is being operated, Total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, pre-previous base value data 203n, pre-previous base value data 203o, new startup flag 203p are stored in RAM 203. It is designed to be initialized (cleared). When starting up the pachinko machine 10 completely new in the manufacturing factory, or when moving the used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a second-hand machine, etc., the RAM all erase switch is operated. By turning on the power while doing so, total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, two-previous base value data 203n, two-previous base value data 203o, new The rise flag 203p can be initialized, from which the measurement of the base value can be started anew. In addition, even when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand machine, the information can be initialized (cleared) so that the base value can be reduced if fraud is committed in the previous hall. is changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, thereby suppressing suspicion that there has been fraudulent activity at the next store. Moreover, since the RAM all-erasing switch is provided in the circuit board box 100 that is unopenably connected, it cannot be operated unless the circuit board box 100 is unsealed by breaking the connection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect the information.

Only when a hole such as a keyhole is provided instead of the RAM all-erase switch and a key or the like matching the hole is inserted, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, The previous base value data 203m, the second previous base value data 203n, the second last base value data 203o, and the new startup flag 203p may be initialized. As a result, only those who have a key or the like that fits the hole can erase the information necessary to display the base value, so it is possible to suppress the erasure of the information necessary to display the base value by a fraudulent person. , you can reliably protect this information.

The total out number counter 203j is a counter for counting the total number of outs, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of balls used in the game). The total out number counter 203j is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while operating the RAM erase all switch, and when a ball is detected by the out switch 208f, the ball is guided to the ball discharge path. 1 is added as When the total number of outs counter 203j reaches 60000, the MPU 201 determines that the total number of outs has reached 60000, executes a predetermined process described later, and initializes the total number of outs counter 203j to zero. become As a result, the total number of outs is counted again by the total out number counter 203j until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

The low-probability payout number counter 203k is a counter for counting the number of prize balls paid out in normal times except for the big hit, the high-probability (probability variable) time, and the time-saving time. The low-probability payout number counter 203k is initialized to zero when the power is turned on while the RAM all-erase switch is being operated. When the game state is normal and there is a payout of balls (prize balls), the number of the putout balls is added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

For example, in the present embodiment, in the normal state, the opening is always open for the first starting opening 64a called "navel", and the first normal winning opening 63a and the second normal winning opening 63b, which are general winning openings. When it is detected by the first starting opening switch 208a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, and the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the number of prize balls set for the corresponding winning opening is detected. is determined by the prize ball number table 202e (see FIGS. 6 and 9), and the number of prize balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k.

In addition, in the pachinko machine 10, if a "small win" is provided as one mode of "losing" and the big winning opening 65a is configured to be opened for several seconds when a "small win" occurs, the game state is changed. However, in normal times, when the large winning opening 65a is opened in the "small hit", there is a ball entering the big winning opening 65a, and if the winning ball is played, the number of the winning balls is a low probability payout number counter 203k may be added to Also, when the game state is normal, when a ball enters the second starting port 64b and a prize ball is played, the number of prize balls may be added to the low-probability payout number counter 203k.

The number of winning balls is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000. That is, the value of the low probability payout number counter 203k when the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000 is the number of balls paid out when the game state is normal, with respect to 60000 balls hit into the game area. number.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000, the total out number counter 203j and the low probability payout number counter 203k are initialized to zero. As a result, the number of balls put out in the normal game state is counted by the low probability payout number counter 203k until the total out number reaches 60000 again.

The MPU 201 calculates the real-time base value using the following formula (1) every predetermined period (for example, every 4 milliseconds when timer interrupt processing is executed).
Real-time base value=value of low probability payout counter 203k/value of total out counter 203j×100 (1)
The real-time base value calculated by the formula (1) is stored in the real-time base value data 203l.

That is, the real-time base value data 203l is data indicating the measured (calculated) real-time base value. Further, the previous base value data 203m is data indicating the previous base value, the second last base value data 203n is data indicating the second last base value, and the second last base value data 203o is data indicating the second last base value. be.

Here, with reference to FIG. 39(b), configurations of the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-previous base value data 203n, and the two-previous base value data 203o will be described. FIG. 39(b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the structure of each base value data 203l to 203o.

As shown in FIG. 39(b), each base value data 203l to 203o is composed of 8 bits (1 byte), the 7th bit (most significant bit) on the MSB side is a valid data flag, and the remaining The base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits (lower 7 bits). For each of the base value data 203l to 203o, when the valid data flag is 1, it means that the valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits. On the other hand, for each of the base value data 203l to 203o, when the valid data flag is 0, it means that no valid base value is stored in the 0th to 6th bits.

All of the base value data 203l to 203o are initialized to zero with the valid data flag and the base value when the power is turned on while the RAM all erase switch is being operated. That is, immediately after the power is turned on while operating the RAM erasing switch, valid data is not stored in any of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the two-previous base value, and the two-previous base value.

After that, until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the real-time base value calculated by the formula (1) is stored in the base value of the real-time base value data 203l. The valid data flag of is left 0. In this case, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, "88." Blink (or light) on the segment.

As described above, the RAM all-erasing switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand table. It is operated when When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, there is a case where a ball is manually inserted into each prize winning hole and the prize balls are paid out in a shipping inspection or the like for confirming the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the identification segment "88." At the same time, the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment by blinking (or lighting) in a special display mode different from the normal base value display, so that the base value being displayed is normal. can indicate that it is not the base value (effective base value) of In addition, by performing the display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state. In this special display mode, both "88." of the identification seg and the real-time base value of the ratio seg may be lit or blinked. Further, the identification segment "88." may be lit and the real-time base value of the ratio segment may be blinked, or conversely, the identification segment "88." may be blinked and the real-time base value of the ratio segment be lit. may

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. As a result, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l becomes a valid base value. Therefore, when the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l becomes 1, the identification segment of the base display device 401 is illuminated with "bL.", and the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment. By doing so, an effective real-time base value can be reported.

On the other hand, at this stage, the valid data flags of the previous base value data 203m, the pre-previous base value data 203n, and the pre-previous base value data 203o are all 0. At this time, when the base display device 401 switches to display the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the time before last on the base display device 401 by switching every predetermined period, the identification segment is displayed corresponding to each base value, while the ratio segment is displayed. “--” lights up. This makes it possible to indicate that no effective base value has been obtained as the previous base value, the pre-previous base value, and the pre-previous base value.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000, the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l at that time becomes the base value for the total out number of 60,000. Therefore, the second-last base value data 203n is shifted to the second-last base value data 203o, the last-last base value data 203m is shifted to the second-last base value data 203n, and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the last-last base value data 203m. shift. As a result, the base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60000 is held as the previous base value.

Here, when data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m after the shift is "1". is also "1". Therefore, from now on, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the previous base value data 203m is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

When the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the second previous base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, After all the RAM 203 is initialized, the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the second time), the effective data flag of the post-shift base value data 203n becomes "1". Therefore, from now on, when the base value of the time before last is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n of time before last is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

Furthermore, when the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before the previous one, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous one is "1" (while the RAM all erase switch is being operated, the power is turned on). After the RAM 203 is turned on and the RAM 203 is all initialized, the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the third time), the effective data flag of the base value data 203o two before the shift after the shift is set to "1". ”. Therefore, after this, when the base value of the time before last is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o of time before last is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

When the total out number counter 203j reaches 60000 and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0, and the real-time base value data 203l is also reset. Initialized to 0, including the valid data flag. The valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is kept at 0 until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300 again. 1 is stored in the flag. Thereafter, 1 is held in the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l until the total out number counter 203j reaches 60,000.

Here, while the total number of outs is small, the measured real-time base value is greatly influenced by the content of the game at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, and it will adversely affect the judgment of cheating. There is a risk of Therefore, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the real-time base While "bL." indicating the value is lit, "--" is lit for the ratio segment. This makes it possible to indicate that the current effective real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs. In this case, the identification segment may flash "bL." indicating the real-time base value, and the ratio segment may display the base value of the real-time base value data 203l. As a result, it is possible to indicate that the current effective real-time base value is not obtained due to the small total number of outs, and to notify the real-time base value at that time as a reference.

On the other hand, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the real-time While "bL." indicating the base value is lit, the ratio segment displays the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l as the effective base value.

Returning to FIG. 39(a), the new start-up flag 203p is set when the pachinko machine 10 is completely new in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand table. 10 is a flag indicating that it is in the new start-up period. When the new start-up flag 203p is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, and when it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not in the new start-up period.

The new start-up flag 203p is initialized to ON when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all-erase switch which is operated when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, and the pachinko machine 10 is initialized during the new start-up period. is shown to be The new startup flag 203p is kept on until the total out number counter 203j reaches 300, and when the total out number counter 203j exceeds 300, the new startup flag 203p is set off. After that, the new rising flag 203p is kept off.

When the new start-up flag 203p is ON, the base display device 401 displays the above-described special display mode, that is, blinking (or lighting) "88." The real-time base value is displayed by blinking (or lighting) the stored real-time base value. In addition, by performing the display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

The display type counter 203 q is a counter for determining the type of base value to be displayed on the base display device 401 . When the display type counter 203q is 0, the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the display type counter 203q is 1, the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401, and the display type counter 203q is displayed. is 2, the base display device 401 is caused to display the base value before last, and when the display type counter 203q is 3, the base display device 401 is caused to display the base value before last.

The display type counter 203q is set when the new start-up flag 203p is set to OFF, that is, when the total number of outs after the new start-up of the pachinko machine 10 reaches 300 and the new start-up period ends. , is initialized to 0. The display type counter 203q is counted up by 1 every 5 seconds, and when the value of the display type counter 203q is 3 when counting up, it is reset to 0. As a result, the base value displayed on the base display device 401 changes every five seconds in the order of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the time before last base value, and the time before last base value, and the time before last base value is displayed. After that, it returns to the real-time base value, and the display of the real-time base value, the previous base value, the time before last base value, and the time before last base value is repeated while being switched every 5 seconds.

Next, with reference to FIG. 40, startup processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 when main controller 110 is powered on in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. Here, this start-up process will be described, focusing on the differences from the start-up process (see FIG. 16) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 in the first embodiment. It should be noted that, as described above, the same reference numerals are given to the portions where the same processing as the start-up processing of the first embodiment is executed, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, when it is determined by the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on (S604: Yes), and when it is determined by the process of S605 that the RAM 203 does not store power failure occurrence information ( S605: No), when it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value is not normal by the processing of S607 (S607: No), after transmitting a payout initialization command to the payout control device 111 (S614), the RAM 203 Among the used areas, total out number counter 203j, low probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, two-last base value data 203n, and two-last The area excluding the base value data 203o and the new startup flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3001), and the initial value is set to the cleared area of the RAM 203 excluding the information necessary for displaying the base value (S3002). .

As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on, the real-time base value measurement that has been performed before the operation is continued, and the measured real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401. can be made Further, the base display device 401 can display the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the base value before the previous base value held before the operation of the RAM erase switch 122 . Even if the fraudulent person operates the RAM erasing switch 122 to erase the evidence, the information necessary for displaying the base value is kept, so that the erasure of the evidence of the fraudulent act can be suppressed.

If it is determined by the process of S604 that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S604), then it is determined whether or not the RAM all erase switch is turned on (S3003). Then, if the RAM all-erase switch is not turned on (S3003: No), the process proceeds to S605.

On the other hand, if the RAM all-erase switch is turned on (S3003: Yes), similarly to the processing of S614, a payout initialization command is transmitted to initialize the payout control device 111 (S3004), and then the RAM 203 All initialization processing (S3005, S3006) is executed. In the full initialization process (S3005, S3006) of the RAM 203, the total out number counter 203j, the low probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, and the two-previous base value, which are information necessary for displaying the base value. The used area of the RAM 203 including the value data 203n, the second-last base value data 203o, and the new startup flag 203p is cleared to 0 (S3005), and then the initial value is set in the RAM 203 (S3006).

As described above, the RAM all-erasing switch is used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely newly started up in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand table. It is designed to be operated when Then, by turning on the power while operating the RAM all-erase switch, the total out number counter 203j, the low-probability payout number counter 203k, the real-time base value data 203l, the previous base value data 203m, the two-previous base value data 203n, and the two-previous The base value data 203o and the new rise flag 203p can be initialized each time, and from there, the measurement of the base value can be newly started. In addition, even when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand machine, the information can be initialized (cleared) so that the base value can be reduced if fraud is committed in the previous hall. is changed, the information is continuously displayed at the next store, thereby suppressing suspicion that there has been fraudulent activity at the next store. Moreover, since the RAM all-erasing switch is provided in the circuit board box 100 that is unopenably connected, it cannot be operated unless the circuit board box 100 is unsealed by breaking the connection. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from erasing the information necessary for displaying the base value, and to reliably protect the information.

When any of the processes of S609, S3002, and S3006 is executed, then all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are lit (S3007), In this state, wait processing is executed for 5 seconds (S3008). As a result, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit continuously for at least 5 seconds. .

In the base display device 401, if some segments do not light up due to disconnection or other failure, the base value and the like cannot be displayed correctly, and there is a risk of making an erroneous judgment as to whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred. By turning on all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 for at least 5 seconds every time the power is turned on, it is possible to check whether all the segments are normally turned on. It can be easily determined whether the display of the device 401 is performed normally.

In addition, the start-up processing waits for 5 seconds during which the lighting is performed, and the start of the normal game processing is awaited. As a result, when the base value cannot be displayed correctly on the base display device 401, it is possible to prevent the game from proceeding without being able to determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. In such a case, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of some disadvantage to the player, the hall, or the like.

In this embodiment, every time the power is turned on, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit, and the game is stopped for 5 seconds so as not to progress. However, while the lighting is being performed, normal game processing may be started to progress the game. In this case, only the display of the base value on the base display device 401 may be put on standby while the real-time base value is measured as the game progresses. As a result, even if all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are turned on when a momentary power failure occurs, the player can immediately finish playing. can resume.

In the startup process, after the process of S3008, the process proceeds to the process of S613.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, base value processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 in the fifth embodiment will be described. FIG. 41 is a flow chart showing the base value processing. This base value processing is the role ratio processing of the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 32) periodically (for example, every 4 milliseconds) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control unit 110 shown in the third embodiment. This is executed as one process of (S2002), and performs calculation (measurement) of the base value and display of the base value.

In this base value processing, first, base value calculation processing is executed (S3101) to calculate (measure) the real-time base value, and when the total number of outs reaches 60000, each base value data 203l to 203o , etc., are executed. The details of this base value calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, it is determined whether or not 1 second has passed since the base value display processing (S3103) was executed last time (S3102), and it is determined that 1 second has passed since the base value display processing (S3103) was executed last time. If so (S3102: Yes), base value display processing is executed (S3103), and processing for displaying the base value on the base display device 401 is executed. The details of the base value display processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG.

When the processing of S3103 is completed, the base value processing ends. On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S3102, if it is determined that one second has not passed since the base value display processing (S3103) was executed last time (S3102: No), the base value display processing (S3103) is skipped. to end the base value processing. As a result, the base value display process (S3103) is executed at intervals of one second, and the display of the base display device 401 is driven and controlled every second.

In the determination process of S3102, when the process of S3102 is executed for the first time after the power of the main controller 110 is turned on (that is, after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed), the previous Without checking whether one second has passed since the value display processing (S3103) was executed, the affirmative determination is made (S3102: Yes), and the base value display processing (S3103) is executed. As a result, the driving control process of the base display device 401 can be executed immediately after the start-up process shown in FIG. 40 is executed.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, details of the base value calculation process (S3101), which is one of the base value processes executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110, will be described. FIG. 42 is a flow chart showing the base value calculation process.

In the base value calculation process (S3101), first, at least the output of each switch of the first starting opening switch 208a, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, the second normal winning opening switch 208d and the out switch 208f is read, and the first starting opening 64a, the first normal winning opening 63a and the second normal winning opening 63b determine whether or not there is a prize won, and whether or not there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path, and store detection information (winning detection information) (S3201). ). It should be noted that determination of winning of one ball and determination of one ball guided to the ball discharge path is performed over three times of timer interrupt processing based on the outputs of the respective switches 208a, 208c, 208d and 208f.

Next, it is determined whether or not the out switch 208f is on (S3201), and if it is determined that the out switch 208f is on and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: Yes), total out 1 is added to the number counter 203j (S3203). As a result, the total out number, which is the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path (that is, the number of hit balls), is counted by the total out number counter 203j.

After the process of S3203 or when it is determined by the process of S3201 that the out switch 208f is not ON and there is no ball guided to the ball discharge path (S3201: No), then the game state is the jackpot. Instead, it is determined whether it is a low probability state and not a time saving state, that is, whether the game state is normal time (S3204). Then, when the game state is not the jackpot time, the low-probability state, and the time-saving state, that is, when it is determined that the game state is the normal time (S3204: Yes), the process of S3205 is executed.

That is, in the process of S3205, based on the winning detection information saved in the process of S3201, it is determined that a prize has been won among the first start opening 64a, the first normal winning opening 63a, and the second normal winning opening 63b. If there is an opening, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning opening (that is, the number defined by the winning ball number table 202e) is added to the low probability payout number counter 203k. As a result, the number of prize balls paid out in the normal time except for the big hit, the high probability (probability variable) time, and the time saving time is counted by the low probability payout number counter 203k.

After the process of S3205 or by the process of S3204, when the game state is a jackpot time, a high probability (probability variation) time, or a time saving time, that is, if it is determined that the game state is not normal time (S3204: No), then, the real-time base value is calculated by the above formula (1), and the calculated real-time base value is stored as the base value of the real-time base value data 203l (S3206). By this processing, the base value is measured in real time.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 60000, that is, whether or not the total number of outs has reached 60000 (S3207). As a result, when the total out number has not reached 60000 (S3207: No), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is skipped, and the process proceeds to S3211. On the other hand, if the total out number has reached 60,000 (S3207: Yes), the processing of S3208 to S3210 is executed, and the processing shifts to S3211.

In the process of S3208, first, the base value data 203n of the time before last is shifted to the base value data 203o of time before last, the base value data 203m of the previous time is shifted to the base value data 203n of time before last, and the real-time base value data 203l is shifted to the base value data 203n of time before last. It is shifted to the base value data 203m (S3208). As a result, the real-time base value measured when the total number of outs reaches 60,000 is held as the previous base value, and thereafter the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 as the previous base value. Further, the base values displayed as the previous base value and the base value before the last time are displayed on the base display device 401 as the base value before the last time and the base value before the time before last.

Note that each base value may be stored in a FIFO (First In First Out) ring buffer. In this case, the address (ring buffer pointer) storing the real-time base value may be updated in the process of S3208. However, when the base value is stored in the FIFO system ring buffer, once the ring buffer pointer is broken due to some influence such as noise, the base value may not be correctly stored in the RAM 203 and displayed. be. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, the area of the RAM 203 for storing the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the time before last is fixed, and each time the total number of outs reaches 60000, By shifting the data between them, it is possible to avoid the above problem that may occur when the base value is stored in the FIFO ring buffer.

Also, in the process of S3208, these shift processes are executed with one LDIR instruction. The LDIR instruction enables block transfer of data by simply setting the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred, the start address (DE) of the transfer destination, and the number of transfer bytes (BC). That is, data is transferred from (HL) to (DE), 1 is added to both (HL) and (DE), and 1 is subtracted from (BC). Then, this is repeated until (BC) becomes zero. Therefore, the two-previous base value data 203o is stored at the address (AA) (AA is one address of the RAM 203), the two-previous base value data 203n is stored at the address (AA+1), and the previous base value data 203m is stored at the address (AA+2). ), store the real-time base value data 203l at the address (AA+3), set the start address (HL) of the data to be transferred to (AA), set the transfer destination address to (AA+1), By setting the number of transfer bytes to 3 bytes and executing one LDIR instruction, the shift processing in S3208 can be easily realized.

In the subsequent processing of S3209, the base value of the real-time base value data 203l and the valid data flag are initialized to 0 (S3209). As a result, the base value is newly measured in real time until the total number of outs reaches 60,000, while the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l remains until the total number of outs reaches 300. It is kept as 0. While the total number of outs is small, the real-time base value measured is greatly influenced by the game content at that time, so even if it is displayed, it will be a meaningless base value, and there is a risk that it will adversely affect the judgment of cheating. be. Therefore, by setting the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 0 when the total number of outs is between 0 and 300, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the real-time base While "bL." indicating the value is lit, "--" is lit for the ratio segment. This makes it possible to indicate that the current effective real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs.

In the subsequent processing of S3210, the total out number counter 203j is initialized to 0 (S3210). As a result, the total number of outs is counted again by the total out number counter 203j until the total number of outs reaches 60,000.

In the processing of S3211, it is determined whether or not the value of the total out number counter 203j is 300, that is, whether or not the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211). As a result, if the total number of outs has not reached 300 (S3211: No), the processing of S3212 to S3215 is skipped and the base value calculation processing ends. On the other hand, if the total number of outs has reached 300 (S3211: Yes), the processing of S3212 to S3215 is executed, and then this base value calculation processing ends.

In the process of S3212, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is ON (S3212). As a result, when the new start-up flag 203p is ON (S3212: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period by turning on the power while operating the RAM all erase switch. . Then, as a result of the processing of the previous S3211, the total number of outs has reached 300, so it is time to end the new start-up period, so the new start-up flag 203p is set to off (S3213). Then, the display type counter 203q is initialized to zero (S3214). As a result, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the time before last base value, and the time before last base value are switched and displayed on the base display device 401 every five seconds.

After the processing of S3214, or when it is determined that the new startup flag 203p is off by the processing of S3212 (S3212: No), then the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1. be. As a result, after the total number of outs reaches 300, by setting the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to 1, when the real-time base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment is: While "bL." indicating the real-time base value is lit, the ratio segment displays the base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l as the valid base value.

Next, referring to FIGS. 43 and 44, details of the above-described base value display processing (S3103), which is one of the base value processing executed by MPU 201 in main controller 110 and which is executed at intervals of one second. will be explained. 43 and 44 are flowcharts showing the base value calculation processing (S3103).

First, referring to FIG. 43, when the base value calculation process (S3103) is started, it is determined whether or not the new startup flag 203p is ON (S3301). If the new start-up flag 203p is ON (S3301: Yes), it means that the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period because the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch. Therefore, the base display device control circuit 402 causes the identification segment of the base display device 401 to blink (or light up) "88." and the ratio segment to blink (or light up) the base value of the real-time base value data 203l. (S3302). Then, the base value display processing ends.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly launched, there is a case where balls are manually put into the winning holes and paid out during the shipping inspection for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10 and the like. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, the display of the base display device 401 blinks (or lights) "88." Indicate that the base value being displayed is not the normal base value (effective base value) by displaying it in a special display mode that is different from the normal base value display, such as blinking (or lighting) in the ratio segment. can be done. In addition, by performing the display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

On the other hand, if the result of the process of S3302 is that the new startup flag 203p is off (S3301: No), then it is determined whether 5 seconds have passed since the display type counter 203q was updated or initialized (S3303). As a result, if 5 seconds have passed (S3303: Yes), the display type counter 203q is updated (S3304), and the process proceeds to S3305 shown in FIG. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3303, if five seconds have not elapsed (S3303: No), the process of S3304 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S3305 shown in FIG.

In updating the display type counter 203q in S3304, if the display type counter 203q is other than 3, 1 is added to the display type counter 203q. If the display type counter 203q is 3, the display type counter 203q is initialized to 0. By updating the display type counter 203q every 5 seconds, the types of base values displayed on the base display device 401 are the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the real-time base value. , previous base value, . . . every 5 seconds.

Referring to FIG. 44, in the process of S3305, the value of display type counter 203q is determined (S3305). When the display type counter 203q is 0 (S3305: "0"), it is the period during which the base display device 401 displays the real-time base value. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 1 (S3306). , and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is displayed in the ratio segment (S3307). As described above, when the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured for the total number of outs of 300 or more, the valid data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is set to 1, indicating that the base value is valid. is set to Therefore, the measured real-time base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 as an effective base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3306, when the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l is 0 (S3306: No), the identification segment of the base display device 401 is lit and displayed as "bL." A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display "--" (S3308).

As described above, if the base value of the real-time base value data 203l is measured when the total number of outs is less than 300, the base value is determined to be invalid and the valid data of the real-time base value data 203l 0 is set to the flag. This makes it possible to indicate that the current effective real-time base value has not been obtained due to the small total number of outs.

If the display type counter 203q is 1 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: "1"), it is the period during which the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401. FIG. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 1 (S3309). ” is lit and the base value of the previous base value data 203m is lit and displayed in the ratio segment (S3310). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the previous base value data 203m, the valid previous base value can be displayed on the base display device 401 to show it.

Further, when the total out number reaches 60000 and the data is shifted to the previous base value data 203m, the effective data flag of the real-time base value data 203l to be shifted is "1", and the previous data after the shift The effective data flag of the base value data 203m also becomes "1". Therefore, when the previous base value is displayed on the base display device 401 after the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the first time after the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the previous base value stored in the previous base value data 203m The base value will appear in the ratio segment as the valid base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3309, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is 0 (S3309: No), "b1." A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display "--" (S3311). As a result, when a valid base value has not been obtained as the previous base value, the "--" displayed in the ratio segment can indicate that the valid previous base value has not been obtained.

If the display type counter 203q is 2 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: "2"), it is the period during which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 the time before last. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before last is 1 (S3312). , and a control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so that the base value of the base value data 203n before the previous time is displayed in the ratio segment (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is stored in the base value data 203n before last, the valid base value before last can be displayed on the base display device 401 to show it.

When the previous base value data 203m is shifted to the second previous base value data 203n, if the valid data flag of the previous base value data 203m is "1" (when the power is turned on while operating the RAM all erase switch, After all the RAM 203 is initialized, the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the second time), the effective data flag of the post-shift base value data 203n becomes "1". Therefore, after this, when the base value of the time before last is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203n of time before last is displayed in the ratio segment as an effective base value.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3312, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the last time is 0 (S3312: No), "b2." A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display "--" (S3313). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the pre-previous base value, "--" displayed in the ratio segment can indicate that the pre-previous base value has not been obtained.

When the display type counter 203q is 3 as a result of the process of S3305 (S3305: "3"), it is the period in which the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 two times before. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the valid data flag of the base value data 203o two times before last is 1 (S3315). A control signal is sent to the base display device control circuit 402 so that "b3." As a result, when an effective base value is stored in the base value data 203o before the last time, the effective base value before the time before last can be displayed on the base display device 401 and shown.

When the base value data 203n is shifted to the base value data 203o before the previous one, if the valid data flag of the base value data 203n before the previous one is "1" (while the RAM all erase switch is being operated, the power is turned on). After the RAM 203 is turned on and the RAM 203 is all initialized, the total number of outs reaches 60000 for the third time), the effective data flag of the base value data 203o two before the shift after the shift is set to "1". ”. Therefore, after this, when the base value of the time before last is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value stored in the base value data 203o of time before last is displayed in the ratio segment as the effective base value. Become.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S3315, when the effective data flag of the base value data 203o two times before is 0 (S3315: No), the identification segment of the base display device 401 lights up and displays "b2." A control signal is transmitted to the base display device control circuit 402 so as to display "--" in the ratio segment (S3317). As a result, when a valid base value is not obtained as the base value of the time before last, the "--" displayed in the ratio segment indicates that the base value of the time before last is not obtained. can be shown.

When any one of S3307, S3308, S3310, S3311, S3313, S3314, S3316, and S3371 ends, the base value display process ends as shown in FIG.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment, the base display device 401 displays a real-time base value (hereinafter referred to as "real-time ), the previous base value measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 last time (most recently), and the total number of outs reached 60000 one before the previous time (the time before last). and the base value of the time before last measured when the total number of outs reached 60000 one before (the time before the time before) the time before the time before the time before the time before the time when displayed by switching to . In addition to the real-time base value, multiple past base values (previous base value, two-previous base value, two-previous base value) are also displayed, making it possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity. In addition, the timing of the fraud can also be made predictable to some extent.

Further, in the fifth embodiment, every time the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. is lit for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). This makes it possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be lit normally, and easily determine whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is performed normally.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment can be used when the pachinko machine 10 is completely new in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a second-hand table. When starting up, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is displayed in a special display mode different from the normal base value display. . When the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, there is a case where a ball is put into each winning hole by hand and the prize balls are dispensed during a shipping inspection or the like for checking the quality of the pachinko machine 10 or the like. Therefore, the base value at this time greatly differs from the actual base value of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started, the display on the base display device 401 until the total number of outs reaches a predetermined number (300 in this embodiment) is different from the normal base value display. By displaying in a different special display mode, it can be shown that the base value being displayed is not the normal base value. In addition, by performing the display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fourth embodiments can provide the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Sixth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a sixth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 45 to 58. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to fifth embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are set in advance by the main controller 110, and the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol are preset by the hall staff. It was made impossible to change the hit probability of 2 symbols. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability are set in multiple stages (set values "1" to "6" in this embodiment) by hall officials and the like. 6 steps)). Then, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment changes the set value (hereinafter referred to as "probability set value") of the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability (hereinafter referred to as "setting change mode") or When confirming the probability setting value (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation mode"), the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 provided in the pachinko machine 10 according to the fifth embodiment. Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is configured such that the history of errors occurring in the pachinko machine 10 (hereinafter referred to as "error history") can be displayed on the base display device 401. FIG.

The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to fifth embodiments. Description is omitted.

FIG. 45 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, the base display device 401 is arranged on the main substrate constituting the main controller 110, and as shown in FIG. The display screen of the device 401 is assembled so that it can be seen. The base display device 401 displays the base value in the normal state, and displays the probability set value in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Also, the base display device 401 is configured to be able to display an error history.

Further, on the main board constituting the main controller 110, setting keys 501 used to change the set probability setting value or to check the set probability setting value, and a base display device 401 An error display button 502 is provided for use when displaying an error history. The setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are provided so as to project from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100, and can be operated by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100. FIG.

Here, the setting key 501 will be described with reference to FIG. 46(a) is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, and FIG. 46(b) is a front view of the setting key 501 when the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It is a front view of. By inserting a dedicated key into a keyhole provided in the setting key 501, the setting key 501 can be switched between two positions, an off side indicated by "OFF" and an on side indicated by "ON". It is configured to be rotatable. The setting key 501 is turned off when positioned on the off side, and turned on when positioned on the warm side.

In the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a pachinko game is played according to the states of the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door open switch (not shown). determine the start-up mode of machine 10; The door open switch is a switch for detecting that the inner frame 12 has been unlocked and opened (the door has been opened).

FIG. 47 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501 and the door opening switch ( not shown).

As the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, four modes of a normal mode, a RAM clear mode, a setting change mode, and a setting confirmation mode are prepared. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to restore the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. This is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203 except for .

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 while turning on the setting key 501, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode on condition that the door opening switch is turned on. . When the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key 501 turned on and the RAM erasing switch 122 turned off, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in a setting confirmation mode on condition that the door opening switch is on.

Thus, if the setting key 501 is turned off when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated by the pachinko machine 10 depending on whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode unrelated to the set probability value, or a normal mode.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on after the inner frame 12 is unlocked and opened, the hall staff can turn on the RAM erase switch 122 or not. Depending on whether or not, as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to select a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode.

That is, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or turned on, a startup mode unrelated to the probability set value and a startup mode related to the probability set value can be selected. When the start-up mode that is not related to the set probability value is selected, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be selected depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, when the probability set value is changed, the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability in the game are changed, so if the game is continued by taking over the game state before the power is cut off, the pachinko machine 10 may not be able to exhibit the predetermined game performance. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 erases (clears) the data stored in the RAM 203 when the probability setting value is changed in the setting change mode. On the other hand, since the setting confirmation mode is a start-up mode for only confirming the probability setting value, the data stored in the RAM 203 is held (not cleared) so that the game can be continued by taking over the game state before the power is turned off. .

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the inner frame 12 is unlocked and released, and the setting key 501 is turned on to erase the RAM. If the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the switch 122 and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode in which the data in the RAM 203 is not cleared, the setting is made after unlocking the inner frame 12. The pachinko machine 10 is powered on while the key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off.

In this way, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode related to the probability setting value, the setting key 501 is turned on before the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. When starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode or setting change mode for clearing the data stored in the RAM 203, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122 (while turning it on). In other words, if the people involved in the hall understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started from now on.

Also, in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, a dedicated key that can be inserted into the setting key 501 is required, and the key is managed by the hall. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a player from arbitrarily confirming the probability setting value and searching for a pachinko machine 10 having a high jackpot probability and/or winning probability, or from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability. In addition, since the RAM erase switch 122 is provided at a position that is not easily touched by a normal player, it is possible to prevent the player from arbitrarily changing the probability setting value to a high probability.

In addition, the number of switches to be operated at the same time is two even when starting up in the setting operation mode, and since both hands can be sufficiently operated, the operability is good. As described above, the persons involved in the hall can easily and simply select the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 by selectively turning on/off the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 .

In this embodiment, when starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the door opening switch is on, that is, the inner frame 12 is open on the condition that

This is because, in order to change or confirm the probability setting value, it is necessary for a person involved in the hall or the like to visually recognize the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. 12 must be open. Therefore, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without opening the inner frame 12 even though the setting key 501 is in the ON state, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not started up, and the setting key 501 is turned on. As in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode when the RAM erasure switch 122 is off, and the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode when the RAM erasure switch 122 is on. As a result, although the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the game starts in the pachinko machine 10. You can prevent it from starting. Further, in order to open the inner frame 12, a dedicated key managed by the hall side is required. Therefore, the player arbitrarily opens the inner frame 12, confirms the probability setting value, searches for a pachinko machine 10 with a high jackpot probability and/or winning probability, or arbitrarily changes the probability setting value to a high probability. You can control what you do.

In addition, when starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the door opening switch must be on, that is, the inner frame 12 must be open. It doesn't have to be. That is, when the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the pachinko machine 10 enters the setting change mode regardless of whether or not the door opening switch is turned on. You can start with When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 is placed in the setting confirmation mode regardless of whether or not the door opening switch is on. may be launched.

Now, the pachinko machine 10 has a setting change mode and a setting confirmation mode for changing or confirming the probability setting value as one of the start-up modes. is enabled only when the pachinko machine 10 is started up (when the power is turned on) by this setting confirmation mode, and the probability setting value cannot be confirmed while the game is in progress. This is for the following reasons.

That is, the display of the character ratio, such as the display of the base value by the base display device 401, the display of the character ratio, etc., and the display of the values representing the game performance, the game state, etc., make it possible to detect cheating at an early stage. Therefore, in principle, it must be displayed during the game. Therefore, at least the probability set value cannot be displayed while the player is playing a game.

If the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at a time other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, even if it is while the player is playing a game. If so, it is conceivable to stop the game. However, although the main controller 110 can stop the variable time when the game is stopped, there is a risk that the third symbol display device 81 will continue to perform the variable effect. A mismatch may occur between the audio ramp controller 113 and the display controller 114 .

In addition, if the setting key 501 is turned on so that the probability setting value can be displayed at a time other than when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, it is possible to do so while the player is playing a game. It is also conceivable to continue playing the game even if the probability setting value is confirmed on the base display device 401, but it is necessary to open the inner frame 12 in order to confirm the display of the base display device 401. Therefore, it is practically difficult for the player to continue playing the game.

Also, after the setting key 501 is turned on, it is conceivable to display the probability setting value on the base display device 401 after waiting for all the variable effects including the big win and the reserved part to be completed. However, many of the variable performances include long variable performances, some of which continue for about 5 minutes. In addition, the variation time of the normal symbols is set long in the normal game state, and it takes a long time to complete all of these reservations, so it is difficult to wait until the probability setting value is displayed.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, when the probability setting value is to be changed or confirmed, the power of the pachinko machine 10 is once turned off, the setting key 501 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on again. Thus, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401 while the game is not being played on the pachinko machine 10, and the probability setting value can be surely changed or confirmed by a person involved in the hall. Further, by turning off the power of the pachinko machine 10 once, the state before the power-off is backed up in the RAM 203, and the start-up process is performed without clearing the backed-up state, so that the setting confirmation mode can be performed. Even if the set value is confirmed, the game can be restarted from the state before the power was turned off.

Also, by limiting the change or confirmation of the probability setting value to the start-up of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the player from checking or changing the probability setting value without permission during normal times.

FIG. 48(a) is a diagram showing the role of the RAM erase switch 122 and setting key 501 in the setting change mode. FIG. 48(b) is a diagram showing the role of the setting key 501 in the setting confirmation mode.

As shown in FIG. 48(a), when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the setting change mode, the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated. Further, when the setting key 501 is turned off in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability setting value for the pachinko machine 10 .

In this embodiment, "1" to "6" can be set as the probability setting value, and for each probability setting value ("1" to "6"), the jackpot random number and/or the second A winning random number value of the symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot random number value and/or the number of second symbol winning random number values determined for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability for that probability setting value. In the pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the probability of the big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. Alternatively, the jackpot random number value and/or the second symbol winning random number value are determined for each probability setting value so that the probability of winning the second symbol is high.

The jackpot random number value and/or the second symbol win random number value is fixed, and the range and/or the random number generated for the jackpot lottery is set for each probability setting value ("1" to "6"). Alternatively, the range of random numbers generated for performing the winning lottery for the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot random number range and/or the second symbol winning random number range determined for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability at the probability setting value.

In the setting change mode, the set probability value displayed on the base display device 401 is incremented by one each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. However, when the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on when the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is "6", the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is updated to "1". be. That is, every time the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed in the setting change mode, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is looped while being incremented by one within the range of "1" to "6".

Then, in the setting change mode, when the setting key 501 is turned off, the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 at that time is determined as the probability setting value of the pachinko machine 10 . After the data in the RAM 203 is cleared, the pachinko machine 10 performs game control with the fixed probability setting value and displays the base value on the base display device 401 .

In the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. 48(b), when the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation mode is ended, and instead of the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed. display.

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, display contents of probability setting values displayed on the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode will be described. FIG. 49 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, and FIG. 49(a) is one example.

In the example shown in FIG. 49(a), all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In addition, among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, all the segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are turned off, and only the right 7-segment display 401d is used, Displays the probability setting value (1 to 6).

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., b1. ) is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), all segments of the identification segment are turned off in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the probability setting value is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information is the base value or the set probability value. Also, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. For example, if the base value is "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7 segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the 7 segment display on the left side. Since all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be turned on, you will see all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c to the left of the ratio segment are turned off. Therefore, the information displayed on the base display device 401 can be clearly understood by the persons involved in the hall or the like.

FIG. 49B is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. In the example shown in FIG. 49(b), in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the segment of the horizontal bar in the middle lights up, Turn off other segments. That is, "--" is displayed in the identification segment. Also, in the left 7-segment display 401c among the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit and the other segments are extinguished. In other words, "-" is also displayed in the relevant segment. Then, only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment is used to display the probability setting values (1 to 6).

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between when the base value is displayed and when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. It is possible to let the user know whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a set probability value. In addition, in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value is displayed using only the right 7-segment display 401d of the ratio segment, and "-" is displayed on the left 7-segment display 401c. Therefore, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the set probability value by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to make the people involved in the hall and the like understand clearly.

FIG. 49(c-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(c-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing another example of the content. In this example, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, for the identification seg, all segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification seg are extinguished, as in FIG. 49(a). On the other hand, the ratio segment displays "H" indicating the setting change mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode in the left seven segment display 401c of the seven segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment. , the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right 7-segment display 401d.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between when the base value is displayed and when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. It is possible to let the user know whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a set probability value.

Also, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. For example, if the base value is "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the examples shown in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2), in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting is performed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment. In the left 7-segment display 401c, "H" is displayed in the setting change mode, and "C" is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. As a result, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment displays "H" or "C", which is different from the number, so that the base display device 401 It is possible to make the persons involved in the hall and the like clearly understand that the information displayed in the table is the set probability value.

In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is present. be able to.

FIG. 49(d-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(d-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing another example of the content. In this example as well, similar to FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2), the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, as in FIG. 49(b), in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment, only the middle horizontal bar segment is lit, and the other segments are turned off. That is, "--" is displayed in the identification segment. On the other hand, in the ratio segment, the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d that constitute the ratio segment enter the setting change mode in the left 7-segment display 401c, as in FIGS. 49(c-1) and (c-2). "H" indicating the setting confirmation mode or "C" indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed, and the probability setting values (1 to 6) are displayed on the right seven-segment display 401d.

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state of the identification segment between when the base value is displayed and when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. It is possible to let the user know whether the information displayed in 401 is a base value or a set probability value. In addition, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the base display device 401 can display "H" or "C" different from the number on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to make the persons involved in the hall and the like clearly understand that the displayed information is the set probability value. In addition, by displaying different display contents on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is present. be able to.

FIG. 49(e-1) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode, and FIG. 49(e-2) is a display of the base display device 401 in the setting confirmation mode. It is a schematic diagram showing another example of the content. In this example as well, the display contents are changed between the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. 49(d-1) and (d-2). Specifically, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment, "SH." is displayed in the setting change mode, and "SC." is displayed in the setting confirmation mode. On the other hand, the ratio segment extinguishes all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c and uses only the right 7-segment display 401d to display the probability setting values (1-6).

As described above, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., b1, . On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 49A, "SH." indicating the setting change mode is displayed in the case of the setting change mode, and "SC." indicating the setting confirmation mode is displayed in the case of the setting confirmation mode. . In this way, the display contents displayed in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the base value or the set probability value. In addition, by displaying different display contents in the identification segment in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to clearly indicate whether the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is currently being performed.

Also, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment, while in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the 7-segment display on the right side of the ratio segment is displayed. 401d is used only to display the probability setting, and all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c are extinguished, so even if the identification seg is broken and cannot be illuminated, the left 7 of the ratio seg is Seeing that all the segments of the segment display 401c are turned off, it is clear to hall officials that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is at least the probability set value, not the base value. can be grasped.

Returning to FIG. 45, the description is continued. An error display button 502 is a button for displaying an error history on the base display device 401 . As described above, the base display device 401 can display the error history, which is the history of errors that have occurred in the pachinko machine 10 . This error history display is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is being pressed. That is, the base value continues to be displayed on the base display device 401 unless the error display button 502 is pressed.

Improper use of giving a shock to the pachinko machine 10 or bringing a magnet close to it to change the flowing direction of the balls to make the balls enter various prize-winning openings to intentionally obtain prize balls or make a jackpot lottery. An act or a fraudulent act such as letting a ball pass through the through gate 67 to intentionally perform a winning lottery of normal symbols may be performed. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 is configured so as to be able to detect an impact and an approach of a magnet, and when these are detected, the game is stopped as a serious error. At this time, the base display device 401 continues to display the base value instead of displaying the error history.

Supposing that the error type is displayed on the base display device 401 when a serious error is detected, the base display device 401 could be the one who has committed an illegal act to change the base value or the like. In order to hide the base value displayed in , the pachinko machine 10 is intentionally impacted or a magnet is brought close to cause a serious error, causing the base display device 401 to display the error type, and the base value is not displayed. It is conceivable to direct

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, even if a serious error is detected, by continuing to display the base value on the base display device 401, a person who commits a fraudulent act such as changing the base value etc. It is possible to make it impossible to hide the display of the base value after a fraudulent act, and to reliably discover fraudulent activity with respect to the base value.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 only while the error display button 502 is being pressed. From the displayed error history, the persons concerned with the pachinko hall can grasp what kind of error occurred in the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加When the pressing operation of the error display button 502 is released, the base value is displayed again on the base display device 401 .

Note that the error history may display only the error type that occurred most recently. In addition, it is also possible to display the error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, four times) going back from the error, including the error that occurred most recently. When displaying the error types for a plurality of times at maximum, the error types are displayed on the base display device 401 for a predetermined time in order from the time of occurrence that is closest to the current time. Further, when the error display button 502 is pressed when no error has occurred in the pachinko machine 10 (or when there is no record of the error), the error is displayed while the pressing operation is being performed. A display indicating that there is no record may be displayed on the base display device 401, or the base value may be displayed as it is.

In the pachinko machine 10, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 while the error display button 502 is being pressed. When the button 502 is pressed once, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. When the error display button 502 is pressed once while the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, the base display device 401 It may be configured to redisplay the base value.

Here, with reference to FIG. 50, display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 will be described. FIG. 50 is a schematic diagram schematically showing various examples of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and FIG. 50(a) is one example.

In the example shown in FIG. 50(a), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b constituting the identification segment of the base display device 401 are turned off. In addition, of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, the left 7-segment display 401c displays "E" indicating that the error history is to be displayed, and the right 7-segment display is displayed. The error type is displayed numerically using only the device 401d. For example, "1" is displayed as an error type for an impact detection error, and "2" is displayed as an error type for a magnet detection error.

As described in the fifth embodiment, when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, characters (bL., b1. ) is displayed, in the example shown in FIG. 49(a), all segments of the identification segment are turned off in the case of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. As a result, the display state can be clearly differentiated between the case where the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 and the case where the error history is displayed. It is possible to grasp whether the information being read is the base value or the error history. Also, when displaying the base value on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. For example, if the base value is "6", it is displayed as "06" in the ratio segment. On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 50(a), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the probability setting value is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the probability setting value is displayed on the left side. Since "E" indicating error history display is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the error history. This can be made clear to the people involved in the hall.

In addition, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(a), FIG. When the error history is displayed on the display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "E" indicating the display of the error history. The display state can be clearly differentiated depending on the case, and it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability set value or an error history at a glance. can.

49(b), 49(d-1), (d-2), 49(e-1), and (e- In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the display of the probability setting value and the display of the error history. It is possible to grasp whether the information received is a probability set value or an error history. When the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "E" indicating the display of the error history. Also, the information displayed on the base display device 401 can be clearly understood by the hall staff and others.

FIG. 50(b) is a schematic diagram showing another example of display contents when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 50(b), when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, in the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b that constitute the identification segment of the base display device 401, only the middle horizontal segment is lit. and turn off other segments. That is, "--" is displayed in the identification segment. In addition, of the 7-segment displays 401c and 401d constituting the ratio segment of the base display device 401, the left 7-segment display 401c displays "E" indicating that the error history is to be displayed, and the right 7-segment display is displayed. Using only the device 401d, the error type is displayed numerically in the same manner as in FIG. 50(a).

This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the case of displaying the base value on the base display device 401 and the case of displaying the error history on the base display device 401. It is possible to grasp whether the information displayed is the base value or the error history. When the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the base history is displayed using only the 7-segment display 401d on the right side of the ratio segment, and the error history is displayed on the 7-segment display 401c on the left side. Since "E" is displayed, even if the identification segment is broken and cannot be lit, the information displayed on the base display device 401 can be confirmed by looking at the display of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the ratio segment. It is possible to make the persons involved in the hall and the like clearly understand that the set value is the probability setting value.

In addition, even if the display contents of the base display device 401 in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are as shown in FIG. 49(b), FIG. When the error history is displayed on the display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "E" indicating the display of the error history. The display state can be clearly differentiated depending on the case, and it is possible to grasp whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a probability set value or an error history at a glance. can.

49(a), 49(c-1), (c-2), 49(e-1), and (e- In the case of 2), the display in the identification segment can be clearly differentiated between the display of the probability setting value and the display of the error history. It is possible to grasp whether the information received is a probability set value or an error history. When the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side displays "E" indicating the display of the error history. Also, the information displayed on the base display device 401 can be clearly understood by the hall staff and others.

FIG. 50(c-1) is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying the error type that occurred most recently as an error history, and FIG. FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram showing an example of display contents when displaying an error type that has occurred second closest in time as . In the examples of FIGS. 50(c-1) and (c-2), of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b forming the identification segment, the left 7-segment display 401a displays "E" indicating error history display. is displayed, and the 7-segment display 401b on the right side displays a numerical value indicating the number of times the error type to be displayed relates to an error that has recently occurred. That is, when the identification segment is displayed as "E1.", it indicates that the error type of the error that occurred most recently is displayed, and when the identification segment is displayed as "E2." indicates that the error type of the second most recent error is displayed. On the other hand, the ratio segment turns off all segments of the left 7-segment display 401c and uses only the right 7-segment display 401d to display the error type.

In this way, the display content displayed in the identification segment is different for the case of displaying the base value, the case of displaying the probability setting value, and the case of displaying the error history. can be differentiated. Therefore, at a glance, it is possible to recognize whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is a base value, a set probability value, or an error history. In addition, in the identification segment, by displaying a numerical value indicating how close in time the error type to be displayed relates to the error that occurred, It can be clearly indicated whether it relates to an error that has occurred.

When the base value is displayed on the base display device 401, the base value is displayed in two digits in the ratio segment. Only the indicator 401d is used to display the error type, and all the segments of the left 7-segment indicator 401c are turned off. Seeing that all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c are turned off, it is possible to make the people involved in the hall clearly understand that the information displayed on the base display device 401 is not at least the base value. can. Then, from the situation that the error display button 502 is pressed, etc., not when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, the information displayed on the base display device 401 is an error history to the hall staff. can be easily comprehended.

Next, referring to FIG. 51, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 indicates that the base display device 401 is displaying the probability set value in the setting change mode (hereinafter referred to as "setting changing display"). and a display mode indicating that the probability set value is being displayed in the setting confirmation mode (hereinafter referred to as "setting confirmation display").

First, FIG. 51(a) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37. As shown in FIG. A plurality of LEDs 37a are provided as described above in the description of the first embodiment, and depending on the lighting state of the plurality of LEDs 37a, a variable display is performed, a pattern according to the result of the lottery is displayed after the variable display, or a reserved series is displayed. show. In addition, the LED 37a includes seven round number notification LEDs 37a1 (first round number notification LED to seventh round number notification LED) for notifying the maximum number of rounds in the big win when a big win occurs.

The pachinko machine 10 uses the round number notification LED 37a1 to light the round number notification LED 37a1 in a lighting pattern different from the notification of the maximum number of rounds, thereby confirming that the setting is being changed or the setting is being confirmed. Notifies that display is being performed.

FIG. 51(b) shows a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 2, a lighting pattern for notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15, and a setting changing LED 37a1. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a lighting pattern for notifying that the display is on, and a lighting pattern for notifying that the setting confirmation display is on;

When the maximum number of rounds is 2, the lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "off"; the second round number notification LED is "off"; is "off", the fourth round number notification LED is "off", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "on", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on". .

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the maximum number of rounds is 15 is that the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "on", and the third round number notification LED is "on". is "on", the fourth round number notification LED is "on", the fifth round number notification LED is "off", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "off". .

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting is being changed is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "on", the second round number notification LED is "off", and the third round number notification LED is "off". The fourth round number notification LED is "on", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

The lighting pattern of the round number notification LED 37a1 when notifying that the setting confirmation display is in progress is as follows: the first round number notification LED is "on"; the second round number notification LED is "off"; The fourth round number notification LED is "off", the fifth round number notification LED is "on", the sixth round number notification LED is "off", and the seventh round number notification LED is "on".

In addition, in this embodiment, the number of rounds notification LED 37a1 is used to not only notify the maximum number of rounds at the time of a big hit, but also to indicate that the setting is being changed or that the setting is being checked by a lighting pattern different from the lighting pattern used in those notifications. Although the case of notifying that the display is being performed has been described, using an LED other than the round number notification LED 37a1, such as an LED that notifies the jackpot design or an LED that notifies the winning design, or the entire LED 37a, the original A lighting pattern that is not used for notification may be used to notify that the setting changing display or setting checking display is being performed. Thus, without changing the hardware configuration of the first pattern display device 37, it is possible to inform the first pattern display device 37 of setting changing display or setting checking display only by software control.

Next, with reference to FIG. 52, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 52 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment in that the setting key 501 and the error display button 502 are connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110; The difference is that the impact detection sensor 503 and the magnetic sensor 504 are connected to the input/output port 215 of the payout control device 111 . Further, the point that an error detection signal is output from the payout control device 111 to the main control device 110 is also different from the pachinko machine 10 of the fifth embodiment.

Setting key 501 outputs to main controller 110 a signal indicating whether it is in the off state or the on state. The main controller 110 grasps the state of the setting key 501 during the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, and outputs from the RAM erase switch circuit 253 provided with the RAM erase switch 122. By grasping the contents of the RAM erase signal SG2 and the signal output from the door opening switch, the start-up mode is determined based on the conditions shown in FIG.

Error display button 502 outputs to main controller 110 a signal indicating the presence or absence of a pressing operation. Based on the signal output from the error display button 502, main controller 110 determines whether or not the error display button 502 has been pressed, and causes the base display device 401 to display the error history while the error display button 502 is being pressed.

The impact detection sensor 503 is a sensor for detecting that the pachinko machine 10 has been impacted. The magnetic sensor 504 is a sensor for detecting that a magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10 .

When the impact detection sensor 503 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 detects that an impact has been applied to the pachinko machine 10 by a fraudulent player, and the flow direction of the balls has been changed illegally. In order to notify the main controller 110 of the occurrence of the error, as well as to instruct the launch control device 112 to stop launching the ball as a serious error. Outputs an error detection signal.

Further, when the magnetic sensor 504 detects that the magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10, the payout control device 111 detects that the magnet has been brought close to the pachinko machine 10 by the fraudulent player, and the flow direction of the ball is illegally changed. and to instruct the launch control device 112 to stop firing the ball as a serious error, and to notify the main control device 110 of the occurrence of the error. error detection signal.

When the main controller 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout controller 111, it stops the progress of the game. Thereby, when there is a possibility that a serious error has occurred, the game in the pachinko machine 10 can be stopped. In addition, the main controller 110 stores the error type (impact detection error or magnet detection error) notified by the error detection signal received from the payout controller 111 as error data 203t (see FIG. 53) of the RAM 203 described later. ). When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the outer work area 203y1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. The outer work area 203y1 stores at least base value data 203r, character product ratio data 203s, and error data 203t.

The base value data 203r is data necessary for calculating the base value and displaying the calculated base value on the base display device 401. For example, the total out number counter shown in FIG. 203j, low-probability payout number counter 203k, real-time base value data 203l, previous base value data 203m, pre-previous base value data 203n, pre-previous base value data 203o, new startup flag 203p, and the like.

The character product ratio data 203s is data necessary for calculating the character product ratio and displaying the calculated character product ratio on the base display device 401. For example, the first counter 263a shown in FIG. , first 2 counter 263b, general 1 counter 263c, general 2 counter 263d, big winning opening counter 263e, out counter 263f, role product ratio data 264a, continuous role product ratio data 264b, or similar data. .

The error data 203 t is data indicating the error type of the error that occurred in the pachinko machine 10 . When an error detection signal is received from the payout control device 111, the error type indicated by the error detection signal is stored as the error data 203t. When the error display button 502 is pressed, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 based on the error type stored in the error data 203t.

Here, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is only the error type that occurred most recently, only the latest error type is always stored in the error data 203t. Specifically, when the main controller 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout controller 111, it overwrites the error data 203t with the error type indicated by the error detection signal. As a result, the base display device 401 always stores only the latest error type, and the error history displayed on the base display device 401 displays only the error type that occurred most recently.

On the other hand, if the error history to be displayed on the base display device 401 is to display error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, four times) going back from the error, including the error that occurred closest in time, , in the error data 203t, the times of occurrence are stored for a plurality of times in order from the time closest to the current time.

For example, in the error data 203t, the error data 203t stores the error types that occurred closest in time so that four error types are stored in order from the time of occurrence closest to the current time. First error type data to be stored, second error type data to store the error type that occurred second closest in time, and third error type to store the error type that occurred third closest in time data and fourth error type data storing the error type that occurred fourth closest in time. When the main control device 110 receives the error detection signal from the payout control device 111, it shifts the third error type data to the fourth error type data, shifts the second error type data to the third error type data, and shifts the second error type data to the third error type data. The first error type data is shifted to the second error type data, and the error type indicated by the received error detection signal is stored as the first error type data. As a result, the error data 203t stores four error types in order from the time of occurrence closest to the current time. , a maximum of a plurality of (for example, four) error types are displayed before the error. In this case, if the address of each error type data is assigned so that the shift processing of each error type data can be performed with one LDIR instruction, the shift processing can be performed with only one LDIR instruction. .

In addition, when the error history displayed on the base display device 401 is to display error types for a maximum of multiple times (for example, 4 times) going back from the error, including the error that occurred closest in time, Alternatively, the error data 203t may be composed of a FIFO (First In First Out) type ring buffer to store the error types for a plurality of times. In this case, when the main control device 110 receives an error detection signal from the payout control device 111, the address (ring buffer pointer) storing the error type may be updated.

Here, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode, at least the base value data 203r, the character product ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. do. As a result, even if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, the base value data 203r, the character product ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t cannot be erased. can be done. Therefore, even if the fraudulent person turns on the RAM erase switch 122 to conceal the fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed.

Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode and the probability setting value is changed, the data in the RAM 203 is erased, but the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are erased. keep it without As a result, even if the fraudulent person changes the probability set value in an attempt to conceal the fraudulent act, it is possible to prevent the evidence from being concealed. On the other hand, the character product ratio data 203s is erased during erasing of the data in the RAM 203 after the probability set value is changed. This is because when the probability setting value is changed, the role ratio also changes. This is because the product ratio cannot be calculated correctly. On the other hand, since the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed, the base value data 203r is held to hold the past base value and information necessary for calculating the base value. By doing so, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts performed in the past without concealing them.

In this way, in erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value has been changed, part of the data related to the display on the base display device 401 is retained without being erased. By erasing the data, the data can be held or erased according to the actual situation of each data.

In addition, the outside work area 203y1 is divided into an area that is erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed, and an area that is held without being erased. The base value data 203r and the error data 203t may be stored in an area that stores the data 203s for the base value and retains the data 203s without erasing. As a result, the data including the role product ratio data 203s stored in the area to be erased can be easily erased by erasing the data in the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. The data including the base value data 203r and the error data 203t stored in the area to be held without fail can be reliably held by erasing the data from the RAM 203 after the probability setting value is changed. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 54, startup processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S4001). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4002). In this embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed with the timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "4 millisecond timer interrupt"). A base display control process (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display contents to be displayed on the display device 401 is executed with a timer interrupt occurring every 2 milliseconds (hereinafter referred to as "2 millisecond timer interrupt") as a trigger. In the process of S4002, for example, these 4 millisecond timer interrupts and 2 millisecond timer interrupts are permitted. In addition, when the random number value necessary for performing the jackpot lottery or the winning lottery is generated by a random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, in the process of S4002, the range of the random number to be generated ( maximum value).

In particular, by enabling the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting processing, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt occurs every 2 milliseconds and the base display control processing is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.例文帳に追加

It should be noted that, in the process of S4002, it is not always necessary to permit the 4-millisecond timer interrupt or set the range (maximum value) of the random number. In the processing of S4002, if the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and/or the range (maximum value) of the random value is not set, other start-up processes to be described later that are executed when the start-up process transitions to the main process are executed. In the raising process (S4013), the permission of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt and/or the setting of the range (maximum value) of the random value, which were not performed in the process of S4002, may be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4003). If it is turned on (S4003: Yes), it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door opening switch is on. is determined (S4004). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on, the setting key 501 is on, and the door opening switch is on. The startup mode is set to the setting change mode, and setting change processing is executed (S4005).

Details of the setting change processing (S4005) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 55 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (S4005). The setting change process (S4005) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for receiving and confirming the change of the probability setting value from the hall staff or the like.

In this setting change process (S4005), first, the start of displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4101). By this setting for starting the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) which is executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

Note that the probability setting value displayed here may be fixed to a specific value. That is, when the startup mode changes to the setting change mode, the display on the base display device 401 may always start with a specific probability set value. The specific probability setting value may be, for example, "1" which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or " It may be "4" or "6", which is the maximum value of the probability set values. As a result, regardless of the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off, the hall staff can change the probability setting value from a specific probability setting value.

On the other hand, when the startup mode becomes the setting change mode, the base display device 401 may start displaying the probability setting values that were set before the power was turned off. Accordingly, the hall staff can change the probability setting value while considering the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off.

Further, when the startup mode becomes the setting change mode, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is 3 or higher, the probability setting value is displayed as "3" on the base display device 401. is started, and if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is less than 3, even if the display is started with the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off. good. For example, if the probability setting value that was set before the power was turned off is high, such as "5" or "6," there may often be a case where the probability setting value is desired to be slightly smaller (for example, by 1). In such a case, if the probability setting value is started to be displayed as it is before the power is turned off, the following problem will occur. That is, the probability setting value is updated by adding 1 each time the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on. This is done by resetting to 1. Therefore, for example, when it is desired to change the probability setting value from "6" to "5", the probability setting value must be set almost once while repeatedly turning on the RAM erase switch 122. FIG. On the other hand, if the probability setting value set before the power is turned off is high, the probability setting value can be set while suppressing the number of times the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on by starting to display the probability setting value with "3". Values can be updated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S4102). : No), the probability set value is changed to the initial value (S4103), and the process proceeds to S4104. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "6", which is the maximum probability setting value. On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4102, when it is determined that the probability setting value is within the range of "1" to "6" (S4102: Yes), the process of S4103 is skipped and the process proceeds to S4104. .

In the processing of S4104, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4104). In the process of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the ON state to the OFF state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned OFF. This is because, as will be described later, when the pachinko machine 10 is started without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, the probability setting value is broken and falls within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"). If not, this setting change process is executed, but the setting key 501 is normally in the OFF state at this time. If it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state, the probability setting value is broken and falls within the normal range (“1”). to "6"), even if this setting change process is executed, if the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the process of S4104 will immediately give an affirmative determination, and as will be described later, the probability setting is performed. The value is fixed and the setting change process ends. Therefore, the persons involved in the hall or the like cannot change the probability set value. On the other hand, in the processing of S4104, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, if it is determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state, the hall If the person concerned does not turn the setting key 501 from the off state to the on state once and then back to the off state, the affirmative determination is not made in the processing of S4104. change is possible.

It should be noted that when the pachinko machine 10 is started without the RAM erase switch 122 being turned on, even if the probability setting value is broken and is not within the normal range (range of "1" to "6"), the setting When the change process is not executed (for example, this corresponds to a case where a person involved in the hall is prompted to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode), the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state.

If it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned off as a result of the process of S4104 (S4104: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4105: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4105: Yes), the probability set value is updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. In the process of S4106, the probability setting value is updated, as described above, if the probability setting value up to that point is "1" to "5", the probability setting value is incremented by 1, and the probability setting value up to that point is updated. If the value is "6", this is done by resetting the probability setting to "1". The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop processing of S4102→S4103→S4104: No→S4105 (and S4106)→S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4104: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the process of S4104 (S4104: Yes), the probability setting value displayed on the base display device 401 is changed to the probability setting value to be used in the game from now on. (S4107). Then, the end of the display of the probability set values on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is finished. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, Display of the base value is started on the base display device 401 .

Returning to FIG. 54, the description of the startup process is continued. After the setting change process of S4005 is finished, the setting change RAM clear process is executed (S4006). In this setting change RAM clearing process, out of the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) and the character ratio data 203s are erased (cleared), while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t are held without being erased. By erasing the data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set values stored in the internal work area 203x1), a new game is started using the newly set probability set values. can be done.

Also, as described above, when the probability setting value is changed, the character ratio also changes. The character ratio based on cannot be calculated correctly. By deleting the character product ratio data 203s in the setting change RAM clearing process, the character product ratio based on the changed probability setting value can be correctly calculated.

On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. By holding the necessary information, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts performed in the past without concealing them. In addition, in the setting change RAM clearing process, the error data 203t is also held, so that even if the fraudulent person who caused the error starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history can be saved. It cannot be erased, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent concealment.

After the process of S4006, other start-up processes are executed (S4013), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, if a negative determination is made in the process of S4004 (S4004: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off or the door opening switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the startup mode is set to the RAM clear mode, and normal RAM clear processing is executed (S4007). Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on, if the door opening switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. Normal RAM clear processing is executed in the RAM clear mode instead of the change mode (S4007). As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in the setting change mode, and the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from starting a game. can.

In the normal RAM clearing process (S4007), among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared). , the base value data 203r, the character product ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t are retained without being erased. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value stored in the inner work area 203x1).

On the other hand, by keeping the base value data 203r, the character product ratio data 203s, and the error data 203t without erasing them, the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on to erase the data in the RAM 203. can be displayed on the base display device 401 . Therefore, even if the fraudulent person turns on the RAM erase switch 122 to conceal the fraudulent activity, the fraudulent activity can be discovered from the base value, the character ratio, the error history, etc. displayed on the base display device 401. .

After the process of S4007, other start-up processes are executed (S4013), and the process shifts to the main process.

If it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the process of S4003 (S4003: No), then it is determined whether or not power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4008). If not (S4008: No), there is a possibility that the process at the time of the previous power shutdown did not end normally. .

If the RAM 203 stores power failure occurrence information (S4008: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated, and whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, the calculated RAM determination value is saved at the time of power failure. It is determined whether or not it matches the RAM determination value (S4009). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 203 . In this embodiment, the probability setting values stored in the RAM 203 are also used to calculate the checksum value.

If the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S4009: No), that is, if the calculated RAM determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off, the backed up data in the RAM 203 is destroyed. In this case, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") (S4010). Then, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4010: Yes), the process proceeds to S4007 to execute normal RAM clear processing. Needless to say, the probability setting value continues to be held without being erased in the normal RAM clearing process or the setting change RAM clearing process.

On the other hand, if the probability setting value is not within the normal range, for example, "7" (S4010: No), the process proceeds to S4005, the setting change process shown in FIG. Re-set the probability setting value to the concerned parties. At this time, the third symbol display device 81 may display a prompt to change the probability set value, or the voice output device 226 may output a notification sound or voice to notify that effect. Alternatively, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the set probability value is not within the normal range. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the persons involved in the hall or the like that the probability setting value needs to be reset.

If the calculated RAM determination value is normal as a result of the process of S4009 (S4009: Yes), then it is determined whether the setting key 501 is on and the door opening switch is on (S4011). If an affirmative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off, the setting key 501 is on, and the door opening switch is on. The startup mode is set to the setting confirmation mode, and setting confirmation processing is executed (S4012).

Details of the setting confirmation process (S4012) will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process (S4012). The setting confirmation process (S4012) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401. FIG.

In this setting confirmation process (S4012), first, the display start of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4201). By this setting for starting the display of the probability set value, the display of the probability set value is started on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) which is executed every 2 milliseconds. The display mode at this time is one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-2), (d-2), and (e-2).

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202). In the process of S4202, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it is determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. Note that it may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 is in the off state.

As a result of the processing of S4202, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4202: No), S4202 is repeatedly executed and the setting key 501 is waited until it is in the off state. During this time, the probability set value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401 . Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4202: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting values on the base display device 401 is set (S4203), and the setting confirmation process is finished. By the process of S4203, the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) which is executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability setting value, Display of the base value is started on the base display device 401 .

This setting confirmation process (S4012) is executed after it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. This is based on the idea that when the RAM judgment value is abnormal, the RAM clearing process should be executed before checking the probability setting value. However, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process may be executed before it is determined whether or not the RAM determination value (checksum) is normal. .

Returning to FIG. 54, the description of the startup process is continued. When the setting confirmation process of S4012 ends, other start-up processes are executed (S4013), and the process shifts to the main process.

If a negative determination is made in the process of S4011 (S4011: No), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off or the door opening switch is off. When the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is off, as shown in FIG. 47, the startup mode is set to the normal mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, and the other startup of S4013 is performed. After executing the raising process, it shifts to the main process. Even if the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, if the door opening switch is off (that is, if the inner frame 12 is closed), the startup mode is set. The normal mode is set instead of the confirmation mode, the setting confirmation process of S4012 is skipped, and other start-up processes of S4013 are executed, and then the process proceeds to the main process. As a result, even though the inner frame 12 is closed with the setting key 501 turned on, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in the setting confirmation mode and the pachinko machine 10 is prevented from starting a game. can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 57, base display control processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. As described above, this base display control process is a process for controlling the display contents displayed on the base display device 401, and is executed with a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds.

In the base display control process, first, various setting processes for performing display control of the base display device 401 are executed by the base display device control circuit 402 (S4301). Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed in the setting change mode (S4302). If it is determined that the setting is being changed (S4302: Yes), the probability setting value being changed is The included segment data for setting change is set as segment data (S4303), the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402 (S4309), and this base display control processing ends. As a result, on the base display device 401, the set probability value is displayed in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. be.

As a result of the process of S4302, if it is determined that the setting is not being changed (S4302: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation of the probability setting value is being performed in the setting confirmation mode (S4304). As a result, if it is determined that the setting is being confirmed (S4304: Yes), the setting confirmation segment data including the probability setting value of the setting confirmation is set as the segment data (S4305), and the segment data is used by the base display device control circuit. 402 (S4309), and the present base display control processing ends. As a result, on the base display device 401, the set probability value is displayed in one of the display modes shown in FIGS. be.

As a result of the process of S4304, if it is determined that the settings are not being checked (S4304: No), then it is determined whether or not the error history is being displayed based on the error display button 502 being pressed ( S4306). As a result, if it is determined that the error history is being displayed (S4306: Yes), the error history segment data including the error type is set as segment data (S4307), and the segment data is output to the base display device control circuit 402. (S4309), and the present base display control processing ends. As a result, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 in one of the display modes shown in FIGS.

As a result of the processing of S4306, if it is determined that the error history is not being displayed (S4306: No), the segment data for normal game including the base value or the ratio of the character is set as the segment data (S4308), and the segment data is displayed as the base. The data is output to the device control circuit 402 (S4309), and the base display control processing ends. As a result, the base display device 401 normally displays the base value or the character product ratio.

Next, with reference to FIG. 58, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment will be described. FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process for performing main control of the game, and is triggered by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4401). By judging whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range each time the timer interrupt processing is executed, even if the probability setting value is destroyed for some reason, it can be found early. can do.

As a result of the processing of S4401, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4401: Yes), the normal game processing for performing the main control of the game is executed (S4402), then the calculation of the role ratio and the base Role ratio processing (base processing) for managing information on the role product ratio and base value, such as calculation of values, is executed (S4403), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

In the game process (S4402), for example, processes such as S101 to S111 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10) executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 described in the first embodiment are executed. That is, the main control of the game includes a lottery for big wins, setting of variable display, opening and closing control of the big winning opening (large opening) 65a at the time of big winning, winning lottery for the second symbol display device 83, and the like. . It should be noted that the MPU 201 uses the in-use area 203x (the inner work area 203x1 and the inner stack area 203x2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4402. On the other hand, the MPU 201 uses the outside working area 203y (outside work area 203y1 and outside stack area 203y2) in the RAM 203 while executing the process of S4403.

At this time, in the processing of S4403, as described in the third embodiment, from the game processing that performs the main control of the game that uses the inside area 203x of the area of use, the ratio of the character and the base that uses the area outside the area of use 203y When shifting to the processing related to the value, among the registers 200 provided in the MPU 201, the register 200 used in the processing related to the role ratio is individually saved to the external work area 203y1 of the RAM 203, and the role ratio processing and After executing the processing related to the base processing, when shifting (returning) from the processing related to the character product ratio using the area 203y outside the use area to the game processing for performing the main control of the game using the area 203x inside the use area (return), the outside The registers 200 saved to the work area 203y1 may be individually restored.

In addition, as described in the fourth embodiment, during the execution of the process using the inside area 203x of the use area, the process of executing the process related to the character product ratio or the base value using the area outside the use area 203y can be performed by the CALL instruction. In the reading stage, the register 200 used in the process related to the role product ratio or base value may be individually cleared to 0, and the process of executing the process related to the role product ratio or base value may be read out with a CALL instruction. . Then, at the stage of ending the processing using the area 203y outside the use area read out by the CALL instruction and returning to the process using the inside area 203x of the use area, the register 200 used in the process relating to the character product ratio is individually read out. After clearing to 0 immediately, it may return to role ratio processing (base processing).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4401, if the probability setting value is not within the predetermined range (S4401: No), the processing of the game processing (S4402) is not performed, and the notification command is set (S4404), and the notification command is issued. Send to the audio ramp controller 113 . The sound lamp control device 113 receives this notification command and outputs, from the sound output device 226, a notification sound or voice prompting the pachinko hall personnel to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability set value. Or, it outputs to the display control device 114 a command for causing the third pattern display device 81 to display a prompt to call a hall official. Alternatively, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the set probability value is not within the normal range. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, and a process of changing the probability set value is performed.

Further, following the processing of S4404, a ball launch stop instruction is given to the payout control device 111 (S4405). This stops the launch of the ball. After the processing of S4405, the timer interrupt processing ends. While the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4401: No), even if the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds, the game processing (S4402) is not executed. completely stopped. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by continuing to play the game with the abnormal set probability value.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or turned on, the startup regardless of the probability setting value A mode can be selected and a launch mode related to the probability set point. When the start-up mode that is not related to the set probability value is selected, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be selected depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As a result, if the people involved in the hall understand the meaning of each start-up mode, they can easily understand what kind of operation is necessary for the pachinko machine 10 required for the start-up mode to be started from now on. .

In addition, the effects described above can be obtained by the configuration mentioned in the description of the sixth embodiment. In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to fifth embodiments can produce the same effect as that of the configuration.

<Seventh embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 of a seventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIG. In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erasure switch 122, and it is detected that the setting key 501 is turned off. A case has been described in which the probability setting value is determined when the On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the setting change switch (not shown) is turned on to update the probability setting value. , the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on to determine the set probability.

Here, the setting change switch is a switch for updating the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change mode. The board box 100 is protruded and can be operated by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100 . The setting change switch normally outputs an off signal, and outputs an on signal when the switch is pressed all the way down.

The pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the seventh embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to sixth embodiments. Description is omitted.

FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (S4005) executed during the startup process (see FIG. 54) by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 according to the seventh embodiment. The setting change process (S4005) is a process executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, as in the sixth embodiment, and accepts and confirms the change of the probability setting value from the hall officials. This process is for

In the setting change process according to the seventh embodiment, first, the processes of S4101 to S4103 similar to those of the sixth embodiment are executed, and then it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4111). As a result, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S4111: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting change switch is turned on (S4112).

As a result, if it is determined that the setting change switch is not turned on (S4112: No), the process returns to S4102, and if it is determined that the setting change switch is turned on (S4112: Yes), By the same method as S4106 (see FIG. 55), the probability set value is updated (S4106), and the process returns to S4102. The probability set value updated by the process of S4106 is displayed on the base display device 401 under the control of the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds.

The loop processing of S4102->S4103->S4111: No->S4112 (and S4106)->S4102 continues to be executed until it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on (S4111: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on by the process of S4111 (S4111: Yes), the probability set value displayed on the base display device 401 is set as the probability set value to be used in the game from now on. (S4107). When the probability set value is determined, the data in the RAM 203 is erased (cleared) as described in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 and determining the probability set value, the hall staff can be made to strongly recognize that the data in the RAM 203 will be erased.

After the processing of S4107, it is then determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned on (S4113). In the process of S4113, if it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state, it may be determined that the setting key 501 has changed to the OFF state. It may be determined that the setting key 501 is turned off by detecting that the level of the signal output from is in the off state.

As long as it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned off as a result of the process of S4113 (S4113: No), the process of S4113 is repeatedly executed. When it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off as a result of the process of S4113 (S4113: Yes), the end of the display of the probability setting value on the base display device 401 is set (S4108), and the setting change process is performed. exit. By the process of S4108, the display of the probability set value on the base display device 401 is ended by the control by the base display control process (see FIG. 57) executed every 2 milliseconds by the end setting of the display of the probability set value, Display of the base value is started on the base display device 401 .

As described above, the configuration referred to in the description of the seventh embodiment provides the effects described above. Further, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to sixth embodiments can produce the same effects as those obtained by the configuration.

<Eighth embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eighth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 60 to 66. FIG. In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the probability setting value can be updated by starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value can be confirmed by starting in the setting confirmation mode. explained. Also, regarding the case where the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined from among the normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode according to the operation state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power is turned on. explained.

Here, if the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the problem is what mode should be used when the power is turned on again. The pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment solves this problem. Further, in the eighth embodiment, the abnormality of the RAM 203 (hereinafter referred to as "RAM abnormality"), the fact that the setting change process has been performed, and the fact that the setting confirmation process has been performed are output via the external output terminal 503. Output to computer 600 . Through the hall computer 600, the persons involved in the hall can grasp the fact that the RAM abnormality occurred in the pachinko machine 10, the setting change processing or the setting confirmation was performed.

The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machines 10 of the sixth and eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as those of the first to seventh embodiments. Description is omitted.

FIG. 60 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the eighth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that an external output terminal 503 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 . The external output terminal 503 is configured to be connectable with the hall computer 600 . The external output terminal 503 is provided so as to protrude from the main board through a hole provided in the board box 100. By connecting a wiring connector (not shown) connected to the hall computer 600 to the external output terminal 503, Signals and data output from main controller 110 to hall computer 600 are relayed to hall computer 600 .

FIG. 61 is a schematic diagram schematically showing data stored in the internal work area 203x1 of the RAM 203 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. As shown in FIG. In this work area 203x1, probability set value data 203x11, change probability set value data 203c12, setting changing flag 203x13, setting confirming flag 203x14, RAM error flag 203x15, and RAM erase switch flag 203x16 are stored. At least stored.

The probability setting value data 203x11 is data indicating the probability setting value set (determined) in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. In this embodiment, similarly to the sixth and seventh embodiments, it is possible to set the probability setting values "1" to "6", and each probability setting value ("1" to "6") , the jackpot random number value and/or the winning random number value of the second symbol are stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot random number value and/or the number of second symbol winning random number values determined for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability for that probability setting value. In the pachinko machine 10, the smaller the probability setting value (closer to 1), the lower the probability of the big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. Alternatively, the jackpot random number value and/or the second symbol winning random number value are determined for each probability setting value so that the probability of winning the second symbol is high.

In the setting change process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value determined by the hall officials or the like is set to the probability setting value data 203x11. stored in The pachinko machine 10 sets a jackpot random number value and/or a second pattern winning random number value corresponding to the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 based on the ROM 202, and a jackpot lottery or a winning lottery for the second pattern. to run.

The jackpot random number value and/or the second symbol win random number value is fixed, and the range and/or the random number generated for the jackpot lottery is set for each probability setting value ("1" to "6"). Alternatively, the range of random numbers generated for performing the winning lottery for the second symbol may be stored in the RAM 203 in advance. The jackpot random number range and/or the second symbol winning random number range determined for each probability setting value determines the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability at the probability setting value. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 has a range of random numbers generated to perform a jackpot lottery corresponding to the probability set value indicated by the probability set value data 203x11 and/or A range is set to generate random numbers for performing a big winning lottery and/or random numbers for performing a winning lottery for a second symbol.

The update probability setting value data 203x12 is the probability of being updated by a hall official or the like before the probability setting value is determined in the setting change process executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode. This is data indicating a set value. That is, the probability set value data 203x11 described above is data indicating the determined probability set value, while the update probability set value data 203x12 is updated by a person involved in the hall before determination in the setting change process. data indicating the probability setting value to be set.

Specifically, when execution of the setting change process is started, the probability setting value data 203x11 is first saved as the updating probability setting value data 203x12. That is, the probability setting values up to now are set in the update probability setting value data 203x12, and the probability setting values are updated by the persons involved in the hall, etc., starting from the probability setting values up to now. Each time the RAM erase switch 122, which also serves as a switch for updating the probability setting value, is turned on, the probability setting value data for updating 203x12 is incremented by 1, and the probability setting value data for updating 203x12 is "6". When the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on at this time, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated to "1". When the setting key 501 is turned off, the update probability setting value data 203x12 is stored as the probability setting value data 203x11, and the probability setting value updated by the hall personnel or the like is used in the game from now on. It is fixed as a probability setting value.

Here, in the setting change process, the probability setting value is updated using the update probability setting value data 203x12 instead of using the probability setting value data 203x11 for the following reasons. . That is, if the probability setting value is updated using the probability setting value data 203x11, if the power supply is interrupted due to a power failure or the like during the setting change process, the probability setting value that has been used in the game is erased by the update. It will be done. Therefore, even if you want to turn on the power again, start up the pachinko machine 10, and change the probability setting value from scratch, you cannot do so because the probability setting value used in the game up to that point is gone. Gone. In this case, the setting change process can be resumed from the probability setting value saved in the probability setting value data 203x11 before the power was turned off, that is, the probability setting value in the middle of the setting change. There is a risk of giving hall officials the illusion of

Also, depending on the relationship between the timing at which the hall personnel turn on the RAM erase switch 122 and the timing at which the power is turned off, an event may occur in which the probability set value data 203x11 is not updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. obtain. In this case, there is a possibility that the pachinko players may feel distrust because the set probability value thought to be updated by the pachinko machine 10 is different from the set probability value saved by the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Therefore, in this embodiment, when the probability setting value is updated in the setting change process, the probability setting value is updated using the update probability setting value data 203x12. 203x11 can retain the previously used probability settings. As a result, even if the power is turned off during the setting change process, the probability setting value used in the previous game remaining as the probability setting value data 203x11 will be updated in the setting change process to be executed again. By storing the probability setting value data 203x12, it is possible to update the probability setting value again from the beginning. Therefore, the persons involved in the hall or the like can renew the probability setting data without anxiety.

The setting changing flag 203x13 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting changing process is being executed. The setting changing flag 203x13 indicates that the setting changing process is being executed when it is on, and indicates that the setting changing process is not being executed when it is off. The setting changing flag 203x13 is normally set to off. Then, when the execution of the setting change process is started, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to ON. The setting changing flag 203x13 is turned off when the probability setting value updated in the setting change process is finalized and the execution of the setting change process ends.

Now, if the setting change flag 203x13 is ON in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 when the power is turned on, the setting change process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. That is, the power was turned off while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, referring to FIG. 62, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram for explaining the start-up mode set corresponding to each start-up operation when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change or setting confirmation.

As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off during setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. When the startup operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting change mode in which setting change processing is redone from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of being started in a normal mode.

After the power was turned off during setting change, a start-up operation was performed to start up in the RAM clear mode, that is, turn on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off to turn on the power. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of being started in the RAM clear mode.

After the power is turned off during setting change, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erase switch 122 to turn on the power is performed. If so, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode according to the startup operation. Also in this case, the setting change process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning).

After the power is turned off during setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the startup operation of turning on the power while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off is performed. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting change mode in which the setting change process is redone from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of being started in the setting confirmation mode.

In this way, the startup mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during a setting change is not only the startup operation for startup in the setting change mode, but also other startup operations. Even if it is a raise operation, it enters a setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed again from the beginning. As a result, when the power is turned off during the setting change, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to make the hall personnel change the probability setting value from scratch without fail. Therefore, it is possible to have the person involved in the hall or the like surely change the probability set value, and to confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, the pachinko machine can reliably update and confirm the probability setting values when the power is turned on again. A change in the probability setting to 10 can be made.

In addition, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time when the power was turned off during the setting change, the update of the probability setting value is restarted. It is possible to update the probability setting value again from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the game so far. Therefore, the persons involved in the hall or the like can renew the probability setting data without anxiety.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is a flag indicating whether or not the setting confirmation process is being executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting confirmation mode as the startup mode. be. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 indicates that the setting confirmation process is being performed when it is on, and indicates that the setting confirmation process is not being performed when it is off. The setting confirmation flag 203x14 is normally set to OFF. When the setting confirmation process starts, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned on, and when the setting confirmation process ends, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned off.

Now, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation process is being executed when the power is turned off last time. That is, the power was turned off during confirmation of the probability set value by the setting confirmation process. Therefore, in this case, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is partially changed.

Here, referring to FIG. 62 again, the start-up mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting confirmation will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, after the power is turned off while checking the settings, the power is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. When the start-up operation is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in a setting confirmation mode in which setting confirmation processing is redone from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of being started in a normal mode. As a result, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the apparatus by operating in the normal mode after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up without anxiety because the persons concerned with the hall can confirm that the probability set value is not destroyed by the power cutoff during the confirmation of the setting.

After the power was turned off during setting confirmation, a start-up operation was performed to start up in the RAM clear mode, that is, turn on the RAM erase switch 122 with the setting key 501 turned off to turn on the power. In this case, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person involved in the hall. Turning on the RAM erase switch 122 indicates at least a clear intention of the persons involved in the hall to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up processing according to the will of the persons involved in the hall.

After the power is turned off during setting confirmation, a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erase switch 122 to turn on the power. Even if it does, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the start-up operation. In this case as well, turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erase switch 122 clearly indicates that the person involved in the hall wants to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the will of the persons involved in the hall.

After the power is turned off during setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the startup operation of turning on the power while the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off is performed. Even if it does, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode as in the start-up operation. In this case as well, turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erase switch 122 clearly indicates that the person involved in the hall wants to check the probability setting value again. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning), the startup process can be performed in accordance with the will of the persons involved in the hall.

Returning to FIG. 61, the description is continued. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is a flag for indicating that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, such as the data stored in the RAM 203 being destroyed. The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 indicates that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203 when it is on, and indicates that there is no abnormality in the RAM 203 when it is off.

The RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is normally set to off. Then, in the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 when the power is turned on, the RAM 203 checks whether the power interruption occurrence information that should be saved at the time of the previous power interruption is stored in the RAM 203 or not. If the judgment value (checksum) is not normal or the probability setting value is not within the normal range ("1" to "6"), the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is set to ON assuming that the RAM 203 is abnormal.

When the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on, the RAM abnormality is notified to prompt restarting in the setting change mode, and the hall computer 600 is notified to that effect via the external output terminal 503. The MPU 201 of the control device 110 is put into an infinite loop state. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode by the persons concerned with the hall, etc., and the probability setting value is surely reset, and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. can be directed to

The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is a flag indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 in the MPU 201 of the main controller 110. FIG. In this embodiment, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 is started, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability set value is set. Also used for updating. That is, the probability set value is updated each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

At this time, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability set value is updated. The RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is used to determine whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from off to on. That is, when the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on. After making that determination, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, after the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is set to " set to "on". This is because, at the stage where it is first determined whether the state of the RAM erase switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state, the RAM erase switch is still operated as a start-up operation for starting the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. 122 may remain turned on, if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off at this time, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. There is a risk of erroneously determining that the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the probability setting value has been turned on, and updating the probability setting value. As a result, the people involved in the hall feel distrustful of the fact that the probability set values have been updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability set values.

On the other hand, after the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, before judging whether the state of the RAM erasure switch 122 has changed from the off state to the on state, the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 is once set to " By setting "on", even if the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode at the time of this first judgment, it is set as probability setting. It is possible to suppress updating of the probability set value by erroneously judging that the RAM erase switch 122 for updating the value has been turned on.

Next, with reference to FIG. 63, startup processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 63 is a flow chart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In this start-up process, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S4201). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4202). In this embodiment, as in the sixth and seventh embodiments, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that generates the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display contents to be displayed on the base display device 401 every 2 milliseconds. Execute as an opportunity. In the process of S4202, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, in the case where the random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110 is used to generate the random number values necessary for performing the jackpot lottery or the winning lottery, the range of the random number to be generated ( maximum value). Also, access to the RAM 203 is permitted in the processing of S4202. In addition, in the processing of S4202, the main controller 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113.

In particular, by enabling the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting processing, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt occurs every 2 milliseconds and the base display control processing is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.例文帳に追加

Note that it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of random numbers in the process of S4202. If the random value range (maximum value) is not set in the processing of S4202, during the other start-up processing (S4221), which will be described later and will be executed when the start-up processing shifts to the main processing, The random number range (maximum value) may be set, which was not performed in the processing of S4202.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4203). As a result, if information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S4203: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power interruption was completed normally. It is determined whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off (S4204). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 203 . In this embodiment, the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

As a result of the process of S4204, if it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off (S4204: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the RAM determination value is used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the received data (information) is normally held, it is then determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4205). Here, the reason for judging whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range is that when the power was turned off last time, although the processing related to the power interruption was performed normally, the probability setting value This is because there is a possibility that it is broken and out of the normal range. The process of S4205 is performed in order to reliably detect such an abnormality in the set probability value.

Then, if the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4205: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag 203x13 is ON (S4206). If the setting changing flag 203x13 is on (S4206: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, the power supply was turned on while the probability setting value was being updated by the setting change process. is broken. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S4213, and the setting change process is executed (S4213).

As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while changing the settings is not only the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, but also other startup modes. Even if it is an operation, it is possible to enter a setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed again from the beginning. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the setting change, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to make the hall personnel change the probability setting value from scratch without fail. Therefore, it is possible to have the person involved in the hall or the like surely change the probability set value, and to confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, the pachinko machine can reliably update and confirm the probability setting values when the power is turned on again. A change in the probability setting to 10 can be made.

In addition, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time when the power was turned off during the setting change, the update of the probability setting value is restarted. It is possible to update the probability setting value again from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the game so far. Therefore, the persons involved in the hall or the like can renew the probability setting data without anxiety. Details of the setting change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if the setting change flag 203x13 is on as a result of the process of S4206 (S4206: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. As a process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the person concerned, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4207). In the process of S4207, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and timer interrupt processing, which will be described later, is not executed. The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205 instead of using what is read.

As a result of the process of S4207, if the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off (S4207: No), it is then determined whether the setting key 501 is in the ON state in order to further confirm the start-up operation ( S4208). In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only determination is made as to whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It may be determined whether the switch is on.

As a result of the processing of S4208, if the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4208: NO), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is in the off state. means operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4209). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4209: Yes), it means that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, confirmation of the probability setting value by the setting confirmation process. indicates that the power has been cut off during In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4210). The currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 by the setting confirmation process. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In this way, even if the person involved in the hall performs the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, but the setting confirmation process is started from the beginning ( Start up the pachinko machine 10 in a setting confirmation mode for redoing (from scratch). As a result, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the apparatus by operating in the normal mode after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up without anxiety because the persons concerned with the hall can confirm that the probability set value is not destroyed by the power cutoff during the confirmation of the setting. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is OFF as a result of the processing of S4209 (S4209: No), it means that the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. . Further, the process of S4209 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4206 that the setting change flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), that is, when the power was turned off last time, the setting change process was executed. Even if it was not running.

Therefore, in this case, the startup mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the startup operation by the person concerned with the hall, etc., the setting confirmation processing of S4210 and the processing of S4211, which will be described later, are skipped, and other startup processing is executed. After that (S4214), the process proceeds to the main process. As for other start-up processing, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In this embodiment, similarly to the sixth or seventh embodiment, the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) that performs the main control of the game is executed with the 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. . By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the processing of S4214, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

In addition, in the main processing of this embodiment, only the update processing of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 and the update processing of the fluctuation type counter CS1 (S702 and S703 in FIG. 17) are executed during the loop. Executes infinite loop processing. Power failure monitoring processing executed in the main processing in the first embodiment (processing for monitoring whether or not there is information on the occurrence of power failure, and executing processing related to power failure when there is information on the occurrence of power failure, FIG. 17) (S701, S704 to S707) are executed in the timer interrupt process in this embodiment.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on as a result of the process of S4208 (S4208: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on. means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4208 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4206 that the setting change flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), that is, when the power supply was cut off last time, the setting change process is executed. was not running. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode started up by the person concerned with the hall. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4210, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4210). The currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 by the setting confirmation process. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the setting confirmation process (S4210) ends, the external output process is executed (S4211). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 . Thus, the persons involved in the hall can understand that the pachinko machine 10 has executed the setting confirmation process and the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 . Therefore, when the probability setting value is displayed illegally, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the process of S4207, which is the process for confirming the start-up operation performed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the hall personnel, etc. ( S4207: Yes), and in order to confirm the activation operation, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212). In this embodiment, a case will be described in which only determination is made as to whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It may be determined whether the switch is on.

As a result of the processing of S4212, if the setting key 501 is on (S4212: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on. It means that you have performed an up operation. When the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is on or not, that is, whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time. Regardless of whether or not, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set to the setting change mode.

Therefore, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state as a result of the process of S4212 (S4212: Yes), the setting change process is executed (S4213). By the setting change processing, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on by a hall official or the like, the probability setting value is updated, and when the setting key 501 is turned off. , the updated probability set value is determined as the probability set value to be used in the game from now on, and RAM clear processing is performed. Thereby, after changing the probability setting value, the game machine can be newly started with the probability setting value after the change. Details of the setting confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process was in progress when the power was turned off last time, turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 means that the hall personnel etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the will of the persons involved in the hall.

When the setting change process (S4213) ends, the external output process is executed (S4214). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been changed is output to hall computer 600 via external output terminal 503 . As a result, the persons involved in the hall can grasp that the setting change process has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value has been changed. Therefore, when the probability set value is illegally changed, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, if the setting key 501 is in the off state as a result of the processing of S4212 (S4212: No), then it is determined whether or not the RAM is abnormal by referring to whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is on. (S4215). Here, the processing of S4207 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), the processing of S4212 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4212: No), and the processing of S4215 is performed. If executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that there is no RAM abnormality in the processing of S4215 (S4215: No).

In this case, since it is determined in the process of S4206 that the setting change flag 203x13 is off (S4206: No), the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. be. Therefore, the processing of S4207 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4207: Yes), the processing of S4212 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4212: No), and the processing of S4215 determines that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that it is not (S4215: No), it means that the staff involved in the hall performed startup operation in the RAM clear mode, and since the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time, As shown in FIG. 62, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the RAM clear mode regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time. Therefore, RAM clear processing is executed (S4216).

In this RAM clearing process, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the internal work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), The character product ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) stored in the outer work area 203y1 are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Also, even if the RAM clearing process is executed, the probability set value data 203x11 is held, so the game can be continued with the probability set value determined before the RAM clearing process is executed.

Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, if there is no RAM abnormality and the start-up operation for starting in the RAM clear mode is performed. , the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person involved in the hall. Turning on the RAM erase switch 122 indicates at least a clear intention of the persons involved in the hall to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up processing according to the will of the persons involved in the hall.

When the RAM clearing process of S4216 is completed, other start-up processes are executed (S4221), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S4203 that the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4203: No), the processing of S4204 changes the calculated RAM determination value to the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4204: No), or if the process of S4205 determines that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4205: No) If this applies, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on (S4217). (S4218). Also in the processing of S4218, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205 as in the processing of S4207.

As a result of the process of S4218, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4218: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S4212 described above, and further checks whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state. It judges (S4212). As a result, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4212: Yes), it means that the person involved in the hall or the like has performed the start-up operation in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4212: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode according to the start-up operation of the hall staff, etc., the process proceeds to S4213 and the above-described setting change processing is executed.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be set again and the RAM can be cleared. Therefore, a new game can be started with a newly set normal probability set value. By this RAM clearing, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned off. Therefore, after that, main controller 110 can control the game without executing the processing related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4218 (S4218: No), and even if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4218, As a result of the processing, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S4218: Yes, S4212: No), the hall staff and others should select normal mode, RAM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode in the RAM abnormality. It means that the startup operation was performed in one of the startup modes.

In this case, the process proceeds to the above-described S4215, and it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal in the process of S4215 (S4215: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4219. In the processing of S4219, RAM abnormality setting processing is performed (S4219). In this RAM abnormality setting process, a process for notifying RAM abnormality is executed. For example, once the power is turned off, the notification prompting to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is performed by voice output from the voice output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81, so that the voice lamp A command is transmitted to the control device 113 .

Then, it executes an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality via the external output terminal 503 (S4220), executes other start-up processes (S4221), and shifts to the main process. do. Since the RAM abnormality is notified to the hall computer 600, the persons involved in the hall can surely grasp the occurrence of the RAM abnormality without noticing the notification from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Here, although the details will be described later, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on due to the occurrence of a RAM abnormality, in the timer interrupt process, the main control related to the game is not executed except for the random number update process and the power failure monitoring process. and In other words, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 enters an infinite loop state since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt process after shifting to the main process. Then, the RAM abnormality setting process of S4219 and the external output process of S4220 are performed to make the pachinko machine 10 restart in the setting change mode after the hall staff and the like grasp the RAM abnormality, and the probability setting value is reliably set. By resetting and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to operate normally.

Thus, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to be restarted in the setting change mode by the persons concerned with the hall. A dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required to start up in the setting change mode. Therefore, a hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key must intervene to resolve the RAM abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole side from solving the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

Next, referring to FIG. 64, the details of the setting change process (S4213), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63), will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the setting change process (S4213). The setting change process (S4213) is a process that is executed when the start-up mode is the setting change mode, and is a process for receiving and confirming the change of the probability setting value from the person involved in the hall or the like.

In this setting change process, first, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4301). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 66), which will be described later, is executed with the occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt as a trigger. Although the details will be described later, power failure monitoring processing is executed in this timer interrupt processing, and when the power is turned off during execution of the setting change processing, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring processing. It is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power supply is completely turned off.

Next, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set to ON (S4302), and initial settings necessary for starting setting change are performed (S4303). In this process of S4303, for example, an initial value is set in the RAM area used in this setting change process. It should be noted that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 may be cleared (turned off) in accordance with the execution of the setting change process at the time of the RAM abnormality, either in the process of S4303 or in the RAM clear process (S4313), which will be described later. good. As described above, when the RAM is abnormal, the pachinko machine 10 is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. When the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is reset and the RAM 203 is cleared, so that the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally. Therefore, by clearing (setting off) the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 along with execution of the setting change process, it is possible to indicate that the RAM abnormality has been resolved.

Next, the probability setting value data 203x11 indicating the probability setting values that have been used so far is read and stored as update probability setting value data 203x12 (S4303). The probability setting value is updated using the updating probability setting value data 203x12 instead of the probability setting value data 203x11. This update probability set value data 203 x 12 is displayed on the base display device 401 . The display mode at this time may be any one of FIGS. 49(a), (b), (c-1), (d-1), and (e-1).

Next, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is set to ON (S4305). Note that the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 may be turned on during the process of S4303. When the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned on until the processing of S4309 (determining whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on) is executed for the first time after the setting change processing is executed. Setting should be done.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value stored in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the normal range (“1” to “6”) (S4306). If it is the probability setting value (S4306: No), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is changed to the initial value (S4307), and the process proceeds to S4308. The initial value may be "1", which is the minimum value of the probability setting values ("1" to "6"), or "3" or "4", which is the intermediate value of the probability setting values. or "6", which is the maximum probability setting value. As a result, even if the probability setting value data 203x11 is destroyed due to a RAM abnormality, or even if the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is destroyed during updating of the probability setting values, the updating probability setting value data 203x12 can be restored. By storing the probability setting value in the normal range as , the probability setting value in the normal range can be updated.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4306, if it is determined that the probability setting value saved in the update probability setting value data 203x12 is within the range of "1" to "6" (S4306: Yes), the process of S4307 is performed. is skipped, and the process proceeds to S4308.

In the process of S4308, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4308). In the process of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned OFF.

As described above, if the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode, which is started by the startup operation with the setting key 501 turned off, This is because the pachinko machine 10 is configured to execute the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning). In the processing of S4308, if it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off by only seeing that the level of the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine can be restarted by the start-up operation in the normal mode or the RAM clear mode. 10 is launched and execution of the setting change processing is started as described above, the setting key 501 has been in the OFF state from the beginning, so an affirmative determination is immediately made in the processing of S4308, and the probability setting value cannot be updated. , there arises a problem that the probability setting value is determined as described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4308, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned OFF. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid the determination that the setting key 501 is turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during execution of the setting change process, if the pachinko machine 10 is started by the normal mode or RAM clear mode start-up operation and the setting change process is executed, the setting key 501 is turned on once. Since the set probability value can be determined only by turning it to the OFF state after switching to the state, it is possible to avoid the problem that the set probability value is determined without being able to update the set probability value.

As a result of the process of S4308, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is not turned off (S4308: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4309). In the processing of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on, and the probability set value is updated.

As described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is used to determine the startup mode when the pachinko machine 10 is started up, and when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated. It is also used when That is, the probability set value is updated each time the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. Therefore, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on as a result of the process of S4309 (S4309: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is updated (S4310), and the process returns to S4306. Specifically, in the process of S4010, 1 is added to the updating probability setting value data 203x12 for updating, and when the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is "6", the updating probability setting value data 203x12 is set to "1". update to

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on as a result of the process of S4309 (S4309: No), the process of S4310 is skipped and the process returns to S4306.

Thus, in the processing of S4309, when the state of the RAM erase switch 122 changes from the off state to the on state, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 has been turned on. Specifically, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 indicating the previous state of the probability setting RAM erase switch 122 and the output of the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 read in timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 66) to be described later. , and if the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is off and the RAM erase switch 122 is on, it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. After making that determination, in the processing of S4309, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 at that time is stored in the RAM erase switch flag 203x16.

Here, as described above, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is once set to "ON" by the process of S4305 and the like before the process of S4309 is first performed after the execution of the setting change process is started. This is because at the stage of executing the processing of S4309 for the first time, there is a possibility that the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on as a start-up operation for starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode. If the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off, the RAM erase switch flag 203x16 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. There is a risk of erroneously judging that there was an error and updating the probability setting value. As a result, the people involved in the hall feel distrustful of the fact that the probability set values have been updated even though the RAM erase switch 122 has not been turned on to update the probability set values.

On the other hand, by temporarily setting the RAM erasure switch flag 203x16 to "ON" before the processing of S4309 is performed for the first time after the execution of the setting change processing is started, the pachinko machine is cleared at the time of this first determination. 10 in the setting change mode, the RAM erase switch 122 is still turned on. It is possible to suppress the update of the probability setting value by making a judgment based on the

The loop processing of S4306 to S4310 continues to be executed until it is determined by the processing of S4308 that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4308: Yes). Then, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on by the process of S4308 (S4308: Yes), the update probability setting value data 203x12 is saved as the probability setting value data 203x11 (S4311). As a result, the set probability value updated by the person involved in the hall or the like is determined as the set probability value to be used in the game from now on.

Next, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4312), and execution of timer interrupt processing is stopped. Then, RAM clear processing is executed (S4313), and the setting change processing ends.

In the process of S4313, among the data stored in the RAM 203, data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) is erased (cleared), and While the character product ratio data 203s stored in the outer work area 203y1 is deleted, the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are retained without being deleted. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Further, since the probability set value data 203x11 is held, the game can be played with the determined probability set value.

In addition, the setting changing flag 203x13 is set off by this RAM clearing process. Therefore, if the power is not turned off during execution of the setting change process, the setting change flag 203x13 is set to OFF. remains. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting changing flag 203x13 is on, it can be determined that the setting changing process was being executed when the power was last turned off.

Further, if the probability setting value is changed, the role ratio will also change. The ratio cannot be calculated correctly. By deleting the character product ratio data 203s in the setting change RAM clearing process, the character product ratio based on the changed probability setting value can be correctly calculated.

On the other hand, the base value does not change even if the probability setting value is changed. By holding the necessary information, it is possible to discover fraudulent acts performed in the past without concealing them. In addition, in the setting change RAM clearing process, the error data 203t is also held, so that even if the fraudulent person who caused the error starts up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, the error history can be saved. It cannot be erased, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent concealment.

When the setting change process ends, the display of the probability setting values on the base display device 401 ends, and the display of the base values on the base display device 401 starts.

Next, referring to FIG. 65, the details of the setting confirmation process (S4210), which is one process of the start-up process (FIG. 63), will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the setting confirmation process (S4215). The setting confirmation process (S4215) is a process executed when the startup mode is the setting confirmation mode, and is a process for displaying the currently set probability setting value on the base display device 401. FIG.

In this setting confirmation process, first, similarly to the process of S4301 in the setting change process, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted (S4401). By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt, timer interrupt processing (FIG. 66), which will be described later, is executed with the occurrence of the 4 millisecond timer interrupt as a trigger. Although the details will be described later, power failure monitoring processing is executed in this timer interrupt processing, and when the power is turned off during execution of the setting change processing, the state at that time is held in the RAM 203 by the power failure monitoring processing. It is configured to wait in an infinite loop until the power supply is completely turned off.

Next, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to ON (S4402), for example, as shown in any of FIGS. When the probability setting value indicated by the probability setting value data 203x11 is started to be displayed on the base display device 401 in the display mode, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403). In the process of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has transitioned from the ON state to the OFF state (edge is detected), it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned OFF.

As described above, when the power is turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process, even if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode in which the setting key 501 is turned off by the startup operation, the pachinko machine 10 This is because the setting confirmation process is configured to be executed from the beginning (from the beginning). In the processing of S4403, when it is judged whether or not the setting key 501 is turned off by only seeing that the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the startup operation in the normal mode. When the execution of the setting confirmation process is started as described above, since the setting key 501 has been in the off state from the beginning, an affirmative determination is immediately made in the process of S4403, and the confirmation of the probability setting value ends in an instant. A problem arises.

On the other hand, in the processing of S4403, when it is detected that the level of the signal output from the setting key 501 has changed from the ON state to the OFF state (detects an edge), it is determined that the setting key 501 has turned OFF. By making the determination, it is possible to avoid the determination that the setting key 501 is turned off unless the setting key 501 is once turned on and then turned off. Therefore, after the power is turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process, if the pachinko machine 10 is started up by the startup operation in the normal mode and the setting confirmation process is executed, the setting key 501 is turned on once. Since confirmation of the probability setting value can be finished only by turning off, it is possible to avoid the problem that the confirmation of the probability setting value is finished in an instant.

As a result of the processing of S4403, if the setting key 501 is not in the off state (S4403: No), S4403 is repeatedly executed and the setting key 501 is waited until it is in the off state. During this time, the probability set value is continuously displayed on the base display device 401 . Then, when the setting key 501 is turned off (S4403: Yes), the display of the probability set values on the base display device 401 ends, and when the display of the base values on the base display device 401 starts, the setting is being checked. The flag 203x14 is cleared to off (S4404). As a result, if the power is not turned off during execution of the setting confirmation process, the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is set to OFF. remains on. Therefore, in the start-up process shown in FIG. 63, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON, it can be determined that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was last turned off.

Then, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is prohibited (S4405), execution of the timer interrupt process is stopped, and the setting confirmation process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 66, timer interrupt processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment will be described. FIG. 66 is a flow chart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, this timer interrupt process is a process for performing main control of the game, and is triggered by a 4 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 4 milliseconds.

In this timer interrupt processing, first, random number update processing used for the big winning lottery and the winning lottery for the second symbol is executed (S4501), and then power failure monitoring processing is executed (S4502). In the power failure monitoring process, it is monitored whether or not there is information on occurrence of power failure, and if there is information on occurrence of power failure, processing related to power failure is executed (processing corresponding to S701, S704 to S707 in FIG. 17). ).

Next, referring to the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, it is determined whether or not the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is ON and a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503). As a result, when it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is off and no RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: No), the processes of S4504 to S4515 are executed as normal game processing.

That is, the test-firing test information setting process for setting the test-firing test information is executed (S4504), and then the payout control device 111, the sound lamp control device 113, the solenoid 209, and the base display device control circuit 402 connected to the input/output port 205 are executed. , 1st pattern display device 37, 2nd pattern display device 83, 2nd pattern reservation lamp 84, external output terminal 503, etc., port output processing to output the output signal set in the previous timer interrupt processing. Execute (S4505).

Next, the states of various sensors, switches 208, etc. are read (S4506). The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is also read by the processing of S4506. Next, subtraction processing of various timers used for game control is executed (S4507), and then, based on an error signal from the payout control device 111, processing for detecting fraud due to impact, magnets, etc. is executed ( S4508).

Next, a discharge control process for controlling the ball discharge by the ball discharge unit 112a is executed (S4509). (S4510), and then executes a payout command transmission process for instructing the payout control device 111 to pay out a ball (S4511).

Next, the first symbol (third symbol, special symbol) variable display and special symbol/special electric control processing related to the big hit are executed (S4512), then the second symbol (normal symbol) variable display and the normal symbol/perfect A general electricity control process is executed (S4513). Then, display LED data setting processing for the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37, the second symbol display device 83, the second symbol reservation lamp 84, etc. is executed (S4514), and output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503. External signal setting processing for setting the external signal to be used is executed (S4515), and the timer interrupt processing ends.

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S4503, if it is determined that the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is ON and that a RAM abnormality has occurred (S4503: Yes), the processing of S4504 to S4515, which is normal game processing, is skipped. , the timer interrupt processing ends.

Thus, when the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is turned on by detecting the occurrence of a RAM abnormality by the start-up process of FIG. control is not executed. As a result, the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 enters an infinite loop state since the main control relating to the game is not executed even in the timer interrupt processing after shifting to the main processing. Then, the pachinko machine 10 is re-started in the setting change mode after the pachinko machine 10 is restarted in the setting change mode after the pachinko machine 10 is made aware of the RAM abnormality by the RAM abnormality setting process of S4219 and the external output process of S4220 of the start-up process, and the probability is set. By surely resetting the value and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15, the pachinko machine 10 can be made to operate normally.

Thus, in order to eliminate the RAM abnormality, it is necessary for the pachinko machine 10 to be restarted in the setting change mode by the persons concerned with the hall. A dedicated key corresponding to the setting key 501 is required to start up in the setting change mode. Therefore, a hall (store manager) who manages the dedicated key must intervene to resolve the RAM abnormality. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hole side from solving the RAM abnormality without knowing that the RAM abnormality has occurred.

On the other hand, in timer interrupt processing, random number update processing and power failure monitoring processing are executed even when a RAM abnormality occurs. By executing random number update processing, random numbers can be continuously generated while the power is on. Further, by executing the power failure monitoring process, even when RAM abnormality occurs, occurrence of power interruption can be monitored, and when power interruption occurs, corresponding processing can be surely executed. In particular, when the pachinko machine 10 has been started in the setting change mode under the condition that the RAM abnormality is detected, the setting change process is executed in the start-up process. If the power is turned off while this setting change processing is being executed, the setting change flag 203x13 is kept ON in the RAM 203, so when the pachinko machine 10 is started next time, The setting change process can be restarted from the beginning regardless of the startup operation.

As described above, the configuration mentioned in the description of the eighth embodiment provides the effects described above. In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to seventh embodiments can produce the same effect as the configuration.

<Ninth Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 to 75. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 in the sixth embodiment, a setting key 501 is provided on the front side of the main control device 110 provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10), , the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed in a plurality of stages (for example, six stages of setting values "1" to "6").

When the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, and when the inner frame 12 is unlocked by a hall official or the like. When the inner frame 12 is rotated with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting keys 501 are exposed to the front of the pachinko machine 10 as the inner frame 12 rotates. With this configuration, when a person involved in the hall wants to change the settings of the pachinko machine 10, he/she can immediately insert the key for changing the settings into the setting key 501 by rotating the inner frame 12. , the setting change operation of the pachinko machine 10 can be performed quickly.

In the hall, an island facility having an automatic ball feeder and the like is installed in a predetermined closed space. It is configured so that a plurality of pachinko machines can be installed in each. Outside the opening hours of the hall, those involved in the hall must unlock the inner frame and/or the front frame and the outer frame of each pachinko machine installed in the island equipment, and lock the outer frame (island equipment). On the other hand, the inner frame and/or the front frame are opened, and the setting change work and maintenance work of each pachinko machine are performed.

However, since the setting keys 501 are configured to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is installed on the long side of one of the island facilities in the hall, the pachinko machine 10 is installed. If the inner frame of another pachinko machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10) is opened for some reason (e.g., fraudulent act, etc.) Otherwise, it becomes possible to directly operate the setting key 501 provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . As a result, even when the inner frame 12 of the pachinko machine 10 is not opened, the setting key 501 of the pachinko machine 10 is directly operated by opening the pachinko machine on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Unauthorized operation of the setting key 501 may change the setting contents, causing an unexpected disadvantage to the hall. In addition, for example, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the main controller 110 due to the disconnection of the sealing unit 100c that connects the box base 100a and the box cover 100b of the board box 100 are performed, and unexpected disadvantages are caused to the hall. may cause

Here, like a slot machine, the entire back side of the pachinko machine 10 may be covered with a housing structure to prevent fraudulent actions from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the setting keys 501 of the main control device 110. A game machine such as a pachinko machine differs from a slot machine in that it is necessary to replenish balls from the upper side of the island facility and to discharge out-balls. If it is covered with a structure, a complicated structure for replenishment and discharge of balls will be required, and there is a possibility that the manufacturing cost will increase due to the housing structure and the replenishment and discharge structure.

In addition, in the island facility, when considering the wiring connection with the card sanding device arranged adjacent to the left side of the pachinko machine 10 and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back surface structure of the pachinko machine 10, especially the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 The structure on the left side is desirably configured to be open to some extent and to be easily connected by wiring to the above devices.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, a protective cover member 140 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 to cover the setting keys 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. In this situation, the protective cover member 140 prevents the setting key 501 from being exposed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加By constructing in this way, the setting key 501 cannot be directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加can prevent fraudulent actions such as unauthorized operation of the setting key 501 .

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the sealing unit 100c provided on the left side of the board box 100 when viewed from the back (the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front) housing the main controller 110 is covered with the protective cover member 140. By configuring the sealing unit 100c so that it cannot be directly contacted, it is difficult to perform fraud such as cutting the sealing unit 100c and replacing the main controller 110, and the hall will be disadvantaged based on the fraudulent act. can be prevented from occurring.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the points that differ from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eighth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first to eighth embodiments. , and its illustration and description are omitted.

First, referring to FIG. 67, the rear configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 67 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment in that the outer frame 11 is constructed by combining a wooden plate material and an aluminum plate material, and the outer frame 11 is attached with a protective cover member 140 . Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment.

The outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment has an upper board 11a made of a wooden plate material as an upper side and a lower board 11b made of a similar wooden board material as a lower side. The left side plate 11c made of a high aluminum plate material serves as the left side, and the right side plate 11d made of the same aluminum plate material serves as the right side.

By forming the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 from aluminum plates, even if the thickness of the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d is thinner than that of a conventional wooden plate, the outer frame Since the rigidity of the entire pachinko machine 11 can be maintained, the design space in the horizontal direction of the pachinko machine 10 can be secured, and the degree of freedom in designing the pachinko machine 10 can be increased.

In addition, the left side plate 11c and the right side plate 11d are formed to have a U-shaped cross-section when viewed from above. and a rear surface portion extending toward the inner side of the pachinko machine 10 on the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the side portion.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the outer frame 11 (that is, the pachinko machine 10) is driven by driving nails into island equipment (not shown) from the inner wall sides of the upper plate 11a and the lower plate 11b of the outer frame 11. is configured to be attached and fixed to the island facility.

The protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 by a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69), which will be described later. configured to cover together.

Note that the base display device 401 and the error display button 502 of the main control device 110 are not covered with the protective cover member 140 and are exposed toward the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . This is because the base display device 401 and the error display button 502 are devices used to display the status of the pachinko machine 10, not to change the setting contents of the pachinko machine 10, so that fraudulent acts are unlikely to occur. Therefore, there is little need for covering with the protective cover member 140 . By configuring in this way, the protective cover member 140 can be formed with the minimum necessary size, and the manufacturing cost required for the protective cover member 140 can be reduced.

Details of the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment will now be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68(a) is a left front perspective view of the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment as seen from the left front, and FIG. 68(b) is a right rear view of the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment. 1 is a right rear perspective view. FIG.

The protective cover member 140 is made of transparent resin (for example, polycarbonate resin) as a whole. A standing portion 160 formed extending in the back direction (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10, and the right side of the pachinko machine 10 from the tip side of the standing portion 160 (that is, the back side (rear side) of the pachinko machine 10). (that is, the cover portion 170 extending in the left direction of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front).

The cover mounting portion 150 includes a mounting surface 151 that is in surface contact with a portion of the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, and an upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 formed in the mounting surface 151. , and a curved portion 154 formed in a shape that abuts along the inner wall shape of the right side plate 11d.

An upper mounting hole 152 and a lower mounting hole 153 are formed in the mounting surface 151 so that a fixing screw 11g (see FIG. 69), which will be described later, can be inserted. The upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 are positioned so that they can be mounted in an upper cover mounting hole 11e and a lower cover mounting hole 11f (see FIG. 69) formed in the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11, respectively. is provided.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71, a manner of attaching the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 will be described. FIG. 69 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 (excluding the front frame 14) in the ninth embodiment. FIG. 70 is a left front perspective view for explaining how to attach the protective cover member 140 to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. Furthermore, FIG. 71 is a front view of the outer frame 11 and the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 in the ninth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 69 shows the front frame 14 removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIGS. The attached state is illustrated, and the description thereof is also omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 69, a cover upper mounting hole, which is a through hole for mounting the protective cover member 140, is provided slightly below the central portion of the side surface of the right side plate 11d constituting the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10. A fixing screw 11g is screwed into each hole 11e and a lower cover mounting hole 11f.

Next, as shown in FIG. 70, the upper cover mounting hole 11e and the lower cover mounting hole 11f are formed at positions corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 and the lower mounting hole 153 of the protective cover member 140, respectively. Specifically, a cover upper mounting hole 11 e is formed at a position corresponding to the upper mounting hole 152 , and a cover lower mounting hole 11 f is formed at a position corresponding to the lower mounting hole 153 . Then, while the (outer) mounting surface 151 and the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the inner wall side of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d, the outer side of the right side plate 11d (the right rear side in FIG. 70) is ) into the cover upper mounting hole 11e and the upper mounting hole 152, and into the cover lower mounting hole 11f and the lower mounting hole 153, so that the outer frame 11 ( A protective cover member 140 is fixed to the right side plate 11d).

Here, the curved portion 154 of the protective cover member 140 is formed in a shape that contacts the inner wall shape of the side surface portion and the rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d. A rear surface portion of the right side plate 11d is made of aluminum. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner walls of the side and rear surfaces of the right side plate 11d abut against the curved portion 154, and the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140 are in contact with each other. A gap (space) is not generated. As a result, in a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting To prevent a protective cover member 140 from being attached and detached from the back side of a pachinko machine 10 by configuring a fixing screw 11g inserted in a hole 153 and a cover lower attachment hole 11f so as not to be directly operated. can be done.

In addition, a card sanding device (not shown) is installed adjacent to the pachinko machine 10 on an island facility, and normally a gap is not formed between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. is configured to Therefore, by configuring the fixing screw 11g so that it cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being attached or detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Therefore, it is difficult to remove the protective cover member 140 from the back side or the side side of the pachinko machine 10, and by covering the setting keys 501 with the protective cover member 140 when the inner frame 12 is closed, the setting keys 501 can be directly accessed. can be made inoperable.

Also, this curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material forming the protective cover member 140 as a whole. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the curved portion 154 allows the protective cover member 140 to bend slightly in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. With this configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even if the main controller 110 (see FIG. 69) comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 due to the force of closing and receives an impact, The curved portion 154 bends due to its elastic force and absorbs the impact, thereby preventing the protective cover member 140 from being damaged.

Here, returning to FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b) again, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 will be described. In addition to the cover mounting portion 150, the protective cover member 140 is provided with a standing portion 160 extending from the cover mounting portion 150 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10, and the tip side of the standing portion 160 (that is, A cover portion 170 is formed in a cantilever shape extending from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 toward the left side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front. The upright portion 160 is provided with an upright cover wall 161 , an upright upper cover portion 162 , an upright lower cover portion 163 , an upright inner rib 164 , and an upright outer rib 165 . Further, the cover portion 170 is provided with a cover plate 171 , a cover-side protrusion 172 , a key cover portion 173 , and cover outer ribs 174 .

From here, the configuration of the standing portion 160 will be described in detail. The upright cover wall 161 is formed so as to continuously extend from the curved portion 154 of the cover attachment portion 150 toward the pachinko machine 10 rear side. The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side surface of the main controller 110 when viewed from the front (left side surface when viewed from the back), and the main controller is provided with a setting key 501 and a sealing unit 100c (both of which are shown in FIG. 72), which will be described later. It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from the right side of 110 when viewed from the front (left side when viewed from the back).

The upright upper cover portion 162 is composed of an upper inner cover portion 162a and an upper outer cover portion 162b. The upper inner cover portion 162a extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 and a portion of the upper portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is arranged). It is set up. The upper outer cover portion 162b extends horizontally from the entire upper portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is not arranged).

By forming the upright upper cover portion 162 so that the upper inner cover portion 162a and the upper outer cover portion 162b are flush with each other in this way, the upper right portion (upper left portion when viewed from the back) of the main control device 110 is It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from the upper right side in front view (upper left side in back view) of main controller 110 covered with setting keys 501 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72 for both), which will be described later. In addition, the upper outer cover portion 162b prevents the wire from traveling upward from the outer side of the upright cover wall 161 in the event of fraudulent activity using a wire from the left side of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, for example. colliding with the upper outer cover portion 162b, the wire can be prevented from entering.

The upright lower cover portion 163 is composed of a lower inner cover portion 163a (see FIG. 68(a)) and a lower outer cover portion 163b (see FIG. 68(b)). The lower inner cover portion 163a extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower portion of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is arranged). formed. The lower outer cover portion 163b extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the upright cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 is not arranged).

In addition, the lower inner cover portion 163a has a larger area than the upper inner cover portion 162a. This is because the main control device 110 is located closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 67), and access to the main control device 110 is more from the lower side than from the upper side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, in many cases, a person who cheats on the main controller 110 commits cheating by inserting a wire or the like from the lower back side of the pachinko machine 10 . Therefore, in order to prevent the above-described fraudulent act, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the lower inner cover portion 163a allows the main controller 110 to be positioned at the lower right side (lower left side when viewed from the back) of the main control device 110 when viewed from the front. The gap between the control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 is designed to be as small as possible.

In this way, by forming the upright lower cover portion 163 so that the lower inner cover portion 163a and the lower outer cover portion 163b are flush with each other, the lower right side (lower left side when viewed from the back) of the main control device 110 is It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in back view) of main controller 110 covered with setting keys 501 and a sealing unit 100c (see FIG. 72 for both), which will be described later. In addition, the lower outer cover portion 163b prevents the wire from contacting the lower outer cover portion 163b when the wire travels downward from the outside of the upright cover wall 161 when, for example, an illegal act is performed using a wire. You can prevent the wire from entering by bumping into it.

The standing inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68(a)) is formed in a rib-like shape in which the protruding amount gradually increases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 at the middle portion of the standing cover wall 161 inside the pachinko machine 10. there is The erected inner rib 164 functions as a reinforcing rib for the erected cover wall 161 and prevents the erected cover wall 161 from being damaged. The degree of reinforcement of the standing cover wall 161 is increased by gradually increasing the protrusion amount of the standing inner rib 164 toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 within a range that does not contact the device 110).

The standing outer rib 165 (see FIG. 68(b)) is formed in a rib-like shape in which the amount of protrusion gradually decreases toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 10 in the middle portion of the standing cover wall 161 outside the pachinko machine 10, It is formed at a position that is paired with the above-described upright inner rib 164 on the inside/outside. Like the upright inner rib 164, the upright outer rib 165 functions as a reinforcing rib for the upright cover wall 161 and prevents the upright cover wall 161 from being damaged.

In addition, the standing outer rib 165 is formed to have the same protrusion amount as the upper outer cover portion 162b and the lower outer cover portion 163b described above, and the pachinko machine 10 to which the protective cover member 140 is attached is installed on the island facility. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed, the standing outer rib 165 does not become an obstacle when it is installed.

From here, the structure of the cover part 170 is demonstrated in detail. The cover plate 171 extends from the upright portion 160 (the upright cover wall 161, the upright upper cover portion 162, the upright lower cover portion 163, and the upright inner rib 164) so that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 extends in the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10. Each of them extends to a position above the setting portion 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main control device 110 and below the base display device 401 (error display button 502).

On the front side of the pachinko machine 10 of this cover plate 171 (that is, the side facing the main controller 110; hereinafter the same), at a position corresponding to the setting section 100d (see FIG. 72) of the main controller 110, which will be described later, A cover-side protrusion 172 is formed in a square shape so as to protrude toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10 , and a portion of the cover plate 171 surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 constitutes a key cover portion 173 .

The cover-side protrusion 172 is formed so as to enter a space formed by a setting portion side wall 100e of a setting portion 100d and a case-side protrusion 100g, which will be described later. formed by

Next, as shown in FIG. 71, the protective cover member 140 attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 is installed so that the plate surface of the cover plate 171 of the cover portion 170, which will be described later, faces the front side of the pachinko machine 10. be done. Also, on this cover plate 171, a later-described setting section 100d (see FIG. 74) provided in the board box 100 of the main controller 110 is hereinafter simply referred to as "the board box 100 of the main controller 110". 110"), and a key surrounded by the cover-side protrusion 172 formed in a square-shaped protrusion on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 and the cover-side protrusion 172 A cover portion 173 is provided. Therefore, the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the setting portion 100d of the main controller 110 are configured to face each other.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74, the configurations of the setting portion 100d, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140, and the key cover portion 173 in the main control device 110 of the ninth embodiment will be described. 72 is a front view of the board box 100 of the main controller 110 in the ninth embodiment, FIG. 73 is a cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine 10 taken along line AA in FIG. 67, and FIG. 2 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of main controller 110 and protective cover member 140 in area B of FIG. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 72 omits illustration of parts that are not related to the present invention, and FIG. The explanation is also omitted.

First, as shown in FIG. 72, the main controller 110 of the ninth embodiment is housed in a substrate box 100 that combines a box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and a box cover 100b. A setting key 501 is provided on the main board constituting the control device 110 to be used when changing the set probability setting value or when confirming the set probability setting value.

The box cover 100b is provided with a setting portion 100d at a position corresponding to the setting key 501, and the setting portion 100d is a cover-side projection from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b (that is, the back side of the pachinko machine 10). It is recessed by the projection amount of 172 and is formed in a size that the entire cover-side projection 172 can be accommodated. A setting portion side wall 100e, a setting portion bottom surface 100f, and a case-side protrusion 100g are provided as parts constituting the setting portion 100d.

The setting portion side wall 100e extends from the outermost surface side of the box cover 100b toward the main board side (not shown), and as shown in FIGS. The height (the recessed amount of the setting portion 100 d ) is formed to be equal to the protrusion amount of the cover-side protrusion 172 .

The setting portion bottom surface 100f extends from the setting portion side wall 100e, has a keyhole (not shown) that exposes the keyhole portion of the setting key 501, and is formed to block the portion other than the keyhole. . By configuring in this manner, the setting keys 501 can be operated while the main controller 110 is housed in the closed space formed by the box base 100a (see FIG. 74) and the box cover 100b.

The case-side protrusion 100g is formed to protrude from the setting portion bottom surface 100f toward the protective cover member 140 (back side of the pachinko machine 10) so as to have the same amount of protrusion as the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. ing. Also, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 is formed to be accommodated in the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g.

That is, as shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover-side protrusion 172 is positioned in the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g. The case-side protrusion 100g contacts the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, while the cover-side protrusion 172 contacts the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the portion where the setting key 501 is arranged is hermetically sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case-side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making it difficult to access the setting part 100d by the side projection 172, the security of the setting key 501 is improved and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter.

Also, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main control device 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 are in contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main control device 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. Therefore, if the setting key 501 is left inserted with the setting change key, the inner frame 12 cannot be locked with respect to the outer frame 11 . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the hall staff from forgetting to collect the setting change key.

Returning to FIGS. 68(a) and 68(b), the description is continued. On the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 (that is, the side not facing the main controller 110), cover outer ribs 174 are formed in square and cross ribs. The cover outer rib 174 functions as a reinforcing rib for the cover plate 171 and prevents the cover plate 171 from being damaged.

In addition, the cover outer rib 174 also prevents the wire from moving upward or downward on the cover plate 171 when, for example, a fraudulent act is performed using a wire from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . By bumping against the outer rib 174, the wire can be prevented from entering.

Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the state of the pachinko machine 10 at the time of work for changing the settings of the pachinko machine 10 in the ninth embodiment will be described. FIG. 75 is a front left perspective view showing the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 unfolded (opened) with respect to the outer frame 11 to which the protective cover member 140 is attached according to the ninth embodiment. For the convenience of explanation, the illustration of parts not related to the present invention is omitted or simplified in FIG. 75, and the explanation thereof is also omitted.

As shown in FIG. 75, when the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are unlocked from the outer frame 11 by a person involved in the hall outside the opening hours of the hall, the state shown in FIG. The frame 14 rotates with respect to the outer frame 11, and the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed toward the front side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加At this time, the protective cover member 140 remains fixed to the outer frame 11 , and the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 is used to rotate the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 . It is exposed to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 as it moves, and is immediately operable by a person involved in the pachinko hall.

Therefore, a person involved in the pachinko hall can immediately change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 only by unlocking and rotating the inner frame 12 without performing complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140.例文帳に追加. In addition, the setting change work can be performed while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change work can be easily performed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 that covers the setting keys 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided on the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents the setting key 501 from being exposed to the back side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Further, when the inner frame 12 is unlocked and setting change work is performed, the back side of the inner frame 12 is exposed in front of the pachinko machine 10 while the protective cover member 140 remains on the outer frame 11.例文帳に追加configured to

With this configuration, in a situation where the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting key 501 can be directly operated from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration using the protective cover member 140. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized actions such as unauthorized operation of the setting key 501 . In addition, since the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without using a housing structure such as that of a slot machine, an increase in the manufacturing cost of the pachinko machine 10 due to the use of a housing structure or the like can be suppressed. be able to.

When the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, the setting keys 501 of the main control unit 110 installed on the back surface of the inner frame 12 are used for pachinko as the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are rotated. It is exposed on the front side of the machine 10 and is immediately operable by hall personnel. Therefore, the persons involved in the hall can change the settings of the pachinko machine 10 without performing complicated work such as removing the protective cover member 140 . In addition, the setting change work can be performed while visually recognizing the base display device 401, and the setting change work can be easily performed.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured to enter the space formed by the setting portion side wall 100e and the case-side protrusion 100g. When the side projection 100g contacts the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140, the cover-side projection 172 contacts the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the setting portion 100d. With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the portion where the setting key 501 is arranged is hermetically sealed by the key cover portion 173 of the protective cover member 140 and the case-side protrusion 100g of the setting portion 100d. By making it difficult to access the setting part 100d by the side projection 172, the security of the setting key 501 is improved and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter.

Further, the case-side protrusion 100g of the main controller 110 and the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 are brought into contact with the setting portion bottom surface 100f of the main controller 110 and the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140. Since the inner frame 12 cannot be locked with respect to the outer frame 11 if the key for changing the setting is left inserted in the setting key 501, the setting by the person involved in the hall cannot be performed. It is possible to prevent forgetting to collect the change key.

Further, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner wall of the right side plate 11d and the curved portion 154 abut against each other, so that no gap (space) is generated between the right side plate 11d and the protective cover member 140. state. As a result, in a state in which the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the fixing screw 11g inserted into the upper mounting hole 152 and the cover upper mounting hole 11e from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, and the lower mounting To prevent a protective cover member 140 from being attached and detached from the back side of a pachinko machine 10 by configuring a fixing screw 11g inserted in a hole 153 and a cover lower attachment hole 11f so as not to be directly operated. can be done.

Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a card sanding device adjacent to the island facility, and is normally constructed so that no gap is formed between the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 and the card sanding device. . Therefore, by configuring the fixing screw 11g so that it cannot be directly operated from the right side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being attached or detached from the side of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

Also, this curved portion 154 is formed in a thin plate shape, and is configured to be elastically deformable based on the elastic force of the resin material forming the protective cover member 140 as a whole. Therefore, when an external force is applied to the protective cover member 140, the curved portion 154 allows the protective cover member 140 to bend slightly in the lateral direction of the pachinko machine 10. As shown in FIG. With this configuration, for example, when the inner frame 12 is closed, even if the main control device 110 comes into contact with the protective cover member 140 due to the closing momentum and receives an impact, the curved portion 154 remains elastic. It is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged by bending due to force and absorbing the impact.

Furthermore, the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, and the cover outer ribs 174 prevent the wire from standing up and covering the cover wall 161 or the cover plate 171 when, for example, a wire is used from the rear surface of the pachinko machine 10 for fraudulent activity. Intrusion of the wire can be prevented by hitting the upper outer cover portion 162b, the lower outer cover portion 163b, or the cover outer rib 174 when the wire travels upward or downward from the outside of the cover.

In addition, the area of the lower inner cover portion 163a is formed to be large, and the main control device 110 and the protective cover member 140 are separated by the lower inner cover portion 163a from the lower right side of the main control device 110 when viewed from the front (lower left side when viewed from the back). It is designed so that the gap is minimized. With this configuration, the lower right side (lower left side when viewed from the back) of main controller 110 is covered, and the lower right side (lower side when viewed from the back) of main controller 110 on which setting key 501 and sealing unit 100c are provided. It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from the lower left side).

As described above, the configuration mentioned in the description of the ninth embodiment provides the effects described above. In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eighth embodiments can produce the same effect as that of the configuration.

<Tenth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a tenth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 76 to 78. FIG. In the sixth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the RAM erase switch 122, the setting key 501, and the door opening switch 208g for detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 (in the tenth embodiment, the inner frame The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the state of the open switch 208g1).

That is, when the power is turned on, the detection mode of the setting key 501 and the RAM erase switch 122 is detected, and the detection mode of the door opening switch 208g is detected. configured to change.

However, when determining the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 based on the detection result of the door opening switch 208g, if the door opening switch 208g fails to detect ON (that is, the opening of the inner frame 12), the door It becomes impossible to start up the start-up mode (that is, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode) that is set based on the detection of the open switch 208g. Therefore, erroneous detection of the door opening switch 208g may make it impossible to change settings, etc., which are important game elements of the pachinko machine 10, making it impossible for the hall to operate as intended.

In addition, in the start-up process at the time of power-on, a process for detecting the door opening switch 208g is required, which complicates the control required at the time of power-on and increases the processing load of the main controller 110. There is a risk.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, while adopting the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 which is the door opening switch 208g Regardless of the detection result, the startup mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to the two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501.例文帳に追加

By configuring in this way, the protective cover member 140 prevents fraudulent acts on the setting keys 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed, while opening the inner frame open switch 208g1 when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of the reliability, it is possible to change settings, etc., which are important game elements of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, and the business form assumed by the hall can be reliably executed.

In addition, in the start-up process at the time of power-on, since the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 is unnecessary, the processing of the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. can be done.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the tenth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to ninth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first to ninth embodiments. , and its illustration and description are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 76, each start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 76 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for each start-up mode in order to start up in that start-up mode. is a diagram showing each piece of information.

As with the pachinko machine 10 of the sixth embodiment, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment includes four modes of normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to restore the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. This is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203 except for .

When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 in the off state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. When the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the RAM clear mode.

On the other hand, when the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of the detection result of the door opening switch 208 (that is, even if it is ON detection) off detection), the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. Also, if the setting key 501 is turned on and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, regardless of the detection result of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 (that is, even if it is ON detection) off detection), the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

As described above, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is kept in the off state, the hall personnel can use the RAM erase switch. Depending on whether or not 122 is turned on, it is possible to select, as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10, whether the RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode unrelated to the probability setting value, or the normal mode.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, regardless of whether the inner frame 12 is unlocked or not, if the setting key 501 is kept in the ON state, the hall personnel and the like can press the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode can be selected as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, the startup mode that is not related to the probability set value and the probability set value are related. You can choose between different boot modes. When the start-up mode that is not related to the set probability value is selected, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the start-up mode related to the probability setting value is selected, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be selected depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on.

Here, since the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment is configured so that setting change or setting confirmation is possible regardless of the opening of the inner frame 12, the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed However, the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment employs the protective cover member 140 of the ninth embodiment. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 prevents direct contact with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. FIG. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts at the time of closing the inner frame 12 while making it possible to change settings without performing processing such as detecting the opening of the inner frame 12 .

In other words, providing the protective cover member 140 means that the inner frame 12 is opened when the setting key 501 is operated. Therefore, it can be recognized that the inner frame 12 is open without detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 in the process.

Next, with reference to FIG. 77, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment will be described. FIG. 77 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 77, an inner frame open switch 208g1 is connected to the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the tenth embodiment. The inner frame open switch 208g1 is for detecting whether or not the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and a protruding piece (not shown) protruding from the upper back side of the inner frame 12 , an elastic body (not shown) such as a spring that applies an elastic force to the projecting piece, and a detection sensor (not shown) that detects the position of the projecting piece. When the inner frame 12 is closed, the projecting piece of the inner frame open switch 208g1 is pressed against the upper part of the outer frame 11, and is recessed into the inner frame 12 because the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the elastic body. On the other hand, when a special key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in a first direction (for example, clockwise), the inner frame 12 is released from the outer frame 11, and when the inner frame 12 is released, the elastic force of the elastic body The protruding piece is configured to protrude toward the outer frame 11 side. When the detection sensor detects the projection of the projecting piece, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is determined to be ON, and an inner frame opening signal is output.

The detection result of the inner frame open switch 208 g 1 (that is, the presence or absence of the inner frame open signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the input/output port 205 . In this case, when the inner frame 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not determined to be ON and does not output the inner frame open signal to the MPU201. On the other hand, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is determined to be ON when the inner frame 12 is in the open state with respect to the outer frame 11, and outputs an inner frame open signal to the MPU201. The MPU 201 specifies that the inner frame 12 is open when the inner frame open signal is input from the inner frame open switch 208g1, and the inner frame 12 is closed when the inner frame open signal is not input. state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, startup processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the tenth embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 78 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

In the startup process of the tenth embodiment, first, an initial value setting process is executed upon power-on (S4401). For example, access permission to the RAM 203 is set, and a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer.

Next, an internal function register setting process is executed (S4402). In the tenth embodiment, as in the eighth embodiment, the base display control processing (see FIG. 57) for controlling the display content to be displayed on the base display device 401 is triggered by a 2 millisecond timer interrupt that occurs every 2 milliseconds. Run. In the process of S4402, for example, the 2 millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. Further, in the case where the random number generation circuit (not shown) provided in the main controller 110 is used to generate the random number values required for the jackpot lottery or the winning lottery, the range of the random number to be generated ( maximum value). Also, access to the RAM 203 is permitted in the processing of S4402. In addition, in the processing of S4402, the main controller 110 performs various settings for transmitting and receiving signals by serial communication with the payout controller 111 and the sound lamp controller 113.

In particular, by enabling the 2 millisecond timer interrupt in this internal function register setting processing, a 2 millisecond timer interrupt occurs every 2 milliseconds and the base display control processing is executed. Then, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the probability setting value can be displayed on the base display device 401.例文帳に追加

Note that it is not always necessary to set the range (maximum value) of the random number in the process of S4402. If the random value range (maximum value) is not set in the process of S4402, during the other start-up process (S4421), which will be described later and is executed when the start-up process shifts to the main process, The random number range (maximum value) may be set, which was not performed in the processing of S4402.

Next, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S4403). As a result, if information on the occurrence of power interruption is stored (S4403: Yes), it means that the process at the time of the previous power interruption was completed normally. It is determined whether or not the calculated RAM determination value is normal, that is, whether or not the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was turned off (S4404). The RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the work area address of RAM 203 . In the tenth embodiment, the probability setting value stored in the RAM 203 is excluded from the calculation of the checksum value, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the checksum value.

As a result of the processing of S4404, if it is determined that the calculated RAM determination value matches the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off (S4404: Yes), the RAM determination value is normal, and at least the RAM determination value is used for calculating the RAM determination value. Since it can be determined that the received data (information) is normally held, it is then determined whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range ("1" to "6") (S4405). Here, the reason for judging whether or not the probability setting value is within the normal range is that when the power was turned off last time, although the processing related to the power interruption was performed normally, the probability setting value This is because there is a possibility that it is broken and out of the normal range. The processing of S4405 is performed in order to reliably detect such an abnormality in the set probability value.

If the probability setting value is within the normal range (S4405: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4406). If the setting changing flag 203x13 is ON (S4406: Yes), it means that the setting change process was being executed when the power was turned off last time. is broken. Therefore, in this case, the process proceeds to S4413, and the setting change process is executed (S4413).

As a result, the startup mode when the power is turned on after the power is turned off while changing the settings is not only the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, but also other startup modes. Even if it is an operation, it is possible to enter a setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed again from the beginning. Therefore, when the power is turned off during the setting change, when the power is turned on after that, it is possible to make the hall personnel change the probability setting value from scratch without fail. Therefore, it is possible to have the person involved in the hall or the like surely change the probability set value, and to confirm the change. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while the settings are being changed, the pachinko machine can reliably update and confirm the probability setting values when the power is turned on again. A change in the probability setting to 10 can be made.

In addition, by restarting the setting change process from the beginning (from the beginning), instead of continuing from the probability setting value being updated at the time when the power was turned off during the setting change, the update of the probability setting value is restarted. It is possible to update the probability setting value again from the beginning using the probability setting value (probability setting value data 203x11) used in the game so far. Therefore, the persons involved in the hall or the like can renew the probability setting data without anxiety.

On the other hand, if the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off as a result of the process of S4406 (S4406: No), it means that the setting change process was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. Therefore, next, as processing for confirming the start-up operation performed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the hall staff, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4407). In the process of S4407, the 4 millisecond timer interrupt is not permitted and the timer interrupt process is not executed. The state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205 instead of using a physical object.

If the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off as a result of the processing of S4407 (S4407: No), then it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state in order to further confirm the startup operation ( S4408). In the tenth embodiment, in this S4408, it is configured not to detect the inner frame open switch 208g1. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-on, since the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary, the process of the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. .

As a result of the processing of S4408, if the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S4408: NO), the RAM erase switch 122 is OFF and the setting key 501 is in the OFF state. means operated. Then, it is determined whether or not the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on (S4409). As a result, if the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON (S4409: Yes), it indicates that the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, that is, confirmation of the probability setting value by the setting confirmation process. indicates that the power was cut off during In this case, as shown in FIG. 62, the setting confirmation process is executed from the beginning (S4410). The currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 by the setting confirmation process. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

In this way, even if the person involved in the hall performs the start-up operation for starting up in the normal mode as the start-up operation, the pachinko machine 10 is not started up in the normal mode, but the setting confirmation process is started from the beginning ( Start up the pachinko machine 10 in a setting confirmation mode for redoing (from scratch). As a result, even if a person involved in the hall or the like starts up the apparatus by operating in the normal mode after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the probability setting value can be confirmed. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be started up without anxiety because the persons concerned with the hall can confirm that the probability set value is not destroyed by the power cutoff during the confirmation of the setting.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is off as a result of the processing of S4409 (S4409: No), the setting confirmation processing was not being executed when the power was turned off last time. means that The process of S4409 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4406 that the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), that is, when the power was turned off last time. This is also the case when the setting change process was not being executed at that time.

Therefore, in this case, the start-up mode is set to the normal mode indicated by the start-up operation by the person concerned with the hall, etc., and the setting confirmation process of S4410 and the process of S4411, which will be described later, are skipped, and other start-up processes are executed. After that (S4414), the process proceeds to the main process. As for other start-up processing, a 4-millisecond timer interrupt is permitted. In the tenth embodiment, similarly to the eighth embodiment, timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 58) for main control of the game is executed with a 4 millisecond timer interrupt generated every 4 milliseconds as a trigger. By permitting the 4 millisecond timer interrupt in the processing of S4414, the timer interrupt processing is executed every 4 milliseconds.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on as a result of the process of S4408 (S4408: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on. means that the startup operation was performed in the setting confirmation mode. Here, the process of S4408 is executed when it is determined in the process of S4406 that the setting changing flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), that is, when the power was turned off last time. Sometimes the configuration change process was not in progress. Therefore, in this case, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether or not the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, the pachinko machine 10 is operated in the setting confirmation mode started up by the person concerned with the hall. In order to start up, the process proceeds to S4410, and the setting confirmation process is executed (S4410). The currently set probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 by the setting confirmation process. Thereby, the probability setting value can be confirmed.

When the setting confirmation process (S4410) ends, the external output process is executed (S4411). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting confirmation process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 is output to the hall computer 600 via the external output terminal 503 . Thus, the persons involved in the hall can understand that the pachinko machine 10 has executed the setting confirmation process and the probability setting value has been displayed on the base display device 401 . Therefore, when the probability setting value is displayed illegally, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on in the processing of S4407, which is the processing for confirming the start-up operation performed when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by the hall personnel, etc. ( S4407: Yes), and furthermore, in order to confirm the activation operation, it is determined whether or not the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412). In the tenth embodiment, in this S4412, it is configured not to detect the inner frame open switch 208g1. Therefore, in the process at the time of power-on, since the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 becomes unnecessary, the process of the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. .

As a result of the processing of S4412, if the setting key 501 is on (S4412: Yes), the RAM erase switch 122 is on and the setting key 501 is on. It means that you have performed an up operation. When the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode, as shown in FIG. 62, regardless of whether the setting confirmation flag 203x14 (see FIG. 61) is on or not, that is, when the power was turned off last time, the setting confirmation process is executed. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is set as the setting change mode regardless of whether or not it is being executed.

Therefore, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state as a result of the process of S4412 (S4412: Yes), the setting change process is executed (S4413). By the setting change processing, the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401, and when the RAM erasing switch 122 is turned on by a hall official or the like, the probability setting value is updated, and when the setting key 501 is turned off. , the updated probability set value is determined as the probability set value to be used in the game from now on, and RAM clear processing is performed. Thereby, after changing the probability setting value, the game machine can be newly started with the probability setting value after the change.

Here, even if the setting confirmation process was in progress when the power was turned off last time, turning on the setting key 501 and turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 means that the hall personnel etc. clearly indicate the intention to change the probability set value. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, it is possible to perform the start-up process according to the will of the persons involved in the hall.

When the setting change process (S4413) ends, the external output process is executed (S4414). In this external output process, information indicating that the setting change process has been executed or that the probability setting value has been changed is output to hall computer 600 via external output terminal 503 . As a result, the persons involved in the hall can grasp that the setting change process has been executed in the pachinko machine 10 and the probability setting value has been changed. Therefore, when the probability set value is illegally changed, it can be grasped quickly. After the external output process is executed, other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, as a result of the process of S4412, if the setting key 501 is in the OFF state (S4412: No), it is then checked whether the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is ON or not. It is determined whether or not (S4415). Here, the processing of S4407 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), the processing of S4412 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4412: No), and the processing of S4415 is performed. If executed, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 is always off, so it is determined that there is no RAM abnormality in the processing of S4415 (S4415: No).

Also, in this case, since it is determined in the process of S4406 that the setting change flag 203x13 (see FIG. 61) is off (S4406: No), the setting change process is being executed when the power was turned off last time. This is the case when it was not. Therefore, the processing of S4407 determines that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4407: Yes), the processing of S4412 determines that the setting key 501 is off (S4412: No), and the processing of S4415 determines that the RAM is abnormal. If it is determined that it is not (S4415: No), it means that the staff involved in the hall has started up in the RAM clear mode. A pachinko machine 10 is started up in a RAM clear mode regardless of whether or not setting confirmation processing was being executed when the power was cut off last time. Therefore, RAM clear processing is executed (S4416).

In this RAM clearing process, out of the data stored in the RAM 203, predetermined data) is erased (cleared), while the character product ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t (both see FIG. 53) stored in the outer work area 203y1 (see FIG. 53) are Keep without erasing. A new game can be started by erasing the data used for game control (predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1). Also, even if the RAM clearing process is executed, the probability set value data 203x11 is held, so the game can be continued with the probability set value determined before the RAM clearing process is executed.

Here, as described above, even if the setting confirmation process was being executed when the power was turned off last time, if there is no RAM abnormality and the start-up operation for starting in the RAM clear mode is performed. , the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode according to the start-up operation of the person involved in the hall. Turning on the RAM erase switch 122 indicates at least a clear intention of the persons involved in the hall to clear the RAM. Therefore, in this case, by starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode, it is possible to perform the start-up processing according to the will of the persons involved in the hall.

When the RAM clearing process of S4416 ends, other start-up processes are executed (S4421), and the process shifts to the main process.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S4403 that the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S4403: No), the processing of S4404 changes the calculated RAM determination value to the RAM determination value saved when the power was shut off. If they do not match and it is determined that the RAM determination value is abnormal (S4404: No), or if it is determined by the process of S4405 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range (S4405: No) If any of the above applies, it can be determined that there is an abnormality in the RAM 203, so the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned on (S4417). , the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on (S4418). Also in the processing of S4418, the state of the RAM erase switch 122 is read by directly accessing the input/output port 205 as in the processing of S4407.

As a result of the process of S4418, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on (S4418: Yes), the process proceeds to the above-described S4412, and whether or not the setting key 501 is on is determined. It judges (S4412). As a result, if the setting key 501 is in the ON state (S4412: Yes), it means that the person involved in the hall or the like has performed the start-up operation in the setting change mode. Then, in this case (S4412: Yes), in order to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode according to the start-up operation of the hall staff, etc., the process proceeds to S4413 and the above-described setting change processing is executed.

Here, even if a RAM abnormality occurs, if the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value can be set again and the RAM can be cleared. Therefore, a new game can be started with a newly set normal probability set value. By this RAM clearing, the RAM abnormality flag 203x15 (see FIG. 61) is turned off. Therefore, after that, main controller 110 can control the game without executing the processing related to the RAM abnormality.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is off as a result of the processing of S4418 (S4418: No), or even if it is determined that the RAM erase switch 122 is on as a result of the processing of S4418, S4412 If it is determined that the setting key 501 is in the off state (S4418: Yes or S4412: No) as a result of the processing of 1. above, the hall staff and the like can operate the normal mode, the RAM clear mode, and the setting mode in the RAM abnormality. It means that the startup operation was performed in one of the confirmation modes.

In this case, the process proceeds to the above-described S4415, and it is always determined that the RAM is abnormal in the process of S4415 (S4415: Yes), and the process proceeds to S4419. In the processing of S4419, RAM abnormality setting processing is performed (S4419). In this RAM abnormality setting process, a process for notifying RAM abnormality is executed. For example, once the power is turned off, the notification prompting to start up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode is performed by voice output from the voice output device 226 and / or display on the third symbol display device 81, so that the voice lamp A command is transmitted to the control device 113 .

Then, it executes an external output process for notifying the hall computer 600 of the RAM abnormality via the external output terminal 503 (S4420), executes other start-up processes (S4421), and shifts to the main process. do. Since the RAM abnormality is notified to the hall computer 600, the persons involved in the hall can surely grasp the occurrence of the RAM abnormality without noticing the notification from the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, while adopting the protective cover member 140 in the ninth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the door opening switch 208g is opened. The start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 is determined according to two detection states of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 regardless of the detection result of the frame open switch 208g1. By configuring in this way, the protective cover member 140 prevents fraudulent acts on the setting keys 501 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 when the inner frame 12 is closed, while opening the inner frame open switch 208g1 when the inner frame 12 is opened. Regardless of the reliability, it is possible to change settings, etc., which are important game elements of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加Therefore, the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved, and the business form assumed by the hall can be reliably executed.

In addition, in the start-up process at the time of power-on, since the process of detecting the inner frame open switch 208g1 is unnecessary, the processing of the detection process is not executed, so that the processing load of the main controller 110 can be reduced. can be done.

As described above, the configuration mentioned in the description of the tenth embodiment provides the effects described above. In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to ninth embodiments can produce the same effect as that of the configuration.

<Eleventh Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to an eleventh embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 79 to 81. FIG. In the tenth embodiment, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1, depending on the state of the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 determined the launch mode.

On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, a front frame open switch 208g2 that detects the opening of the front frame 14 is provided, and the inner frame open switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12 (that is, ON detection). In addition, when the front frame open switch 208g2 detects the closing of the front frame 14 (that is, off detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is activated. On the other hand, when the inner frame open switch 208g1 detects the closing of the inner frame 12 (that is, off detection), or even when the inner frame open switch 208g1 detects the opening of the inner frame 12, the front surface When the frame open switch 208g2 detects the opening of the front frame 14 (that is, ON detection), the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not activated, and the normal mode is activated.

Conventionally, when the pachinko machine 10 is easily shifted to a state where settings can be changed and settings can be confirmed, it is impossible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized setting changes and settings confirmation. It is desirable to implement multi-step security measures for the pachinko machine 10 so as not to migrate.

On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is to be maintained by a person concerned with the pachinko machine, the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are both released from the outer frame 11, and the maintenance work is carried out by the hall personnel who have the authority to change or confirm the settings. This is generally done by a hall employee who does not have the authority to change or confirm settings, rather than the person in charge.

Here, if an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm the settings enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during maintenance work, the employee may be able to communicate with an unauthorized outside person. , there is a risk that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. The security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved by making it difficult for an employee who does not have access to change the settings.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to tenth embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the same reference numerals as those of the first to tenth embodiments are used for the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments. , and its illustration and description are omitted.

First, with reference to FIG. 79, each start-up mode when the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment is powered on will be described. FIG. 79 shows the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment, and the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on to start up in each start-up mode for each start-up mode. , and information of each of the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2.

As with the pachinko machine 10 of the tenth embodiment, the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment includes four modes of normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. ing. The RAM clear mode is a mode for erasing (clearing) data stored in the RAM 203 in order to restore the pachinko machine 10 to its initial state. The setting change mode is a mode for changing the set probability setting value. The setting confirmation mode is a mode for confirming the set probability setting value.

The normal mode is a startup mode other than the RAM clear mode, setting change mode, and setting confirmation mode. This is a mode for restarting the game of the pachinko machine 10 from the state before power-off by executing various start-up processes while holding the data stored in the RAM 203 except for .

Then, without turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 and with the setting key 501 turned off, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the detection mode of the inner frame opening switch 208g1 and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is detected. Regardless, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the normal mode. Also, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 while the setting key 501 is in the OFF state, the pachinko machine 10 rises in RAM clear mode.

In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, even if the setting key 501 is turned on, this normal mode may be set based on the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1 or the front frame open switch 208g2. be.

Specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, even if both the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not on, or the front frame open switch 208g2 is off. If not, that is, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is off, even if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on, if the front frame open switch 208g2 is on, the normal mode is started instead of the setting change mode is configured as

Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is powered on, the RAM erase switch 122 is off, and even if the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not on, or the front frame open switch 208g2 is If it is not off, that is, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is off, even if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on, if the front frame open switch 208g2 is on, instead of the setting confirmation mode, the normal mode is configured to stand up.

Conventionally, when a hall official or the like performs maintenance work on the pachinko machine 10, both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are released from the outer frame 11, and the settings are changed, not by the person in charge of the hall who changes or confirms the settings. This is generally done by hall employees who do not have the authority to confirm or confirm settings. That is, during the maintenance work of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on, and the front frame opening switch 208g2 is turned on.

Here, if an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change or confirm the settings enters the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode during maintenance work, the employee may be able to communicate with an unauthorized outside person. , there is a risk that information on the setting status of the pachinko machine 10 may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, that is, when both the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 are on , setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change settings, etc., to change settings or confirm settings, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

Next, while the setting key 501 is turned on, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on to turn on the power of the pachinko machine 10, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on, and the front frame open switch 208g2 is turned off. On the condition that there is, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting change mode. When the setting key 501 is turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on and the front frame open switch 208g2 is turned off. On this condition, the pachinko machine 10 starts up in the setting confirmation mode.

Thus, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, after the setting key 501 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 can be turned on according to whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. As the start-up mode, it is possible to select a RAM clear mode, which is a start-up mode unrelated to the set probability value, or a normal mode.

On the other hand, when turning on the power of the pachinko machine 10, if the setting key 501 is turned on on the condition that only the inner frame opening switch 208g1 is turned on, hall officials and the like can turn on the RAM erase switch 122. Depending on whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, a setting change mode related to the probability setting value or a setting confirmation mode can be selected as the start-up mode of the pachinko machine 10. - 特許庁

That is, first, depending on whether the setting key 501 is turned off or on, it is possible to select a start-up mode unrelated to the probability set value and a start-up mode related to the probability set value. Then, when setting the startup mode regardless of the probability setting value, regardless of the detection mode of the inner frame open switch 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2, depending on whether the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on, that While it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the RAM clear mode or the normal mode, when setting the start-up mode related to the probability setting value, the RAM Depending on whether or not the erase switch 122 is turned on, it is possible to select whether the start-up mode is the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment will be described. FIG. 80 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 80, the input/output port 205 of the main controller 110 of the eleventh embodiment is connected with a front frame open switch 208g2 as the door open switch 208g in addition to the inner frame open switch 208g1. This front frame open switch 208g2 is for detecting whether or not the front frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 12. The front projecting piece (not shown) projecting from the upper rear side of the front frame 14 ), a front elastic body (not shown) for applying an elastic force such as a spring to the front projecting piece, and a front detection sensor (not shown) for detecting the position of the front projecting piece. When the front frame open switch 208g2 is closed, the front projecting piece of the front frame open switch 208g2 is pressed against the upper part of the inner frame 12, and is retracted into the front frame 14 because the force of the cylinder lock 20 is stronger than the elastic force of the front elastic body. On the other hand, when a special key is inserted into the cylinder lock 20 and turned in a second direction different from the first direction (for example, counterclockwise), the front frame 14 is released from the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 When the door is opened, the front projecting piece projects toward the inner frame 12 due to the elastic force of the front elastic body. Then, when the front detection sensor detects the protrusion of the front projecting piece, the front frame open switch 208g2 is turned on, and a front frame open signal is output.

The detection result of the front frame open switch 208 g 2 (that is, the presence or absence of the front frame open signal) is input to the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 via the input/output port 205 . In this case, the front frame open switch 208 g 2 is not determined to be on when the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12 and does not output the front frame open signal to the MPU 201 . On the other hand, the front frame open switch 208g2 is determined to be ON when the front frame 14 is in the open state with respect to the inner frame 12, and outputs a front frame open signal to the MPU201. The MPU 201 specifies that the front frame 14 is open when the front frame open signal is input from the front frame open switch 208g2, and when the front frame open signal is not input, the front frame 14 is closed. state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 81, startup processing executed by the MPU 201 in the main controller 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 in the eleventh embodiment is turned on will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing this startup process. This start-up process is started by a reset when the power is turned on.

Regarding the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment, the difference from the start-up process of the tenth embodiment is that when the RAM erase switch 122 is off and the setting key 501 is on, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is On the condition that the front frame open switch 208g2 is off, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is executed, the RAM erase switch 122 is on, and the setting key 501 is on. In some cases, that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on, and, on condition that the front frame open switch 208g2 is off, to execute the setting change process (S4413), the inner frame open switch 208g1 and In the confirmation process of the front frame open switch 208g2, if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not on, or if the front frame open switch 208g2 is not off even if the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on (that is, if it is on) 2) Start up in normal mode without starting up in setting confirmation mode or setting change mode.

In the start-up process of the eleventh embodiment, when it is determined that the setting key 501 is not ON in S4408 (S4408: No) and the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is ON. If it is determined that there is no memory (SS4409: No), the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 are both turned off and the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. .

On the other hand, in the process of S4408, if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned on (S4408: Yes), or even if it is determined that the setting key 501 is turned off (S4408: No). ), if it is determined that the setting confirmation flag 203x14 is turned on (S4409: Yes), the RAM erasing switch 122 is not turned on and the pachinko machine 10 is turned on with the setting key 501 turned on. Since it is turned on, the process proceeds to S4451 in order to confirm whether or not the setting confirmation process (S4410) can be executed, that is, whether or not it is maintenance work.

In the processing of S4451, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on (S4451: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is open, then the front frame open switch 208g2 is It is determined whether or not it is off (S4452). As a result of the determination, when it is determined that the front frame open switch 208g2 is off (S4452: Yes), that is, when it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the person in charge of the hall who has the setting confirmation authority It is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on, and the process proceeds to S4410 to execute the setting confirmation process (S4410).

On the other hand, in the process of S4451, if it is determined that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4451: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is closed, the outer frame 11 In this state, the inner frame 12 is closed, and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, the process proceeds to S4421, and the normal operation is performed. mode.

Also, in the process of S4452, if it is determined that the front frame open switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4452: No), that is, the inner frame 12 is in the open state and the front frame 14 is determined to be in the open state. If so, there is a high probability that the pachinko machine 10 is being maintained, so the setting confirmation process (S4410) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

Next, in the processing of S4406, if it is determined that the setting change flag 203x13 is on (S4406: Yes), or if it is determined that the setting key 501 is on in the processing of S4412, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. This means that the pachinko machine 10 has been turned on with the setting key 501 turned on, so whether the setting change process (S4413) can be executed, that is, whether it is not during maintenance work. The process proceeds to S4453 in order to confirm whether

In the process of S4453, similarly to the process of S4451, it is determined whether or not the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is turned on (S4453: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is in the open state, then the front frame open switch 208g2 is It is determined whether or not it is off (S4454). As a result of the determination, if it is determined that the front frame open switch 208g2 is off (S4454: Yes), that is, if it is determined that the front frame 14 is in the closed state, the person in charge of the hall who has the setting confirmation authority It is assumed that the pachinko machine 10 has been powered on, and the process proceeds to S4413 to execute the setting change process (S4413).

On the other hand, in the process of S4453, if it is determined that the inner frame open switch 208g1 is not turned on (S4453: No), that is, if it is determined that the inner frame 12 is closed, the outer frame 11 In this state, the inner frame 12 is closed, and there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the back side of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, the setting change processing (S4413) is not executed, and the processing proceeds to S4421, and the normal operation is performed. mode.

Further, in the process of S4454, if it is determined that the front frame open switch 208g2 is not turned off (S4454: No), that is, the inner frame 12 is in the open state and the front frame 14 is determined to be in the open state. If so, there is a high probability that it is maintenance work for the pachinko machine 10, so the setting change process (S4413) is not executed, and the process proceeds to S4421 to start up in the normal mode.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the situation in which only the inner frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, that is, the inner frame open switch 208g1 is on and the front frame In a situation where the open switch 208g2 is off, setting change or setting confirmation work can be performed. When both 208g1 and the front frame open switch 208g2 are on, it is configured such that setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed. Therefore, during maintenance work when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are open, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is not started, but the normal mode is started. By configuring in this way, it is difficult for an employee who does not have the authority to change the settings to change or confirm the settings, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

As described above, the configuration referred to in the description of the eleventh embodiment provides the effects described above. In addition, the same configuration as that of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to tenth embodiments can produce the same effect as that of the configuration.

<Twelfth Embodiment>
Next, a pachinko machine 10 according to a twelfth embodiment to which the present invention is applied will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the ninth embodiment, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the protective cover member 140 attached to the outer frame 11 covers the setting keys 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main controller 110, and when the inner frame 12 is closed, The setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c are configured so that they cannot be operated directly.

On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 extends to the left side of the front view (that is, the right side of the back view) to cover the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110, and the payout It extends downward in front view to a portion covering the sealing portion 111a of the control device 111 . That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111 are covered with the protective cover member 140. .

With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 of the main control device 110 and the sealing unit 100c, the connectors used for communicating control signals to the control devices 111, 113, etc. Direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be made impossible for parts related to game specifications, such as the landing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

The pachinko machine 10 according to the twelfth embodiment will be described below, focusing on the differences from the pachinko machine 10 according to the first to eleventh embodiments. In the following description of the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the same configuration and processing as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the first to eleventh embodiments are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the first to eleventh embodiments. , and its illustration and description are omitted.

Here, the configuration of the protective cover member 140 in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 and 83. FIG. 82 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment, and FIG. 83 is a right side view of the pachinko machine 10 in the twelfth embodiment. For convenience of explanation, FIG. 82 shows a state in which the front frame 14 is removed from the outer frame 11 and the inner frame 12, and FIG. 83 shows a state in which the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are removed from the outer frame 11. are illustrated, and their description is also omitted.

The pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment differs from the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment in that the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 is connected to the connector attachment portion 100h of the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111. The point that covers the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with the sealing portion 111a, and the upright cover wall 161 and the upright lower cover portion 163 of the protective cover member 140 are located on the right side of the seal portion 111a of the payout control device 111 (left side in the back view). ), and the positions of the lower cover mounting hole 11f of the right side plate 11d and the lower mounting hole 153 of the cover mounting portion 150 are slightly lower than in the ninth embodiment. Other configurations are the same as those of the pachinko machine 10 of the ninth embodiment.

As shown in FIGS. 82 and 83, the upright cover wall 161 of the protective cover member 140 of the twelfth embodiment extends continuously downward from the curved portion 154 of the cover mounting portion 150 that is longer than that of the ninth embodiment. It extends toward the rear side of the machine 10 (see FIG. 83). The upright cover wall 161 covers the right side of the main controller 110 in front view (left side in back view) and the right side of the payout control device 111 in front view (left side in back view). Therefore, directly from the right side of the pachinko machine 10 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 (left side when viewed from the back), Since the part cannot be touched, fraudulent acts from the right side of the pachinko machine 10 when viewed from the front can be prevented.

The upright lower cover portion (not shown) of the twelfth embodiment is composed of a lower inner cover portion (not shown) and a lower outer cover portion (not shown). This lower inner cover part extends horizontally from the entire lower part of the upright cover wall 161 and the entire lower part of the cover plate 171 toward the inside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main controller 110 and the payout controller 111 are arranged). It is formed extending in the direction. The lower outer cover portion extends horizontally from the entire lower portion of the standing cover wall 161 toward the outside of the pachinko machine 10 (the direction in which the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 are not arranged). there is

This lower inner cover portion (not shown) has a wider area than the upper inner cover portion (not shown), as in the ninth embodiment. This is because the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, especially the payout control device 111, are located closer to the lower side of the pachinko machine 10, and the main control is performed from the lower side rather than the upper side of the pachinko machine 10. Since it is easy to access the device 110 or the payout control device 111, in many cases, a person who cheats on the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 inserts a wire or the like from the lower back side of the pachinko machine 10. to commit fraud. Therefore, in order to prevent the fraudulent act described above, the area of the lower inner cover portion is widened, and the lower inner cover portion 163a controls the payout control at the lower right side (lower left side when viewed from the back) of the payout control device 111. The gap between the device 111 and the protective cover member 140 is designed to be as small as possible.

By forming the lower inner cover portion (not shown) in this way, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111, in particular, the lower right side of the payout control device 111 in front view (lower left side in back view) are covered, It is possible to prevent fraudulent actions from the lower right side in front view (lower left side in back view) of the payout control device 111 provided with the sealing portion 111a or the main control device 110 provided with the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c. .

Next, the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed from the upright portion 160 (upright cover wall 161, upright upper cover portion 162, upright lower cover portion 163, and upright inner rib 164 (see FIG. 68)). The plate surfaces face the front and rear directions of the pachinko machine 10, and extend to cover the setting portion 100d of the main controller 110 and the connector attachment portion 100h of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 82). Further, the plate surface of the cover plate 171 covers the RAM erase switch 122 provided on the power supply device 115 . Thus, by covering the devices 501, 100c, 122, 111a that may affect game specifications with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved. Note that the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed so as not to cover the base display device 401 and the error display button 502 . Since the cover plate 171 is transparent, the visibility of the back surface and the like is not reduced, so from the viewpoint of the security of the main controller 110 as a whole, the base display device 401 and/or the error display button 502 may be covered. .

A cover outer rib 174 formed on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover plate 171 is formed so as to protrude from a portion corresponding to the setting key 501 and a portion corresponding to the RAM erase switch 122 . By configuring in this way, it is possible to make it difficult to drill a hole or the like in the cover plate 171, and the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

In addition, the upper projection (not shown) of the cover plate 171 of the twelfth embodiment is formed to protrude in the front direction of the pachinko machine 10 in a rib shape, and the lower projection (not shown) of the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 is formed. ) may be formed to protrude in the direction of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 in the form of ribs. By configuring the lower side surface of the upper side protrusion and the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion to contact each other, even when the protective cover member 140 is attached to the outer frame 11, the upper side surface of the protective cover member 140 can be The back pack 92 mounted on the inner frame 12 can be closed without interference between the part and the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92, and the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion and the lower side surface of the upper side protrusion abut. By doing so, the gap between the back pack 92 and the protective cover member 140 can be eliminated, and the main controller 110 cannot be contacted from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 using a wire or the like. Therefore, fraud from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented. In addition, since the back pack 92 is attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of a fixed beam with one end and the other end of the back pack 92 fixed to each other, the back pack 92 is attached to the outer frame 11 like a cantilever beam. Even if an impact is applied to the protective cover member 140 from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the rigidity of the protective cover member 140 is compensated by the back pack 92 attached to the inner frame 12 in the form of a beam fixed at both ends. can do. Therefore, even if an impact or the like is applied from the back side of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to prevent the protective cover member 140 from being damaged.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 extends to the left side in the front view (that is, the right side in the back view) to cover the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110. At the same time, it extends downward in front view to cover the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111 . That is, in addition to the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110, the connector attachment portion 100h of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the dispensing control device 111 are covered by the protective cover member 140. . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is closed, in addition to the setting key 501 of the main controller 110 and the sealing unit 100c, the connector used for communicating control signals to the respective controllers 111, 113, etc. It is possible to prevent direct operation from the back side of the pachinko machine 10 on parts related to game specifications, such as the landing part 100h and the sealing part 111a of the payout control device 111 that manages the payout of prize balls and rental balls. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is closed, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration using one member.

Although the present invention has been described based on the above embodiments, the present invention is by no means limited to the above embodiments, and it will be easily understood that various modifications and improvements are possible without departing from the scope of the present invention. It can be inferred. For example, each embodiment may add part or more of the configuration of another embodiment to that embodiment or replace it with a part or more of the configuration of that embodiment. The embodiment may be modified and configured. Further, the numerical values given in the above embodiment are only examples, and it is naturally possible to adopt other numerical values.

<Modification 1>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection device 300 has been described. In addition to the object ratio and the continuous role ratio, information indicating the game performance of the pachinko machine 10, such as the base value, the number of balls sucked with respect to 100 hit balls (= 100 - base value), jackpot and so on. The average number of outs until the number of outs is reached may be calculated, recorded, and output to the inspection apparatus 300 .

<Modification 2>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a counter is provided in the first reading memory 263 to count the number of winning balls for each winning hole. , you may count the number of balls paid out by winning. Then, in the first embodiment, when it is time to calculate the role ratio, based on the number of balls paid out for each winning opening counted by the first reading/reading memory 263, The product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be calculated and accumulated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . Further, in the second embodiment, when the timing for calculating the character ratio has come, the winning for each winning opening counted by the first reading memory 263 is calculated when the timing for calculating the character ratio has come. The number of balls paid out by , may be accumulated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . In this case, when the number of winning balls for each winning opening is stored in the buffer 262 for 0.5 seconds, the CPU 261 responds to the number of winning balls for each winning opening. By multiplying the number of winning balls in the winning opening, the number of balls put out due to winning in the 0.5 seconds is calculated, and the calculated number of balls put out is stored in the correspondence provided in the first reading memory 263. The number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening by adding to the counter of the winning opening. Further, when it is detected that a prize has been won in one prize-winning slot, the MPU 201 writes information indicating the prize-winning slot in the buffer 262. When the information indicating the opening is written, the number of balls paid out by winning the winning opening is added to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the first reading memory 263, so that for each winning opening, The number of balls paid out by winning a prize may be counted. In addition, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls paid out for each winning opening every 0.5 seconds (or every predetermined time) and stores the number in the buffer 262. , when the writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the CPU 261 calculates, for each winning hole, the number of balls paid out by winning the winning hole for 0.5 seconds written in the buffer 262 as the first By adding to the counter of the corresponding winning opening provided in the reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning opening. When the MPU 201 detects that a winning opening has been won, the MPU 201 stores the number of balls paid out as a result of the winning in the area corresponding to the winning opening in the buffer 262. , in the CPU 261, when writing to the buffer 262 is performed, the counter of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the winning opening storing the number of balls paid out is written to the buffer 262. By adding the number of balls, the number of balls paid out by winning may be counted for each winning hole. In this way, even if the counter provided in the first reading memory 263 counts the number of balls paid out for each winning hole, the number of balls paid out for each winning hole thus counted is paid out. Since the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio can be calculated from the number of balls obtained, fraud can be detected by analyzing the calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio. If the MPU 201 stores in the buffer 262 the number of balls paid out as a result of winning, the winning ball number table 202e does not have to be sent to the character ratio management chip 207, and the buffer 262 From the number of balls paid out by winning a prize for each winning hole stored in , the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated. In addition, in order to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio in the inspection device 300, the number of balls paid out for winning, which is counted for each winning opening, may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. . In this case, the inspection device 300 can calculate the contract ratio and the continuous accessory ratio without transmitting the contents of the number-of-balls table 202e to the inspection device 300 .

<Modification 3>
In the first embodiment described above, the case where the role product ratio data 264a and the continuous role product ratio data 264b are recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. It may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 , or only the continuous character object ratio data 264 b may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . can be The inspection device 300 can analyze fraud by analyzing the role product ratio or the continuous role product ratio transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 .

<Modification 4>
In each of the above embodiments, the case where the first read/write memory 263 is configured with a volatile memory has been described, but the first read/write memory 263 is configured with a nonvolatile memory (eg, flash memory, FeRAM, MRAM, ReRAM, etc.). may be Also, the backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the first read/write memory 263 even while the power is off. In this case, in the processing of S711 (see FIG. 18) executed by the CPU 261 when power is supplied to the character product ratio management chip 207, the initialization of the first read/write memory 263 may not be executed. As a result, the counters 263a to 263f and the data 263g to 263j stored in the first read/write memory 263 can be held even while the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power to the role product ratio management chip 207 is cut off, even if the role product ratio calculation process or winning information storage process is not executed, the most recent second reading memory 264 can be read before the power is cut off. Without omitting the winnings to each winning opening that occurred during the time when it was determined that the power was turned off from the timing (trigger) when the recording was performed to calculate the ratio of the winnings, etc., and the total number of winnings is calculated in the second reading. It can be recorded to memory 264 . Therefore, in this case, the capacitor 267 may be dispensed with.

<Modification 5>
In each of the above embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the inspection result output process is executed and the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 is output. In addition, information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may also be output. Since the information stored in the first reading memory 263 has not yet reached the timing (trigger) to be recorded in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and continuous character ratio recorded in the second reading memory 264 It is information that is not used for calculation, or information that is not recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . Therefore, by transmitting the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 to the inspection device 300, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to perform analysis using the latest information.

Further, in the first embodiment, as the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio calculated by the character product ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. However, by also transmitting the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 to the inspection device 300, although it is short-term information, the total number of balls that have won in each winning hole can be obtained. Raw information before calculating the ratio can be grasped by the inspection device 300 . Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, as information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. If the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300 , the winning balls table 202 e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 uses the winning ball number table 202e to calculate the latest role ratio and continuous role ratio from the total number of winning balls for each winning hole transmitted from the first reading memory 263. and can be analyzed. It should be noted that the calculated role ratio and continuous role ratio are the values of winnings to each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated character object ratio and continuous character object ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300. .

Further, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the CPU 261 calculates the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263, and the calculated role product ratio The ratio and the continuous character ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . As a result, the inspection device 300 can easily analyze fraud by using the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio output from the role product ratio management chip 207 . In this case, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may also be output to the inspection device 300 . This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis using information related to the latest winnings. Also in this case, the number-of-balls table 202e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300. FIG. This allows the inspection device 300 to perform a deeper analysis while referring to the number-of-balls table 202e.

<Modification 6>
In each of the above embodiments, the character object ratio management chip 207 is provided with the first volatile reading memory 263 and the second nonvolatile reading memory 264, and the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b The information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first read/write memory 263 while accumulating until the indicated timing (trigger) is reached. Based on the information stored in 263, the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading memory 264, or accumulated and stored in the first reading memory 263 by the timing. The case of recording various information in the second read/write memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the character object ratio management chip 207, a non-volatile memory provided with at least a first reading area serving as the first reading memory 263 and a second reading area serving as the second reading memory 264. is provided, and until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the information set in the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 is temporarily stored in the first reading area while accumulating. , and when the timing comes, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated and recorded in the second reading area based on the information temporarily stored in the first reading area, or Various information accumulated and stored in the first reading area may be recorded in the second reading area until the timing is reached. As a result, the number of parts of the memory can be reduced, so an increase in the cost of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 7>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the MPU 201 counts the number of balls that have won a prize for each winning hole in 0.5 seconds, and counts the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path. Then, the number of balls counted for each winning hole, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path, and information about the game state at that time are stored in the buffer 262 of the character ratio management chip 207 every 0.5 seconds. Each time the setting is made in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have won a prize for each winning hole set in the buffer 262, the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path, and the game state. The case where the information is accumulated and stored in the first read/write memory 263 has been described. On the other hand, in the MPU 201, the winning of the first starting port 64a is detected by the output of the first starting port switch 208a in the timer interrupt process executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches. In this case, the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, and when the winning of the second start opening 64b is detected by the output of the second start opening switch 208b, the start 2 buffer 262b is turned on, and the first normal winning opening switch 208c is turned on. When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected by the output, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d. The general 2 buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208e, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the out switch 208f is guided to the ball discharge path. When the ball is detected, the out buffer 262f is turned on, and the corresponding jackpot buffer 262g, open buffer 262h, and error buffer 262i are turned on according to the game state at that time, and an interrupt signal is generated. It may be transmitted to the role product ratio management chip 207 . Then, in the character product ratio management chip 207, in the setting information receiving process executed in response to the interrupt signal, when the start 1 buffer 262a is turned on, the start 1 counter 263a is incremented by 1, and the start 2 buffer 262b is When the general 1 buffer 262c is on, the general 1 counter 263c is incremented by 1, and when the general 2 buffer 262d is on, the general 2 counter 263b is incremented by 1. The counter 263d is incremented by 1, and when the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, the big winning opening counter 263e is incremented by 1, and when the out buffer 262f is turned on, the out counter 263f is incremented by 1. When the big win buffer 262g is on, the jackpot information is additionally stored in the big win data 263g together with the time at that time, and when the open buffer 262h is on, the door is opened in the open data 263h. If the error buffer 262i is ON, the error information is additionally stored in the error data 263i along with the time at that time, and the setting If the time at which the information reception process is executed is midnight, the after-hours information may be added to the after-hours data 263j and stored together with the time at that time. As a result, the MPU 201 does not need to count the number of balls that have entered each winning hole or the number of balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, so the processing load of the MPU 201 increases. can be suppressed. Therefore, most of the processing capacity of the MPU 201 can be allocated to the main control of the game that should be performed by the MPU 201 .

<Modification 8>
Also, in this case, the first start switch 208a, the second start switch 208b, the first normal winning switch 208c, the second normal winning switch 208d, the big winning switch 208e, and the out switch 208f are used for role product ratio management. It may be input directly to the chip 207 . Then, in the role product ratio management chip 207, the first starting opening switch 208a, the second starting opening switch 208b, the first normal winning opening switch 208c, the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the big winning opening switch 208e, and the out switch 208f. From each output, the presence or absence of winning to the first start port 64a, the second start port 64b, the first normal winning port 63a, the second normal winning port 63b, the big winning port 65a, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path If there is a prize, the counters 263a to 264e of the first reading memory 263 corresponding to the starting port where the prize was won are incremented by 1, and there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path. In this case, the out counter 263f may be configured to count up by one. As a result, when a prize is won in the prize winning slot or when a ball is guided to the ball discharge path, the situation can be immediately reflected in the role product ratio management chip 207 . In addition, the door opening switch 208g is directly input to the role product ratio management chip 207, and based on the output of the door opening switch 208g, the role product ratio management chip 207 determines whether the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened. Then, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the door opening information is stored in addition to the opening data 263h together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. A management chip 207 may be configured. As a result, when the inner frame 12 or the front frame 14 is opened, the situation can be immediately reflected in the role product ratio management chip 207 .

<Modification 9>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the number of balls that have won a prize in each prize-winning opening until the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached in the role ratio management chip 207 is set to the first Each counter 263a to 264e of the read memory 263 counts, and the number of balls discharged to the ball discharge path until the timing (trigger) is reached is counted by the out counter 263f of the first read memory 263. In the first read/write memory 263, the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the general buffer 262c, the general buffer 2 262d, and the big winning opening buffer 262e are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. , out-buffer 262f (that is, the number of balls won in each winning hole during 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds) are It may be stored sequentially together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 . Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio are calculated from the values stored in the first reading memory 263. Calculate and record in the second read/write memory 264, or calculate the total number of balls that have entered each prize winning opening until the timing is reached, and the total number of balls that have been discharged to the ball discharge path before the timing is calculated. The total number of spheres may be calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . By transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can also determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the character object ratio and the continuous object ratio. can do. In this case, when the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 is transmitted to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the winning openings that have won during 0.5 seconds The number of balls per hour, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds, and the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the number of balls is stored in the first reading memory 263) may be transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300. As a result, information such as how many balls have won in which prize opening at what time every 0.5 seconds, and how many balls have won at what time every 0.5 seconds. The inspecting device 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether the ball was guided to the discharge path at the beginning (that is, whether the ball was shot to the game area). Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, as information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. If the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300 , the winning balls table 202 e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the number of balls winning each winning opening every 0.5 seconds transmitted from the first reading memory 263, and By using the number-of-balls table 202e, it is possible to calculate and analyze the latest character ratio and continuous character ratio. It should be noted that the calculated role ratio and continuous role ratio are the values of winnings to each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated character object ratio and continuous character object ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300. .

<Modification 10>
In addition, the number of balls won in each winning hole in 0.5 seconds, the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in 0.5 seconds, and their When storing the time associated with the number of balls (that is, the time when the number of balls was stored in first read/write memory 263), it is indicated by trigger information data 202f set in trigger setting area 265b. The information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 when the timing (trigger) is reached. In the inspection device 300, the number of balls won in each winning hole during 0.5 seconds recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the number of balls entering the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds The number of guided balls and the time associated with the number of balls are transmitted, and the winning ball number table 202e set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a is transmitted to the inspection device 300. can be As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls in each winning hole for each predetermined section from the number of balls winning in each winning hole every 0.5 seconds, and then calculates the number of winning balls in the winning ball table. 202e is used to calculate the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio for each predetermined section, and the possibility of fraud can be analyzed from changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the role product ratio suspected of cheating and the continuous role product ratio, the inspection device 300 stores the number of balls in each winning hole in 0.5 seconds and 0.5 seconds. Since detailed information related to the game, such as the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path in five seconds and the time corresponding to the number of those balls, is input, based on this information, the role is determined. It is possible to finely investigate the cause of the change in the product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio.

<Modification 11>
In addition, without providing the first read/write memory 263, the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the general buffer 262c, the general buffer 2 262d, the large winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer are set by the MPU 201 every 0.5 seconds. Each value of 262f (that is, the number of balls in each winning hole during 0.5 seconds and the number of balls guided to the ball discharge path during 0.5 seconds) is indicated by RTC 266. It may be directly recorded in the second read/write memory 264 in sequence together with the time at that time. In this case, the game state information set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 0.5 seconds is also combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state of the second reading memory 264. It may be recorded in the data 264d, and if the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the late-night time zone, the after-hours information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state data 264d is recorded. may be recorded in the As a result, the first read/write memory 263 can be made unnecessary, so the cost increase of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 12>
Further, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches, when the winning of the first start opening 64a is detected by the output of the first start opening switch 208a, Turns on the first 1 buffer 262a, and when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, turns on the first 2 buffer 262b, and by the output of the first normal winning opening switch 208c When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the normal 2 The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208e, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is released. When it is configured to turn on the out buffer 262f when detected, the first read/write memory 263 stores the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, and the general buffer 262a, which are set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. 262c, general 2 buffer 262d, big winning opening buffer 262e, and out buffer 262f (that is, information indicating whether or not there is a winning for 2 milliseconds in each winning opening, and guidance to the ball ejection path for 2 milliseconds) information indicating the presence or absence of a ball) may be sequentially stored together with the current time indicated by the RTC 266 . Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, based on each value stored in the first reading memory 263, the role product ratio and the continuous role product The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each prize winning opening until the timing is reached is calculated for each winning, and the balls are discharged to the ball discharge path before the timing is reached. Alternatively, the total number of spheres that have been hit may be calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . By transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can also determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the character object ratio and the continuous object ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is checked. and information indicating whether or not there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263). time) may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, information such as which winning opening was won at which time at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds, and at what time the ball was guided to the discharge path at an extremely short time interval of 2 milliseconds (that is, the game The inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as whether it has been fired to an area. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

<Modification 13>
Further, in the MPU 201, in the timer interrupt processing executed every 2 milliseconds based on the outputs of various switches, when the winning of the first start opening 64a is detected by the output of the first start opening switch 208a, Turns on the first 1 buffer 262a, and when the winning of the second starting opening 64b is detected by the output of the second starting opening switch 208b, turns on the first 2 buffer 262b, and by the output of the first normal winning opening switch 208c When the winning of the first normal winning opening 63a is detected, the normal 1 buffer 262c is turned on, and when the winning of the second normal winning opening 63b is detected by the output of the second normal winning opening switch 208d, the normal 2 The buffer 262d is turned on, and when the winning of the big winning opening 65a is detected by the output of the big winning opening switch 208e, the big winning opening buffer 262e is turned on, and the ball guided to the ball discharge path by the out switch 208f is released. When it is detected that the out buffer 262f is turned on, if the first read/write memory 263 has turned on buffers among the buffers 262a to 262e corresponding to the winning openings, The information indicating the winning opening where the prize was won, and the information indicating that there was a ball guided to the ball discharge path when the out buffer 262f was turned on, is displayed by the RTC 266 and the time at that time. may be stored sequentially. Then, when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, based on each information stored in the first reading memory 263, the role product ratio and the continuous role product The ratio is calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264, or the total number of balls that have entered each prize winning opening until the timing is reached is calculated for each winning, and the balls are discharged to the ball discharge path before the timing is reached. Alternatively, the total number of spheres that have been hit may be calculated and recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . By transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the inspection device 300 can also determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity from the character object ratio and the continuous object ratio. can do. In this case, when transmitting the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the information stored in the first reading memory 263, that is, the presence or absence of winning for 2 milliseconds at each winning opening is checked. and information indicating whether or not there is a ball guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and the time associated with the information (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263). time) may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 can grasp detailed information such as information such as which winning opening and at what time the ball was won, and at what time the ball was guided to the discharge path (that is, whether it was launched into the game area). become. Therefore, the analysis in the inspection apparatus 300 can be performed more deeply and accurately.

As a modification of the first embodiment, as information recorded in the second read/write memory 264, the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio calculated by the character material ratio management chip 207 are transmitted to the inspection device 300. If the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 is also transmitted to the inspection device 300 , the winning balls table 202 e may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening from the information indicating whether or not there is a winning ball in each winning opening transmitted from the first reading memory 263 every 2 milliseconds. Then, by using the number-of-balls table 202e, the latest character ratio and continuous character ratio can be calculated and analyzed. It should be noted that the calculated role ratio and continuous role ratio are the values of winnings to each winning slot in a short period of time before the timing indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b. Since it is calculated based on the total number of balls, the calculated character object ratio and continuous character object ratio are not necessarily accurate values, but can be used as reference values for analysis by the inspection device 300. .

<Modification 14>
In addition, in the first read/write memory 263, information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds in each prize winning opening, information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds, and correspondence to such information. When storing the attached time (that is, the time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263), the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b and the The information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 when an error occurs. In the inspection device 300, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264, which indicates whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds at each prize winning opening, and whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds. and the time associated with the information are transmitted, and the winning ball number table 202e set in the winning ball number data setting area 265a is also transmitted to the inspection device 300. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls in each winning hole for each predetermined section from the information indicating the presence or absence of the winning balls in each winning hole every 2 milliseconds. By using the number table 202e to calculate the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio for each predetermined section, the possibility of fraud can be analyzed from changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio. In addition, when there is a change in the character product ratio suspected of fraud and the continuous character product ratio, the inspection device 300 receives information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds in each prize winning opening, and a ball for 2 milliseconds. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating the presence or absence of the ball guided to the discharge path and the time associated with the information is input, the role ratio and the continuous role are determined based on this information. It is possible to investigate the causes of changes in material ratios in detail.

<Modification 15>
In addition, in the first reading memory 263, information indicating the prize-winning opening where the prize was won, information indicating that the ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and the time associated with the information (that is, time when the information was stored in the first read/write memory 263), when the timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is reached, the first The information stored in the read/write memory 263 may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . In the inspection device 300, the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 indicates the prize-winning opening, the information indicating that the ball was guided to the ball discharge path, and their information. The time associated with the information may be transmitted, and the number-of-balls table 202e set in the number-of-balls data setting area 265a may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together. As a result, the inspection device 300 calculates the total number of winning balls for each winning opening for each predetermined section from the information indicating the winning opening, and then calculates each winning ball using the winning ball number table 202e. By calculating the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio in the predetermined section, it is possible to analyze the possibility of fraudulent activity from changes in the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio. Also, when there is a change in the role product ratio suspected of fraud and the continuous role product ratio, the inspection device 300 has information indicating the prize winning opening and the ball guided to the ball discharge path. Since detailed information related to the game such as information indicating that the game has been played and the time associated with the information is input, the cause of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be determined based on this information. You can search in detail.

<Modification 16>
In addition, without providing the first read/write memory 263, the first buffer 262a, the first buffer 262b, the general buffer 262c, the general buffer 2 262d, the big winning opening buffer 262e, and the out buffer 262f are set by the MPU 201 every 2 milliseconds. (that is, information indicating whether or not a prize has been won for 2 milliseconds in each prize opening, and information indicating whether or not a ball has been guided to the ball discharge path for 2 milliseconds) is indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. , and may be directly recorded in the second read/write memory 264 sequentially. In this case, the game state information set in the jackpot buffer 262g, the open buffer 262h, and the error buffer 262i every 2 milliseconds is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266, and the game state data of the second reading memory 264 264d, and when the setting from the MPU 201 to the buffer 262 is performed in the midnight time zone, the after-hours information is combined with the time indicated by the RTC 266 and recorded in the game state data 264d. You may make it record. As a result, the first read/write memory 263 can be made unnecessary, so the cost increase of the character product ratio management chip 207 can be suppressed.

<Modification 17>
In each of the above embodiments, the area in which information is recorded in the second read/write memory 264 (for example, in the first embodiment, the character ratio data 264a, the continuous character ratio data 264b, the number of shot balls data 264c, and the game state data 264d is recorded (in the second embodiment, the area where the ball number data 264c, the game state data 264d, and the winning counter data 264e are recorded) is calculated and stored in the second read/write memory 264. When transmitting the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the checksum value may also be transmitted. When the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 is received in the inspection device 300, a checksum value is calculated from the received information, and compared with the checksum value transmitted from the role-product ratio management chip 207. If they match, it may be determined that the received information is correct and analyzed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the inspection apparatus 300 from performing analysis based on erroneous information.

<Modification 18>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, an interrupt signal is generated, and based on the interrupt signal, the CPU 261 executes inspection result output processing to manage the role product ratio. Although the case where the information recorded by the chip 207 is output to the inspection device 300 has been described, it is not necessarily limited to this, and is based on the command transmitted from the inspection device 300 connected to the inspection terminal 207a. , the information recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 may be output to the inspection device 300 . As a result, when the inspection device 300 becomes capable of receiving information transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 and then transmits a command to the role product ratio management chip 207, the inspection device 300 Information transmitted from the material ratio management chip 207 can be reliably received.

<Modification 19>
In each of the above embodiments, when the CPU 261 is executing the role product ratio calculation process (first embodiment) or the prize winning information storage process (second embodiment), the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a and allocated. When the interrupt signal is generated, while the role product ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process is being executed, the execution of the inspection result output process corresponding to the interrupt signal is waited, and the role product ratio calculation process or the winning information After the saving process is finished, execution of inspection result output may be started. As a result, the inspection result output process is executed during the execution of the role product ratio calculation process or the winning information storage process, and incorrect information is transmitted to the inspection device 300 because it is being written to the second read/write memory 264. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation where

<Modification 20>
In each of the above-described embodiments, a case has been described in which winning information and the like are transmitted in one direction from the MPU 201 to the role product ratio management chip 207 in the main control device 110, but the MPU 201 receives information output from the role product ratio management chip 207 and perform some processing based on that information. For example, when the operation of the role product ratio management chip 207 stops, or when some error occurs in processing in the role product ratio management chip 207, the information is transmitted from the role product ratio management chip 207 to the MPU 201. Based on the information, the MPU 201 notifies the fact by displaying on the first pattern display device 37, lighting/flickering of the lamp, outputting by voice, displaying on the third pattern display device 81, and the like. may be controlled. As a result, the person concerned with the hall can know the abnormality of the role product ratio management chip 207, and can take some countermeasures. In addition, based on information indicating that the operation of the role product ratio management chip 207 has stopped or information indicating that some error has occurred in processing in the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 201 The character product ratio management chip 207 may be reset. Thereby, the abnormality of the role product ratio management chip 207 can be automatically resolved, and the role product ratio management chip 207 can be operated again.

<Modification 21>
Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 receives the role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 and the ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio, the pachinko The MPU 201 may control the machine 10 to perform the first predetermined notification. Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the MPU 201 receives the continuous role ratio calculated by the role ratio management chip 207 and the continuous role ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio , the MPU 201 may control the pachinko machine 10 to perform a second predetermined notification. Also, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment, from the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 and the second read/write memory 264, the appropriate role ratio or continuous role ratio is calculated and transmitted to the MPU 201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform the above comparison and notification based on the character material ratio and the continuous character material ratio received from the character material ratio management chip 207 . As the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the LED 37a of the first pattern display device 37 may be displayed in a predetermined color, or a predetermined number may be displayed on the 7-segment display 37b. Also, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, a command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 to turn on or flash a predetermined lamp in a predetermined manner or to output a predetermined sound. Alternatively, a command is transmitted to the sound lamp control device 113 so as to display a predetermined pattern or character on the third pattern display device 81, and the display control device is displayed from the sound lamp control device 113 based on the command. Further commands may be sent to 114 . In addition, as the first predetermined notification and the second predetermined notification, the hall computer 600 provided in the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed, via a relay board (not shown). or information indicating that the continuous character ratio is higher than a second predetermined ratio. By these reports, the pachinko machine 10 can directly notify the pachinko machine 10 of the abnormality in the pachinko machine 10's character product ratio or continuous character product ratio. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that may have been illicitly used can be easily found. In addition, such notification can lead to deterrence of fraudulent actions.

<Modification 22>
In each of the above embodiments, the character product ratio management chip 207 determines whether the calculated character product ratio or continuous character product ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or the second predetermined ratio. You may output a judgment result to MPU201. Then, the MPU 201 may perform control to perform the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the judgment result received from the character product ratio management chip 207 . Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 itself may execute control for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification based on the above determination result. For example, the LEDs that perform these notifications are connected to the role product ratio management chip 207, and the LEDs are driven and controlled when the role product ratio management chip 207 performs the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification. You may Also, the character product ratio management chip 207 may directly control the first pattern display device 37 to display the LED 37a in a predetermined color or display a predetermined number on the 7-segment display 37b. In addition, a command for performing the first predetermined notification or the second predetermined notification is directly transmitted from the character product ratio management chip 207 to the sound lamp control device 113, and the sound lamp control device 113 transmits the command Based on this, it may be controlled to turn on/blink a predetermined lamp, output a predetermined sound, or perform a predetermined display on the third pattern display device 81 . In addition, information indicating that the character product ratio is higher than the first predetermined ratio or information indicating that the continuous character product ratio is higher than the second predetermined ratio is sent directly from the character product ratio management chip 207 to the hall computer 600 . You may make it transmit the information which shows that it is high. In this way, the pachinko machine 10 can also directly notify the pachinko machine 10 of the abnormality in the pachinko machine 10's character ratio or continuous character ratio. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 that may have been illicitly used can be easily found. In addition, such notification can lead to deterrence of fraudulent acts.

<Modification 23>
In the second embodiment, when the character ratio management chip 207 transmits the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 to the inspection device 300, the prize balls set in the prize ball number data setting area 265a The case of transmitting the information of the number table 202e to the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. On the other hand, in the role product ratio management chip 207, when the inspection device 300 is output to the inspection terminal 207a, or based on the control signal from the inspection device 300, the MPU 201 receives the prize number table 202e , and the winning ball number table 202e transmitted by the MPU 201 in response to the request may be configured so that the character ratio management chip 207 transmits to the inspection device 300. In addition, the inspection device 300 outputs a signal requesting transmission of the number of winning balls table 202e directly to the MPU 201, and the MPU 201 receives the request signal and directly transmits the number of winning balls table 202e to the inspection device 300. You may make it Also, after the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. You may make it As a result, the prize ball number data setting area 265a can be eliminated from the character product ratio management chip 207, and the number of registers can be reduced.

<Modification 24>
Further, the main controller 110 may not transmit the prize ball table 202e to the inspection device 300, and the number of prize balls for the inspection device 300 may be set manually. As a result, the main controller 110 does not need to control the transmission of the number-of-balls table 202e.

<Modification 25>
In the above-described first embodiment, the case where the number-of-balls table 202e is not transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. good. As a result, the inspection device 300 can analyze whether or not there is a possibility of cheating due to changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, while also referring to the number-of-balls table 202e.

<Modification 26>
In each of the above embodiments, an output register (buffer) for temporarily storing information transmitted from the second read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 may be provided between the second read/write memory 264 and the inspection terminal 207a. good. As a result, even if the read speed of information read from the second read/write memory 264 and the transmission speed for transmitting information to the character product ratio management chip 207 are different, the second 2. Information can be easily sent from the read/write memory 264 to the inspection device 300 .

<Modification 27>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power is turned off, based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263, the information regarding the character object ratio and the like is recorded in the second read/write memory 264. explained. On the other hand, by configuring the first read/write memory 263 as a non-volatile memory or supplying a backup voltage to the first read/write memory 263, data can be stored even while the power is turned off. It may be configured so that when the power is supplied, the information regarding the character object ratio and the like may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 . Also by this, after being recorded in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio can be calculated without omission with respect to the number of prize balls paid out before the power is turned off. . Moreover, since the recording to the second read/write memory 264 is performed when the power is turned on, the possibility that the power is completely cut off during the recording to the second read/write memory 264 can be suppressed.

<Modification 28>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when it is detected that the power supply is cut off, the information about the character ratio etc. is automatically sent to the second reading memory 263 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263 under the control of the CPU 261. The case of recording in the read/write memory 264 has been described. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263, as the timing (trigger) for recording the information on the character object ratio etc. in the second read/write memory 264, "power off" or "Power supply" may be defined. Then, if the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power off", the power off is detected based on the information stored in the first read/write memory 263. , the information about the character ratio, etc. is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and when the trigger information data 202f set in the trigger setting area 265b is "power supply", when the power is supplied, the first reading Based on the information stored in the memory 263 , information regarding the character product ratio and the like may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 . As a result, according to the setting of the trigger information data 202f in the MPU 201, the power is turned off while recording the information regarding the character object ratio etc. to the second reading memory 264 based on the information stored in the first reading memory 263. or when power is supplied. If "power supply" can be specified as the trigger information data 202f, the first read/write memory 263 can be configured as a non-volatile memory, or a backup voltage can be supplied to the first read/write memory 263, so that the first The read/write memory 263 may be configured so that data can be saved even while the power is turned off.

<Modification 29>
In each of the above embodiments, in the trigger information data 202f, the "number of shots , 'time', and 'playing time' are specified. On the other hand, in the trigger information data 202f, the "power supply time" may be specified. When information indicating "power supply time" is defined in the trigger information data 202f, information indicating "predetermined time", which is the timing for recording the information on the character object ratio, etc. in the second reading memory 264, is also defined. may For example, when the trigger information data 202f defines information indicating "power supply time" and information indicating 4 hours as the "predetermined time", the character ratio management chip 207 sets the following in the trigger setting area 265b: At the stage of setting the trigger information data 202f, the time indicated by the RTC 266 is acquired, the acquired time is stored in the memory as the "power supply time measurement start time", and then the time indicated by the RTC 266 and the It is determined whether 4 hours have passed since the power was supplied from the difference from the "power supply time measurement start time". Based on the obtained information, information regarding the character product ratio and the like may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 . Then, the time at which the recording was performed is acquired from the RTC 266, and that time is stored in the memory as a new "power supply time measurement start time". It may be determined whether four hours have elapsed from the difference from the "start time". By defining the trigger (timing) for calculating the role product ratio by the power supply time, even in a situation where the pachinko machine 10 does not play many games, the power supply time has passed for a predetermined time, so that the role can be reliably played. A product ratio and a continuous accessory ratio can be calculated. Therefore, it is possible to cause the inspection device 300 to reliably analyze whether or not there is fraudulent activity based on the reliably calculated role product ratio and continuous role product ratio.

<Modification 30>
In the second embodiment, the information recorded in the winning counter data 264e of the second reading memory 264, which indicates the total number of winning balls in each winning opening for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f. is transmitted to the inspection device 300 together with the number-of-balls table 202e. On the other hand, when information indicating the total number of balls that have won in each winning hole for each timing (trigger) indicated by the trigger information data 202f is transmitted to the inspection device 300, based on the information for each timing Then, the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio at each timing may be calculated, and information indicating the calculated character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 together. Alternatively, when transmitting to the inspection device 300, instead of the information indicating the total number of winning balls in each winning opening stored in the second reading memory 264, the character ratio and the continuous role are calculated based on the information. The product ratio may be calculated, and the calculated character product ratio and continuous character product ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 . As a result, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio, and analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Also, when calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio by the inspection device 300, there is a possibility that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio will be calculated based on the prize ball number table that has been illegally or erroneously set. However, if the character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated in the character ratio management chip 207, the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the number-of-balls table 202e will be tampered with, and it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio.

<Modification 31>
In addition, not limited to the second embodiment, the second reading memory 264 does not store information indicating the character product ratio or the continuous character product ratio, and the information necessary to calculate at least one of these is not stored in the second reading memory 264. 2 If it is stored in the reading memory 264, the CPU 261 calculates the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio from the information stored in the second reading memory 264 when transmitting to the inspection device 300. , the calculated character product ratio and continuous character product ratio may be output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second read/write memory 264 or instead of the information. As a result, the inspection device 300 does not need to calculate the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio, and analysis by the inspection device 300 can be facilitated. Also, when calculating the character ratio and the continuous character ratio by the inspection device 300, there is a possibility that the character ratio and the continuous character ratio will be calculated based on the prize ball number table that has been illegally or erroneously set. However, if the character ratio and continuous character ratio are calculated in the character ratio management chip 207, the number of prize balls in the number of prize balls data setting area 265a set by the startup process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on By using the table 202e, there is no possibility that the number-of-balls table 202e will be tampered with, and it is possible to accurately calculate the role ratio and the continuous role ratio. In addition, if the calculated character object ratio and continuous object ratio are output to the inspection device 300 together with the information stored in the second reading memory 264, the inspection device 300 can display the object ratio and the continuous object ratio. is determined to be suspicious, the cause can be investigated based on the information stored in the second read/write memory 264 . In the inspection device 300, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio are calculated from the information stored in the second reading memory 264, and the character ratio and the continuous character ratio output from the character ratio management chip 207 are calculated. By judging whether or not they match, it becomes possible to judge whether or not some kind of fraudulent act has been carried out.

<Modification 32>
In each of the above embodiments, an out switch 208f is provided for detecting the ball guided to the ball discharge path, and the number of times the ball is detected by the out switch 208f is counted to determine the number of balls launched into the game area. Although the case of counting is explained, various methods may be used as a method of counting the number of balls shot into the game area. For example, an out port switch is provided to detect balls passing through the out port 66, and the number of balls passing through the out port 66 detected by the out port switch and the number of balls passing through the out port 66 detected by the first starting port switch 208a are detected. The number of balls passing through the opening 64a, the number of balls passing through the second starting opening 64b detected by the second starting opening switch 208b, and the first normal winning opening 63a detected by the first normal winning opening switch 208c. The number of balls passed through, the number of balls passed through the second normal winning opening 63b detected by the second normal winning opening switch 208d, and the balls passing through the large winning opening 65a detected by the large winning opening switch 208e The number of balls shot into the play area may be calculated by summing the number of . A supply ball detection switch for detecting balls supplied to the ball shooting unit 112a, and a foul ball for detecting balls that have been shot by the ball shooting unit 112a and discharged from the ball guide passage as foul balls without reaching the game area. A detection switch is provided, and the counter counts up by 1 each time a ball is detected by the supply ball detection switch and counts down by 1 each time a ball is detected by the foul ball detection switch. may be counted. Also, instead of the supplied ball detection switch, a shot ball detection switch for detecting the ball shot by the ball shooting unit 112a is provided, and each time a ball is detected by the shot ball detection switch, the count is incremented by 1 to detect a foul ball. The number of balls shot into the game area may be counted by a counter that counts down by one each time a ball is detected by a switch. A game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch detects the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area. A counter that counts up by one each time a ball is detected by a switch may be provided to count the balls shot into the game area.

<Modification 33>
In each of the above embodiments, the CPU 261 is provided in the role product ratio management chip 207, and based on the software executed by the CPU 261, the information about the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio is recorded in the second reading memory 264, and the inspection apparatus 300 has been described. On the other hand, a part or all of the functions of the role product ratio management chip 207 may be configured by wired logic. By configuring with wired logic, it is possible to manage the information on the character ratio at high speed.

<Modification 34>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the case where the role product ratio management chip 207 is provided in the main control device 110, the information regarding the role product ratio is recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207, and transmitted to the inspection device 300 has been described. On the other hand, a non-volatile memory is connected to the MPU 201, the MPU 201 records the information on the role product ratio in the non-volatile memory, and the MPU 201 transmits the information recorded in the non-volatile memory to the inspection device 300. may be controlled to As a result, the MPU 201 itself uses the information about the winning of the balls in each winning hole detected by the MPU 201 and the information about the balls guided to the ball discharge path to another chip, and the information about the character ratio is obtained. Since it can be managed, it is less likely to be affected by noise, and it is possible to more accurately manage the information on the character item ratio.

<Modification 35>
Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be provided separately from the main controller 110 so that the role product ratio management chip 207 and the main controller 110 are connected. In this case, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be housed in the same board box 100 as the main controller 110, or in a board box different from the board box 100 in which the main controller 110 is housed. good. When the role product ratio management chip 207 is stored in a substrate box different from the main controller 110, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be stored in a substrate box dedicated to the role product ratio management chip 207, or other control may be performed. The role product ratio management chip 207 may be housed in any one of the board boxes 101 to 104 housing devices and the like.

<Modification 36>
Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the payout control device 111 or may be provided in the payout control device 111 . Then, the role product ratio management chip 207 may record information on the role product ratio based on the signal from the payout control device 111 and transmit it to the inspection device 300 . In this case, from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, information on winning for each winning opening (for example, the number of balls that have won during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening number) is transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the character product ratio management chip 207 . In addition, in the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the payout control device 111, together with the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out), it is possible to determine which prize hole the prize balls are associated with. Based on the prize ball command, the number of prize balls indicated by the prize ball command is set in the area corresponding to the prize winning opening where the prize was won in the buffer 262, and the number of prize balls is set in the buffer 262. By adding the number of winning balls obtained to the counter of the corresponding winning hole provided in the first reading memory 263, the number of balls paid out by winning the corresponding winning hole is calculated at the counter for each winning hole. You can count the number. Further, instead of the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 may realize the function of the role product ratio management chip 207. Also by these, the information about the role product ratio can be recorded in the role product ratio management chip 207 or the payout control device 111 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . In these cases, in the main control unit 110, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main control unit 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. to the payout control device 111 by a command. Thus, using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the payout control device 111 side can manage the accessory ratio and the like.

<Modification 37>
Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the sound lamp control device 113 , or the role product ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the sound lamp control device 113 . Then, the character material ratio management chip 207 may record information on the character material ratio based on the signal from the sound lamp control device 113 and transmit the information to the inspection device 300 . In this case, from the main control device 110 to the sound lamp control device 113, information on winning for each winning opening (for example, balls that have won during a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) ) may be transmitted and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the character product ratio management chip 207 . Further, instead of the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 221 of the audio lamp control device 113 may implement the functions of the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG. These also allow the character material ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113 to record information about the character material ratio and transmit it to the inspection device 300 . In addition, by managing the character ratio management chip 207 or the sound lamp control device 113, the calculated character ratio, continuous character ratio, etc. can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Commands may be sent to controller 114 . By the display on the third pattern display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 with a strange character ratio or continuous character ratio can be easily found by the persons concerned in the hall, and the fraudulent person can be prevented from committing an illegal act. can. Also, when the character ratio management chip 207 or the continuous character ratio calculated by the sound lamp control device 113 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraud is suspected), the voice output device 226 Or to output the notification sound, the sound lamp control device 113 performs control such as lighting and blinking the lamp display device 227 in a predetermined manner, in order to display a predetermined display on the third symbol display device 81, A command may be sent to the display controller 114 . As a result, the pachinko machine 10 suspected of fraudulent activity can be easily found by the persons involved in the hall, and the fraudulent act can be suppressed from committing a fraudulent act. In these cases, in the main control unit 110, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main control unit 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. 110 to the audio ramp controller 113 as a command. Accordingly, by using the information stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller 110, the character ratio and the like can be managed on the audio lamp controller 113 side.

<Modification 38>
Also, the role product ratio management chip 207 may be connected to the display control device 114 , or the role product ratio management chip 207 may be provided in the display control device 114 . Then, the character product ratio management chip 207 may record information on the character product ratio based on the signal from the display control device 114 and transmit it to the inspection device 300 . In this case, from the main control device 110 to the display control device 114 via the audio lamp control device 113, information about the winning of each winning opening (for example, a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) for each winning opening information indicating the number of winning balls) may be transmitted, and the information may be stored in the buffer 262 of the character product ratio management chip 207 . Further, instead of the role product ratio management chip 207, the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 may implement the function of the role product ratio management chip 207. FIG. With these also, the information on the character product ratio can be recorded in the character product ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114 and transmitted to the inspection device 300 . In addition, by managing the character ratio management chip 207 or the display control device 114, the control to display the calculated character ratio, the continuous character ratio, etc. on the third pattern display device 81 can be controlled by the display control. Device 114 may do so. By the display on the third pattern display device 81, the pachinko machine 10 with a strange character ratio or continuous character ratio can be easily found by the persons concerned in the hall, and the fraudulent person can be prevented from committing an illegal act. can. Further, when the character ratio management chip 207 or the continuous character ratio calculated by the display control device 114 is in a predetermined state (for example, a state in which fraudulent activity is suspected), a predetermined display is displayed in the third pattern. The display control device 114 may perform control for displaying on the display device 81 . As a result, the pachinko machine 10 suspected of fraudulent activity can be easily found by the persons involved in the hall, and the fraudulent act can be suppressed from committing a fraudulent act. In these cases, in the main control unit 110, the information of the number-of-balls table 202e and the information of the trigger information data 202f are transferred to the main control unit 110 by the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is turned on. 110 via the audio lamp controller 113 to the display controller 114 as a command. Accordingly, using these pieces of information stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, the character product ratio and the like can be managed on the display control device 114 side.

<Modification 39>
In each of the above embodiments, on the board provided with the main controller 110, or connected to the role ratio management chip 207, or mounted with the role ratio management chip 207, or mounted on the role ratio management chip 207 A display device provided with a plurality of 7-segment displays is provided on a board provided with a control device that realizes the function, and the display device is related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio. Information or information indicating game performance (for example, base value, etc.) may be displayed. The display device may be configured by a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like having a predetermined number of pixels instead of the 7-segment display. The display device is on a board on which the main controller 110 is provided, or is connected to the character material ratio management chip 207, or is equipped with the character material ratio management chip 207, or functions as the character material ratio management chip 207. is not provided on a board provided with a control device that realizes, but is connected to a board provided with a main control device 110 or a role ratio management chip 207, or a role ratio management chip 207 is mounted Alternatively, it may be connected to a substrate provided with a control device that realizes the function of the role product ratio management chip 207 . The display device may be assembled so that the display screen of the display device can be seen when looking at the back side of the pachinko machine 10, or the display screen of the display device can be seen from the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may be assembled as follows.

<Modification 40>
The information about the role product ratio and the continuous role product ratio displayed on the display device may be, for example, information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning prizes for each prize opening, or information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning , the total number of balls paid out by winning the prize-winning opening (in this embodiment, the second start opening 64b and the big winning opening 65a) in which the role product operates, and the role It may also be information indicating the total number of balls paid out by winning a winning prize opening (in this embodiment, the big winning prize opening 65a) in which objects operate continuously. Further, information indicating the total number of balls shot into the game area (the number of shot balls) may be included in the information regarding the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device. The display device is composed of a liquid crystal display, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, or the like with a predetermined number of pixels instead of the 7-segment display, and the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the role Information related to the product ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed.

<Modification 41>
The character ratio and continuous character ratio displayed on the display device, information related to the character ratio and continuous character ratio, or information indicating game performance is recorded in the second read/write memory 264, which is the most recent. At the timing (trigger), the information itself recorded in the second read/write memory 264 or the information generated from the information may be used. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed in a plurality of second reading memories 264 including the latest, the recording itself in the second reading memory 264, or the recording in the second reading memory 264 at each timing The information generated from the information may be displayed on the display device as information relating to the role product ratio, the continuous role product ratio, the role product ratio or the continuous role product ratio, or information indicating the game performance. In addition, at the timing (trigger) at which recording is performed in a plurality of second read/write memories 264 including the latest, information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 or all timings (trigger) recorded in the second read/write memory 264 ), the average value of the information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is obtained, and the average value is displayed on the display device. may Furthermore, not only the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 but also the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are reflected to determine the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio. Related information or information indicating game performance may be generated and displayed on the display device.

As a result, by looking at the display device, there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out from the information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. can be judged. The display device may simultaneously display any of the character ratio, the continuous character, information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and information indicating the game performance, or may display them one by one. You may let Also, any one of the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and the information indicating the game performance may be alternately displayed at predetermined time intervals. When alternately displaying, information indicating what is being displayed may be displayed together. In addition, if the character ratio or the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device or other information exceeds a predetermined ratio (for example, if the character ratio exceeds 70%, the continuous character ratio exceeds 60%), the displayed role product ratio, continuous role product ratio, and other information may be displayed in a color different from usual or may be blinked. Further, in the display device, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on for a predetermined period (for example, a predetermined period of time such as 30 seconds, or until the start-up process is completed by the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110). (which may be a period until a predetermined process is completed, such as a period), information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, or the continuous character ratio, or information indicating the game performance may be displayed. Thereby, the person concerned with the hall confirms the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, and the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio. By doing so, it is possible to easily check whether or not there has been any fraudulent act. Further, in the display device, when it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the game performance is displayed. Information may be displayed. Thus, when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, a person involved in the hall can easily confirm whether or not there has been any fraudulent act by confirming the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio displayed on the display device. . In addition, when it is determined that the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio to the display device, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance The display may be for a predetermined period of time (for example, 10 seconds), or until the MPU 201 of the main control unit 110 completes the power-off process (for example, until the process of S705 is completed). , may be a period until a predetermined process is completed). Also, when it is determined that the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio to the display device, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance , power from a backup power source, a secondary battery, a large-capacity capacitor, or the like may be used. Also, the display device may be accommodated in the substrate box. As a result, it is possible to prevent the display device from displaying an incorrect value.

<Modification 42>
In addition, a button for displaying the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance is provided on the display device, and the button is operated. In this case, the display device may display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. As a result, only when the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, and other information are confirmed, by operating the button, information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, and the continuous character ratio Alternatively, since the information indicating the game performance can be displayed on the display device, it is possible to suppress wasteful power consumption in the display device. Further, the operation of the button is effective only when the pachinko machine 10 is in a non-execution state, and the display device displays information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, Alternatively, information indicating game performance may be displayed. The pachinko machine 10 determines that the game is not being executed. If not, it may be performed when the ball launching unit 112a has not performed ball shooting, or when the ball guided to the game area has not been detected. As a result, it is possible to prevent a cheater from trying to do something wrong by looking at the information displayed on the display device while playing a game.

<Modification 43>
Also, the operation of the button may be effective only when it is operated in combination with another button. As a result, a cheater who does not know the effective combination of button operations can display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. It can be made so that it cannot be easily displayed on the device. Also, while operating a button for displaying on the display device the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, the information related to the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, the pachinko machine 10 is powered on. Only when is inserted, the display device may display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated by operating the buttons together to obtain the character ratio, the consecutive character ratio, and the character ratio and the consecutive character ratio displayed on the display device. By confirming the information related to the product ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there was any fraudulent act during business hours on the previous day or outside business hours at night. Also, while operating a button for displaying on the display device the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, the information related to the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is operated. Only when is disconnected, the display device may display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance. As a result, when the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the pachinko machine 10 can be operated by operating the same button to display the character ratio, the consecutive character ratio, the character ratio, and the continuous role displayed on the display device. By confirming the information related to the product ratio or the information indicating the game performance, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not there was any fraudulent act before or during the day's business. The display of the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance on the display device by operating the button ends based on the elapse of a predetermined period. Alternatively, it may end when the button is operated again. Further, only during the period when the operation of the button is continuously performed, the character product ratio, the continuous character product ratio, the information related to the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, or the information indicating the game performance are displayed. good too.

<Modification 44>
In addition, when the button is operated and the display device displays information related to the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, or the information related to the role ratio or the continuous role ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, the pachinko machine The game mode of 10 may be the check mode, and the main control of the game in the main controller 110 may be temporarily stopped. Accordingly, as the game progresses, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance change. , it is possible to suppress the fact that it is difficult to confirm the role product ratio. In this case, the main control device 110 sets the game mode of the pachinko machine 10 to the check mode, and at the stage of temporarily stopping the main control of the game, to the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114), A command for notifying the transition to the check mode may be transmitted. Then, when the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 receive the command notifying the transition to the check mode, for example, a predetermined image (for example, a black screen) corresponding to the check mode is displayed on the third pattern display device 81 ) is displayed, the variable effect being executed continues to fluctuate at high speed during the check mode period, the sound output from the audio output device 226 is also a predetermined sound corresponding to the check mode, and the sound corresponding to high speed fluctuation may be controlled to output As a result, it is possible to indicate to the player that the pachinko machine 10 has entered the check mode. In addition, the main control device 110 cancels the check mode as the game mode of the pachinko machine 10, and at the stage of restarting the main control of the game, the check mode is set to the sound lamp control device 113 (and the display control device 114). You may send a command notifying that it will be released. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 restore the image displayed on the third pattern display device 81 and the sound output from the sound output device 226 to those before the transition to the check mode. can be done.

<Modification 45>
Further, in the modified examples described so far, when a button operation is performed, the display device provided on the board of the main control device 110 or the like displays the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the character ratio, or the continuous character ratio. Although the case of displaying related information or information indicating game performance has been described, in addition to or instead of this, when a button operation is performed, the first symbol display device 37 or the third symbol display device is displayed. 81. The lamp display device 227 or the like may display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio or the continuous character ratio, or the information indicating the game performance, or output the sound. The device 226 may output a character ratio, a continuous character ratio, or some notification sound indicating game performance. Also in this case, the modified example described above may be appropriately applied in relation to the button operation.

<Modification 46>
Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, when the inspection device 300 is connected to the inspection terminal 207a, a case has been described in which the information related to the character object ratio is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Information related to the role product ratio may be transmitted to the inspection device 300 when a button operation is performed. Also in this case, the modified example described above may be appropriately applied in relation to the button operation.

<Modification 47>
In each of the above embodiments, the information managed by the role product ratio management chip 207 is transmitted to the inspection device 300. Based on the information managed by the role product ratio management chip 207, the main controller 110 or the like to display the character ratio, the continuous character ratio and other various information on the display device provided on the substrate, the first pattern display device 37, the third pattern display device 81, the lamp display device 227, etc. By displaying information about the object ratio, the continuous role ratio, or information indicating the game performance, or outputting some notification sound related to the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, or the game performance from the voice output device 226, When configured to perform some notification, transmission to inspection device 300 does not necessarily have to be performed.

<Modification 48>
In each of the above embodiments, the large-capacity capacitor 267 or secondary battery is connected to the character ratio management chip 207, and when the power supply to the main controller 110 is stopped due to a power failure or the like, the character ratio management chip 207 , the case where the power charged in the capacitor 267 is used to execute the process associated with the power-off has been described. On the other hand, instead of the capacitor 267 or the secondary battery, a backup voltage may be supplied from the power supply device 115 to the role-product ratio management chip 207 . Thereby, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 can be retained even while the power is turned off. Further, when a fraudulent person tries to set illegal information in the buffer 262 in the middle of the night, the after-hours information is stored in the after-hours data 263j of the first reading memory 263, and then at a predetermined timing, the second reading The overtime information can be recorded in the game state data 264 d of the memory 264 .

<Modification 49>
In the above-described embodiment, when the MPU 201 determines whether or not the transmission of the interrupt signal after setting the buffer 262 was performed in the middle of the night by the processing of S724 (see FIG. 19), the time indicated by the RTC 266 is , the MPU 201 may set the time threshold used for determining whether it is between 0:00 midnight and 6:00 early morning. For example, in the ROM 202 of the MPU 201, late-night time zone judgment time data that defines the threshold value of the time is stored, and during the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 when the power is supplied, the number of prize balls table 202e , and the trigger information data 202f, the late-night time zone determination time data stored in the ROM 202 may be set in the midnight time zone determination time setting area provided in the setting register 265. FIG. Then, in the process of S724, it may be determined whether or not an interrupt signal has been transmitted after the setting of the buffer 262 by the MPU 201 during the time period indicated by the late-night time period determination time data. Thereby, determination of the late-night time zone can be variably set by the ROM 202 .

<Modification 50>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when power is turned on to the role product ratio management chip 207, the power-on information is stored in the first read/write memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At the timing, the power-on information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time. Further, when power is turned on to the role product ratio management chip 207, the power-on information may be directly recorded in the game state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. As a result, information regarding the time when the power was turned on is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . Therefore, when there is a possibility of cheating due to changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, the cause can be investigated from various aspects, including the time when the power was turned on.

<Modification 51>
Further, in each of the above embodiments, when the power to the character product ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut information is stored in the first read/write memory 263 together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. At a predetermined timing, the power-off information may be recorded in the game state data 264d of the second read/write memory 264 together with the time. In this case, the first read/write memory 263 may be composed of a non-volatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. Also, when the power to the role product ratio management chip 207 is cut off, the power cut information may be directly recorded in the gaming state data 264d together with the time indicated by the RTC 266 at that time. In this case, the first read/write memory 263 does not necessarily need to be configured with a non-volatile memory or supplied with a backup voltage. As a result, information regarding the time when the power was turned off is also transmitted to the inspection apparatus 300 . Therefore, when there is a possibility of cheating due to changes in the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio, the cause can be investigated from various aspects, including the time when the power was cut off.

<Modification 52>
In the above embodiment, when the power supplied to the main controller 110 is cut off and the processing of S704 to S707 is executed in the main processing of the MPU 201 (see FIG. 17), after the processing of S704 is executed, S705 The same processing as the processing of S155 and S156 shown in FIG. 11 may be executed before the processing of . That is, in the processing at the time of power failure, after prohibiting the occurrence of interrupt processing (S704), the values of the first 1 counter 203d, the first 2 counter 203e, the general 1 counter 203f, the general 2 counter 203g, and the big winning opening counter 203h of the RAM 203 are changed. as winning information, the value of the out counter 203i as out information, together with the game state of the pachinko machine 10 at that time, is set in the role ratio management chip 207, and an interrupt signal is transmitted to the role ratio management chip 207. You may As a result, the power is cut off for the number of balls that have won prizes in the respective prize-winning openings and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path immediately before the power is turned off, and which are not counted in the character ratio management chip 207. It can be counted by the role product ratio management chip 207 before entering. Therefore, it is possible to record the number of balls that have won prizes in each winning hole and the balls that have been guided to the ball discharge path immediately before the power is turned off in the role product ratio management chip 207 without omission.

<Modification 53>
In each of the above-described embodiments, when the trigger (timing) for calculating the role product ratio indicated by the trigger information data 202f is the "game time", the ball guided to the ball ejection path by the out switch 208f is detected. Although the case where the game time is calculated by counting the time played has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, an out-port switch for detecting a ball that has passed through the out-port 66 is provided, and the out-port switch includes a first starting port switch 208a, a second starting port switch 208b, a first normal winning port switch 208c, and a second normal winning port. The game time is calculated by counting the detected time when the passage of the ball to each winning opening or out opening is detected by either the switch 208d or the big winning opening switch 208e. good too. Further, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which it is determined that the player is touching the operating handle 51 based on the output of the touch sensor 51a provided on the operating handle 51. The game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the operation handle 51 is rotated by the player, or by accumulating the time during which the player touches the operation handle 51 and rotates the operation handle 51. A game time may be calculated. Also, the game time may be calculated by accumulating the time during which the ball shooting unit 112a is driven by the shooting control device 112 and the ball is being shot. A game ball detection switch is provided on the return ball prevention member 68 provided at the tip of the inner rail 61, and the game ball detection switch counts the time during which the ball guided from the ball guide passage to the game area continues to be detected. By doing so, the game time may be calculated.

<Modification 54>
In each of the above embodiments, the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern win probability are set in advance by the main controller 110, so that the hall staff or the like cannot change the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern win probability. However, instead of this, the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol may be changed in a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages) by a person involved in the hall or the like. As a result, on the pachinko hall side, by making the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second pattern different for each machine for pachinko machines of the same model, the player can be given the pleasure of selecting the machine. .

<Modification 55>
The big win probability and/or the second symbol win probability may be changed, for example, as follows. First, for each of a plurality of stages in which the jackpot probability and/or the hit probability of the second symbol can be changed (hereinbelow, described as six steps (levels 1 to 6)), the jackpot random value and / Or the winning random number value of the second symbol is stored in the ROM 202 in advance. The jackpot random value and/or the number of second symbol winning random values determined for each level determines the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol winning probability at that level.

<Modification 56>
A main board provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a keyhole for changing the probability of a big win and/or the probability of a second symbol win. The keyhole may be normally covered by the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 or may be revealed by opening the back pack 92 . Alternatively, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the keyhole so that the keyhole is exposed through the opening. The keyhole is configured to be rotatable by a dedicated key between two positions, a "probability setting off" side and a "probability setting on" side, and when it is on the "probability setting off" side, the keyhole On the other hand, the dedicated key can be removed and inserted. When the keyhole is set to the "probability setting ON" position by the special key, the pachinko machine 10 can change the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol. While the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off, the keyhole is turned from the position of "probability setting off" to the position of "probability setting on" by a dedicated key, and when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, The pachinko machine 10 may be configured to start in a probability setting mode in which the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol can be changed. As a result, the big win probability and/or the second symbol win probability can be safely changed in accordance with the start-up of the pachinko machine 10 in the hall. Further, when the keyhole is rotated from the "probability setting OFF" position to the "probability setting ON" position by the dedicated key while the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is ON, the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol It may be configured such that the winning probability cannot be changed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent person from illegally changing the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol during the business.

<Modification 57>
The pachinko machine 10 is provided with a push-type probability setting button for changing the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability on the main board. Like the keyhole, this probability setting button is normally covered with the back pack 92 of the back pack unit 94 and appears when the back pack 92 is opened. However, the back pack 92 may be provided with an opening for the probability setting button, and the probability setting button may be exposed from the opening. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level (step) of the hit probability of the big win and/or the hit probability of the second symbol is displayed, for example, on the display device provided on the main board. Then, when the probability setting button is pressed, the level of the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol is increased by one and displayed on the display device. If the level is "6" before the probability setting button is pressed, the level "1" is displayed on the display device when the probability setting button is pressed. When the pachinko machine 10 enters the probability setting mode, the level displayed on the display device is a predetermined level ( For example, it may be level "1").

<Modification 58>
When the level of the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol win probability to be set is displayed on the display device, when the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed, the level of the jackpot value or the second symbol displayed on the display device is displayed. The winning value of the symbol is set and the pachinko machine 10 is started. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 operates at the set level of the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability. Further, when the level of the jackpot probability and/or the probability of winning the second symbol to be set is displayed, if the keyhole into which the dedicated key is inserted is turned to the position of "probability setting off", the display The jackpot value of the level displayed on the device or the winning value of the second symbol may be set and the pachinko machine 10 may be started. Also by this, the pachinko machine 10 operates at the set level of the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability.

<Modification 59>
Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a display device for displaying the role ratio, the continuous role ratio, or the information related to the role ratio and the continuous role ratio, the pachinko machine 10 sets the probability When activated in the mode, the display device may display the set jackpot probability and/or the level of the second symbol winning probability. As a result, an increase in cost can be reduced by suppressing an increase in the number of display devices mounted on the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加In addition, by also using the display device and suppressing an increase in the number of parts, the arrangement (layout) of each part can be easily performed.

<Modification 60>
Now, in the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol can be changed, the character ratio and the consecutive character ratio naturally change according to the change. Therefore, it is possible to determine whether the change in the character ratio and continuous character ratio managed by the character ratio management chip 207 is due to a change in the probability of a big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol, or due to some kind of fraud. You may not understand.

Therefore, when the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 may be erased. . As a result, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio that accompanies the change in the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol win probability. Also, in this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second read/write memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. may As a result, it can be grasped at the inspection stage that the information or the like recorded in the second reading memory 264 has been erased due to the change in the probability of the big win and/or the probability of winning the second pattern, and whether or not there has been fraud. It can be used as a reference for the judgment of In this case, the date and time when the change was made may be stored together. Also, the information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability has been changed may include information indicating the level after the change, or may include information on the level before the change. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud.

<Modification 61>
On the other hand, even when the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept. can be As a result, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is fraud before the big win probability and/or the second symbol win probability are changed. Also, in this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed is recorded in the second read/write memory 264, and the information is output to the connected inspection device 300. may As a result, it can be easily determined whether or not the influence of the change in the role ratio or the continuous role ratio is due to the change in the big win probability and/or the second pattern win probability. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability has been changed may include the date and time when the change was made. Also, information indicating the level after change may be included, or information on the level before change may be included. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors of changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 62>
In addition, even when the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second pattern are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept. In this case, the display device provided for displaying the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio has the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol win After the probability is changed, based on the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and/or the first reading memory 263, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, or the character ratio and the continuous character ratio Related information may be displayed. Therefore, regarding the character ratio and the continuous character ratio displayed on the display device, or the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, the probability of the big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol is changed. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the influence of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and to easily discover the fraudulent act after the change in the big win probability and/or the second symbol win probability. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability has been changed may be recorded in the second reading memory 264 together with the date and time of the change. Based on this information, after the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol are changed, the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 can be easily judged, and based on that, the character ratio and the continuous character It is possible to display information related to ratios, character ratios, or continuous character ratios.

<Modification 63>
In addition, even when the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second pattern are changed, all the information recorded in the second reading memory 264 and the information stored in the first reading memory 263 are kept. In this case, the information may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 separately for each level (step) of the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability. Thereby, for each level of the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second pattern, the character ratio and the continuous character ratio when the level is set are determined from the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264. be able to. Therefore, the analysis is performed by clearly switching between the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio due to the change in the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability and the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio due to the cheating. can.

<Modification 64>
When the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability are changed, only one or more pieces of information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 immediately before may be saved, and the rest may be deleted. Also, the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may be left as it is. Alternatively, all the information recorded in the second read/write memory 264 may be erased, and only the information stored in the first read/write memory 263 may remain stored. As a result, it is possible to eliminate as much as possible the influence of the character product ratio and the continuous character product ratio before the jackpot probability and/or the second symbol win probability are changed on the analysis and display, while the jackpot probability and/or It is possible to analyze whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed before the second symbol win probability is changed. In this case, information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the winning probability of the second symbol has been changed may be recorded in the second read/write memory 264 and output to the connected inspection device 300. good. As a result, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the influence of the change in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio is due to the change in the probability of the big win and/or the probability of winning the second symbol, and the information is recorded in the second reading memory 264. It can be understood at the inspection stage that some of the information, etc., has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning the jackpot and/or the probability of winning the second symbol, and it can be used as a reference for determining whether there has been fraud. can. The information indicating that the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability has been changed may be stored together with the date and time when the change was made. Also, information indicating the level after change may be included, or information on the level before change may be included. Based on these dates and levels, it is possible to more reliably analyze the factors of changes in the character ratio and the continuous character ratio.

<Modification 65>
In each of the above embodiments, the information recorded in the first read/write memory 263 and the second read/write memory 264 cannot be erased from the outside, thereby preventing the fraudulent person from erasing evidence of fraud. . On the other hand, there is also a second-hand market in the pachinko machine market, where machines are often sold from one store to another and installed at another store. In this case, even if a fraudulent act was carried out at the previous shop and the character ratio and the like changed, if the information remains in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, the current There was a risk of suspicion of fraudulent activity at other stores. Therefore, in preparation for such a case, when one store sells to another store, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 is erased, or the information to be resold is deleted. You may enable it to record in the 2nd read/write memory 264. FIG. By erasing the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264, it is possible to prevent the record of the fraudulent act performed at the previous store from being taken over at the next other store. can. In addition, if the information to be resold is recorded in the second reading memory 264, the information related to the ratio of special goods at the previous shop and the information related to the ratio of special goods at the next other shop can be clearly switched. In addition, it is also possible to discover fraudulent acts performed at the previous store from related information such as the ratio of specials at the previous store.

<Modification 66>
Erasure of information recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264 and recording of information to be resold in the second reading memory 264 are restricted to some limited parties such as the pachinko machine 10 makers. should be limited to As a result, it is possible to suppress the erasure of records of fraudulent acts and the facilitation of cheating. Also, the erasing of information recorded in the first read/write memory 263 or the second read/write memory 264 and the recording of resold information in the second read/write memory 264 may be performed by the following method. . For example, by connecting the inspection device 300 to the inspection terminal 207a and inputting a dedicated command from the inspection device 300 to the character object ratio management chip 207, the data is recorded in the first reading memory 263 and the second reading memory 264. Alternatively, a program may be executed to erase information that has been acquired or to record information to be resold in the second read/write memory 264 . By setting this command as a secret special command except for some persons, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from easily erasing the record of the fraudulent act or deceiving it. In addition, only when a hole such as a keyhole is provided in the main board and a key or the like matching the hole is inserted, the information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264 can be erased or resold. A program may be executed to record the information to the second read/write memory 264 . As a result, only those who have a key or the like that fits the hole can erase information recorded in the first read/write memory 263 or the second read/write memory 264, or transfer resold information to the second read/write memory 264. Since it is possible to record, it is possible to prevent the unauthorized person from easily erasing or deceiving the record of the fraudulent act. Further, a switch is provided in the board box 100 in which the main board is housed, and only when the switch is operated, the information recorded in the first read/write memory 263 or the second read/write memory 264 is erased or resold. A program may be executed to record the information to be read into the second read/write memory 264 . As a result, unless the substrate box 100 is opened, the switch cannot be operated, erasing information recorded in the first reading memory 263 or the second reading memory 264, or transferring information to be resold to the second reading memory 264. Recording cannot be performed. As described above, in the board box 100, the box base and the box cover are unopenably connected (connected by a caulking structure). A seal is affixed to the Therefore, since a fraudulent person cannot easily open the board box, it is possible to prevent the fraudulent person from easily erasing the record of the fraudulent act or cheating. In addition, if the board box is opened and the switch is operated, evidence of the opening remains, so that it is possible to easily determine that a fraudulent act has been carried out.

<Modification 67>
In the above-described third to seventh embodiments, as the processing using the area 203y outside the use area in the RAM 203, the processing related to the character ratio and the base value was exemplified. It may be various processing other than. For example, it may be a process of judging fraud. In this fraudulent act determination process, for example, it is determined whether or not there is an approach or vibration of a magnet, or an unnatural entry of a ball into the winning opening (a ball detected even though the big winning opening 65a is closed). , processing may be performed to notify when there is a fraudulent act. In addition, the processing using the non-use area 203y may include a plurality of processing with different functions (purposes) (for example, “processing regarding the character product ratio” and “processing for judging fraud”).

<Modification 68>
In the third to seventh embodiments, the case where the contents of the register 200 are saved to the outside work area 203y1 of the area outside the use area 203y using the load (LD) instruction has been described. A store (ST) instruction may be used instead to save to the outside working area 203y1 of the outside area 203y, and the same effects can be obtained.

<Modification 69>
In the above fifth to seventh embodiments, in addition to the real-time base value, three base values counted every predetermined period in the past (previous base value, pre-previous base value, pre-previous base value) are displayed on the base display device. Although the case of displaying in 401 has been described, at least two base values counted for each predetermined period in the past (for example, the previous base value and the previous base value) may be displayed together with the real-time base value. , four or more base values counted every predetermined period in the past may be displayed together with the real-time base values.

<Modification 70>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the base values measured in a plurality of periods and the base values being measured in real time are displayed on the base display device 401. However, instead of the base values, Alternatively, in addition to the base value, the character ratio, the continuous character ratio, the information related to the character ratio and the continuous character ratio, and/or other information indicating the game performance are measured in a plurality of periods. , and what is measured in real time may be displayed on a display device.

<Modification 71>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, the case where the MPU 201 executes the base value processing (FIG. 41) and displays various base values on the base display device 401 has been described. A chip is provided, or a management chip for managing the base value is provided separately from the main controller 110, and the management chip executes processing equivalent to the base value processing, calculates the real-time base value, and calculates the real-time base value. , the previous base value, the base value before last, and the base value before last, may be displayed on the base display device 401 . In this case, the management chip may directly control the display of the base display device 401 , or the management chip may control the display of the base display device 401 by the MPU 201 via the MPU 201 . Alternatively, the base display device 401 may be directly connected to the management chip.

<Modification 72>
Also, the various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, the base value data 203l to 203o, and the flag 203p shown in FIG. 39(a) may be stored in the RAM within the management chip. In this case, when the power is turned on while the RAM all-erasing switch is turned on, the MPU 201 transmits a signal to that effect to the management chip during startup processing, and the management chip receives the signal. , various counters 203j, 203k, 203q, base value data 203l to 203o, flag 203p, etc. may be initialized.

<Modification 73>
Also, when the power is turned on, the management chip may control the base display device 401 to light all the segments of the four 7-segment displays 401a to 401d. In this case, the control may be performed immediately after the management chip is powered on, or the MPU 201 may send an initialization signal to the management chip during the startup process when the power is turned on. may be transmitted, and the control may be executed in the process executed by the management chip upon receiving the initialization signal.

<Modification 74>
In the fifth to seventh embodiments, when displaying the previous base value, the base value before the last time, and the base value before the time before last on the base display device 401, if there is no valid base value as the base value, the comparison segment We discussed the case of displaying "--" in the to indicate that there is no valid base value. On the other hand, if none of the last base value, the second last base value, and the second last base value are effective, only the real-time base value may be displayed on the base display device 401 . This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value among the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the base value before the previous base value. In addition, it is possible to prevent the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the base value before the previous one, which do not have a valid base value, from being wastefully displayed. On the other hand, in this case, the real-time base value and the previous base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the previous base value. This also makes it possible to indicate that there is no effective base value among the previous base value, the base value before the previous base value, and the base value before the previous base value. By displaying not only the real-time base value but also the previous base value, it can be suggested that the previous base value and the like will be displayed on the base display device 401 after an effective base value is obtained.

<Modification 75>
If there is a valid base value for the previous base value and there is no valid base value for the base value before the last time and the base value before the time before last, only the real-time base value and the previous base value are displayed on the base display device 401. You may In addition, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the base value for the time before last, but there is no valid base value for the base for the time before last, only the real-time base value, the base value for the previous time, and the base value for the time before last are displayed on the base display device. 401 may be displayed. This makes it possible to indicate that there is no valid base value for base values that are not displayed. In addition, it is possible to suppress unnecessary continuous display of items that do not have a valid base value.

<Modification 76>
On the other hand, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value and there is no valid base value for the base value for the time before last and the base value for the time before last, the real-time base value, the base value for the time before last, and the base value for the time before last are displayed on the base display device. 401, and the second-last base value may be displayed with "--" in the comparison segment. Also, if there is a valid base value for the previous base value and the base value for the time before last, but there is no valid base value for the base value for the time before last, the real-time base value, the previous base value, the base value for the time before last, and the base value for the time before last The base value and the base value may be displayed on the base display device 401, and "--" may be displayed in the comparison segment for the second-last base value. This also makes it possible to indicate base values for types for which there are no valid base values. Also, by displaying one base value for a type for which there is no valid base value, it is possible to suggest that the base value for that type will be displayed on the base display device 401 after a valid base value is obtained.

<Modification 77>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on are turned on. Although the case of lighting for a period (in this embodiment, 5 seconds) has been described, instead of lighting, all segments may blink for a predetermined period. By blinking all the segments, it is possible to confirm not only whether all the segments can be lit normally, but also whether all the segments can be turned off normally, and whether the display on the base display device 401 is performed normally. Easy to judge.

<Modification 78>
Also, when starting up the pachinko machine 10 completely new in the manufacturing factory, or when moving the used pachinko machine 10 to another hall as a second-hand machine, for example, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, the entire RAM After the power is turned on while the erase switch is being operated, all segments (dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are displayed until the total number of outs reaches 300. ) may be lit or blinked for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment). Thereby, at least when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, it is possible to confirm whether or not the display on the base display device 401 is performed normally. Moreover, while the lighting is performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

<Modification 79>
Also, when the power is turned on while the RAM erase switch 122 is operated, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are cleared for a predetermined period (this embodiment 5 seconds) may be lit or blinked.

<Modification 80>
In the fifth embodiment, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the pachinko machine 10 is turned on for a predetermined period (this embodiment 5 seconds) lighting (or blinking) control is executed at a predetermined point (S3007) of the start-up process (see FIG. 40), but the lighting (or blinking) control is performed in the start-up process. may be performed at any point in For example, the control may be executed first after execution of the start-up process is started, or may be executed after the initialization (S601). Alternatively, the control may be executed after setting interrupt permission (S613). Also, the control may be executed at a place other than the start-up process. For example, in the main process (see FIG. 17) executed after the start-up process ends, the control may be executed before the loop process (S701 to S703) is executed. In the timer interrupt processing, for example, in the base value processing (see FIG. 41), which is one processing of the timer interrupt processing, the timer interrupt processing or the base value processing is executed for the first time after the power is turned on. It may be determined whether or not the control has been executed, and the control may be executed when the control is executed for the first time after the power is turned on. In other words, all segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 are lit (or blinked) for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) once after the power is turned on. If possible, this control may be performed at any timing.

<Modification 81>
In the fifth embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up, such as when the pachinko machine 10 is newly started up in the manufacturing factory, or when the used pachinko machine 10 is moved to another hall as a used table. , until the total number of outputs reaches 300, each time the power is turned on, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided in the base display device 401 are displayed for a predetermined period (this 5 seconds in the embodiment), and then the display of the base display device 401 flashes (or lights up) the identification segment "88." In this case, the 7 segments provided on the base display device 401 are displayed every time the power is turned on. Lighting all the segments (including the dot segments) of the display devices 401a to 401d for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) may be non-executed. In this case, since the base value is displayed on the base display device 401 in a special display mode during the new start-up period of the pachinko machine 10, it is possible to indicate that the base value being displayed is not the regular base value. In addition, by performing the display, it is possible to suggest that the pachinko machine 10 is in a new start-up state.

<Modification 82>
Further, in the fifth embodiment or the modified example, as a special display mode displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, "88." In addition to displaying the real-time base value stored in the real-time base value data 203l in the ratio segment, it is not necessary to be in this manner. display on the base display device 401 in a different manner. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the new start-up period, while blinking the identification segment, "bL.", "b1.", "b2.", and "b3." The display on the base display device 401 may be performed in such a manner that "--" is displayed in the comparison segment. As a result, while this display is being performed, it can be suggested that the pachinko machine 10 is in a newly activated state. Further, in this aspect, while "bL." As a result, the real-time base value at that time can be shown for reference.

<Modification 83>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the probability setting value can be changed in six stages from "1" to "6", and the probability of a big hit and/or the probability of a second symbol can be changed. is not limited to six stages, and may be changed to any stage.

<Modification 84>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments described above, by changing the probability set value, the case of changing the big win probability and/or the second symbol win probability has been described. Alternatively, instead of or in addition to changing the big win probability and/or the second symbol win probability, the small win probability may be changed. Here, a small win is a kind of loss, and when a ball enters the big winning hole 65a opened by the small win and the ball is paid out, the number of the paid out balls is also calculated as a base value. used for In other words, if the odds of winning a small win are changed, the base value will also change. cannot be calculated correctly. Therefore, in this case, the base value data 203r may also be erased during the erasing of the data in the RAM 203 that is performed when the setting change mode is activated and the probability setting value is changed. . As a result, the base value based on the changed probability setting value can be calculated correctly.

<Modification 85>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, the case where it is confirmed each time the timer interrupt process is executed whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") has been described. However, this confirmation may be performed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth to twelfth embodiments. Also, this confirmation is performed every time a predetermined opportunity comes, such as every time the variable effect is started or every predetermined time (for example, every hour or every time the clock provided inside reaches 00 minutes). can be

<Modification 86>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, it is checked whether the probability setting value is within the normal range (range of "1" to "6") in the timer interrupt processing, and the probability setting value is within the normal range. If it is not within the range, the game is stopped and the pachinko machine 10 is restarted to prompt the pachinko hall personnel to change the set probability value. Alternatively, a setting change process may be executed to force a person involved in the hall or the like to change the probability set value. In this case, it is also possible to output a notification sound prompting the change of the probability setting value, or to notify the third symbol display device 81 to call a hall official. Alternatively, an external terminal (not shown) provided in main controller 110 may notify hall computer 600 that the set probability value is not within the normal range. As a result, the probability set value can be reset within a normal range by a person involved in the hall or the like.

<Modification 87>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the normal mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is confirmed whether the RAM judgment value is normal during the startup process, and the RAM judgment value is normal. If not, it is further checked whether the probability set value is within the normal range, and if it is not within the normal range, the setting change processing is executed and the hall personnel etc. are made to change the probability set value. explained the case. Instead of executing this setting change process, the voice output device 226 or the third pattern display device 81 notifies the pachinko hall personnel and the like to restart the pachinko machine 10 and change the probability setting value. and/or notify the hall computer 600 that the probability setting value is not within the normal range from an external terminal (not shown) provided in the main controller 110, and enter an infinite loop You may do so. As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted and the probability set value can be changed by the persons involved in the hall.

<Modification 88>
Also, if it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the start-up process, a specific probability setting value (for example, "1") from the range of "1" to "6" is set. The value may be forcibly set. If it is determined that the probability setting value is not within the normal range during the game (for example, during timer interrupt processing), it is better not to forcibly set the probability setting value to a specific probability setting value. This is to prevent the player from suffering any disadvantage due to a sudden change in the jackpot probability and/or the second pattern winning probability during the game.

<Modification 89>
In the sixth and seventh embodiments described above, the probability setting value is included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum), but the probability setting value may be excluded from the calculation of the RAM determination value. In this case, before determining whether the RAM determination value is normal (S4009 in FIG. 54), it is determined whether the probability setting value is within the normal range. , the setting change processing is executed to change the probability setting value to the person concerned with the hall, etc., the person concerned with the hall etc. is urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode, and the probability setting value is normal. A specific probability set value within the range may be forcibly set.

<Modification 90>
In the eighth embodiment described above, the case where the probability setting value is not included in the calculation of the RAM determination value (checksum) has been described, but the probability setting value may be included in the calculation of the RAM determination value.

<Modification 91>
In the fifth embodiment, every time the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on. Although the case of lighting for a predetermined period (5 seconds in this embodiment) has been described, even in the sixth to twelfth embodiments, whenever the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the base display device 401 is provided immediately after the power is turned on. All segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be illuminated or blinked for a predetermined period. However, even when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d provided on the base display device 401 immediately after the power is turned on lighting or blinking for a predetermined period of time may be troublesome. Therefore, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, lighting or blinking of all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d may be disabled. Also, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, after the setting change process or the setting confirmation process is executed, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a to 401d are lit or blinked. may be executed. Further, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, once all the segments (including dot segments) of the 7-segment display 401a to 401d are lit or blinked for a predetermined period, and a predetermined The lighting or blinking may be terminated when an operation is performed.

<Modification 92>
In the above-described fifth to twelfth embodiments, the base display device 401 is configured by an identification segment composed of two 7-segment displays 401a and 401b and a ratio segment composed of two 7-segment displays 401c and 401d. Although the case of configuration has been described, the identification segment may be configured with one or two or more 7-segment displays, and the ratio segment may be configured with two or more 7-segment displays.

<Modification 93>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, using the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the jackpot symbol, the LED for notifying the winning symbol, etc., prepared in the first symbol display device 37, or the entire LED 37a, The case of notifying that the setting change display or setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401 using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification has been described, but the first pattern display device 37, using the round number notification LED, the LED for notifying the jackpot pattern, the LED for notifying the winning pattern, etc., or the entire LED 37a using a lighting pattern that is not used in the original notification, The display of the error history on the base display device 401 may be notified.

<Modification 94>
In addition, the first symbol display device 37 is provided with one LED for notifying that the base display device 401 is performing setting change display and setting confirmation display. , the base display device 401 notifies that the setting change display is being performed, and blinks the LED to notify that the setting confirmation display is being performed on the base display device 401. may In addition, the first pattern display device 37 has an LED for notifying that the base display device 401 is displaying the setting change in progress, and the base display device 401 is displaying the setting confirmation in progress display. By lighting the respective LEDs, it is possible to notify that the base display device 401 is changing the setting or confirming the setting. can be Further, the first pattern display device 37 is provided with an LED for notifying that the error history is being displayed on the base display device 401, and by lighting the LED, an error message on the base display device 401 is displayed. You may make it alert|report that history display is performed.

<Modification 95>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability setting value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b of the identification segment are extinguished, or the identification segment is "--" or displaying fixed characters on each of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b in a display mode different from the case of displaying the base value on the base display device 401, but the probability setting When the value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the identification segment may be displayed in any display manner as long as the display manner is different from when the base value is displayed on the base display device 401. For example, predetermined segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b may be blinked, or segments of the 7-segment displays 401a and 401b may be sequentially or randomly lit and blinked. Also, in the identification segment, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the display of the base value and the display of the probability set value or the error history on the base display device 401 .

<Modification 96>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the probability setting value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, all the segments of the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment are extinguished or "-" is displayed. However, when the set probability value or error history is displayed on the base display device 401, the 7-segment display 401c on the left side of the comparison segment displays the base display device 401 Any display mode may be used as long as the display mode is different from the case where the base value is displayed in the display mode. For example, a predetermined segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be blinked, or each segment of the 7-segment display 401c may be sequentially or randomly lit and blinked. Also, in the 7-segment display 401c, a plurality of display modes may be rotated and displayed. This also makes it possible to clearly differentiate the display state between the display of the base value or the error history and the display of the set probability value on the base display device 401 .

<Modification 97>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, the example shown in FIG. 50 is illustrated as a display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, and the display mode when the probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401. A case in which a display mode different from that is used has been described. On the other hand, as a display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401, a display mode similar to the display mode shown in FIG. 49(a) or (b) may be used. In this case, the display mode when the probability setting values are displayed on the base display device 401 may be the same as the display mode when the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 . The probability setting value is displayed on the base display device 401 when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode by a hall official or the like. Further, the error history is displayed on the base display device 401 when a person involved in the hall or the like presses the error display button 502 . In other words, even if the display mode for displaying the probability setting value on the base display device 401 and the display mode for displaying the error history on the base display device 401 are the same, the hall staff and the like cannot Based on this operation, it is possible to ascertain whether the information displayed on the base display device 401 is the set probability value or the error history.

<Modification 98>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, the probability setting value is updated by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 or by turning on the setting change switch. Although the case where the setting key 501 is used has been described, the setting key 501 may be used. Specifically, the setting key 501 is made rotatable from the ON state to a setting change position provided in the opposite direction to the OFF side, and when the setting key 501 is turned to the setting change position, the ON state is automatically set. The setting key 501 is configured to be energized to return. Then, each time the setting key 501 is rotated from the ON state to the setting change position, the probability setting value is updated. This also makes it possible to easily change the probability set value.

<Modification 99>
Further, in the sixth and twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode, the case of updating the probability setting value by turning on the RAM erase switch 122 has been described, but the seventh embodiment A setting change switch similar to is provided, and the probability setting value may be updated by turning on the setting change switch. As a result, the roles of the RAM erase switch and the setting change switch are clearly divided, so that the operator can clearly grasp the role of each switch.

<Modification 100>
In the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode, by turning off the setting key 501 or turning on the RAM erase switch 122, the probability setting value Although the case of confirming is described, this may be performed by operating a separately provided switch, for example, a setting confirmation switch. This setting confirmation switch is, for example, a switch for confirming the probability setting value by being operated during the setting change mode. The board box 100 may be protruded further so that it can be operated by hall personnel or the like without opening the board box 100 . This also facilitates determination of the set probability value.

<Modification 101>
In the above eighth to twelfth embodiments, when a person involved in the hall or the like performs a start-up operation in any one of the normal mode, RAM clear mode, and setting confirmation mode in the RAM abnormality, the main controller 110 In the process of S4215 of the start-up process executed by the MPU 201, it is always determined that there is a RAM abnormality (S4215: Yes), the process proceeds to S4219, and notification by the RAM abnormality setting process and ( S4219) and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220) are executed, and then the infinite loop state occurs. On the other hand, in this case, after executing the notification by the RAM abnormality setting process (S4219) and the output to the hall computer 600 (S4220), the process of S4213 may be performed to execute the setting change process. Thus, the pachinko machine 10 can operate normally by resetting the probability set value without fail and clearing the RAM 203 together with the RAM abnormality flag 203x15. Also, in this case, since the setting change process is automatically executed, there is no need to restart the pachinko machine 10, and the trouble of the hall staff can be saved.

<Modification 102>
In the processing of S4313 of the setting change processing in the eighth to twelfth embodiments, among the data stored in the RAM 203, the data used for game control (excluding the probability set value data 203x11 stored in the inner work area 203x1) predetermined data) is erased (cleared), and the character product ratio data 203s stored in the outer work area 203y1 is erased, while the base value data 203r and the error data 203t (see FIG. 53) are cleared. Although the case of holding without erasing has been described, this is similar to the processing of S4216 in the start-up processing. Predetermined data excluding the probability set value data 203x11) is erased (cleared), while the character product ratio data 203s, the base value data 203r, and the error data 203t stored in the outer work area 203y1 (Fig. 53 reference) may be retained without being erased. That is, the RAM clear after the setting change process and the RAM clear executed when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the RAM clear mode may be the same process.

<Modification 103>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, the startup mode when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change is only the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode. However, even if it is another start-up operation, the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning has been described. On the other hand, only when the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during the setting change is the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, the setting change process is started from the beginning. Start up as a setting change mode to redo and execute, and the startup operation when the power is turned on after the power is turned off during setting change is performed in other startup modes (normal mode, RAM clear mode, setting check mode). , the MPU 201 may enter an infinite loop state. In this case, the hall staff are notified to turn off the power once and restart in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600 You may As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be restarted in the setting change mode and the probability set value can be reliably reset.

<Modification 104>
Also, if the start-up operation when the power is turned on after being turned off during setting change is a start-up operation for starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (that is, the setting key 501 is turned on), the setting change process is restarted from the beginning. If the startup operation corresponds to another startup mode (normal mode, RAM clear mode) (that is, if the setting key 501 is turned off), the MPU 201 is set to enter an infinite loop state. good too. In this case, the hall staff are notified to turn off the power once and restart in the setting change mode, or a signal to that effect is output from the external output terminal 503 to the hall computer 600 You may As a result, the pachinko machine 10 can be urged to restart the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode after turning on the setting key 501, and to surely reset the probability setting value. . On the other hand, when the startup operation is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting key 501 is in the ON state, and the hall personnel are ready to smoothly update and confirm the probability setting values. there is Therefore, in this case, by starting up in the setting change mode, it is possible to reliably determine the probability setting value.

<Modification 105>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments described above, after the power is turned off during the setting change, the power is turned off while the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. When the startup operation of inputting the pachinko machine 10 is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of the normal mode. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the process of being updated before the power was turned off last time. Also, the setting change processing that was executed before the power was turned off may be ignored, or the probability setting value in the process of being updated may be erased, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the normal mode.

<Modification 106>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting change, the start-up operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on while the setting key 501 is turned off. When the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is restarted from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of starting in the RAM clear mode when the startup operation of turning on the power is performed. explained. On the other hand, in this case, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the process of being updated before the power was turned off last time. Further, it waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, stands in normal mode. It may be raised, or a RAM clear may be executed. Also, the setting change processing that was executed before the power was turned off may be ignored, or the probability setting value in the process of being updated may be erased, and the pachinko machine 10 may be started in the RAM clear mode. After that, it waits until the setting key 501 is turned on, waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the game can be executed. You may make it become. Waiting until the setting key 501 is turned on, and when the setting key 501 is turned on, waits for the setting key 501 to be turned off. It is possible to give the persons involved in the hall, etc., the feeling that the release of the is released.

<Modification 107>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, as in the startup operation, the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode has been described. When is turned on, it is possible to wait until the setting key 501 is turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the normal mode can be started up. As a result, it is possible to give the people involved in the hall, etc., the feeling that the cancellation of the setting change mode, which was executed at the time of the previous power-off, has been cancelled.

<Modification 108>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting change, the startup operation for starting up in the setting confirmation mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. Regarding the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the setting change mode in which the setting change process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of in the setting confirmation mode when the start-up operation of turning on the power is performed. As described above, the setting change process may be executed from the probability setting value that was in the process of being updated before the power was turned off last time. In this case, after the setting key 501 is turned off, the setting confirmation process may be executed subsequently, or the setting confirmation process may be ignored. It is also possible to start up in the setting confirmation mode, ignore the setting change processing that was executed before the power was turned off, and erase the probability setting values that were being updated.

<Modification 109>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the startup operation for starting up in the normal mode, that is, the power is turned off while the setting key 501 is turned off and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned off. , the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting confirmation mode in which the setting confirmation process is executed again from the beginning (from the beginning) instead of being started in the normal mode. Alternatively, the pachinko machine 10 may be started up in the normal mode, ignoring the setting confirmation process that was executed before the power was turned off.

<Modification 110>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the start-up operation for starting up in the RAM clear mode, that is, turning on the RAM erasing switch 122 while the setting key 501 is turned off. When the start-up operation of turning on the power is performed, the case of starting up the pachinko machine 10 in the RAM clear mode has been described as the start-up operation of the hall officials. The pachinko machine 10 may be started up in a setting confirmation mode in which the confirmation process is redone from the beginning (from the beginning). In this case, wait until the setting key 501 is turned on, wait for the setting key 501 to be turned off, and when the setting key 501 is turned off, the RAM is not cleared. may be launched, or a RAM clear may be executed.

<Modification 111>
In the eighth to twelfth embodiments, after the power is turned off during setting confirmation, the startup operation for starting up in the setting change mode, that is, the setting key 501 is turned on and the RAM erase switch 122 is turned on. When the startup operation of turning on the power is performed, the pachinko machine 10 is started up in the setting change mode as in the startup operation, but the setting change mode is ignored and the setting confirmation mode is started. may Alternatively, after starting up in the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined operation may be used as a trigger to shift to the setting change mode.

<Modification 112>
In the eleventh embodiment, when the pachinko machine 10 is started in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, at least the opening of the inner frame 12 is an essential condition, and in addition, the RAM erase switch 122 and the setting key 501 The start-up mode was set according to the detection mode. On the other hand, it may be configured such that the opening of the inner frame 12 can be set so that the hole can be selected as a condition for setting change or setting confirmation.

The island facility of the hall where the pachinko machine 10 is installed includes "both islands" in which the pachinko machine 10 can be installed on both sides of the island facility, "wall island" in which the pachinko machine 10 can be installed only on one side of the island facility, There are various island facilities, such as a "pillar island" that surrounds the pillars of the hall with "wall islands", or a "single island" where one or two pachinko machines 10 can be installed. Depending on the island facility, settings may be changed or checked while the inner frame 12 is locked. Therefore, depending on the business form (island facility) of the hall, setting change or setting confirmation is not always performed by opening the inner frame 12, and setting change or setting confirmation work is performed on the condition that the door open switch 208g is opened. In the case of such a configuration, the inner frame 12 must be opened once, and the work becomes complicated.

Therefore, if a DIP switch or the like is provided in a portion (for example, inside the main controller 110) that cannot be operated by an employee, etc., and when starting up in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, is it necessary to open the inner frame 12? It may be configured such that the manager of the hall or the like can decide whether or not to proceed. By configuring in this way, it is possible to improve the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 while considering the work efficiency according to the environment of each hall.

<Modification 113>
In the eleventh embodiment, the front frame 14 may be configured so that an employee cannot arbitrarily close the front frame 14 during maintenance work in which both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened. Specifically, when both the inner frame 12 and the front frame 14 are opened, the front frame 14 cannot be closed with respect to the inner frame 12 unless a special key is inserted by the manager of the hall. Configure. By constructing in this manner, it is possible to prevent an employee who does not have the authority to change settings from closing the front frame 14 without permission during maintenance work, thereby making it impossible to change settings or confirm settings. , the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved.

<Modification 114>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a of the back pack 92 and the upper side protrusion 171a and the lower side of the protective cover member 140 are configured to be in contact with each other. On the other hand, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion 92a, the upper side protrusion 171a, and the lower side surface may be engaged with each other. In this case, when the inner frame 12 is opened, the engagement is easily disengaged. preferred. With this configuration, the security performance of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved without any trouble during the maintenance work of the inner frame 12.例文帳に追加

<Modification 115>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 in a cantilever manner. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 may be attached like a beam supporting both ends from the right side plate 11d to the left side plate 11c. By configuring in this way, while increasing the rigidity of the protective cover member 140, it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 with a simple configuration. In addition, depending on the protective cover member 140, the pachinko machine 10 adopting the protective cover member 140 to the existing island equipment does not interfere with the replenishment and discharge of balls by not covering the upper part or the lower part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.例文帳に追加can be installed.

<Modification 116>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is fixedly formed at a predetermined position of the cover plate 171 . On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured to be detachable from and attachable to the cover plate 171 so that the position of the cover-side protrusion 172 within the cover plate 171 can be changed and adjusted. Conventionally, the general pachinko machine 10 is configured such that the game board 13 can be changed. Here, if the game board 13 attached to the outer frame 11 of the pachinko machine 10 is changed, the position of the setting section 100d of the main controller 110 attached to the game board 13 after replacement may also be changed. be. In such a case, the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 may not fit into the setting portion 100d of the main controller 110, and the inner frame 12 may not be closed. On the other hand, when the game board 13 is replaced and the position of the setting section 100d of the main control device 110 is changed by configuring the cover-side protrusion 172 to be detachable from and attachable to the cover plate 171. Even so, the cover-side protrusion 172 can be fitted into the setting portion 100d, so that the security performance of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved while the cover-side protrusion 172 of the protective cover member 140 and the main control device 110 are separated. The inner frame 12 can be locked without interfering with the setting part 100d, and the conventional distribution form of the pachinko machine 10 can be prevented from being hindered.

<Modification 117>
In the ninth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is attached to the right side plate 11 d of the outer frame 11 . Alternatively, the protective cover member 140 may be attached to the left side plate 11c, the upper plate 11a, or the lower plate 11b in a cantilever manner. Also in this case, it is preferable to attach the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 from the inner wall surface of each of the plates 11a to 11c.

<Modification 118>
In the ninth embodiment, the mounting surface 151 of the cover mounting portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 is attached to the inner wall surface of the right side plate 11d of the outer frame 11 so as to be in contact therewith. Alternatively, the mounting surface 151 may be attached to the outer wall surface of the right side plate 11d, or the cover attachment portion 150 of the protective cover member 140 may be fitted (inserted) into the inside of the right side plate 11d. .

<Modification 119>
In the twelfth embodiment, the protective cover member 140 is configured to cover the setting key 501 and the sealing unit 100c of the main control device 110 and the sealing portion 111a of the payout control device 111. FIG. On the other hand, the protective cover member 140 covers all of the control devices 110 and 111, and in addition to the control devices 110 and 111, other control devices (for example, It may be configured to cover part or all of the launch control device 112 and power supply 115). By covering many control devices with the protective cover member 140, the security performance on the back side of the pachinko machine 10 can be improved with a simple configuration.

<Modification 120>
In the eleventh embodiment, the configuration is such that setting change or setting confirmation can be performed only when the inner frame 12 is open with respect to the outer frame 11 and the front frame 14 is closed with respect to the inner frame 12. However, in other situations (for example, when the inner frame 12 is not open, or when the inner frame 12 is open but the front frame 14 is also open), setting change or setting confirmation cannot be performed had configured. On the other hand, even if the inner frame 12 is not opened, when the front frame 14 is opened, the setting may be changed or confirmed.

<Modification 121>
In each of the embodiments described above, the RAM erase switch 122 is mounted on the power supply device 115 . On the other hand, the RAM erase switch 122 may be configured to be mounted on the main controller 110 or the payout controller 111 .

<Modification 122>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side protrusion and the lower side of the protective cover member 140 are configured to be in contact with each other. On the other hand, the upper side surface of the lower side protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side protrusion and the lower side surface of the protective cover member 140 are engaged with each other, and the engagement is released as the cylinder lock 20 is operated. You may

<Modification 123>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side protrusion and the lower side of the protective cover member 140 are configured to be in contact with each other. On the other hand, the cover plate 171 of the protective cover member 140 may be configured to contact or engage with the outermost surface of the main control device 110 or the payout control device 111 .

<Modification 124>
In the ninth embodiment, the cover-side protrusion 172 is configured in a wall shape surrounding the setting key 501 in the setting portion 100d. On the other hand, the cover-side protrusion 172 may be configured as a protrusion that fits the entire setting portion 100d.

<Modification 125>
In the twelfth embodiment, the upper side surface of the lower protrusion of the back pack 92 and the upper side protrusion and the lower side of the protective cover member 140 are configured to be in contact with each other. On the other hand, the back pack 92 is extended to the portion of the payout control device 111 and the payout control device 111 is mounted on the back side of the back pack 92 . A part of the extended back pack 92 may be positioned in the space between the inner frame 12 and the protective cover member 140 . With this configuration, when the inner frame 12 is locked, even if an attempt is made to open the back pack 92 to the back side of the pachinko machine 10, the protective cover member 140 interferes with the opening. Therefore, when the inner frame 12 is locked, it is possible to prevent tampering with the sound lamp control device 113 or the like disposed inside the pachinko machine 10 of the back pack 92 .

<Modification 126>
In the ninth to twelfth embodiments, the protective cover member 140 is composed of one member. Alternatively, two or more protective cover members may be attached to the outer frame 11 to cover part or all of the back side of the pachinko machine 10 .

<Modification 127>
In each of the above-described embodiments, the setting key 501 is configured to be able to change the jackpot probability and the like. On the other hand, the setting key 501 can be used to drive the number of prize balls to be paid out when one wins a prize (for example, change from 3 to 5), or to drive a movable accessory that assists the winning of a prize in a prize opening. Time (change from 3 seconds to 5 seconds), driving width (for example, change from 20 mm to 30 mm), or members that affect the flow of the ball (for example, a stage or a crane on which the ball can roll) The setting regarding the degree of advantage to the player can be changed in a plurality of stages, such as the tilt mode (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees) and the tilt state of the pachinko machine 10 itself (for example, change from 1 degree to 3 degrees). may be configured.

<Modification 128>
In each of the above embodiments, the keyhole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the back side of the pachinko machine 10 . On the other hand, the direction of the key hole of the setting key 501 is configured to face the horizontal direction (left or right direction) of the pachinko machine 10, the oblique direction of the pachinko machine 10, or the front side of the pachinko machine 10. may

In the above embodiment, each command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio lamp controller 113, and the audio lamp controller 113 instructs the display controller 114 to display. The command may be sent directly from the control device 110 to the display control device 114 . Alternatively, an audio lamp control device may be connected to the display control device, and the display control device may transmit commands for instructing the output of each sound and lighting of the lamp to the audio lamp control device. Furthermore, the audio lamp control device and the display control device may be configured as one control device. By using these as one control device, the number of parts can be reduced, and an increase in the cost of the pachinko machine can be suppressed.

In the above embodiment, in the command determination process (S911) executed by the audio ramp control device 113, when the stop type command is received, the fluctuation start flag is always set to ON. The fluctuation start flag may be set to ON when the stop type command is received after there is As a result, it is possible to suppress execution of a strange variation effect when a stop type command is received without receiving a variation pattern command.

Also, at the timing of receiving the variation pattern command, the variation start flag may be set to ON. In this case, in the variation display process (S910) executed by the audio lamp control device 113, based on the fact that the variation start flag is turned on, display is performed to notify the display control device 114 of the variation pattern extracted by the variation pattern command. A variation pattern command may be generated and transmitted to the display control device 114 . As a result, without waiting for reception of the stop type command by the sound lamp control device 113, the display control device 114 is caused to execute the variation effect on the third pattern display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command. can be done. In this case, the audio lamp control device 113 generates a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type extracted from the stop type command at the timing of receiving the stop type command, You may make it transmit to the display control apparatus 114. FIG. Then, the display control device 114 may determine the stop pattern of the variable effect executed by the third pattern display device 81 based on the stop type command for display.

In the above embodiment, the image controller 236 transmits the V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 at each display interval of the image for one frame (every 20 milliseconds in the above embodiment) at which drawing processing ends. However, the image controller 236 may transmit this V interrupt signal to the MPU 231 each time the third pattern display device 81 is driven to display an image for one frame. The third pattern display device 81 is driven so that one frame of image is always displayed at equal time intervals (20 millisecond intervals). By sending a , the time interval can be kept accurate without timing.

In the above-described embodiment, the demonstration effect may stop and display the third symbols consisting of the main symbols with no numerals "0" to "9". Further, the third pattern consisting of main patterns with numbers or main patterns with no numbers may be stopped and displayed in a translucent state. Alternatively, only the rear image may be changed without displaying the third pattern. Also, a character or back image completely different from the third pattern or back image used in the variable display may be displayed.

In the above-described embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 in which the variable effect is performed may execute the continuous advance notice effect, or a fourth symbol display device separate from the third symbol display device 81 may be provided to display the third symbol. By displaying the fourth pattern on the fourth pattern display device together with the variable effect executed by the display device 81, the continuous advance notice effect may be executed. In this case, the control of the fourth pattern display device may be performed by the display control device 114 or may be performed by the sound lamp control device 113 . Further, a continuous advance notice performance may be executed by providing the pachinko machine 10 with a role that operates according to various performances and activating the performance in a predetermined mode together with the variable performance. Further, by controlling the sound lamp control device 113, by outputting the sound for the continuous notice effect from the sound output device 226 of the pachinko machine 10, the continuous notice effect may be executed, or the illumination part of the pachinko machine 10. A continuous advance notice effect may be executed by lighting or blinking 29 to 33 together with the variable effect.

As a result, every time the variation effect is performed in the third pattern display device 81 (and the first pattern display device 37), the pattern is continuously displayed on the fourth pattern display device, or the accessory operates in a predetermined manner. Or, by outputting a sound from the sound output device 226, or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the player can be given a feeling of anticipation of a big win. In addition, the player normally continues the game by watching the third pattern display device 81 where the variable effect is performed, but the pattern is displayed by the fourth pattern display device different from the third pattern display device 81. , the action of the character, the sound output from the sound output device 226, or the lighting and blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 are used to perform a continuous advance notice effect, and the effect different from the usual effect is performed to the player. can be easily recognized. In addition, the continuous announcement effect can be easily continued by simple control such as display of the pattern by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the character, sound output from the sound output device 226, or lighting / blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33. It is possible to perform a preview performance.

Further, if the continuous notice effect is performed by outputting sound from the sound output device 226 or by lighting or blinking the illumination parts 29 to 33, the control of the continuous notice effect is performed by the sound lamp control device 113. By making the main control device 110 perform the winning judgment and the lottery processing at the start of the variation, the voice lamp control device 113 performing the continuous notice performance, and the display control device 114 performing the variation performance, the pachinko machine 10 continuously When the advance notice effect is performed, each control device can be made to take charge of each process. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the load from concentrating on one control device, so that the performance required for the MPU of each control device can be kept low.

In addition, display of symbols for continuous advance notice effect on the third pattern display device 81, display of symbols for continuous notice effect on the fourth pattern display device, operation in a predetermined mode of the role, sound from the sound output device 226 At least two or more of the output and lighting or blinking of the illumination units 29 to 33 may be combined and controlled in conjunction with each other to execute a continuous advance notice effect. As a result, it is possible to execute more diverse continuous announcement effects. In addition, the execution method of the continuous notice effect (display by the third pattern display device 81, display by the fourth pattern display device, operation of the role, sound output from the sound output device 226, lighting or blinking of the illumination parts 29 to 33 , or a combination of them), by changing the game state after the end of the continuous notice effect (15R probability variable jackpot, 2R probability variable jackpot, 15R normal jackpot, off) Prepare multiple continuous notice effect modes selected according to good too.

Further, when the continuous advance notice effect is performed, an image for the continuous notice effect different from the variable effect may be displayed on the third pattern display device 81, or the continuous notice effect is performed when the variable effect is completed. As the displayed stop symbols, a so-called "chance eye", which is a combination of predetermined symbols, may be displayed. In this case, when the command determination process (S1602 in FIG. 27(c)) executed by the MPU 221 of the display control device 114 determines the reception of the continuous notice command, the stop symbol determination flag corresponding to the chance eye is turned on. , and other stop symbol determination flags may be set to OFF. In the command determination process, after the stop identification command process, the process corresponding to the continuous notice command is executed in the other command process. It is set as a pattern. Therefore, it is possible to confirm and display the chance eye when the variation is stopped. Then, if the third symbol display device 81 continuously displays chance numbers as stop symbols for each variable performance, the player can be made to expect a big win in the end.

In the above-described embodiment, the main controller 110, when there is a winning (starting winning) to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the number of pending balls incremented by "1" The case where each counter C1 to C3, CS1 acquired from the counter buffer along with the start winning is included as it is and is transmitted to the audio lamp control device 113 in response to the pending ball number command to be notified has been described. The types of counters included in the number-of-balls command may be part of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1, or may include the values of other counters. Also, when the main controller 110 notifies the audio lamp controller 113 of the values of the counters acquired in conjunction with the start winning, the information indicating the values of the counters is included in the pending ball number command and notified. Instead, information indicating the value of each counter may be included in a command separate from the number-of-holds-balls command, and these values may be notified to the audio lamp control device 113 . As another command, it may be a dedicated command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, or a variation pattern command, a stop pattern command, or other information may be voiced. The command for notifying the lamp control device 113 may be added with the value of each counter acquired with the start winning. As another command, when notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the value of each counter acquired with the start winning, the command indicates that the value of each counter to be notified is a variable effect corresponding to the number of times of suspension It may include information indicating whether it is related. As a result, the sound lamp control device 113, based on the information about the number of times of suspension included in the command, stores each of A counter value can be stored.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the pending ball number command, the values of the counters C1 to C3 and CS1 indicated by the pending ball number command may be stored in the RAM 223. , When a command for the number of pending balls (or a command indicating the value of each counter) is received, based on the value of each counter indicated by the command, whether it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot in the case of a jackpot, and the loss In this case, some or all of the outlier types, etc. are determined, and these determination results are used instead of the values of each counter indicated by the command, or combined with some or all of the values of the counters, It may be stored in the RAM 223 .

In each of the above embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the number of retained balls is counted by the main controller 110 using one retained ball number counter 203a. I explained how to count. On the other hand, in the RAM 203 of the main controller 110, the number of reserved balls counter for the first starting opening corresponding to the first starting opening 64a, the number of reserved balls counter for the second starting opening corresponding to the second starting opening 64b, and the RAM 203 of the main controller 110 It is also possible to separately count the number of pending balls associated with starting winnings to the first starting port 64a and the number of pending balls associated with starting winnings to the second starting port 64b.

Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, regardless of which of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b the ball has won, the case where the maximum number of balls that can be held is set to "4" has been described. The maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting prize to the first starting port 64a and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting prize to the second starting port 64b are separately determined and managed. good too. For example, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is set to "4", and the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "4". As, at a certain point in time, the number of reserved balls with the start winning to the first starting port 64a is "4", and the number of reserved balls with the starting winning to the second starting port 64b is "2", even if there are more starting prizes in the first starting port 64a, the starting prizes will not be reserved, but if there are starting prizes in the second starting port 64b, they will be reserved. may As a result, the player can be made to recognize that the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b are separate, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, for example, the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the first starting port 64a. Alternatively, the variable effect based on the start winning to the first starting port 64a may be given priority over the variable effect based on the starting winning to the second starting port 64b. As a result, it is possible to make the player pay more attention to the starting opening where the variable performance is preferentially performed.

In the above-described embodiment, the game board 13 is provided with two starting holes, the first starting hole 64a and the second starting hole 64b, as starting holes for starting the jackpot lottery when a ball is entered. However, the number of starting ports is not necessarily limited to this, and the number of starting ports may be one or a plurality of three or more. When there are two or more starting ports, the RAM 203 has a corresponding reserved ball number counter for each starting port, and for each starting port, the reserved balls that are reserved according to the winning of the corresponding starting port are stored. You may make it count the number. Also, for each starting port, the maximum number of reserved balls that can be reserved with the start winning to the corresponding starting port may be set.

In addition, when there are two or more starting ports, the command for the number of pending balls sent by the main controller 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 to notify that the suspension has been performed with the winning of the starting port It may also include information indicating whether a hold has been made by winning a prize in the starting port. Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when starting variation may also include information indicating which starting port the variation effect is suspended. As a result, in the voice lamp control device 113, a holding ball number counter is prepared for each starting port, and when a holding ball number command is received, a holding ball number counter for the starting port indicated by the holding ball number command When the number of held balls is set to , and a variation pattern command is received, the number of held balls can be counted for each starting port by decrementing by 1 a counter of the number of retained balls for the starting port indicated by the variation pattern command.

Further, when a plurality of starting holes are arranged on the game board 13, the counter value acquired with the winning of each starting hole (starting winning) may be notified to the sound lamp control device 113. In this case, the command for notifying the voice lamp control device 113 of the counter value acquired by the main control device 110 in association with the start winning to any starting opening is may include information indicating whether Further, the variation pattern command that the main controller 110 transmits to the sound lamp control device 113 when the variation is started may also include information indicating whether the variation effect is associated with the start winning to which starting port. . Furthermore, in the RAM 223 of the sound lamp control device 113, a look-ahead information storage area is prepared for each starting opening, and each counter value transmitted from the main controller 110 in association with the starting winning to the corresponding starting opening is stored. It may be stored in the prefetch information storage area. As a result, every time a variation pattern command is received, shift processing can be performed on the look-ahead information storage area corresponding to the start opening that detected the start winning that triggered the execution of the variation effect indicated by the variation pattern command. can. Therefore, the value of each counter corresponding to the pending variable effect for each starting port can be held in the sound lamp control device 113 as well. Therefore, if the probability of winning a jackpot, the distribution probability of the jackpot type, the distribution probability of the losing type, etc. differ depending on the starting opening that won the start prize, in the look-ahead process, whether or not it will be a jackpot for each variable effect, It is possible to correctly determine a jackpot type in the case of a jackpot, a loss type in the case of a loss, etc., based on which start opening the winning prize is. In addition, when the variable performance based on the start winning to one starting port is given priority to the variable performance based on the starting winning to the other starting port, the variation based on the starting winning to the one starting port Pre-reading processing can be performed in order from the value of the counter corresponding to the performance, and the number of suspension times of the fluctuation performance that will be the most recent big win can be correctly determined.

Further, when a plurality of starting ports are provided, the sound lamp control device 113 receives a command from the main control device 110 for the value of each counter obtained based on the starting winning to the starting port. When the start of the performance is determined, the continuous notice performance may be executed over all the variable performances (suspended balls) suspended at that time regardless of the start opening where the start prize was awarded. In addition, in a pachinko machine provided with a plurality of starting openings, and in which a variable performance for winning a prize at one starting opening is executed preferentially over a variable rendering for winning a prize at another starting opening, The start of the continuous advance notice effect may be determined only from the result of the prefetching of the counter value obtained for the prize winning at the start opening where the variable effect is executed. Thus, it is not determined whether or not the execution of the continuous announcement performance is set for the variable performance corresponding to the winning to the starting port with the low priority, and the continuous announcement performance is not started for this variable performance. If a continuous announcement effect is started for the variable effect corresponding to the winning at the starting point with a low priority, and the variable effect is continuously suspended at the starting point with a high priority, the continuous warning effect will end soon. It is possible that there will be a situation where you do not. On the other hand, in this modification, the presence or absence of the setting of the execution of the continuous notice effect is not determined for the variable effect corresponding to the winning to the starting port with a low priority, and the continuous notice effect is not determined for this variable effect. is not started, so you can suppress the occurrence of such a situation.

In the above embodiment, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110, the value of the number of pending balls stored in the RAM 223 is reduced by 1 (see S1107 in FIG. 26). However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, variation processing executed by the MPU 201 of the main controller 110 (FIG. 13
), the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a of the main controller 110 subtracted in accordance with the fluctuation pattern command set by the fluctuation start process (S307) (see S305 in FIG. 13) is A pending ball number command is set so as to be transmitted from the control device 110 to the audio ramp controller 113, and the pending ball number command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the audio ramp controller 113 together with the transmission of the variation pattern command. You may make it transmit. As a result, the audio lamp control device 113 can more accurately grasp the number of held balls held by the main control device 110 . In this case, S1107 in FIG. 26 is omitted. Also, the variation pattern command may include the value (N) of the pending ball number counter 203a after the subtraction. In this case, the sound lamp control device 113, when receiving a variation pattern command, extracts the number of pending balls (N) included in the variation pattern command and sets it to the number of pending balls stored in the RAM 223.

In the above embodiment, winning to the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b and passage through the through gate 67 are each suspended up to four times, but the maximum number of suspended balls is limited to four. It is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). In addition, for the winning of the first starting port 64a and the second starting port 64b, the maximum number of reserved balls may be set separately depending on the starting port, and the maximum number of reserved balls at each starting port is "4 ” may be any number other than . Also, the maximum number of held balls in each starting port does not necessarily have to be the same value, and may be different values. In addition, the number of held balls for variable display based on the winning of the first start port 64a and the second start port 64b can be displayed numerically in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or by dividing the area into four. It may be displayed in a different manner (for example, color or lighting pattern) by the number of reserved balls. It may be configured to notify the number.

Further, as shown in the above embodiment, the variable display, which is a type of dynamic display, is not limited to vertically scrolling the pattern as identification information on the display screen of the third pattern display device 81. It may be performed by moving and displaying a pattern along a predetermined path such as a direction or an L shape. Further, the dynamic display of the identification information is not limited to the variable display of the pattern. It also includes the production display etc. In this case, one or more characters are used as the third symbol.

In each of the above-described embodiments, when the variable effect is executed, the case of displaying the high-speed variation in which all the symbols Z1 to Z3 are scrolled at such a high speed that the player cannot visually recognize them has been described. Alternatively, all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be reduced to an unrecognizable degree and displayed, or all the patterns Z1 to Z3 may be displayed as snow noise-like images in which a large number of white dots are randomly displayed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from the above embodiment. For example, once a jackpot is won, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a double-right product, a triple-right product, etc.) that increases the expected value of the jackpot until multiple (for example, 2 or 3) jackpot conditions occur, including that. may be implemented as Further, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the ball enters a predetermined area after the big winning pattern is displayed. Also, a pachinko machine having a prize winning device having a special area such as a V-zone and entering a special game state as a necessary condition for winning a ball in the special area may be implemented. Furthermore, in addition to pachinko machines, various game machines such as arepachi, majang ball, slot machines, and so-called game machines in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined may be implemented.

In the slot machine, for example, the pattern is changed by operating the control lever in a state where the pattern effective line is determined by inserting a coin, and the pattern is stopped and fixed by operating the stop button. It is. Therefore, the basic concept of a slot machine is "provided with a display device that confirms and displays identification information after variably displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of pieces of identification information, The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stopping (for example, a stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed, and the stop is displayed. It is a slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value under the condition that the combination of time identification information is a specific one. In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Examples include:

In a slot machine, the ratio of the number of game media paid out as a bonus (accessory) to the total number of game media (coins, medals) paid out during a predetermined period is the role ratio. Therefore, the number of game media to be paid out when each winning combination is established is stored in the ROM of the main controller instead of the winning ball number table 202e, and the number of the game media is stored in the ROM of the main controller, and the same as the role ratio management chip or the prize ratio management chip. In the control device that executes the function, the number of wins (symbols aligned on the activated line) during the non-bonus game period (normal period), the number of wins during the bonus game period, and the win during the AT period. By counting the number of wins won, the role ratio and the consecutive role ratio may be managed.

Further, as a specific example of a game machine that combines a pachinko machine and a slot machine, it is equipped with a display device for displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then confirming and displaying the symbols, and is equipped with a ball launching handle. There are things that are not. In this case, after throwing a predetermined amount of balls based on a predetermined operation (button operation), for example, the pattern starts to change due to the operation of the control lever, for example, due to the operation of the stop button, or a predetermined As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbols is stopped, and a special game is generated in which a predetermined game value is given to the player under the condition that the determined symbols at the time of the stop are so-called jackpot symbols, and the player is given a special game. A lot of balls are paid out to the tray at the bottom. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the balls can be treated as game value in the game hall. It is possible to solve the problems such as the burden on the equipment due to the separate handling of the medals and the balls and the restrictions on the installation location of the game machine.

In the following, concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown. It should be noted that each of the various inventive concepts described below may add a part or a plurality of parts of the configuration of another inventive concept to the inventive concept, or add a part or a plurality of the configurations of the other inventive concept. The concept of the invention may be modified and configured by exchanging parts or the like.

(Task 1)
Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 shown below to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, and O1 are made to solve the following problems.

That is, conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined There is a game machine that pays out a number of game media to a player. In addition, some prize-winning ports are provided with an accessory, and the operation of the accessory affects the winning of game media (for example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2003-340046).

By the way, some fraudsters illegally activate the prize-winning function in which the prize-winning function is provided, or induce the game medium to enter the prize-winning function so as to win the prize. There are those who try to increase the number of prizes to be awarded to the winning slots. However, measures to detect such fraudulent acts are insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent activity.

(Means and Effect 1)
<Group A>
a game area provided with a plurality of prize-winning ports including a first prize-winning port having an accessory that operates based on a game;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing a medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine A1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with the plurality of prize winning ports including the first winning port having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. be. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to the winning of the prize-winning hole, the number of game media paid out due to the first prize-winning hole (that is, the operation of the role). can be analyzed, and fraud can be detected based on the character ratio.

In gaming machine A1,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means, and main control means for performing main control of the game;
A gaming machine A2 characterized in that the storage means, the storage control means, and the output means are provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the winning detection means and the shooting means has won a prize in one of the winning holes, the game medium is paid out based on the winning hole in which the game medium has won. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means; storage means for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening; storage control means for accumulating and storing the information in the storage means; and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, the winning detection means detects winning to the winning opening, sets the number of game media to be paid out based on the detection, and based on the set number of game media to be paid out, the number of game media paid out by the paying out means, The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning slot in the storage means and the output of signals based on the information stored in the storage means are all controlled by the main control. can be done in the means. Therefore, even if the fraudulent person outputs fraudulent information from the output means and tries to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. difficult to enter. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio from being hindered due to the output of fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In gaming machine A2,
The game machine A3 is characterized in that the main control means is housed in a substrate box in which a box space and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the main control means is housed in the board box in which the box space and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are connected in an unopenable manner, a fraudulent person can transmit illegal information to the output means. is output to prevent the discovery of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio, it becomes difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to 3,
an external device connecting means connectable to an external device;
an external device connection detection means for detecting that the external device is connected to the external device connection means;
Triggered by the detection of the connection of the external device by the external device connection detection means, the output means outputs information to the external device based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. A gaming machine A4 characterized by outputting a signal.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an external device is connected to the external device connection means, it is detected by the external device connection means. is output by the output means. As a result, by simply connecting the external device to the external device connection means of the game machine, payouts are made to the external device based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means, based on the winning in the first winning hole. Since a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of played game media is output from the game machine, there is an effect that fraudulent acts based on the character ratio can be quickly and easily detected.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to 4,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A game machine A5 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won, are output by the output means. Output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a win for each winning hole in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that the character ratio can be easily analyzed based on the signal output from.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A5,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized by storing in a storage means information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by Machine A6.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the following effects are produced. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine A6,
The game machine A7 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information regarding the latest winnings to the winning openings stored in the second storage means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storage means, is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A7,
The first prize winning port includes a second prize winning port having an accessory that continuously operates based on the game,
The storage control means stores information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the paying out means. Cumulatively stored in a storage means,
The output means determines the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means accumulated and stored in the storage means. information relating to the ratio of the number of game media, and information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means A gaming machine A8 characterized by outputting and.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first prize winning port provided in the game area includes the second prize winning port having the accessory that continuously operates based on the game, and the number of game media paid out by the payout means is Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning hole is also stored in the storage means by the storage control means. and information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the storage means; , and information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. As a result, the ratio of the number of game media that received the signal output from the output means to the first winning hole (that is, the operation of the accessory) out of the number of game media paid out as a result of winning the winning hole Not only the character ratio that is , but also the continuous character ratio that is the ratio of the second winning opening (that is, the operation of the character when the character operates continuously) can be analyzed, and the character ratio and Based on the continuous character ratio, there is an effect that fraud can be detected more accurately.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A8,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the payout means, and main control means for performing main control of the game;
The main control means has a calculation means for executing calculations for performing the main control of the game,
A gaming machine A7 characterized in that at least the winning detection means, the payout amount setting means, the storage control means, and the output means are realized by execution of calculations by the calculation means.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the winning detection means and the shooting means has won a prize in one of the winning holes, the game medium is paid out based on the winning hole in which the game medium has won. a payout number setting means for setting the number of game media and notifying the payout means; means are provided. Then, at least, the number of game media paid out by the payout means accumulated and stored in the winning detection means, the payout number setting means, and the storage means is paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole. The generation of information relating to the ratio of the number of game media played and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the execution of calculations by the calculation means. As a result, the detection of the winning to the winning opening by the winning detection means, the setting of the number of game media to be paid out based on the detection, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means based on the set number of payouts 1. The storage of information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winnings to a winning slot in the storage means by the storage control means, and the output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, All can be done by the computing unit of the main control means. Therefore, even if the fraudulent person tries to prevent the detection of fraud based on the character product ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, it is difficult to input fraudulent information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

<Group B>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A8,
Equipped with main control means for performing the main control of the game,
The main control means comprises computing means for performing computations for performing main control of the game,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the said payout means is realized by the execution of calculation by said calculating means,
The game machine B1 is characterized in that the memory control means and the output means are provided in a microchip separate from the effect means.

According to the gaming machine B1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with calculation means for executing calculations for performing the control, and the winning detection means and the game medium shot by the shooting means a payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning prize opening of the game medium and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the game medium has won a prize; , is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are provided in a microchip separate from the arithmetic means. As a result, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be increased to the first winning slot without significantly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means by simply providing another microchip. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning. Further, the calculation means outputs a signal based on the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in , and most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means can be applied to the main control of the game.

In gaming machine B1,
The gaming machine B2, wherein the microchip is provided in the main control means.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine B1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the microchip provided with the storage control means, the output means, and the performance means is provided in the main control means. Accordingly, information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the set number of payouts. is stored in the storage means and output of a signal based on the information stored in the storage means is performed in the main control means. Therefore, even if a fraudulent person tries to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by causing the output means to output fraudulent information, the above configuration is completed by the main control means. difficult to enter information. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio from being hindered due to the output of fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In gaming machine B1 or B2,
A game machine B3 characterized in that the main control means and the microchip are housed together in a board box in which a box space and a box cover covering an opening of the box base are unopenably connected.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effects of the game machine B1 or B2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the main control means and the microchip are housed in a substrate box in which the box space and the box cover covering the opening of the box base are unopenably connected, a fraudulent person cannot access the output means. Even if an attempt is made to prevent the discovery of fraud based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information, input of fraudulent information becomes difficult. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably prevent the detection of fraudulent activity based on the character product ratio by outputting fraudulent information by the fraudulent person.

In any one of gaming machines B1 to B3,
The main control means is
In each winning slot, a payout information storage means for storing information on the number of game media to be paid out by the paying out means when the corresponding winning hole wins,
The computing means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
In the start-up process, information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means for each winning hole based on the memory of the payout information storage means when the corresponding winning hole is won, A gaming machine B4 characterized by including a process for transmitting to the microchip.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines B1 to B3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the main control means, the payout information storage means stores information on the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when the corresponding prize winning hole is won. When the power is turned on to the main control means, the computing means executes start-up processing. Information indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means when a prize is won is transmitted to the microchip. As a result, even if the microchip does not store in advance the information indicating the number of game media to be paid out for the winning of each winning hole, which differs for each model of the gaming machine, the microchip can be controlled by the main controller when the power is turned on. Based on the information transmitted from the means, the character ratio is calculated, or a signal based on the information is output, and the character ratio is calculated for those who receive the signal output from the output means. There is an effect that it can be calculated.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The game machine B5 is characterized in that the microchip comprises second arithmetic means for performing arithmetic operations for realizing the memory control means and the output means.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the microchip is provided with a second calculation means, and the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means The storage control means for accumulating and storing related information in the storage means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means are realized by the calculation of the second calculation means. . As a result, by changing the instruction (program) for the calculation of the second effect means, there is an effect that it is possible to flexibly cope with the function change and specification change of the memory control means, the output means, and the like.

In any of gaming machines B1 to B4,
The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the microchip implements the memory control means and the output means by wired logic.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines B1 to B4, the following effects are produced. That is, the microchip stores information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means by wired logic. and output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. As a result, processing such as storing and outputting information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout device. can be performed at high speed.

<Group C>
In any of game machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6,
The game machine C1 is characterized in that the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine C1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9 and B1 to B6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information stored in the storage means and related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is Retains even when the power is turned off. As a result, regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is turned on, the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port are compared with the number of game media paid out by the paying out means over a long period of time. can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, the person who receives the signal output from the output means can analyze the role material ratio of the game machine over a long period of time, so there is an effect of being able to detect past cheating as well.

In gaming machine C1,
a second storage means incapable of holding information while the power is off;
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized by storing in a storage means information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by Machine C2.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The second storage means cannot retain information while the power is turned off. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, every time a predetermined opportunity comes, based on the information stored in the second storage means, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is increased to the first winning hole. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, the storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even when the power is turned off. Although the number of times of writing is limited from the viewpoint of performance, the number of times of writing to the storage means can be reduced by configuring as described above, and the above problem of the storage means can be suppressed from manifestation.

In gaming machine C2,
The game machine C3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winnings to the winning openings stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output, so that the information including the latest winning status is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

<Group D>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
The storage control means stores the above The gaming machine D1 is characterized in that the information indicating the winning detected by the winning detection means is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage control means stores in the storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. , information indicating the winning openings in which the winning has been detected by the winning detecting means is accumulated and stored. A signal based on this information is then output. Receiving the signal output from the output means, based on the information indicating the winning opening in which the winning was detected, the number of game media paid out by the paying out means and the winning to the first winning opening , the number of game media paid out can be calculated, and the role product ratio can be analyzed from these numbers. Then, when a suspicious change is recognized in the character ratio, the cause can be investigated in depth based on the information indicating the winning opening where the winning was detected. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably detect fraud based on the role product ratio.

In gaming machine D1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The storage control means causes the payout means to pay out the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. The information relating to the ratio of the number of the game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of the game media put out is accumulated and stored in the storage means. A game machine D2.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effects of any of the gaming machines D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means is As information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole, the information is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, the information stored in the second storage means reflecting all winnings is based on the number of game media paid out by the paying out means and the number of winnings to the first winning hole. As information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out by the number of game media, the information can be accumulated and stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine D2,
The game machine D3 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winnings to the winning openings stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output, so that the information including the latest winning status is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In any one of the game machines D1 to D3,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A game machine D4 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won, are output by the output means. Output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a win for each winning hole in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that it is possible to calculate and analyze the character ratio from the information about the prize output from.

In any of gaming machines D1 to D4,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines D1 to D4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. , is calculated by the ratio calculating means. A signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This eliminates the need for the recipient of the signal output by the output means to calculate the ratio (character product ratio), thereby facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, when trying to calculate the role product ratio in the one that received the signal output by the output means, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening set illegally or by mistake The role ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the gaming machine D5, the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, so there is an effect that the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated accurately.

In gaming machine D5,
The output means outputs a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. A game machine D6 characterized in that it outputs a signal indicating

According to the gaming machine D6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the signal indicating the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media paid out by the payout means calculated by the ratio calculating means are the first A signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening is output by the output means. Thereby, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (character product ratio) output from the output means, the cause can be searched from the information on the winning detected by the winning detection means, which is also output. has the effect of being able to

<Group E>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come;
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined based on the information stored in the second storage means. a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening;
The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores the information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine E1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined by the determination means, based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, the information indicating the calculated ratio is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, since the calculated ratio (character product ratio) is output, the person receiving the signal output by the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (character product ratio), and analysis of fraudulent behavior has the effect of facilitating In addition, when trying to calculate the character ratio by receiving the signal output by the output means, when there is a prize in the corresponding prize opening in each prize opening set illegally or by mistake Although there is a possibility that the role ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means at the time, the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, so the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be accurately calculated. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the role product ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information to be stored in the storage means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed.

In gaming machine E1,
The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winnings to the winning openings stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output, so that the information including the latest winning status is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the role product ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means, so the information regarding the winning is used. This has the effect of enabling a deeper analysis of the cause of a situation suspected of being a fraudulent act.

In gaming machine E1 or E2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A game machine E3 characterized in that it outputs at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine E1 or E2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won, are output by the output means. Output by As a result, when there is a suspicion of misconduct by analyzing the role ratio, the number of game media paid out by the payout means when there is a winning in the corresponding winning slot is referred to. This has the effect of being able to search for the cause of the situation.

<Group F>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning each winning opening is counted for each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, and the counting is performed for each winning opening. second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The storage control means stores the information stored in the second storage means in relation to the number of game media paid out by the payout means when the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred. , a gaming machine F1, wherein the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning in each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs is counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening. Information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning hole is stored in the second storage means. When the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the information indicating the winning game media counted for each winning opening stored in the second storage means is paid out by the payout means. The information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, the winnings detected by the winning detection means are first counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening, so that the winnings to the winning openings are not missed, and the information stored in the second storage means is counted. can be reflected. Then, each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, the information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning port, which reflects all the winnings and is stored in the second storage means, is displayed as the game media paid out by the paying-out means. can be accumulated and stored in the storage means as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of . Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the storage means stores the total number of game media for each prize-winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, the storage capacity required for the storage means is reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the increase. Further, the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from when a predetermined opportunity occurs until the next predetermined opportunity occurs. There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In the gaming machine F1,
The game machine F2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of fraud, including the latest winning status.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A gaming machine F3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F1 or F2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won, are output by the output means. Output by As a result, even if the receiver of the signal output from the output means does not have information on the number of game media to be paid out when there is a win for each winning hole in the connected gaming machine, There is an effect that it is possible to calculate and analyze the character ratio from the information about the prize output from.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3,
Based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, the number of the game media paid out based on the winning in the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means Equipped with a ratio calculation means for calculating the ratio of numbers,
The game machine F4 is characterized in that the output means outputs a signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is , is calculated by the ratio calculating means. A signal indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculating means is output by the output means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. This eliminates the need for those who receive the signal output from the output means to calculate the relevant ratio (character product ratio), which has the effect of facilitating the analysis of fraud. In addition, those who receive the signal output from the output means, when trying to calculate the role product ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening set illegally or by mistake The role ratio may be calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means. On the other hand, in the game machine F4, since the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculating means, there is an effect that the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be calculated accurately.

In the gaming machine F4,
The output means outputs a signal indicating the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means as a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means. A gaming machine F5 characterized by outputting a signal indicating

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine F4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, as the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, there is a signal indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning hole from when a predetermined chance occurs until the next predetermined chance occurs. a signal indicating the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means, calculated by the ratio calculating means; Output by As a result, when there is a suspicious point in the ratio (character product ratio) output from the output means, the time from when the predetermined trigger, which is also output, is reached to when the next predetermined trigger is reached , there is an effect that the cause can be found from the number of game media that have won in each winning hole.

<G group>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3,
Based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning each winning opening is counted for each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, and the counting is performed for each winning opening. second storage control means for storing information indicating the number of winning game media in the second storage means;
a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come;
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined based on the information stored in the second storage means. a ratio calculation means for calculating a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the winning opening;
The gaming machine G1 is characterized in that the storage control means accumulates and stores the information indicating the ratio calculated by the ratio calculation means in the storage means.

According to the gaming machine G1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, and C1 to C3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, based on the detection by the winning detecting means, the number of game media winning in each winning opening from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs is counted by the second storage control means for each winning opening. Information indicating the number of winning game media counted for each winning hole is stored in the second storage means. When it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has come, the number of game media paid out by the payout means is determined by the determination means, based on the information stored in the second storage means. The ratio of the number of game media paid out is calculated by the ratio calculating means. Then, the information indicating the calculated ratio is cumulatively stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, since the calculated ratio (character product ratio) is output, the person receiving the signal output by the output means does not need to calculate the ratio (character product ratio), and analysis of fraudulent behavior has the effect of facilitating In addition, those who receive the signal output from the output means, when trying to calculate the role product ratio, when there is a prize in the corresponding winning opening in each winning opening set illegally or by mistake Although there is a possibility that the role ratio is calculated based on the number of game media paid out by the payout means at the time, the role ratio is calculated and output by the ratio calculation means, so the role ratio and the continuous role ratio can be accurately calculated. There is an effect that the ratio can be calculated. In addition, since the information indicating the role product ratio is accumulated and stored in the storage means, the amount of information to be stored in the storage means can be reduced, and an increase in the storage capacity required for the storage means can be suppressed. Furthermore, since the second storage means also stores information indicating the number of game media that have won in each winning slot from when a predetermined opportunity occurs to when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, There is an effect that an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed.

In gaming machine G1,
The gaming machine G2, wherein the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine G2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, information indicating the number of winning game media for each winning opening, including the winning in the latest winning opening stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of fraud, including the latest winning status. Further, while the information stored in the storage means is the role product ratio, the information stored in the second storage means is the number of prize-winning openings that have passed from the time a predetermined opportunity arrives to the time the next predetermined opportunity occurs. Since the information indicates the number of game media that have won a prize, the use of this information has the effect of enabling deeper analysis of the cause of a situation in which fraudulent activity is suspected.

In gaming machine G1 or G2,
The output means outputs a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means and the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won. A gaming machine G3 characterized by outputting at least a signal for indicating

According to the gaming machine G3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine G1 or G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least a signal based on the information stored in the storage means, and a signal indicating the number of game media to be paid out by the payout means in each winning hole when the corresponding winning hole is won, are output by the output means. Output by As a result, the person who receives the signal output from the output means analyzes the character ratio and if there is a suspicion of fraud, in each winning slot, if there is a prize in the corresponding winning slot There is an effect that the cause of the situation can be found by referring to the number of game media paid out by the payout means.

<Group H>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3,
a second storage control means for storing in a second storage means information relating to the winning detected by the winning detection means after a predetermined opportunity occurs and before the next predetermined opportunity occurs;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. A game characterized by storing in a storage means information relating to a ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by Machine H1.

According to the gaming machine H1, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, and G1 to G3, the following effects are achieved. . That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity occurs until the time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Further, since the second memory means stores only the information about winning detected by the winning detection means from the time when a predetermined opportunity occurs to the next time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, the storage capacity of the second storage means can be reduced. There is an effect that it can be kept small.

In gaming machine H1,
The game machine H2 is characterized in that the output means outputs at least a signal based on the information accumulated in the storage means and a signal based on the information stored in the second storage means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effects of the game machine H1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the output means outputs not only the signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, but also the signal based on the information stored in the second storage means. As a result, the information about the latest winnings to the winning openings stored in the second storing means, which is not reflected in the information stored in the storing means, is also output, so that the information including the latest winning status is also output. There is an effect that the presence or absence can be determined.

In gaming machine H1 or H2,
The gaming machine H3 is characterized in that the second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine H3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine H1 or H2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information about the prize winning detected by the winning detecting means from the time when the predetermined opportunity occurs until the time when the next predetermined opportunity occurs, which is stored in the second storage means, is held even while the power is turned off. As a result, when the power is cut off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information about the winning that has been stored in the second storage means and has not yet been reflected in the storage in the storage means, thereby improving the reliability of the output signal. There is an effect that it can be increased.

<Group I>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come;
and a power interruption detection means for detecting that the power supply is interrupted,
The storage control means stores a The game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port with respect to the number of the game media paid out by the paying out means based on the information about the winning detected by the winning detection means. A gaming machine I1 characterized in that information relating to the ratio of the number of is stored in a storage means.

According to the game machine I1, in addition to the effects of any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, and H1 to H3, effect. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Further, even when the power interruption detection means detects that the power supply is cut off, the payment is made by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media received is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, and even when the power is turned off before the predetermined opportunity occurs, all winnings are reflected and the payout is made. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the means can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power supply is turned off, it is possible to suppress the loss of the information about the winning that is stored in the second storage means and not reflected in the storage in the storage means, and the game media paid out by the payout means. There is an effect that more accurate information can be output as information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of .

In gaming machine I1,
A power supply means capable of supplying power for at least a predetermined period even after power is cut off,
The game machine I2, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to at least the memory control means.

According to the gaming machine I2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least the storage control means is supplied with power by the power supply means for at least a predetermined period of time after the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power-off detection means detects that the power is turned off, the storage control means uses the power to obtain the information about the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. To surely store in a storage means information related to the ratio of the number of game media put out based on the winning to the first prize winning port to the number of game media put out by the payout means. has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine I2,
The gaming machine I3, wherein the power supply means supplies the power to the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine I3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine I2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the power supply means supplies power not only to the storage control means but also to the second storage means for at least a predetermined period after the power is turned off. Thus, before the situation stored in the second storage means is erased, the payout means is surely paid out based on the winning information detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. There is an effect that information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media received can be stored in the storage means.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
The second storage means is configured to be able to retain the stored information even while the power is turned off,
The storage control means stores the winning detected by the winning detecting means stored in the second storing means when power is supplied and when the determining means determines that the predetermined opportunity has not occurred. storage means for storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means A game machine I4 characterized by storing in.

According to the game machine I4, the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I3 In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The information stored in the second storage means is retained even while the power is turned off. Then, when power is supplied and when it is determined by the determination means that a predetermined opportunity has occurred, the payout means is operated based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the storage control means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. . Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, the number of game media paid out by the payout means when power is supplied and each time a predetermined opportunity occurs, reflecting all winnings. to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port can be stored in the storage means. Therefore, when the power is turned off, the information about the winning stored in the second storage means and not yet reflected in the storage in the storage means is surely reflected in the information stored in the storage means after the power is supplied. It is possible to suppress loss of information stored in the second storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. has the effect of Further, when it is detected that the power supply is turned off, if the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, the power supply is interrupted while the information is being stored in the storage means. If the power supply is interrupted, there is a possibility that information cannot be stored in the storage means reflecting all the information stored in the second storage means, or that incorrect information is stored in the storage means. is supplied, the information is stored in the storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means, so there is an effect that such problems can be suppressed.

<Group J>
In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The game machine J1 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media ejected into the game area reaches a predetermined number.

According to the game machine J1, the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, and I1 to I4 In addition to the following effects. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is increased to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined trigger includes that the number of game media ejected to the game area reaches the predetermined number, the number of game media paid out by the payout means while the predetermined game media are being ejected It is possible to calculate the ratio (accessory ratio) of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number. Therefore, it is possible to calculate the role ratio at the stage where many game media have won various winning slots and the payout has been performed, so that the averaged role ratio can be calculated. Therefore, since it is possible to eliminate short-term fluctuations in the character product ratio in normal games, it is possible to facilitate the analysis of cheating by those who receive the signal output by the output means.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The gaming machine J2, wherein the predetermined timing includes that the current time reaches a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J2, any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 In addition to the effects obtained, the following effects are obtained. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined timing includes the fact that the current time has reached the predetermined time, the payout means can reliably perform the payout by the arrival of the predetermined time even in the situation where the game is not played. It is possible to calculate the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media (accessory ratio). Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably analyze the presence or absence of dishonesty with respect to those who have received the signal output from the output means by using this reliably calculated role product ratio.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the predetermined opportunity includes that the cumulative time of playing the game reaches the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J3, any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1, J2 In addition to the effects of the above, the following effects are obtained. That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to Further, the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative time during which the game has been played reaches the predetermined time. Here, the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (accessory ratio) is essentially the number of game balls. It is calculated by performing a trial firing test for 10 hours. Information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is triggered by the game time reaching a predetermined time. By storing it in the storage means, it is possible to calculate the role product ratio close to the original definition. Therefore, there is an effect that the person receiving the signal output from the output means can be analyzed using the role-thing ratio close to the original definition.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3,
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The gaming machine J4 is characterized in that the predetermined trigger includes that the cumulative time during which power has been supplied has reached a second predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine J4, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J3 In addition to the effects of ka, the following effects are obtained.

That is, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to In addition, since the predetermined trigger includes that the accumulated time during which the power is supplied reaches the second predetermined time, the time during which the power is supplied is the second predetermined time even when the game is not played much. 2, the ratio (character ratio ) can be calculated. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to reliably analyze the presence or absence of dishonesty for those who have received the signal output from the output means by using this reliably calculated role product ratio.

In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4,
Equipped with main control means for performing the main control of the game,
The main control means comprises computing means for performing computations for performing main control of the game,
and when the winning detection means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won a prize, a payment is made based on the winning opening of the game medium. The number-of-payouts setting means for setting the number of game media to be put out and notifying the said payout means is realized by the execution of calculation by said calculating means,
The memory control means and the output means are provided in a microchip different from the effect means,
The microchip is
a second storage control means for storing information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in a second storage;
and a judgment means for judging that a predetermined opportunity has come,
When the determination means determines that the predetermined opportunity has occurred, the storage control means controls the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means. storing in a storage means information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by
The main control means is
provided with a predetermined trigger information storage means for storing information indicating the predetermined trigger,
The computing means executes a start-up process when power is turned on to the main control means,
The game machine J5 is characterized in that the start-up processing includes processing for transmitting information indicating a predetermined trigger to the microchip based on the information stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means.

According to the gaming machine J5, any of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J4 In addition to the effects of ka, the following effects are obtained. That is, the main control means for performing the main control of the game is provided with calculation means for executing calculations for performing the control, and the winning detection means and the game medium shot by the shooting means a payout amount setting means for setting the number of game media to be paid out based on the winning prize opening of the game medium and notifying the payout means when the winning detection means detects that the game medium has won a prize; , is realized by execution of the calculation by the calculation main means. On the other hand, storage control for accumulating and storing information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means in the storage means. The means and the output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the memory means are provided in a microchip separate from the arithmetic means. As a result, the number of game media paid out by the payout means can be increased to the first winning slot without significantly rewriting the instruction (program) of the calculation executed by the calculation means by simply providing another microchip. There is an effect that it is possible to output a signal based on information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning.

Further, the calculation means outputs a signal based on the information related to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It is possible to suppress an increase in the processing load in , and most of the processing capacity of the arithmetic means can be applied to the main control of the game. Further, in the microchip, the second storage control means temporarily stores the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means in the second storage means. The number of game media paid out by the payout means based on the information regarding the winning detected by the winning detection means stored in the second storage means when the determination means determines that a predetermined opportunity has occurred. , the information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning hole is accumulated and stored in the storage means by the storage control means. Thus, by first storing the information about the winning detected by the winning detecting means in the second storing means, the winning to the winning opening can be reflected on the information stored in the second storing means without failing. . Then, based on the information stored in the second storage means, every time a predetermined opportunity occurs, all the winnings are reflected, and the number of game media paid out by the paying out means is the number of winnings to the first winning port. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on is stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to output more accurate information as information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means. It has the effect of being able to

On the other hand, in the main control means, the predetermined trigger is stored in the predetermined trigger information storage means. When the main control means is powered on, the computing means executes start-up processing. The indicated information is sent to the microchip. Here, the storage of the information on the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means (character ratio) is Since there is a physical limit to the storage capacity of the storage means that stores information related to the ratio, instead of fixing the memory trigger with a microchip, consideration is given to the jackpot probability and probability variation ratio in the game machine. It is preferable that the Therefore, by causing the main control means to store the predetermined trigger in the predetermined trigger information storage means, and transmitting information indicating the predetermined trigger to the microchip each time the power is turned on, the microchip can be used to play games. The ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means at a predetermined opportunity that matches the jackpot probability and probability variation ratio of the machine ( There is an effect that the information on the character product ratio) can be stored in the storage means.

<K group>
In any of game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5,
a third storage control means for accumulating information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine and storing it in a third storage means;
The game machine K1, wherein the output means outputs information indicating the game state of the game machine stored in the third storage means.

According to the game machine K1, any of the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5 In addition to the effects of ka, there are the following effects. That is, the information indicating the game state of the gaming machine is accumulated and stored in the third storage means by the third storage control means. Information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine stored in the third storage means is output by the output means. As a result, when the signal output from the output means is suspected, the person receiving the signal can analyze the game state of the gaming machine to find out the cause.

In the gaming machine K1,
A door frame covering the front surface of the game area is provided,
The game machine K2 is characterized in that the game state of the game machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the door frame is being opened.

According to the game machine K2, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1, there are the following effects. That is, since the game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the state in which the door frame covering the front surface of the game area is being opened, the one that receives the signal output from the output means , there is an effect that it is possible to judge whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out, from the occurrence situation of the state in which the door frame is being opened.

In gaming machine K1 or K2,
A gaming machine K3, wherein the gaming status of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes an error status of the gaming machine.

According to the game machine K3, in addition to the effects of the game machine K1 or K2, there are the following effects. That is, since the game state of the game machine stored as information in the third storage means includes the error state of the game machine, the receiver of the signal output from the output means can determine the state of occurrence of the error state of the game machine. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been performed.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K3,
A game machine K4, wherein the game state of the game machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a win state in which a predetermined game value is awarded to the player.

According to the game machine K4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines K1 to K3, the following effects are provided. That is, since the game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a winning state in which a predetermined game value is given to the player, the signal output from the output means is received by: There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not there is a possibility that a fraudulent act has been carried out from the state of occurrence of the winning state of the gaming machine.

In any of gaming machines K1 to K4,
The game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detection means detects that a prize has been won in any of the winning openings within a predetermined period of time. A game machine K5.

According to the gaming machine K5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines K1 to K4, the following effects are provided. That is, the game state of the gaming machine stored as information in the third storage means includes a state in which the winning detecting means detects that a prize has been won in any of the winning openings within a predetermined period of time. Therefore, those who receive the signal output from the output means can determine whether or not there is a possibility of fraudulent activity, based on whether or not there is a state in which a prize has been won outside business hours, such as late at night. There is an effect that it is possible to determine whether

<Group L>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing advantageous game values to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
a game area provided with a plurality of prize-winning ports including a first prize-winning port having an accessory that operates based on a game;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing a medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
A changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
a game machine L1, further comprising erasing means for erasing all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means when the probability is changed by the changing means.

According to the gaming machine L1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with a plurality of prize winning ports including the first winning port having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. be. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to the winning of the prize-winning hole, the number of game media paid out due to the first prize-winning hole (that is, the operation of the role). can be analyzed, and fraud can be detected based on the character ratio. On the other hand, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means in the lottery by the lottery means which is the opportunity to give the player an advantageous game value, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased by the erasing means. will erase everything. Here, when the winning probability is changed, the character ratio is also changed. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the character ratio that can be analyzed based on the accumulated information is changed. It is unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or a fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, all the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased, so that the effect of the change in the ratio of the characters according to the change of the probability of winning remains in the storage means.

In gaming machine L1,
The game machine L2 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the change has been made.

According to the game machine L2, in addition to the effects of the game machine L1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it can be grasped at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning, and it can be used as a reference for judging whether or not there has been fraud. There is

In gaming machine L2,
When the probability is changed by the change means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information showing the date and time of the change. A gaming machine L3 characterized by being a machine that allows

According to the game machine L3, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information showing the date and time of the change. be done. As a result, it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning, and the change has been made (that is, the information has been erased). Since the date and time can also be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud.

In gaming machine L2 or L3,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the winning probability after the change. The game machine L4 is characterized by being a machine that allows the player to play.

According to the game machine L4, in addition to the effects of the game machine L2 or L3, there are the following effects. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage controlling means together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp at the stage of analysis that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the winning probability, and it is also possible to grasp the winning probability after the change. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while suppressing the probability of winning later.

In any of gaming machines L2 to L4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the winning probability before the change. The game machine L5 is characterized in that the game machine L5

According to the game machine L5, in addition to the effects of the game machines L2 to L4, the following effects are obtained. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. be done. As a result, it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the information stored in the storage means has been erased due to the change in the probability of winning, and the probability of winning before the change can also be grasped. There is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while suppressing the probability of being hit before.

<M group>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing advantageous game values to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
a game area provided with a plurality of prize-winning ports including a first prize-winning port having an accessory that operates based on a game;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing a medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
A changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means,
The game machine M1 is characterized in that the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is kept held even when the probability is changed by the change means.

According to the gaming machine M1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with a plurality of prize winning ports including the first winning port having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. be. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to the winning of the prize-winning hole, the number of game media paid out due to the first prize-winning hole (that is, the operation of the role). can be analyzed, and fraud can be detected based on the character ratio. On the other hand, in the lottery by the lottery means which is the opportunity to award advantageous game value to the player, even if the probability of winning is changed by the change means, all the information stored in the storage means is retained. continue. As a result, although the character ratio changes according to the change in the winning probability, it is possible to analyze whether or not there is fraud before the winning probability is changed.

In gaming machine M1,
The game machine M2 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the change has been made.

According to the game machine M2, in addition to the effects of the game machine M1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it is possible to grasp, at the stage of analysis, that the ratio of the character is changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and it is possible to refer to the decision as to whether or not there has been fraud.

In gaming machine M2,
When the probability is changed by the change means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information showing the date and time of the change. A gaming machine M3 characterized by being a machine that allows the player to play.

According to the game machine M3, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information showing the date and time of the change. be done. As a result, it is possible to easily grasp the date and time when the winning probability was changed. It has the effect of being easy to judge.

In gaming machine M2 or M3,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the winning probability after the change. A game machine M4 characterized in that it allows

According to the game machine M4, in addition to the effects of the game machine M2 or M3, there are the following effects. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage controlling means together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. be done. As a result, since the probability of winning after the change can also be grasped, there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably judge whether or not there has been fraud while suppressing the probability of winning after the change.

In any of gaming machines M2 to M4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the winning probability before the change. The game machine M5 is characterized by being a machine that allows the player to play.

According to the game machine M5, in addition to the effects of the game machines M2 to M4, there is the following effect. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. be done. As a result, it is possible to grasp the probability of winning before the change, so there is an effect that it is possible to more reliably determine whether or not there has been fraud while suppressing the probability of winning before the change.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M5,
Display means for displaying information related to the character ratio based on the information stored in the storage means,
M6, wherein the display means displays information related to the character product ratio based only on the information stored after the change, when the probability is changed by the change means.

According to the game machine M6, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M5, the following effects are obtained. That is, the display means displays information relating to the character product ratio based on the information stored in the storage means. At this time, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the information relating to the character product ratio is displayed based only on the information stored after the change. As a result, regarding the information related to the character object ratio displayed on the display means, it is possible to eliminate the change in the character object ratio due to the change in the winning probability, and it is said that the fraudulent act after the change in the winning probability can be easily detected. effective.

In any of gaming machines M1 to M6,
The game machine M7 is characterized in that the storage control means divides the information for each of the probabilities that can be set by the change by the change means, and accumulates and stores the information in the storage means.

According to the game machine M7, in addition to the effects of the game machines M1 to M6, the following effects are obtained. In other words, the information stored in the storage means is accumulated and stored in the storage means by being divided for each winning probability that can be set by the change by the change means. As a result, for each probability of winning that can be set, it is possible to easily determine the role ratio when the probability is set from the information stored in the storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly switch and analyze the change in the character product ratio associated with the change in the winning probability and the change in the character product ratio associated with cheating.

<N group>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing advantageous game values to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
a game area provided with a plurality of prize-winning ports including a first prize-winning port having an accessory that operates based on a game;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing a medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
A changing means for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
erasing means for excluding and erasing part of the information accumulated and stored in the storage means, which is stored most recently, when the probability is changed by the changing means. Gaming machine N1.

According to the gaming machine N1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with a plurality of prize winning ports including the first winning port having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. be. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to the winning of the prize-winning hole, the number of game media paid out due to the first prize-winning hole (that is, the operation of the role). can be analyzed, and fraud can be detected based on the character ratio. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means in the lottery of the lottery means which serves as a trigger for imparting an advantageous game value to the player, the most recent of the information accumulated and stored in the storage means The information is erased by the erasing means except for the part of the stored information. Here, when the winning probability is changed, the character ratio is also changed. Therefore, if the information accumulated and stored in the storage means remains as it is before the probability of winning is changed, the change in the character ratio that can be analyzed based on the accumulated information is changed. It is unclear whether it is due to a change in the probability of winning or a fraudulent act. On the other hand, when the probability of winning is changed, the information accumulated and stored in the storage means is erased except for the most recently stored part, so that the probability of winning is changed. In this way, it is possible to minimize the effect of changes in character ratios from remaining in the memory means, and at the same time, it is possible to analyze whether there is a possibility that cheating has occurred before the probability of winning is changed. There is an effect that it is possible to

In gaming machine N1,
The game machine N2 is characterized in that, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means causes the storage means to store information indicating that the change has been made.

According to the game machine N2, in addition to the effects of the game machine N1, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. As a result, it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the character ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed according to the change in the probability of winning. There is an effect that erasure can be grasped at the stage of analysis and can be used as a reference for determining whether or not there has been fraud.

In gaming machine N2,
When the probability is changed by the change means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information showing the date and time of the change. A game machine N3 characterized by being a thing to make.

According to the game machine N3, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2, there are the following effects. That is, when the probability of winning is changed by the changing means, information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with information showing the date and time of the change. be done. As a result, it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the character ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed according to the change in the probability of winning. Since it is possible to grasp that the information has been erased at the stage of analysis, and furthermore, it is possible to grasp the date and time when the change was made (that is, the erasure was made), it is possible to more reliably judge whether or not there has been fraud. has the effect of

In game machine N2 or N3,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the winning probability after the change. A game machine N4 characterized in that it is a game machine N4.

According to the game machine N4, in addition to the effects of the game machine N2 or N3, there are the following effects. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage controlling means together with the information indicating the winning probability after the change. be done. As a result, it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the character ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed according to the change in the probability of winning. At the stage of analysis, it is possible to grasp that it has been deleted, and furthermore, it is possible to grasp the probability of winning after the change. It has the effect of being able to

In any of gaming machines N2 to N4,
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the storage control means stores information indicating that the change has been made in the storage means together with information indicating the winning probability before the change. A game machine N5 characterized by being a thing to let.

According to the game machine N5, in addition to the effects of the game machines N2 to N4, there are the following effects. That is, when the winning probability is changed by the changing means, the information indicating that the change has been made is stored in the storage means by the storage control means together with the information indicating the winning probability before the change. be done. As a result, it can be grasped at the analysis stage that the character ratio has changed due to the change in the probability of winning, and the information stored in the storage means can be changed according to the change in the probability of winning. At the analysis stage, it is possible to grasp that the data has been erased, and furthermore, it is possible to grasp the probability of success before the change. It has the effect of being able to

<O group>
A gaming machine comprising a lottery means for performing a winning lottery based on the establishment of a starting condition, and providing advantageous game values to a player when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a win,
a game area provided with a plurality of prize-winning ports including a first prize-winning port having an accessory that operates based on a game;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing a medium;
Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is accumulated and stored in a storage means. a memory control means for
output means for outputting at least a signal based on the information accumulated and stored in the storage means;
display means for displaying information related to the character ratio based on the information stored in the storage means;
Mode switching means for switching to a mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means;
means for displaying, on the display means, a value indicating the probability of winning to be changed when the mode is switched to the mode to be changed by the mode switching means;
setting means for setting the winning probability to be changed displayed on the display means as the winning probability at the stage when the mode for changing the winning probability ends. Game machine O1.

According to the gaming machine O1, the game medium is launched by the launching means into the game area provided with a plurality of prize winning ports including the first winning port having the accessory that operates based on the game. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on the winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means is stored in the storage means by the storage control means. be. Then, a signal based on at least the information stored in the storage means is output by the output means. Thereby, based on the output signal, the role ratio is the ratio of the number of game media paid out due to the winning of the prize-winning hole, the number of game media paid out due to the first prize-winning hole (that is, the operation of the role). can be analyzed, and fraud can be detected based on the character ratio. In addition, since the display means displays information related to the character product ratio based on the information stored in the storage means, it is possible to easily see whether or not a fraudulent act has been carried out by looking at the display of the display means. has the effect of being able to determine On the other hand, when the mode switching means switches to the mode for changing the probability of winning in the lottery by the lottery means, the display means displays a value indicating the probability of winning to be changed. Then, when the mode for changing the probability of winning is completed, the probability of winning to be changed displayed on the display means is set as the probability of winning by the setting means. As a result, the display means for displaying the information relating to the role product ratio can also be used as the display means for displaying the probability of winning to be changed when changing the probability of winning. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress an increase in the number of display means mounted on the gaming machine.

(Task 2)
The gaming machines P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, and U2 described below are designed to solve the following problems.

That is, the RAM (Random Access Memory) used in the main control means for controlling the game is divided into a first storage area used for the main control processing of the game and a second storage area used for other processing. A gaming machine is known which is divided and configured to protect information used for main control of a game from being destroyed by other processes (for example, Japanese Patent No. 6154863).

On the other hand, there is a demand for better protection of the information used in the process of controlling the game from other processes.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine capable of suitably protecting information used in the main control of a game.

(Means and Effect 2)
<P group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means is
computing means for computing;
a plurality of registers;
a first storage means for readable and writable storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the computing means;
A second storage means which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and stores in a readable and writable manner second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means. When,
From the step in which the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means performs the second information stored in the second storage means. saving means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using the information;
From the step in which the computing means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means is stored in the first storage means. a restoring means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first processing using the information. A gaming machine P1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine P1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for main control of the game is executed by the computing means for computing, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable. stored in the storage means. Further, second information, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means, is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the load instruction or the store instruction by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first processing, the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means is restored to the corresponding register by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register can also be appropriately protected from other processing for the information used in the processing for main control of the game. In addition, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, compared to the case of saving to the stack area, the save location is fixed to the predetermined area. be able to. Therefore, by constructing a program so as to use the second storage means while clearly avoiding the predetermined area where the contents of the registers are saved during the second process, the registers used in the first process can be saved. can reliably protect the contents of Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In gaming machine P1,
The second storage means comprises a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the computing means and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the computing means,
The game machine P2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine P2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine P1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic operations for the arithmetic means. The contents of the registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the required capacity of the stack area can be reduced and a large capacity of the working area can be secured.

In gaming machine P2,
The computing means is
stack area designating means for designating the range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, memory clear for clearing all the information stored in at least the second storage means provided with the stack area. A gaming machine P3 characterized by comprising: means;

According to the game machine P3, in addition to the effects of the game machine P2, the following effects are produced. That is, the calculating means preliminarily designates the range of the stack area by the stack area designating means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the memory clear means. Here, from the stage where the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storing means, the computing means starts using the second information stored in the second storing means. When moving to the step of executing the second process by the saving means, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, by saving the information, it is possible to suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility of clearing all the information stored in the second storage means. be.

In any of the game machines P1 to P3,
The game machine P4, wherein the registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means include registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine P4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines P1 to P3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. from the second information stored in the second storage means to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using the second information . Thereby, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine P4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

According to the game machine P5, in addition to the effects of the game machine P4, the following effects are produced. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is changed from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means shifts to the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves to a predetermined area of the second storage means. As a result, only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second process can be reliably restored.

<Q group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means is
computing means for computing;
a plurality of registers;
a first storage means for readable and writable storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the calculating means;
A second storage means which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and stores in a readable and writable manner second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means. When,
From the step in which the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means performs the second information stored in the second storage means. saving means for saving the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of a second storage means when transitioning to the step of executing the second processing using the information;
From the step in which the computing means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means is stored in the first storage means. a restoring means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first processing using the information. A gaming machine Q1 characterized by comprising:

According to the gaming machine Q1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for main control of the game is executed by the computing means for computing, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable. stored in the storage means. Further, second information, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means, is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the contents of some of the plurality of registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first processing, the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means is restored to the corresponding register by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register can also be appropriately protected from other processing for the information used in the processing for main control of the game. In addition, since only some registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low. It is possible to increase the area for storing information such as Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In gaming machine Q1,
The second storage means comprises a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the computing means and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the computing means,
The gaming machine Q2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the content of the part of the registers to the predetermined area provided in the working area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic operations for the arithmetic means. The contents of some registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the required capacity of the stack area can be reduced and a large capacity of the working area can be ensured.

In gaming machine Q2,
The computing means is
stack area designating means for designating the range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, memory clear for clearing all the information stored in at least the second storage means provided with the stack area. A gaming machine Q3 characterized by comprising: means;

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the calculating means preliminarily designates the range of the stack area by the stack area designating means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the memory clear means. Here, from the stage where the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storing means, the computing means starts using the second information stored in the second storing means. When moving to the step of executing the second processing by the saving means, the contents of some registers are saved in the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, by saving the information, it is possible to suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility of clearing all the information stored in the second storage means. be.

In any of gaming machines Q1 to Q3,
A gaming machine Q4, wherein the partial registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means include registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine Q4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines Q1 to Q3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, some registers including registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing are used by the arithmetic means to execute the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the computing means shifts from the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means. be evacuated. Thereby, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine Q4, the part of the registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means are registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. Game machine Q5.

According to the gaming machine Q5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing are part of the registers, and the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when the computing means shifts from the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means. be evacuated. As a result, only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second process can be reliably restored.

<R group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means is
computing means for computing;
a plurality of registers;
a first storage means for readable and writable storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the calculating means;
A second storage means which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and stores in a readable and writable manner second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means. When,
From the step in which the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means performs the second information stored in the second storage means. saving means for saving the contents of the registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means by individual instructions for each register when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using the information;
From the step in which the computing means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means is stored in the first storage means. a restoring means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first processing using the information. A gaming machine R1 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine R1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for main control of the game is executed by the computing means for computing, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable. stored in the storage means. Further, second information, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means, is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the registers are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means by individual instructions for each register. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first processing, the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means is restored to the corresponding register by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register can also be appropriately protected from other processing for the information used in the processing for main control of the game. In addition, since each register is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual command, saving is necessary to ensure that the game processing that performs the main control of the game is not affected by other processing. Only necessary registers can be individually specified to be saved. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In gaming machine R1,
The second storage means comprises a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the computing means and a work area for storing information used based on instructions to the computing means,
The game machine R2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the content of the register to the predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine R2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the second storage means is provided with a stack area for stacking information based on instructions to the arithmetic means and a work area for storing information used based on the arithmetic operations for the arithmetic means. The contents of the registers saved by the means are saved in a predetermined area provided in the work area of the second storage means. Therefore, there is an effect that the required capacity of the stack area can be reduced and a large capacity of the working area can be secured.

In gaming machine R2,
The computing means is
stack area designating means for designating the range of the stack area in advance;
When information is stacked in the stack area beyond the range specified by the stack area specifying means, memory clear for clearing all the information stored in at least the second storage means provided with the stack area. A gaming machine R3 characterized by comprising: means;

According to the gaming machine R3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the calculating means preliminarily designates the range of the stack area by the stack area designating means. On the other hand, when the information is stacked in the stack area beyond the designated range, at least the information stored in the second storage means provided with the stack area is cleared by the memory clear means. Here, from the stage where the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storing means, the computing means starts using the second information stored in the second storing means. When moving to the step of executing the second process by the saving means, the contents of the register are saved in the work area instead of the stack area. Therefore, by saving the information, it is possible to suppress the information from being stacked beyond the range specified in the stack area, and therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility of clearing all the information stored in the second storage means. be.

In any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3,
The game machine R4 is characterized in that the registers whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means include registers used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing.

According to the gaming machine R4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines R1 to R3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the register including the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. from the second information stored in the second storage means to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using the second information . Thereby, the register used by executing the second process can be reliably restored to the contents immediately before executing the second process based on the contents saved in the predetermined area.

In the gaming machine R4, the register whose contents are saved to the predetermined area by the saving means is a register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing. .

According to the gaming machine R5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine R4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the register used when the arithmetic processing executes the second processing is changed from the stage where the arithmetic means executes the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. When the means shifts to the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the saving means saves to a predetermined area of the second storage means. As a result, only the minimum necessary registers are saved in a predetermined area, and the contents immediately before the execution of the second process can be reliably restored.

<S group>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means is
computing means for computing;
a plurality of registers;
a first storage means for readable and writable storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the calculating means;
a second storage means that has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and stores in a readable and writable manner second information that is used when the second processing relating to the character product ratio is executed by the computing means;
From the step in which the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means performs the second information stored in the second storage means. saving means for saving the contents of the register to a predetermined area of a second storage means when shifting to the step of executing the second processing using the information;
From the step in which the computing means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means is stored in the first storage means. a restoring means for restoring the contents of the registers saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means to the corresponding registers when returning to the step of executing the first processing using the information. A gaming machine S1 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine S1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for main control of the game is executed by the computing means for computing, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable. stored in the storage means. Further, the storage area is different from that of the first storage means, and the second information used when the second processing relating to the role product ratio is executed by the calculation means is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. . Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second processing, the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by the saving means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first processing, the content of the register saved in the predetermined area of the second storage means is restored to the corresponding register by the restoring means. As a result, the information stored in this register can also be appropriately protected from the processing relating to the character product ratio, with respect to the information used in the processing for main control of the game. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In the gaming machine S1,
The game machine S2 is characterized in that the saving means saves the content of the register to a predetermined area of the second storage means by means of a load command or a store command.

According to the gaming machine S2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1, there are the following effects. That is, since the contents of the register are saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by a load instruction or a store instruction, compared to the case of saving to the stack area, the save location is fixed to the predetermined area. It has the effect of being able to

In the gaming machine S1 or S2,
The gaming machine S3, wherein the saving means saves the contents of some of the plurality of registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means.

According to the gaming machine S3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine S1 or S2, there are the following effects. That is, since only some registers are saved in a predetermined area of the second storage means, the storage capacity required for saving the contents of the registers can be kept low, and the capacity of the memory can be reduced. There is an effect that it is possible to increase the area for storing information such as the above.

In any of gaming machines S1 to S3,
The game machine S4 is characterized in that the saving means saves the contents of the registers to a predetermined area of the second storage means by individual instructions for each register.

According to the gaming machine S4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines S1 to S3, the following effects are provided. That is, since each register is saved to a predetermined area of the second storage means by an individual command, saving is necessary in order to ensure that the game processing, which is the main control of the game, is not affected by other processing. There is an effect that only necessary registers can be individually specified and saved.

<T group>
In a game machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means is
computing means for computing;
a first storage means for readable and writable storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the calculating means;
A second storage means which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and stores in a readable and writable manner second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means. When,
with a stack pointer and
The second process is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first process,
The main control means is
From the step in which the computing means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means is stored in the first storage means. The game machine T1 is characterized by comprising stack pointer setting means for setting the stack pointer to a fixed value when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information.

According to the gaming machine T1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for main control of the game is executed by the computing means for computing, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable. stored in the storage means. Further, second information, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means, is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. remembered. Here, the second process is executed by a program read at a predetermined position of the first process. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first process, the stack pointer is set to a fixed value by the stack pointer setting means. Since the second process is a program read at a predetermined position in the first process, the number of information stacked in the first process is always constant. Therefore, by simply setting a fixed value based on the number of stacked information to the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the process is executed again. In the first process, the stacked information can be reliably read. Therefore, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means is using the second information stored in the second storage means. Since it is not necessary to save the value of the stack pointer pointing to the stack area provided in the first storage means used in the first process when moving to the stage of executing the second process, it is saved. Therefore, an increase in storage capacity can be suppressed. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In gaming machine T1,
The computing means includes a main process, a loop process executed in the main process, and a timer interrupt executed at a predetermined position of the loop process when a timer interrupt generated at predetermined intervals is detected. and
The gaming machine T2 is characterized in that the first process and the second process are processes executed in the timer interrupt process.

According to the game machine T2, in addition to the effects of the game machine T1, the following effects are produced. That is, main processing, loop processing that is executed in the main processing, and timer interrupt processing that is executed at a predetermined position in the loop processing when a timer interrupt that occurs at predetermined intervals is detected. , is executed by the computing means. Then, the first process and the second process are executed in the timer interrupt process. As a result, when the program read at a predetermined position in the first process starts executing the second process, the number of pieces of information stacked in the first process is always a fixed number. Therefore, only by setting a fixed value based on the fixed number to the stack pointer when returning from the stage of executing the second process to the stage of executing the first process, the first process to be executed again. , the stacked information can be reliably read.

<Group U>
In a gaming machine equipped with main control means for controlling a game,
The main control means is
computing means for computing;
a plurality of registers;
a first storage means for readable and writable storing first information used when a first process for main control of a game is executed by the calculating means;
A second storage means which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and stores in a readable and writable manner second information used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means. When,
From the step in which the computing means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the computing means performs the second information stored in the second storage means. first fixed value storage means for storing a fixed value in a predetermined register when shifting to the step of executing the second process using the information;
From the step in which the computing means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means is stored in the first storage means. a second fixed value storage means for storing the fixed value in the predetermined register when returning to the step of executing the first process using the information.

According to the gaming machine U1, main control means for controlling a game is provided. In the main control means, when the first processing for main control of the game is executed by the computing means for computing, the first information used for the execution of the first processing is readable and writable. stored in the storage means. Further, second information, which has a storage area different from that of the first storage means and is used when a second process different from the first process is executed by the computing means, is stored in the second storage means in a readable and writable manner. remembered. Then, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means When shifting to the stage of executing the second process, the fixed value is stored in the predetermined register by the first fixed value storing means. On the other hand, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the arithmetic means uses the first information stored in the first storage means When returning to the step of executing the first process, the fixed value is stored by the second fixed value storage means in the predetermined register in which the fixed value is stored by the first fixed value storage means. As a result, the arithmetic means can start using the second information stored in the second storage means from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means. and when the computing means executes the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the computing means performs the first At first glance, the contents of the register can be the same when returning to the step of executing the first processing using the first information stored in the storage means. Therefore, it is possible to ensure that the first process, which performs the main control of the game, is not affected by the second process executed in between. Therefore, there is an effect that the information used in the main control of the game can be preferably protected.

In gaming machine U1,
The gaming machine U2, wherein the fixed value is zero.

According to the game machine U2, in addition to the effects of the game machine U1, the following effects are produced. That is, from the stage where the arithmetic means is executing the first processing using the first information stored in the first storage means, the arithmetic means uses the second information stored in the second storage means. When shifting to the step of executing the second processing and from the step of executing the second processing using the second information stored in the second storage means, the calculation means is stored in the first storage means. When returning to the step of executing the first processing using the first information stored in the means, 0 is stored as the fixed value of the predetermined register. As a result, it can be grasped that this predetermined register has been cleared to 0 at a glance.
(Task 3)
The gaming machines V1 to V9, W1 to W7, and X1 to X6 shown below are designed to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

Now, among cheaters, there are those who make it difficult for game media to win a prize in a predetermined prize winning slot, or conversely guide game media to make it easier for a game medium to win a prize in a predetermined prize winning slot. However, the response to discover such fraudulent acts was insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably detecting fraudulent activity.
(Means and Effect 3)
<Group V>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
a confirmation display means for performing a confirmation display for a predetermined period of time for confirming whether normal display is possible in the game performance information display means.

According to the gaming machine V1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. For the game performance display means, confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period. With this confirmation display, it is possible to confirm whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means, so it is possible to judge whether or not the game performance information displayed on the game performance display means is normal. As a result, it is possible to determine the presence or absence of fraud based on the game performance information that is determined to be normal.

In the gaming machine V1,
The gaming machine V2 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when power is turned on.

According to the gaming machine V2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the power is turned on, the confirmation display is performed for a predetermined period by the confirmation display means for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means. As a result, it is possible to judge whether the display of the game performance display means is normal or not every time the power is turned on, so that it is possible to judge the presence or absence of cheating based on the game performance information judged to be normal with higher accuracy. There is

In the gaming machine V1,
The game machine V3 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means.

According to the gaming machine V3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed on a predetermined operation means, confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means is performed by the confirmation display means for a predetermined period of time. will be Thus, by performing a predetermined operation on the predetermined operating means, it is possible to determine whether or not the display on the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, when the determination is made, the determination can be made by performing the predetermined operation on the predetermined operation means, so there is an effect that the fraudulent act can be suitably discovered.

In the gaming machine V1,
A new start-up specifying means for specifying that the game machine is in a new start-up period,
The gaming machine V4 is characterized in that the confirmation display means causes the game performance information display means to perform the confirmation display for a predetermined period in the case of the new start-up period.

According to the gaming machine V4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine V1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the specifying means specifies that the game machine is in the new start-up period, the confirmation display for confirming whether or not normal display is possible on the game performance display means is the confirmation display. means for a predetermined period of time. As a result, at least when the game machine is in the new start-up period, it can be determined whether or not the display of the game performance display means is normal. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the shipment of game machines in which the display of the game performance display means cannot be performed normally.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V4,
The game machine V5 is characterized by comprising stopping means for stopping the progress of the game during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V5, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, during the predetermined period during which the confirmation display is caused to the gaming performance information display means by the confirmation display means, the game performance is increased. Since progress is stopped by the stopping means, confirmation display is performed on the game performance display means, and while the game performance information is not displayed, the game proceeds without being able to judge whether or not there is fraud. There is an effect that it can be suppressed.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V4,
The game machine V6 is characterized in that the progress of the game is continued even during the predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine V6, in addition to the effect produced by any one of the gaming machines V1 to V4, the game can be performed during a predetermined period during which the confirmation display is performed by the game performance information display means by the confirmation display means. Since the progress is continued, the display for confirmation is displayed on the game performance information display means, which has the effect of suppressing the waiting time for the game.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment,
The game machine V7 is characterized in that the display for confirmation is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit.

According to the gaming machine V7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment. . The display for confirmation is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be lit normally, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is performed normally.

In any of gaming machines V1 to V6,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment,
The game machine V8 is characterized in that the display for confirmation is a display in which all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are blinked.

According to the gaming machine V8, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment. . The display for confirmation is a display in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are blinked. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not all the segments can be lit and extinguished normally, and it is possible to easily determine whether or not the display of the game performance information display means is performed normally.

In any one of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means indicates that the number of game media ejected to the game area is 100, and the game state is normal. A game machine V9 characterized in that the base value is the number of game media played.

According to the gaming machine V9, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines V1 to V8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media put out when the game state is normal when the number of game media fired into the game area is 100. be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

<W group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
game performance information display means for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
new start-up specifying means for specifying that the game machine is in a new start-up period;
special display mode display means for displaying the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from normal when the new start-up specifying means specifies that it is the new start-up period. A gaming machine W1 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine W1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. On the other hand, when the new start-up specifying means specifies that the gaming machine is in the new start-up period, the special display mode display means displays the game performance information display means in a special display mode different from the normal time. will be As a result, the game performance information display means displayed in the special display mode can indicate that the game is currently in a new start-up period, indicating that it does not have information that can be used to determine fraudulent activity. has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine W1,
The game performance information display means includes a plurality of segment displays each composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment,
The gaming machine W2 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or blinked.

According to the gaming machine W2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment. . The special display mode is a display mode in which all segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or blinked. As a result, all the segments of the plurality of segment displays are lit or blinked in the game performance information display means, so that it is possible to easily indicate that the game is currently in the new start-up period.

In gaming machine W1 or W2,
The game performance information display means includes:
Equipped with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and for each segment display, information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing individual segments,
Some of the segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are used to identify the types of the game performance information displayed on the some of the segment displays. is used to display information,
The gaming machine W3, wherein the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment display device. .

According to the gaming machine W3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment. . Also, some of the segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information displayed on some of the segment displays. is used to display The special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on the other segment display. Accordingly, when information different from the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is lit or blinked on another segment display device of the game performance information display means, it indicates that the current start-up period is in progress. can be easily shown.

In gaming machine W3,
The gaming machine W4 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which the game performance information indicating the game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on the part of the segment displays.

According to the game machine W4, in addition to the effects of the game machine W3, the following effects are produced. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which the game performance information indicating the game performance measured in real time is lit or blinked on some of the segment displays. As a result, although the normal game performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because it is in the new start-up period, there is an effect that the information indicating the game performance measured in real time can be displayed for reference.

The game performance information display means includes:
Equipped with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and for each segment display, information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing individual segments,
Some of the segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are used to identify the types of the game performance information displayed on the some of the segment displays. is used to display information,
The gaming machine W5 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information is displayed blinking on the other segment display.

According to the gaming machine W5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W1 or W2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means is provided with a plurality of segment displays composed of a plurality of segments, and displays information on each segment display by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment. . Also, some of the segment displays are used to display the game performance information, and other segment displays are identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information displayed on some of the segment displays. is used to display The special display mode is a display mode in which identification information for identifying the type of game performance information is displayed blinking on another segment display. As a result, when the identification information for identifying the type of the game performance information blinks on another segment display of the game performance information display means, it is possible to easily indicate that the current start-up period is in progress. It has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine W5,
The gaming machine W6 is characterized in that the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed on the part of the segment displays.

According to the gaming machine W6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine W5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the special display mode is a display mode in which information different from the game performance information is lit and displayed on some of the segment displays. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly indicate that the regular game performance of the gaming machine cannot be measured because it is in the period of new start-up.

In any one of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means indicates that the number of game media ejected to the game area is 100, and the game state is normal. A game machine W7 characterized in that the base value is the number of game media played.

According to the gaming machine W7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines W1 to W6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media put out when the game state is normal when the number of game media fired into the game area is 100. be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

<Group X>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
game performance information acquisition means for acquiring game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine for each predetermined period;
game performance information storage means for storing each of the game performance information acquired by the game performance acquisition means for a plurality of predetermined periods;
and game performance information display means for displaying game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods, stored in the game performance information storage means.

According to the gaming machine X1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Here, for each predetermined period, the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a gaming machine during the predetermined period is acquired by the game performance information acquisition means, and each piece of the game performance information is the game performance information. It is stored in the performance information storage means. Then, the game performance information stored in the game performance information storage means and acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, since game performance information for a plurality of predetermined periods is displayed, it becomes possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity, and it is also possible to predict the timing of fraudulent activity to some extent. can. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

In gaming machine X1,
The game performance acquisition means acquires game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period,
The game performance information storage means stores the game performance information acquired in real time,
The game performance information display means displays the game performance information acquired in real time together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. A game machine X2 characterized by.

According to the game machine X2, in addition to the effects of the game machine X1, the following effects are produced. That is, the game performance acquisition means acquires the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine in real time during the predetermined period, and the game performance information acquired in real time is stored in the game performance information storage means. remembered. The game performance information acquired in real time is displayed on the game performance information display means together with the game performance information acquired for a plurality of predetermined periods stored in the game performance information storage means. As a result, since game performance information obtained in real time is also displayed, there is an effect that it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not there has been fraudulent activity.

In gaming machine X1,
The game performance information storage means
a first storage area for storing gaming performance information for a previous predetermined period;
At least a second storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period of time before the last,
When the predetermined period of time has passed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and during the predetermined period of time acquired by the game performance acquisition means, the gaming machine The gaming machine X3 is characterized in that game performance information indicating the performance of the executed game is stored in the first storage area.

According to the gaming machine X3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information storage means has at least a first storage area for storing the game performance information for the previous predetermined period and a second storage area for storing the game performance information for the previous predetermined period. . Then, when the predetermined period has passed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information is executed in the gaming machine during the predetermined period acquired by the game performance acquisition means. Game performance information indicating game performance is stored in the first storage area. As a result, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means in place of the oldest acquired game performance information and displayed on the game performance information display means every time the predetermined period elapses. be. Therefore, based on the new game performance information, there is an effect that it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not there has been a fraudulent act.

In gaming machine X2,
The game performance information storage means
a 0th storage area for overwriting and storing the game performance information obtained in real time during the predetermined period by the game performance obtaining means;
a first storage area for storing gaming performance information for a previous predetermined period;
At least a second storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period of time before the last,
When the predetermined period has passed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the 11th storage area. A gaming machine X4 characterized by shifting.

According to the gaming machine X4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information storage means stores a 0th storage area for overwriting the game performance information acquired in real time during a predetermined period by the game performance acquisition means, and stores the game performance information for the previous predetermined period. and a second storage area for storing game performance information for a predetermined period of time before the previous one. Then, when a predetermined period has passed, the game performance information stored in the first storage area is shifted to the second storage area, and the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area is shifted to the first storage area. . As a result, the newly acquired game performance information is stored in the game performance information storage means in place of the oldest acquired game performance information and displayed on the game performance information display means every time the predetermined period elapses. be. Therefore, based on the new game performance information, there is an effect that it is possible to make a determination as to whether or not there has been a fraudulent act. Also, the game performance information stored in the 0th storage area when the predetermined period has passed becomes the game performance information for that predetermined period. By shifting it to the first storage area as it is, there is an effect that the game performance information in the previous predetermined period can be easily stored in the first storage area.

In gaming machine X3 or X4,
A gaming machine X5 comprising shift processing means for executing shifting of the game performance information between storage areas in the game performance information storage means using an LDIR command.

According to the gaming machine X5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine X3 or X4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the shift processing means shifts the game performance information between the storage areas in the game performance information storage means in accordance with the LDIR command. As a result, there is an effect that shift processing can be easily executed with one instruction.

In any one of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means indicates that the number of game media ejected to the game area is 100, and the game state is normal. A game machine X6 characterized in that the base value is the number of game media played.

According to the gaming machine X6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines X1 to X5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game performance information display means displays, as the game performance information, a base value which is the number of game media put out when the game state is normal when the number of game media fired into the game area is 100. be done. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity.

(Task 4)
The following game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, E2, F1, F2, and K1 to K3 are as follows: It was made to solve the problem.

Conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

There are people who cheat on such games. However, measures to curb such fraudulent acts were insufficient.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of appropriately suppressing fraudulent acts.

(Means and Effect 4)
<A group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
a game performance information display means capable of switching between and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine and non-game performance information other than the game performance information;
The game performance information display means includes:
a first display means for displaying the game performance information or information other than the game performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content to be displayed on the first display means;
and means for hiding the display of the second display means when the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means.

According to the gaming machine A1, a game medium is shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect cheating from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, the game performance information or information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display contents displayed by the first display means is displayed on the second display means. be done. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to clearly grasp that the display content displayed on the first display means is information other than the game performance information by seeing that the display on the second display means is non-display.

In gaming machine A1,
When a starting condition is established, a predetermined determination is made, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
When the changing means changes the probability of obtaining the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. and display control means for causing the means to display.

According to the gaming machine A2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination yields a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined judgment, the display control means switches the display of the game performance information display means, and the level of the probability is changed as information other than the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp the level of probability that the display content displayed on the first display means will be changed by the change means by seeing that the display on the second display means is non-display. There is

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
error history display reception means for receiving display of the error type history,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the history of the error type as the information other than the game performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. and display control means for causing the game performance information display means to display the game performance information display means.

According to the game machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the game machine A1 or A2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information other than the game performance information. is displayed on the game performance information display means. When the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is hidden. As a result, it is possible to clearly understand that the display content displayed on the first display means is the error type history by seeing that the display on the second display means is not displayed.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A3,
The second display means includes a segment display configured with a plurality of segments, and displays information by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on the segment display,
The gaming machine a4, wherein the means for hiding the display of the second display means turns off all the segments of the segment display.

According to the game machine A4, the following effect is exhibited in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A3. That is, the second display means has a segment display composed of a plurality of segments, and information is displayed by lighting, blinking or extinguishing each segment on the segment display. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, all the segments of the segment display of the second display means are extinguished, and the display of the second display means is turned off. As a result, there is an effect that the non-display can be performed by simple control.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits,
The game machine is
When the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed according to the gaming performance. A gaming machine a3 characterized by comprising a means for displaying information in a non-display mode.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when displaying non-gaming performance information on the first display means, some of the plurality of digits are used to display the game performance information. The outside information is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed. Thus, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information, even from the display contents of the remaining digits on the first display means. effective.

In gaming machine A5,
6. A game machine a6 characterized by comprising means for displaying said game performance information using all of said plurality of digits when said game performance information is displayed on said first display means.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all the digits. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information, depending on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
7. A gaming machine characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode in which the remaining digits are not displayed in the display of the game performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed. . As a result, by hiding the remaining digits, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information. be.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
8. The game machine a8 characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information fixes and displays the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine A8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed fixedly in a predetermined display mode. be. As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, making it clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of making decisions.

In gaming machine A5 or A6,
9. A game machine (a) characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode not displayed in the display of the game performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine A9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A5 or A6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display mode. be. Thus, by flashing the remaining digits in a predetermined display manner, it is made clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of making decisions.

<B group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
a game performance information display means capable of switching between and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine and non-game performance information other than the game performance information;
The game performance information display means includes:
a first display means for displaying the game performance information or information other than the game performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content to be displayed on the first display means;
The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits,
The game machine is
When the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed according to the gaming performance. 1. A gaming machine characterized by comprising a means for displaying information in a non-display mode.

According to the game machine A1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect cheating from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, the game performance information or information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display contents displayed by the first display means is displayed on the second display means. be done. The first display means is configured to be able to display a plurality of digits, and when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, part of the plurality of digits is used to display the non-gaming performance information. is displayed, and the remaining digits are displayed in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information. As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information according to the display contents of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is

In gaming machine A1,
A2, characterized in that the game machine comprises means for displaying the game performance information using all of the plurality of digits when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the game performance information is displayed using all the digits. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information, depending on the display content of the remaining digits.

In gaming machine A1 or A2,
When a starting condition is established, a predetermined determination is made, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
When the changing means changes the probability of obtaining the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. and display control means for causing the means to display.

According to the gaming machine A3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine A1 or A2. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination yields a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined judgment, the display control means switches the display of the game performance information display means, and the level of the probability is changed as information other than the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed when the game performance information is displayed. It is done in a display mode that is not displayed. As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the probability level, depending on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. be.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A3,
error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
error history display reception means for receiving display of the error type history,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the history of the error type as the information other than the game performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. and display control means for causing the game performance information display means to display the game performance information display means.

According to the game machine A4, the following effect is exhibited in addition to the effect produced by any one of the game machines A1 to A3. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the history of error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information other than the game performance information. is displayed on the game performance information display means. When the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the error type history is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are used to display the game performance information. This is done in a display mode that is not displayed in . As a result, it is possible to clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the error type history, depending on the display content of the remaining digits on the first display means. There is

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4,
A5, the gaming machine characterized in that the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information hides the display of the remaining digits.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the non-gaming performance information is displayed using a part of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are not displayed. . As a result, by hiding the remaining digits, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information. be.

In any one of gaming machines A1 to A4,
A6, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information displays the remaining digits fixedly in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are displayed fixedly in a predetermined display mode. be. As a result, the remaining digits are fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode, making it clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of making decisions.

In any of gaming machines A1 to A4,
A7, wherein the means for displaying the remaining digits in a display mode that is not displayed in the display of the game performance information blinks the remaining digits in a predetermined display mode.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines A1 to A4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the probability level is displayed using some of the plurality of digits, and the remaining digits are blinked in a predetermined display mode. be. Thus, by flashing the remaining digits in a predetermined display manner, it is made clearer whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information. It has the effect of making decisions.

<Group C>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
a game performance information display means capable of switching between and displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine and non-game performance information other than the game performance information;
The game performance information display means includes:
a first display means for displaying the game performance information or information other than the game performance information;
a second display means for displaying identification information indicating display content to be displayed on the first display means;
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the second display means is displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine c1 characterized by comprising: means;

According to the gaming machine c 1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect cheating from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. By switching the display on the game performance information display means, information other than the game performance information is also displayed. Here, the game performance information or information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means of the game performance information display means, and the identification information indicating the display contents displayed by the first display means is displayed on the second display means. be done. When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the information other than the game performance information by looking at the display of the second display means.

In the game machine c 1,
When a starting condition is established, a predetermined determination is made, and when the determination is a predetermined result, a predetermined game value is given to the player,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
When the changing means changes the probability of obtaining the predetermined result among a plurality of levels, the game performance information display means is switched to display the level of the probability as the information other than the game performance information. and display control means for causing the means to display.

According to the gaming machine C-2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine C-1. That is, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination yields a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. Then, when the changing means changes the probability of a predetermined result in a predetermined determination, the display control means switches the display of the game performance information display means, and the probability level is changed as information other than the game performance information. Is displayed. When the probability level is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, by looking at the display of the second display means, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display contents displayed on the first display means are the game performance information or the probability level to be changed by the change means. effective.

In gaming machine C1 or C2,
error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
error history display reception means for receiving display of the error type history,
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display accepting means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the history of the error type as the information other than the game performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. and display control means for causing the game performance information display means to display the game performance information display means.

According to the game machine c3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the game machine c1 or c2. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Further, when the display of the history of error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means as information other than the game performance information. is displayed on the game performance information display means. When the error type history is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is performed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. As a result, it is possible to clearly grasp whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or the error type history by looking at the display on the second display means.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the second display means is displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. A game machine c4 characterized in that the means fixedly displays the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

According to the game machine c4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines c1 to c3, the following effects are produced. That is, when the non-gaming performance information is displayed on the first display means, the display on the second display means is fixedly displayed in a predetermined display mode. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information.

In any of gaming machines C1 to C3,
When the information other than the game performance information is displayed on the first display means, the second display means is displayed in a display mode that is not displayed when the game performance information is displayed on the first display means. A gaming machine c5 characterized in that the means blinks the display of the second display means in a predetermined display mode.

According to the game machine c5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines c1 to c3, the following effects are produced. That is, when displaying non-gaming performance information on the first display means, the display on the second display means blinks in a predetermined display mode. As a result, it is possible to more clearly determine whether the display content displayed on the first display means is the game performance information or non-game performance information.

<D group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. A gaming machine comprising a payout means for paying out a medium,
game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
error detection means for detecting an error;
error history storage means for storing a history of error types detected by the error detection means;
error history display receiving means for receiving a display of the error type history;
When the display of the history is accepted by the error history display acceptance means, the game performance information display means is switched to display the history of the error type based on the error history storage means. and display control means for displaying on.

According to the game machine D1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. The game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in such a game machine is displayed on the game performance information display means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to preferably detect cheating from the game performance information displayed on the game performance information display means. Also, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the history of the error type is stored in the error history storage means. Then, when the display of the history of the error type is received by the error history display receiving means, the game performance information display means is switched by the display control means, and the history of the error type is displayed as the game performance information based on the memory of the error history storage means. displayed on the display means. As a result, it is possible to display the history of the error type by one game performance information display means, and it is possible to suitably discover fraudulent behavior from the history of the error type.

In game machine D1,
The game machine D2 is characterized in that the display control means keeps displaying the game performance information on the game performance information display means when an error is detected by the error detection means.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine D1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an error is detected by the error detection means, the display control means continues to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means. Therefore, even if the cheater intentionally causes some kind of error, there is an effect that the cheating can be reliably detected from the game performance information that continues to be displayed on the game performance information display means.

In gaming machine D1 or D2,
The display control means switches the game performance information display means to display the game performance information on the game performance information display means when the reception of the display of the history by the error history display reception means ends. A gaming machine D3 characterized by

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effects of the game machine D1 or D2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the error history display reception means has finished accepting the display of the error type history, the display control means switches the game performance information display means, and the game performance information is displayed on the game performance information display means again. be. Thus, even if the history of the error type is once displayed on the game performance information display means, the game performance information can be displayed again, so that fraud can be reliably detected from the game performance information. It has the effect of being able to

<Group E>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
storage means for storing information relating to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
output means for outputting information about game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
When the probability is changed by the changing means, the information related to the game performance information affected by the probability is deleted from the information stored in the storage means, and the information related to the game performance information not affected by the probability is erased. and memory control means for holding information.

According to the game machine O-1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity from the information relating to the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. When the changing means changes the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in a predetermined determination, the memory control means erases the information related to the game performance information that is affected by the probability from among the information stored in the memory means. and the information on the game performance information that is not affected by the probability is retained. Therefore, the information on the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that the game performance information can be output with high accuracy. On the other hand, since the information related to the game performance information which is not affected by the probability is held in the storage means, even if the fraudulent person changes the probability in order to conceal the erasure of the fraudulent act, the information is held in the storage means. There is an effect that it is possible to reliably detect cheating based on the obtained game performance information.

In game machine O 1,
2. A gaming machine O2, wherein the information relating to the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means.

According to the game machine O-2, in addition to the effects played by the game machine O-1, the information on the game performance information affected by the probability is stored in a predetermined area of the storage means, so that the probability is changed by the change means. In this case, by collectively erasing the predetermined area of the storage means, it is possible to easily erase the information relating to the game performance information that is affected by the probability.

<Mosquito group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
storage means for storing information relating to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
output means for outputting information about game performance information based on the information stored in the storage means;
specific determination means for determining whether or not the determination is a specific result when the determination is not a predetermined result;
an opening means for opening one normally closed winning hole for a predetermined period of time without imparting the predetermined game value when the determination is determined to be the specific result by the specific determination means;
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining the specific result in the predetermined determination;
and memory control means for erasing the information stored in the memory means when the probability is changed by the change means.

According to the game machine 1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. Information relating to a plurality of pieces of game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in such a gaming machine is stored in the storage means and output by the output means. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to suitably detect fraudulent activity from the information relating to the game performance information output from the output means. In addition, this gaming machine makes a predetermined determination when the starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination results in a predetermined result. If the result is not the predetermined result, the specific determination means determines whether or not the determination is a specific result. When the determination is determined to be a specific result by the specific determination means, a predetermined game value is not given, and one normally closed winning hole is opened by the opening means for a predetermined time. When the game medium wins in the opened prize winning opening, the game medium is paid out by the payout means. Also, the probability of a particular result in a given decision is changed among a plurality of levels by the changing means. Then, when the probability is changed by the changing means, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the storage control means. Therefore, the information on the game performance information is stored in the storage means at the newly set probability, so that the game performance information can be output with high accuracy.

In gaming machine 1,
2. A game machine 2, wherein the game performance information is a base value.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, since the game performance information is the base value, the information about the base value is the information about the game performance information at the newly set probability. Since it is stored in the storage means, there is an effect that a highly accurate base value can be output.

<G group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
and display means for displaying the level of probability,
1. A game machine 1 characterized in that the display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on.

According to the game machine key 1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. The probability level is displayed on the display means. The display of the probability level on the display means is performed only when the power is turned on. As a result, since the probability level set in the game machine is not displayed unless the power is turned on, it is difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the game machine, and cheating is preferably suppressed. has the effect of being able to

In gaming machine key 1,
The game machine 2, wherein the display means is provided on the back side of the game machine.

According to the game machine G-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine G-1, the display means is provided on the back side of the game machine. , the probability level displayed on the display means cannot be confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it becomes more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

In game machine g 2,
Door opening detection means for detecting that the locked door of the game machine is unlocked and opened,
The display of the probability level on the display means is performed on condition that at least the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection means when the power is turned on. .

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effects of the game machine G2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the door opening detection means detects that the door of the locked game machine is unlocked and opened. The probability level is displayed on the display means on condition that at least the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection means when the power is turned on. The unlocking of the door is usually performed with a key managed by the hall side, which has the effect of making it more difficult for the player to know the probability level set in the gaming machine.

(Task 5)
The game machines shown below are from 1 to 3, from 1 to 6, from 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, S 2, T 1, T 2, H 1, H 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1 and T 2 were made to solve the following problems.

Conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players (for example, JP-A-2003-340046).

For such games, there is a demand to change the probability of winning. However, the countermeasures for changing the probability of winning have been inadequate.

The present technical idea has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

(Means and effect 5)
<H group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
a storage means for storing information used for game control and capable of retaining the information even while the power is turned off;
information erasure instruction means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means;
permitting means for permitting modification or confirmation of the level of probability by being placed in a predetermined state;
When the power is turned on while the permission means is in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means instructs erasure of the information, the probability level can be changed by the change means. a first mode start-up means for starting up in the mode;
When the power is turned on in a state in which the permission means is set to a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means does not instruct erasure of the information, the probability level can be confirmed. When the power is turned on while the 2-mode activation means and the permission means are not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means instructs the erasure of the information, the information stored in the storage means is erased. a third mode start-up means for starting up in a third mode for erasing;
When the power is turned on in a state in which the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means does not instruct erasure of the information, the fourth mode startup is performed in a normal startup mode. A game machine 1 characterized by comprising upper means.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination yields a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. Information used for game control is stored in the storage means, and the information can be retained even while the power is turned off. Information erasure instructing means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means and permitting means for permitting a change in the probability level or the probability by setting a predetermined state are provided. When the power is turned on in a state in which the permission means is placed in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means instructs erasure of information, the first mode activation means causes the probability level to be changed by the change means. It is launched in the first mode, which is enabled. Further, when the permission means is set to a predetermined state and the power is turned on without an instruction to erase information by the information erasure instruction means, the probability level can be confirmed by the second mode start-up means. Launched in 2 modes. Further, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means instructs erasure of information, the information stored in the storage means is erased by the third mode start-up means. It is launched in the third mode of erasing. In addition, when the power is turned on in a state where the permission means is not in a predetermined state and the information erasure instruction means does not instruct erasure of information, the fourth mode startup means performs normal startup in a fourth mode. is launched with As a result, by combining the operations of the information erasure instructing means and the permitting means, it is possible to easily set the start-up mode including the mode in which the probability level can be changed and confirmed. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
Door opening detection means for detecting that the locked door of the game machine is unlocked and opened,
In the first mode start-up means, the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection means, the permitting means is placed in a predetermined state, and an instruction to erase the information is given by the information erasure instruction means. When the power is turned on in the state of
In the second mode starting means, the opening of the door is detected by the door opening detection means, the permitting means is placed in a predetermined state, and the information erasure instruction means does not instruct erasure of the information. A game machine 2 characterized by starting up in a second mode that enables confirmation of the probability level when the power is turned on in the state.

(Effect)
According to the gaming machine Q2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permission means is placed in a predetermined state, and the information erasure instruction means instructs erasure of information, and the power is turned on, the second The 1-mode activation means activates in a first mode that allows the change means to change the probability level. Further, when the door opening detection means detects that the door has been opened, the permitting means is placed in a predetermined state, and the power is turned on in a state where there is no instruction to erase information by the information erasing instruction means, the second A mode activation means activates in a second mode that allows confirmation of the probability level. As a result, since the probability level cannot be changed or confirmed unless the door is opened, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

In game machine h1 or h2,
3. The gaming machine 3, wherein the permission means is composed of a key, and the predetermined state is a state rotated to a predetermined position by the key.

According to the gaming machine Q3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Q1 or Q2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the permitting means is configured by a key, and the predetermined state is a state rotated to a predetermined position by the key. Therefore, when starting up in the first mode or when starting up in the second mode, it is necessary to rotate the permission means to a predetermined position with the key. Since the key is managed by the hall side, there is an effect that it is difficult for the player to change or confirm the probability level.

<Group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
confirmation means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal each time a predetermined timing arrives;
and processing execution means for executing a predetermined process when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. Further, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirming means each time a predetermined timing arrives, and when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the process executing means executes a predetermined process. be done. As a result, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it can be detected early and some countermeasures can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
2. The gaming machine 2, wherein the predetermined timing is the lapse of a predetermined time.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, every time a predetermined period of time elapses, the confirmation means confirms whether or not the probability level is normal. Therefore, there is an effect that if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, it can be reliably found.

In gaming machine 1,
3. A gaming machine 3, wherein the predetermined timing is the start of dynamic display of the identification information executed when the starting condition is met.

According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means each time the dynamic display of the identification information is started. Therefore, if the probability level is destroyed for some reason during the game, there is an effect that it can be found without fail before the dynamic display of the identification information is started.

In any one of gaming machines Ke 1 to Ke 3,
A game machine 4 characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the fact that the probability level is abnormal is reported, so that there is an effect that the player or the hall side can grasp the state immediately.

In any one of gaming machines 1 to 4,
The gaming machine 5 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for stopping the game.

According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, since the game is stopped when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being disadvantaged by playing the game at an abnormal probability level.

In any one of gaming machines 1 to 5,
The gaming machine 6, wherein the predetermined process includes a process for causing the change means to change the probability level.

According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects of any one of the gaming machines 1 to 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so that the game can be returned to the normal probability level.

<Group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
changing means for changing, among a plurality of levels, the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination;
confirming means for confirming whether or not the probability level is normal in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on;
and processing execution means for executing a predetermined process when the confirmation means confirms that the probability level is not normal.

According to the game machine 1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means to the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination yields a predetermined result. is modified among a plurality of levels by modifying means. Then, in the start-up process executed when the power is turned on, whether or not the probability level is normal is confirmed by the confirmation means, and if it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, a predetermined process is performed. is executed by the processing execution means. As a result, if the probability level has been destroyed when the power is turned on, it can be reliably detected, and some countermeasures can be taken. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine Ko 1,
The gaming machine 2 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for notifying that the probability level is abnormal.

According to the game machine Ko 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Ko 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the fact that the probability level is abnormal is reported, so that there is an effect that the player or the hall side can grasp the state immediately.

In game machine Ko 1 or Ko 2,
A gaming machine 3, wherein the predetermined process includes an infinite loop process.

According to the game machine Ko-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine Ko-1 or Ko-2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the game is looped infinitely, so that there is an effect that it is possible to suppress the start-up process from being completed and the game to be played while the probability level is abnormal.

In any of the game machines Ko 1 to Ko 3,
The gaming machine 4, wherein the predetermined processing includes processing for causing the changing means to change the probability level.

According to the game machine Ko-4, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines Ko-1 to Ko-3, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level can be changed by the changing means, so there is an effect that the start-up process can be completed at the normal probability level.

In any of the game machines Ko 1 to Ko 3,
The gaming machine 4 is characterized in that the predetermined process includes a process for setting the probability level to one of normal levels.

According to the game machine Ko-5, in addition to the effects of any one of the game machines Ko-1 to Ko-3, the following effect is exhibited. That is, when it is confirmed that the probability level is not normal, the probability level is set to one of the normal levels, so that the startup process can be completed at the normal probability level. be.

<Sa group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
a start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
If the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the start-up means can set the power on even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on. A game machine server 1 characterized by executing a process by a change process executing means.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. The processing by this change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, if the processing by the change processing execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the change processing is executed by the start-up means. Processing by the means is performed. As a result, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level can be changed without fail when the power is turned on after that, so the probability level can be changed with confidence. Changes can be made. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
When the power is turned off last time and the process by the change process executing means is being executed, the start-up means, when the power is turned on, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied, the A gaming machine 2 characterized in that the processing by the change processing executing means is executed from the beginning.

According to the gaming machine SA2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine SA1. That is, if the change process executing means is executing the process when the power is turned off last time, even if the predetermined condition is not satisfied when the power is turned on, the change process is executed by the start-up means. The processing by means is executed from the beginning. As a result, since the probability level can be reset from scratch, there is an effect that the probability level can be changed without anxiety.

<Shi group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation process execution means for executing a process that enables confirmation of the set probability level;
When the power is turned on, on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is set. a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on condition that a condition is satisfied;
If the change process execution means is executing the process when the power is turned off last time, the start-up means is activated when the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. A game machine 1 characterized by executing the processing by the change processing execution means even if

According to the game machine 1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. Also, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is performed when the power is turned on. Execution is performed by the start-up means on the condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. If the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. The raising means executes the processing by the change processing executing means. As a result, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on, the probability level is always changed when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. can be performed, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In gaming machine 1,
The start-up means, if the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power was turned off last time, and if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. The game machine server 2 is characterized in that the process by the change process execution means is executed from the beginning even if the change process is executed.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, if the process by the change process execution means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. The process by the change process execution means is executed from the beginning by the raising means. As a result, since the probability level can be reset from scratch, there is an effect that the probability level can be changed without anxiety.

<Su group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
a first storage means for storing the original probability level when the probability level is changed by the process by the change process executing means;
and a second storage means for storing the probability level changed by the process by the change process execution means.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. When the probability level is changed by the process by the change process execution means, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level changed by the process by the change process execution means is stored in the second storage means. be. As a result, the original probability level is stored in the first storage means, and the probability level is changed using the second storage means. 1 The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the storage means. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed without anxiety, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine 1,
The gaming machine 2 is characterized in that the first storage means continues to store the original probability level even while the power is turned off.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the original probability level stored in the first storage means continues to be held even while the power is turned off. The probability level can be changed again from the original probability level stored in the first storage means after the insertion. Therefore, since the probability level can be changed without anxiety, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

<Se group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
a start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The start-up means sets a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. is established, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed,
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state,
the second predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in a second state different from the first state;
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state, and the detection means detects that the first operation means has changed from the first state to the second state. A gaming machine (1), characterized in that the changed probability level is determined when a change from a state to the second state is detected.

According to the game machine set 1, the game medium is shot by the shooting means into the game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. The processing by this change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, it means that a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is established when the power is turned on. However, the processing by the change processing executing means is executed by the startup means. As a result, if the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, the probability level is set to the same even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on after that. can be changed, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. The predetermined condition includes setting the first operating device to the first state, and the second predetermined condition includes setting the first operating device to a second state different from the first state. I'm in. The change processing executing means has detecting means for detecting that the first operating means has changed from the first state to the second state. to a second state is detected, a modified probability level is determined. Here, even if the change process execution means is executed by satisfying the second predetermined condition, the change process execution means determines that the first operation means is in the second state and changes the probability Instead of determining the level, the detection means determines the changed probability level triggered by the detection of the change of the first operating means from the first state to the second state. Therefore, even if the change processing executing means is executed by satisfying the second predetermined condition, it is possible to reliably change the probability level.

In gaming machine 1,
The game machine set 2, wherein the first operation means is a key.

According to the game machine set 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine set 1, since the first operation means is a key, the probability level can be easily changed simply by changing the key from the first state to the second state. There is an effect that can be determined.

<So group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
a start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
When the power is turned off last time and the process by the change process execution means is being executed, the startup means is configured to set a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition when the power is turned on. A game machine SO1 characterized in that an infinite loop state is established when the condition is established.

According to the gaming machine So-1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. The processing by this change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, and when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, is an infinite loop. As a result, it is possible to change the probability level by inducing a predetermined condition to be established and turning on the power, and executing the processing by the change processing executing means in the start-up processing. You can change levels. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine SO 1,
2, the game machine 2 is characterized in that said start-up means comprises an informing means for giving an instruction to satisfy said predetermined condition and to turn on a power source when said infinite loop state is established.

According to the gaming machine SO2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine SO1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an infinite loop state is established by the start-up means, the notification means issues a notification to instruct to turn on the power after a predetermined condition is established. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that power should be turned on after satisfying a predetermined condition.

<Ta group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation process execution means for executing a process that enables confirmation of the set probability level;
When the power is turned on, on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is set. a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on condition that a condition is satisfied;
The launching means includes:
If the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the Execute processing by the change processing execution means,
a third predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition and the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time; A game machine 1 characterized by setting an infinite loop state when a condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. Also, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is performed when the power is turned on. Execution is performed by the start-up means on the condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is established. If the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. The raising means executes the processing by the change processing executing means. As a result, even if the second predetermined condition is satisfied and the power is turned on, the probability level is always changed when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. can be performed, the probability level can be changed with confidence. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. Further, in the case where the process by the change process executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, a third predetermined condition different from the second predetermined condition when the power is turned on. is established, an infinite loop state is established. As a result, it is possible to change the probability level by inducing a predetermined condition to be established and turning on the power, and executing the processing by the change processing executing means in the start-up processing. You can change levels. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine ta 1,
The start-up means comprises an informing means for giving an instruction to turn on the power when the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied when the endless loop state is established. Playing game machine 2.

According to the gaming machine TA-2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine TA-1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an infinite loop state is established by the start-up means, the notification means issues a notification to turn on the power after the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition is satisfied. Accordingly, there is an effect that it is possible to easily grasp that the predetermined condition or the second predetermined condition should be established and the power supply should be turned on.

<Chi group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
a start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is in the first state,
The change processing execution means includes detection means for detecting that the first operation means is changed from the second state to the first state, and the change process execution means detects that the first operation means changes from the second state to the first state. When a change in is detected, the probability level is changed,
The game machine is
comprising storage means for storing the previous state of the first operation means,
The detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time, and changes the state of the first operation means from the second state to the first state. It detects whether or not it has changed to
1, wherein the memory means stores a first state as a previous state of the first operation means for a period from when the power is turned on until the first detection is performed by the detection means. .

According to the gaming machine Chi-1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. The processing by this change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, the predetermined condition includes that the first operating means is set to the first state. The change processing execution means has detection means for detecting that the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state, and the detection means detects that the first operation means is in the second state. When a change from to the first state is detected, the level of probability is changed. On the other hand, the previous state of the first operation means is stored in the storage means, and the detection means refers to the previous state of the first operation means stored in the storage means and the state of the first operation means at that time. to detect whether or not the first operating means has changed from the second state to the first state. Then, the storage means stores the first state as the previous state of the first operation means during the period from when the power is turned on until the first detection is performed by the detection means. As a result, when the power is turned on, the first operating device is set to the first state in order to satisfy the predetermined condition, and the first operating device is kept in the first state until the detection is performed for the first time. However, since the storage means stores the first state as the previous state of the first operation means during the period from when the power is turned on until the first detection by the detection means, the first state is stored. In the detection performed by the detection means, it is possible to suppress the detection that the first operation means has changed from the second state to the first state. Therefore, even if the first operating means is set to the first state in order to establish a predetermined condition, erroneous change of the probability level based thereon can be suppressed, so that the probability can be suitably changed. There is an effect that the machine can be provided.

In game machine Chi 1,
The storage means stores information used for game control, and can hold the information even while the power is turned off,
The gaming machine 2 is characterized in that said first operation means instructs erasure of information stored in said storage means when said first state is established.

According to the gaming machine Chi-2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Chi-1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the storage means stores information used for game control, and can hold the information even while the power is turned off. This command instructs the erasure of the information that has been written. As a result, the probability level can be changed by using the first operation means for instructing erasure of information stored in the storage means. There is an effect that the probability level can also be changed by using the first operating means for instructing erasure of the information stored in the .

<T group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
startup means for executing the process by the change process execution means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
a storage means for storing information used for game control and capable of retaining the information even while the power is turned off;
When the start-up means determines that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means, an infinite loop state is established;
The game machine is
The game machine 1 is characterized by comprising means for executing a process of monitoring power supply interruption even when the game machine is in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. The processing by this change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Further, information used for game control is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even while the power is turned off. Here, when the start-up means determines that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, an infinite loop state is established. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game from being played with an abnormal probability level because the changed probability level was not correctly held before the power was turned off. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, even in the infinite loop state, the process of monitoring the power-off is executed. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from becoming more abnormal by correctly performing the processing related to the power-off.

In game machine Tsu 1,
The game machine 2 is characterized by comprising means for executing update processing of the random number used for the predetermined determination even when in the infinite loop state.

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, even in the infinite loop state, the process of updating the random numbers used for the predetermined determination is executed. As a result, there is an effect that the random number update process can be continued as long as the power is kept on.

In game machine 1 or 2,
The game machine 3 is characterized in that said start-up means comprises an informing means for giving an instruction to satisfy said predetermined condition and to turn on a power supply when said infinite loop state is established.

According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an infinite loop state is set by the start-up means, the notification means issues a notification for instructing to turn on the power by satisfying a predetermined condition. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to induce the predetermined condition to be established and the power to be turned on.

<Te group>
a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
a start-up means for executing the process by the change process execution means on condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on;
The start-up means is characterized in that, when it is determined that the game is in a predetermined state, it carries out a process for not executing the control related to the game, and has means for notifying the external device to that effect. Game machine Te 1.

According to the gaming machine Te-1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. The processing by this change processing execution means is executed by the start-up means on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. Here, when it is determined that the starting means is in a predetermined state, a process for not executing the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified to that effect. As a result, it is possible to prevent a game from being played at an abnormal probability level due to the gaming machine being in a predetermined state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability. On the other hand, since the fact is notified to the external device, there is an effect that the persons concerned with the hall or the like can take some measures against it.

In game machine Te 1,
The predetermined state is a state in which a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is met when the power is turned on when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time. A gaming machine Te 2 characterized by being in a state of being established.

According to the gaming machine Te-2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Te-1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the case where the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, , a process for not executing the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified to that effect. Thereby, when the processing by the change processing executing means is being executed when the power is turned off last time, when the second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. has the effect of making it possible to satisfy a predetermined condition and turn on the power.

In game machine Te 1 or Te 2,
a storage means for storing information used for game control and capable of retaining the information even while the power is turned off;
3. The gaming machine te 3, wherein the predetermined state is a state in which the information stored in the storage means is abnormal.

According to the gaming machine Te3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine Te1 or Te2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the information used for controlling the game is stored in the storage means, and the information is retained even while the power is turned off. Then, when it is determined that the information stored in the storage means is abnormal, a process for not executing the control related to the game is performed, and the external device is notified to that effect. Thus, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the information stored in the storage means while the process is being executed by the change process execution means when the power is turned off last time, some kind of countermeasures are taken. There is an effect that it can be directed to

<G group>
a game area provided with a number of winning holes;
a launching means for launching a game medium into the game area;
Winning detecting means provided for each of the winning openings for detecting winning of the game medium into the corresponding winning opening;
When it is detected by the winning detecting means that the game medium shot by the shooting means has won any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of games are played for the winning holes in which the game medium has won. a dispensing means for dispensing the medium,
A gaming machine that makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is established, and gives a predetermined game value to a player when the determination is a predetermined result,
change processing execution means for executing processing for changing the probability of obtaining a predetermined result in the predetermined determination among a plurality of levels;
Confirmation process execution means for executing a process that enables confirmation of the set probability level;
When the power is turned on, on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied, the processing by the change processing execution means is executed, and when the power is turned on, a second predetermined condition different from the predetermined condition is set. a start-up means for executing the process by the confirmation process execution means on the condition that a condition is satisfied;
an interrupt processing means for monitoring whether or not at least the power supply has been turned off based on an interrupt that occurs at predetermined time intervals;
an interrupt permitting means for permitting the interruption while the process by the change process execution means is executed and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is executed. .

According to the gaming machine 1, game media are shot by the shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes. Each winning hole is provided with winning detecting means for detecting winning of a game medium. When the winning detecting means detects that the game medium shot by the shooting means has entered any of the winning holes, a predetermined number of game media for the winning holes in which the game medium has won is detected. is paid out by the payout means. In addition, this game machine makes a predetermined determination when a starting condition is satisfied, and gives a predetermined game value to the player when the determination is a predetermined result. is modified among the plurality of levels in a process performed by the modification process execution means. Also, the set probability level can be confirmed by the process executed by the confirmation process executing means. Here, the processing by the change processing execution means is performed on the condition that a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and the processing by the confirmation processing execution means is performed when the power is turned on. Execution is performed by the start-up means on the condition that a second predetermined condition different from the condition is satisfied. Further, the interrupt processing means performs at least a process of monitoring whether or not the power supply has been turned off, based on an interrupt that occurs at predetermined time intervals. The interrupt is permitted by the interrupt permitting means while the process by the change process executing means is executed and while the process by the confirmation process executing means is executed. Thereby, it is possible to monitor whether or not the power supply is turned off while the process by the change process execution means is being executed and while the process by the confirmation process execution means is being executed. Such processing can be executed. Therefore, when the power is turned on again, the process corresponding to the situation in which the power is turned off is executed while the process by the change process execution means is executed or while the process by the confirmation process execution means is executed. be able to. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably changing the probability.

In game machine 1,
A game machine 2, further comprising an interrupt prohibiting means for prohibiting the interrupt when the process by the change process executing means is completed or the process by the confirmation process executing means is completed.

According to the game machine T-2, the following effects are obtained in addition to the effects of the game machine T-1. That is, when the processing by the change processing executing means ends or the processing by the confirmation processing executing means ends, the interrupt is prohibited by the interrupt prohibiting means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress unnecessary execution of interrupt processing by the interrupt processing means in the start-up means.

<Group 1: Protective cover that covers the setting keys when the inner frame is closed>
Conventionally, a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine stores the details of the game value (win probability and/or win type, etc., hereinafter referred to as "set contents") to be given to the player according to the game result. setting means that can change the setting of the game machine, and based on the operation of the setting means by a person involved in the hall, etc., the setting contents of the gaming machine are set in multiple stages (for example, six stages of set values "1" to "6") is configured to be changeable.

The setting means is provided so as to be exposed in the direction of the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the supporting body, and the opening/closing body is supported when the opening/closing body is unlocked by a hall official or the like. When rotated with respect to the body, the setting means is exposed to the front of the game machine as the support rotates. With this configuration, when a person involved in the hall wishes to change the setting contents of the game machine, it is possible to immediately insert the key for changing the setting into the setting means by rotating the opening/closing body. It is configured so that the setting change operation of the game machine can be performed quickly.

In addition, in the hall, an island facility having an automatic ball feeder and the like is installed in a predetermined closed space. It is configured so that a plurality of game machines can be installed in each. Outside the opening hours of the hall, the hall personnel must unlock the opening and closing member of each game machine installed on the island facility and the support member, and move the opening and closing member against the support member (island facility). Open it and perform setting change work and maintenance work for each game machine.

However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the game machine, for example, in a situation where the game machine is installed on the long side of one of the island facilities in the hall, the length of the installed game machine may be reduced. If the opening/closing body of another game machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the game machine) is opened for some reason (for example, fraud), the game It becomes possible to directly operate the setting means provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the machine. As a result, even when the opening/closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine. Unauthorized manipulation of the settings may change the settings and cause unforeseen disadvantages to the hall.

Here, like a slot machine, it is conceivable to have a structure in which the entire back side of the game machine is covered with a housing structure to prevent cheating from the back side of the game machine against the setting means of the control device. Unlike a slot machine, the game machine needs to replenish game balls from above the island facility and discharge balls (out balls). Therefore, if the back side of the game machine is covered with a housing structure, a complicated structure for replenishment and discharge of game balls is required, and the manufacturing cost increases due to the housing structure and the replenishment and discharge structure. There is a risk of

In addition, in the island facility, when considering the wiring connection with the card sandwiching device arranged adjacent to the left side of the game machine and the connection wiring with the power supply, the back structure of the game machine, especially the right side of the game machine when viewed from the back ( The structure on the left side in front view) is desirably configured to be open to some extent and to be easily connected by wiring to the above devices.

The first group of inventions has been devised in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving security performance of the gaming machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
a game body (for example, game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with ball entry means (for example, first start opening 64a) for allowing game balls to enter;
A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting a game ball toward the game area;
A lottery information acquiring means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means;
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307));
A gaming machine comprising game value imparting means (for example, large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined game value to a player based on the fact that a specific determination result is derived by the determining means ,
setting means (for example, setting key 501) capable of changing the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determination means;
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated. A gaming machine 10 characterized by comprising protection means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for

According to the game machine 10, the opening/closing body is supported by the supporting body so as to be opened and closed, and the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device. A game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means for allowing game balls to enter. Further, the game ball is shot toward the game area by the shooting means, and the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the game ball shot by the shooting means entering the ball entering means. The determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result derived by the determination means. be done. Here, the probability of deriving a specific determination result by the determination means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. The protective means provided on the support makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device. A setting means is operably configured. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is difficult to operate due to the protective means. can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing member is locked with respect to the support member.

In gaming machine 10,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 1, characterized in that it is mounted in a cantilever shape on any one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d).

According to the gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 10, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the protection means is cantilevered on any one of the plates. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine at low cost.

In addition, the "cantilever shape" is a beam shape in which one end of the protective means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is free.

In game machine Ichi 0 or Ichi 1,
Control means (for example, main control device 110) for controlling the game;
A storage means (for example, a substrate box 100) that stores the control means,
The setting means
provided in the control means,
The storage means is
a setting unit (for example, setting unit 100d) where the setting means is located;
an exposed portion exposing a portion of the setting means from the setting portion toward the outside of the storage means (for example, a portion where the keyhole of the setting key 501 in the setting portion 100d is exposed);
a concave portion (for example, a setting portion side wall 100e and a setting portion bottom surface 100f) for recessing the exposed portion from the outermost surface side of the storage means toward the control means side,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 12 characterized by comprising a projecting portion (for example, a cover-side projecting portion 172) that enters the recess when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support.

According to the game machine 12, in addition to the effects of the game machine 10 or 11, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the control means controls the game, the control means is housed by the housing means, and the control means is provided with the setting means. Here, the setting means is positioned in the setting portion provided in the storage means, the exposure portion exposes a part of the setting means from the setting portion toward the outside of the storage means, and the recess portion exposes the exposure portion of the storage means. It is formed at a position recessed from the outermost surface side toward the control means side. Then, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support, the projecting portion provided on the protecting means is configured to enter the recess. As a result, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support, the projecting portion of the protecting means enters the concave portion of the housing means, and the setting means exposed from the housing means is covered by the projecting portion. It is possible to make it difficult to access the setting means from the back side of the game machine when the body is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine at a low cost.

In gaming machine 12,
The protrusion is
A gaming machine 13 characterized in that it is formed to surround and close the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 13, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 12, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the projection surrounds and closes the setting means. As a result, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support, the projecting portion of the protecting means enters the concave portion of the housing means, and surrounds and closes the setting means exposed from the housing means. By covering with , it is possible to make it difficult to access the entire setting means from the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing body is locked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine at a low cost.

In game machine Ichi 2 or Ichi 3,
The recess is
a recess side wall (for example, a setting portion side wall 100e) recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means;
a recess bottom surface (setting portion bottom surface 100f) extending from the sidewall of the recess portion and constituting the bottom surface of the recess portion and part of which is formed with the exposed portion;
a recess-side projecting portion (for example, case-side projecting portion 100g) projecting from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protection means in a square shape so as to surround the exposed portion;
The protrusion is
A game machine 14 characterized in that, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support, it enters a space formed by the side wall of the recess and the protruding part on the side of the recess.

According to the game machine 14, in addition to the effects of the game machine 12 or 13, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the side wall of the recess is recessed from the outermost surface of the storage means, and the bottom surface of the recess extends from the side wall of the recess to constitute the bottom surface of the recess, and an exposed portion is formed in a part thereof. Similarly, the recess-side protruding portion of the recess protrudes in a square shape from the bottom surface of the recess toward the protecting means so as to surround the exposed portion. Then, when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support, the projecting portion is configured to enter a space formed by the side wall of the recess and the projecting portion on the side of the recess. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, the portion where the setting means is arranged is blocked by the projection on the side of the concave portion of the storage means, thereby making it difficult to access the setting means. make access to the setting means difficult. By configuring in this manner, the security of the setting means is enhanced, and there is no room for a wire or the like to enter, so there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means.

In any one of gaming machines Ichi 2 to Ichi 4,
Said protective means are:
a mounting portion (e.g., cover mounting portion 150) attached to the plate;
an upright portion (e.g., upright portion 160) extending from the mounting portion to the back side of the gaming machine;
a cover portion (e.g., cover portion 170) formed with the projecting portion extending from the standing portion toward the setting means,
The standing portion is
A game machine 15 characterized by comprising a bending portion (for example, a bending portion 154) capable of bending based on an impact when an impact is applied to the protection means.

According to the gaming machine I-5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I-2 to I-4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protective means is attached to the plate by the mounting portion, the standing portion is formed to extend from the mounting portion to the back side of the game machine, and the cover portion is formed to extend from the standing portion to the setting means side. A protrusion is formed. When an impact is applied to the protecting means, the bending portion provided in the standing portion allows the protection means to be bent based on the impact. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, even if the storage means or the like comes into contact with the protective means due to the force of closing and a shock is applied, the flexible portion bends and absorbs the shock, thereby preventing the protective means from being damaged. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent damage.

In gaming machine 15,
The cover part
A game machine 16 characterized by comprising a rear projecting rib (for example, cover outer rib 174) projecting toward the back side of the game machine along at least the outer shape of the cover portion.

According to the gaming machine 16, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 15, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the rear projecting rib of the cover portion projects toward the back side of the game machine along at least the outer shape of the cover portion. As a result, the rigidity of the cover portion is increased by the rearward protruding ribs, and in the event that a fraudulent act is performed using a wire from the back side of the game machine, the wire is directed upward or downward from the back side of the cover portion. There is an effect that the wire can be prevented from entering by colliding with the rearward projecting rib when the wire is transmitted through.

In gaming machine 16,
The rearward protruding rib is
A game machine 17 characterized by being provided on the back side of the game machine of the setting means.

According to the gaming machine 17, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 16, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a rear projecting rib is provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. Thus, by forming the rearward protruding rib on the cover portion at the position corresponding to the setting means, it is possible to make it difficult to drill a hole or the like in the cover portion, thereby improving the security performance on the back side of the game machine. It has the effect of being able to

In game machines Ichi 5 to Ichi 7,
The standing portion is
A game machine 1 characterized by comprising a laterally protruding rib (for example, an upper outer cover portion 162b or a lower outer cover portion 163b) protruding to the side of the game machine along at least the outer shape of the standing portion. 8.

According to the gaming machine I-8, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I-5 to I-7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the laterally protruding rib of the standing portion protrudes to the side of the game machine along at least the outer shape of the standing portion. As a result, the side protruding ribs increase the rigidity of the standing portion, and when a fraudulent act using the wire is performed from the side of the game machine, the wire is pulled from the side of the standing portion above or below the standing portion. There is an effect that the wire can be prevented from entering by colliding with the laterally protruding rib when the wire is transmitted toward.

In game machines Ichi 5 to Ichi 8,
The control means is
arranged below the central portion of the gaming machine,
The upright portion and the cover portion are
an upper inner cover portion (for example, an upper inner cover portion 162a) extending from the upper portions of the standing portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the game machine;
a lower inner cover portion (for example, a lower inner cover portion 163a) extending from the lower portions of the standing portion and the cover portion toward the inside of the gaming machine;
The lower inner cover part
A game machine 19 characterized in that it is formed with an area larger than that of the upper inner cover portion.

According to the gaming machine I-9, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines I-5 to I-8, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the control means is disposed below the central portion of the game machine, the upper inner cover portion is formed extending from the standing portion and the upper portion of the cover portion toward the inside of the game machine, and the lower inner cover portion , extending from the upright portion and the upper portion of the cover portion toward the inner side of the game machine. Further, the area of the lower inner cover part is formed to be larger than the area of the upper inner cover part.

Conventionally, since the control means is arranged below the central portion of the gaming machine, it is easier to access the control means from the lower side than from the upper side of the gaming machine when a fraudulent act is committed. Therefore, in many cases, a person who cheats on the control means cheats by inserting a wire or the like from the bottom side of the back surface of the game machine. Therefore, in order to prevent the fraudulent act described above, the area of the lower inner cover portion is widened, and the gap between the control means and the protection means can be minimized by the lower protective cover portion. There is an effect that the security performance of the side can be improved.

In any one of gaming machines Ichi 0 to Ichi 9,
Said protective means are:
A gaming machine 10 characterized by being made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine 10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 10 to 19, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protective means are made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the game machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to quickly detect fraud or defects in the changing means. has the effect of

<Second group: The cover that protects the control means is configured to be non-removable from the back side>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a setting means for performing various game settings is provided on the back side of a gaming machine, and when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, a player cannot touch the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, a person involved in the hall opens the opening/closing body outside the opening hours of the hall, and performs various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a game machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that the setting means will be tampered with from the back side of the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The second group of inventions has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening/closing body for performing various game settings;
a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means;
Difficult-to-detach means for making the protective means difficult or impossible to detach from the game machine (for example, a fixing screw is attached from the outside of the right side plate 11d while the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). 11g) and a game machine 20 characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine 20, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the supporting body, the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device, and various game settings are performed by setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. done. The protecting means protects the back side of the gaming machine of the setting means. Here, the difficult-to-remove means makes the protective means difficult or impossible to remove from the game machine. As a result, the protective means for protecting the back side of the game machine of the setting means for performing various settings of the game is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the game machine by the hard-to-remove means. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent

In gaming machine 20,
Said protective means are:
attached to the support;
The difficult-to-remove means is
1. A game machine 2, characterized in that when the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the support.

According to the gaming machine 21, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 20, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the protective means is attached to the support and the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the difficult-to-remove means makes it difficult or impossible to remove the protective means from the support.

Conventionally, in a hall where a game machine is installed, an island facility having an automatic supply device for game balls, etc. is provided in a predetermined closed space. By installing the, it is configured to be able to install a plurality of game machines on the island facility. Outside the opening hours of the hall, the hall personnel must unlock the opening and closing member of each game machine installed on the island facility and the support member, and move the opening and closing member against the support member (island facility). Open it and perform setting change work and maintenance work for each game machine.

However, if the setting means is configured to be exposed on the back side of the game machine, for example, in a situation where the game machine is installed on the long side of one of the island facilities in the hall, the length of the installed game machine may be reduced. If the opening/closing body of another game machine installed on the other long side (that is, the back side of the game machine) is opened for some reason (for example, fraud), the game It becomes possible to directly operate the setting means provided so as to be exposed on the back side of the machine. As a result, even when the opening/closing body of the gaming machine is not opened, the setting means of the gaming machine can be directly operated by opening the gaming machine on the back side of the gaming machine. Unauthorized manipulation of the settings may change the settings and cause unforeseen disadvantages to the hall.

Therefore, according to the game machine 21, when the protection means is attached to the support and the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, the attachment/detachment difficulty means makes it difficult to detach the protection means from the support. It is non-detachable. Thereby, even if the game machine on the back side of the game machine is illegally opened, the setting means provided on the back side of the game machine is protected by the protection means, and the protection means is used when the opening/closing body is locked. It is possible to make it difficult or impossible to attach and detach from the back side of the machine, thereby preventing fraudulent acts on the setting means.

In game machine 20 or 21,
Said protective means are:
A mounting portion (e.g., mounting surface 151) that is attached to the plate,
The support is
Formed by combining a plurality of plates (for example, upper plate 11a, lower plate 11b, left plate 11c and right plate 11d),
The plate is
a side part located on the side of the game machine;
a front portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine on the front side of the gaming machine of the side portion;
a rear portion extending toward the inside of the game machine on the rear side of the side portion of the game machine,
The mounting portion is
A game machine 2, characterized in that it is attached to the inner wall side of the side part.

According to the game machine 22, in addition to the effects of the game machine 20 or 21, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means is attached to the plate by the attachment portion of the protection means. Also, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates. The plate body includes a side portion located on the side surface of the game machine, a front portion extending toward the inside of the game machine on the front side of the game machine in the side portion, and a game machine in the side portion. A rear portion extending toward the inside of the gaming machine is provided on the rear side. Protective means are then attached to the inner walls of the lateral portions. As a result, by attaching the attachment portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate, the attachment portion of the protection means can be accessed from the front or the rear side of the game machine. can be difficult to access. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means by making the protection means difficult or impossible to attach and detach from the back side of the game machine.

In game machine 2,
part or all of the plate,
A game machine 23 characterized by being made of a metal material (for example, made of aluminum) having a higher hardness than wood.

According to the gaming machine 23, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 22, the following effects are exhibited. That is, part or all of the plate is made of a metal material having a hardness higher than that of wood. As a result, by attaching the mounting portion of the protection means to the inner wall of the portion surrounded by the front portion, the side portion, and the rear portion of the plate made of a metal material having a higher height than wood, the front portion of the game machine or the game portion can be It is possible to make it difficult to access the mounting portion of the protective means from the rear side of the aircraft. Therefore, there is an effect that the protection means can be made difficult or impossible to attach and detach from the back side of the game machine, thereby preventing fraudulent acts on the setting means.

In the game machine 2 or 2,
The lateral portion is
a side insertion hole (for example, upper cover mounting hole 11e or lower cover mounting hole 11f) into which a fixing member (for example, fixing screw 11g) capable of fixing the protection means to the support can be inserted;
The mounting portion is
A mounting insertion hole (for example, an upper mounting hole 152 or a lower mounting hole 153) provided corresponding to the side insertion hole and into which the fixing member can be inserted,
The fixing member is
A game machine 24 characterized in that it is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from the outside of the game machine of the side portion.

According to the gaming machine 24, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 22 or 23, the following effects are exhibited. In other words, a fixing member capable of fixing the protection means to the support can be inserted into the side insertion hole provided in the side portion. Further, a fixing member can be inserted into a mounting insertion hole provided in the mounting portion corresponding to the side insertion hole. Then, the fixing member is inserted into the side insertion hole and the attachment insertion hole from the outside of the game machine at the side portion.

Conventionally, game machines are installed without gaps on the island facilities of a hall so that a player cannot access the back side of the game machine from the front side of the game machine. In addition, on the side of the gaming machine installed on the island facility, a card sanding device into which a card storing the amount of money used in the game can be inserted is installed. are arranged so as not to

Therefore, by inserting a fixing member from the outer side of the game machine to fix the plate and the protection means, and installing the game machine on the island facility in that state, a gap is generated in the part where the fixing member is installed. can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent access to the fixing member that fixes the protective means to the game machine, to prevent the protective means from being detached from the game machine, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine. has the effect of

In any of game machines 22 to 24,
Said protective means are:
An extension portion (for example, a curved portion 154) extending from the mounting portion to the rear side of the gaming machine,
The extension part is
A game machine 25 characterized in that it is formed in a shape along (abutting against) the inner wall shape of the rear part.

According to the gaming machine 25, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 22 to 24, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the extending portion provided in the protection means extends from the mounting portion to the rear side of the game machine, and the shape of the extending portion is formed along (in contact with) the shape of the inner wall of the rear portion. be. As a result, the mounting portion of the protection means is covered by the rear portion of the plate from the back side of the game machine, and the extension portion is formed in a shape that follows (contacts) the inner wall shape of the rear portion, It is possible to prevent a gap from being generated between the side portion to which the fixing member is attached and the attachment portion. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the protective means from being detachable from the game machine, and there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved.

In game machine 25,
The extension part is
6. A gaming machine 26, characterized in that it comprises a flexible portion (for example, the curved portion 154 is made of a resin having elastic force) that can be elastically deformed when an impact is applied to the protective means.

According to the gaming machine 26, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 25, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when an impact is applied to the protection means, the flexible portion of the extension portion is configured to be elastically deformable. As a result, for example, when the opening/closing body is closed, even if a part of the opening/closing body comes into contact with the protection means due to the closing momentum and a shock is applied, the flexible portion bends due to the elastic force and absorbs the shock. By doing so, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the protection means from being damaged.

In any of game machines 20 to 26,
a game body (for example, game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with ball entry means (for example, first start opening 64a) for allowing game balls to enter;
A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting a game ball toward the game area;
A control means (for example, the main controller 110) that controls the game,
The control means is
A lottery information acquiring means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means;
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307));
game value imparting means (for example, large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result derived by the determining means;
The setting means
7. A game machine 27, characterized in that the setting of the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determination means can be changed.

According to the gaming machine 27, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 26, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means for allowing a game ball to enter. A game ball is shot toward the game area by the shooting means, and the game is controlled by the control means. Lottery information is acquired by lottery information acquisition means provided in the control means based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means. Then, the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means is determined by the determination means provided in the control means, and the game value provided in the control means based on the specific determination result derived by the determination means. A given game value is given to the player by the giving means. Here, the probability of deriving a specific determination result by the determination means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. Thus, the protective means for protecting the back side of the game machine of the setting means that can change the probability of the specific determination result and affect the game result is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the game machine by the hard-to-detach means. , there is an effect that it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine, such as illegally changing the settings of the gaming machine.

In any of game machines 20 to 27,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 28 characterized in that it is made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine 28, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 20 to 27, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protective means are made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the game machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to quickly discover fraudulent or defective changes to the changing means. has the effect of

<Reference group: Settings can be changed/checked regardless of whether the inner frame is open>
Conventionally, a control device provided on the back side of a gaming machine stores the details of the game value (win probability and/or win type, etc., hereinafter referred to as "set contents") to be given to the player according to the game result. setting means that can change the setting of the game machine, and based on the operation of the setting means by a person involved in the hall, etc., the setting contents of the gaming machine are set in multiple stages (for example, six stages of set values "1" to "6") is configured to be changeable.

In such a game machine, in order to improve the security performance, it is determined that setting is impossible when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed by the support, and the opening/closing body is released from the support so that the setting means is closed. The setting by the setting means is permitted when it is determined that the game machine is operable from the front. With this configuration, in a situation where the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the supporting body, even if the setting means is illegally operated by a fraudulent act from the back side of the gaming machine, the setting of the gaming machine will not be possible. It is possible to make it unchangeable (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, when determining whether to change the setting of the game machine based on the opening state of the opening/closing body, if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening/closing body cannot detect the open state due to a failure or the like, the opening/closing body may be opened. You will not be able to make configuration changes that are possible based on Therefore, due to an erroneous detection by the opening detection means of the opening/closing body, it is possible that setting changes, etc., which are important game elements of the game machine, cannot be performed, and the hall's intended business form cannot be executed.

The invention of the third group has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
open/close detection means (for example, an inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting an open/closed state of the open/close body with respect to the support;
A first operation means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the game machine when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state. When,
changeability determination means (for example, S4412 of start-up processing: Yes) for determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the advantage to the player can be changed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner; , and
The change propriety determination means is
changeable state transition means for shifting to the changeable state when the first operation means is operated in the predetermined manner regardless of the detection result of the open/close detection means (for example, S4407 of start-up processing: Yes); A game machine 0 characterized by comprising.

According to the game machine 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the supporting body so as to be openable/closable, and the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device. Then, the opening/closing state of the opening/closing member with respect to the supporting member is detected by the opening/closing detecting means. Further, when the opening/closing body and the supporting body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the first operation means can be operated from the front side of the game machine. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the change permission/inhibition determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the advantage to the player can be changed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open/close detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the changeable state transition means provided in the changeability determination means shifts to the changeable state. That is, as a condition for shifting to the changeable state, it is possible to shift to the changeable state when a predetermined operation is performed with respect to the first operating means without judging the detection result of the open/close detection means. Therefore, even if the open detection means that detects the opening of the opening and closing body cannot detect the open state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to change the setting, which is an important game element of the game machine. There is an effect that it is possible to reliably execute the business form that is already in place.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
open/close detection means (for example, an inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting an open/closed state of the open/close body with respect to the support;
A first operation means (for example, a setting key 501) that can be operated from the front side of the game machine when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state. When,
When the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, a confirmation possibility determination means (for example, S4408 of start-up processing: Yes ), with
The confirmation propriety determination means is
regardless of the detection result of the opening/closing detection means, when the first operation means is operated in the predetermined manner, confirmable transition means for transitioning to the advantage confirmation possible state (for example, S4407 of start-up processing: No); A gaming machine 3, characterized by comprising:

According to the game machine reference 1, the opening/closing body is supported by the supporting body so as to be openable/closable, and the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device. Then, the opening/closing state of the opening/closing member with respect to the supporting member is detected by the opening/closing detecting means. Further, when the opening/closing body and the supporting body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the first operation means can be operated from the front side of the game machine. Then, when the first operating means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmability determination means determines whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmation possible state in which the advantage to the player can be confirmed. Here, regardless of the detection result of the open/close detection means, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner, the confirmation enable transition means provided in the confirmation possibility determination means shifts to the advantage confirmation possible state. That is, as a condition for transitioning to the advantage confirmable state, it is possible to transition to the advantage confirmable state based on the operation of the first operating means without judging the detection result of the open/close detection means. Therefore, even if the open detection means for detecting the opening of the opening and closing body cannot detect the open state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to check the setting status, which is an important game element of the game machine, and the set status can be confirmed. There is an effect that it is possible to reliably confirm the setting contents of .

In the game machine 0 or 1,
When the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state, a second operating means (for example, RAM erase switch 122) that can be operated from the front side of the game machine ), with
The modifiable state transition means or the verifiable state transition means
A gaming machine 3, characterized in that, when said second operating means is specially operated, said changeable state or said advantage confirmation possible state is entered.

According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 30 or 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the opening/closing body and the supporting body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the second operating means is configured to be operable from the front side of the game machine. Then, when the second operation means is specially operated, the state is shifted to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state by the changeable state shifting means or the confirmable state shifting means. That is, the condition for shifting to the changeable state or the advantage checkable state is based on a predetermined operation on the first operation means and a special operation on the second operation means without judging the detection result of the open/close detection means. can be changed to a changeable state or an advantage checkable state. Therefore, even if the opening detection means for detecting the opening of the opening/closing body cannot detect the open state due to a failure or the like, it is possible to change or confirm the setting, which is an important game element of the game machine. There is an effect that the business form assumed by is able to be executed reliably. In addition, in the control to shift to the changeable state or the advantage confirmation possible state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body becomes unnecessary, and the control load of the game machine shifting to the changeable state or the advantage confirmation possible state is reduced. has the effect of being able to

In any of the game machines 30 to 2,
a third operation means that can be operated from the front side of the gaming machine when the opening/closing body and the support body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state;
The third operating means is
When a specific operation is performed, the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off is changed to the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The change propriety determination means is
A game machine 3 characterized by being executed in a start-up process executed when the power of the game machine is turned on.

According to the game machine 3, in addition to the effects of the game machines 30 to 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the opening/closing body and the supporting body are unlocked by the locking device and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the second operating means provided in the specific detecting means can be operated from the front side of the game machine. be done. Then, when the third operation means is operated in a specific manner, the operation of changing the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on corresponds, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on. Determination by the change availability determination means is performed in the start-up process executed when the change is made.

Conventionally, in determining whether or not to shift to a changeable state in the start-up process at the time of power-on, if processing for detecting the opening of the opening and closing body is performed, the processing for detecting the opening of the opening and closing body is performed. , the control required at the time of power-on becomes complicated, and there is a possibility that the processing load of the gaming machine increases.

Therefore, according to Game Machine Part 3, when changing the settings of the game machine, when the power of the game machine is turned on according to the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the game machine, the change is possible. It can be determined whether or not to transition to the state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine before the game control is executed.

In game machine 3,
The confirmation propriety determination means is
A game machine 3 characterized by being executed in the start-up process.

According to the game machine 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, similar to the change availability determination means, the determination by the confirmation availability determination means is performed within the start-up process executed when the gaming machine is powered on.

Conventionally, when a process for detecting the opening of an opening/closing body is performed in determining whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmation possible state in the start-up process at the time of power-on, the opening of the opening/closing body is detected. Due to the processing, the control required at power-on becomes complicated, and there is a risk that the processing load of the gaming machine increases.

Therefore, according to Game Machine Part 4, when confirming the settings of the game machine, when the power of the game machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the third operation means provided on the back side of the game machine, the advantage It can be determined whether or not to shift to the confirmable state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to check the setting of the gaming machine by determining whether or not to shift to the advantage checkable state before the game control is executed.

In any of game machine 0 to game machine 4,
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the first operating means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the first operation is performed. A gaming machine 5, characterized by comprising a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) which makes the means operable.

According to the game machine III-5, in addition to the effects of the game machines III-0 to III-4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the first operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while the first operating means is made difficult to operate when the opening/closing body is released from the support. is operably configured. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the first operation means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the first operation is performed by the protection means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the means difficult to operate and improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the supporting body. In addition, the first operating means cannot be completely operated when the opening/closing body is closed by the protection means, so that even if the opening/closing detection means does not detect the opening/closing of the opening/closing body, the opening/closing body must inevitably be open. For example, the first operation means cannot be operated, so the detection result of the open/close detection means need not be determined as a condition for shifting to the changeable state or the confirmation possible state. Therefore, in the control to shift to the changeable state or the confirmable state, the process of detecting the opening of the opening and closing body becomes unnecessary, and it is possible to reduce the control load of the game machine that shifts to the changeable state or the confirmable state. effective.

In game machine 3,
Said protective means are:
A gaming machine 3, characterized in that it is attached to the support.

According to the game machine III-6, in addition to the effects of the game machine III-5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protective means attached to the support make it difficult to operate the second operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while the opening/closing body is released from the support. Also, the second operating means is configured to be operable. Thereby, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the second operation means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the second operation is performed by the protection means. There is an effect that it is possible to make the means difficult to operate and improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the supporting body.

In the game machine Part 5 or Part 6,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 7 characterized by being made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the game machine III-7, in addition to the effects of the game machine III-5 or III-6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protective means are made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the game machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to quickly detect fraud or defects in the changing means. has the effect of

<Subgroup: Settings cannot be changed or confirmed when the front frame is open>
In the past, when a game machine was easily changed to a state in which it was possible to change or confirm settings, it was not possible to eliminate the possibility of unauthorized setting changes or setting confirmation. Alternatively, it is desirable to implement multi-step security measures for the game machine so that the game machine does not shift to a confirmable state in which the setting contents can be confirmed.

On the other hand, when a person involved in the hall performs maintenance work on the game machine, both the opening/closing body and the decorative body are released from the supporting body (opening/closing body), and the maintenance work is carried out by the hall who has the authority to change or confirm the setting. Generally, hall employees who do not have the authority to change settings or check settings do so, not the person in charge (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-092371)).

Here, if an employee of the hall who does not have the authority to change or check the settings enters into a changeable state or a checkable state during maintenance work, the employee may slip into an unauthorized outside person. , there is a risk that the information on the setting status of the gaming machine may be leaked to the unauthorized person.

The invention of Shigun has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the security performance of the gaming machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a decorative body (for example, a front frame 14) supported on the front side of the opening/closing body and openable/closable with respect to the opening/closing body or the support;
a first locking means (for example, part of a cylinder lock 20) for locking the support and the opening/closing body;
a second locking means (for example, part of a cylinder lock 20) for locking the decoration and the support or the opening/closing body;
open/close detection means (for example, an inner frame open switch 208g1) for detecting an open/closed state of the open/close body with respect to the support;
decoration opening/closing detection means (for example, front frame opening switch 208g2) for detecting the opening/closing state of the decoration with respect to the support or the opening/closing body;
First operating means (e.g., power switch ) and second operating means (for example, setting key 501),
When the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, a changeability determination means (for example, , S4412 of the startup process: Yes),
The change propriety determination means is
When the second operation means is subjected to the specific operation, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect opening/closing of the decoration, the changeable state is entered. (eg, S4453: Yes and S4454: Yes in start-up processing).

According to the gaming machine section 0, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support, and the decorative body is supported at the front side of the opening/closing body so as to be openable/closable with respect to the opening/closing body or the support. The first locking means locks the opening/closing body to the support, and the second locking means locks the decorative body to the support or the opening/closing body. Here, the opening/closing detection means detects the opening/closing state of the opening/closing body with respect to the support, and the decoration opening/closing detection means detects the opening/closing state of the decoration with respect to the support or the opening/closing body. Further, when the opening/closing body and the supporting body are unlocked by the first locking means and the opening/closing body is in the open state, the first operation means and the second operation means can be operated from the front side of the game machine. Become. Then, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, the change permission/inhibition determination means determines whether or not to shift to a changeable state in which the advantage to the player can be changed. be. Here, when the second operation means is operated for a specific operation, the opening/closing detection means detects the opening/closing of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect the opening/closing of the decoration, the change provided in the change permission/inhibition determination means is changed. The transition means transitions to the modifiable state. That is, the conditions for transitioning to the changeable state include a specific operation on the second operating means, detection of opening of the opening/closing body by the opening/closing detection means, and non-opening (that is, closing) of the decoration by the decoration opening/closing detection means. When the conditions for detection are satisfied, it is possible to shift to the changeable state. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening/closing body and the decorative body are open, it is difficult to change the settings by an employee who does not have the authority to change the settings. There is an effect that the security performance for the machine can be improved.

At gaming machine 0,
confirmation availability determination means for determining whether or not to shift to an advantage confirmation possible state in which an advantage to the player can be confirmed when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner; (For example, S4408 of start-up processing: Yes),
The confirmation propriety determination means is
When the second operating means is subjected to the specific operation, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect opening/closing of the decoration, the advantage checkable state. A gaming machine 1 characterized by comprising a confirmation transition means (for example, S4451: Yes and S4452: Yes in start-up processing) for transitioning to .

According to the gaming machine 1, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the first operation means is operated in a predetermined manner and the second operation means is operated in a specific manner, the confirmation availability determination means determines whether or not to shift to a confirmation possible state in which the advantage to the player can be confirmed. is determined. Here, when the second operation means is operated specifically, the opening/closing detection means detects opening of the opening/closing body, and the decoration opening/closing detection means does not detect the opening/closing of the decoration, the change provided in the confirmation possibility determination means The transition means transitions to an advantage checkable state. That is, the conditions for transitioning to the possible state to the advantage core are a specific operation on the second operating means, detection of opening of the opening/closing body by the opening/closing detection means, and non-opening of the decoration by the decoration opening/closing detection means (that is, When the conditions for the detection of "closed" are established, the state can be shifted to the state in which the degree of advantage can be confirmed. As a result, during maintenance work in which both the opening/closing body and the decorative body are open, it is difficult to confirm the settings by an employee who does not have the authority to confirm the settings. There is an effect that the security performance for the machine can be improved.

At gaming machine 0 or 1,
a third operation means (for example, a RAM erase switch 122) that becomes operable when the opening/closing body is opened;
an operation mode detection means for detecting the operation mode of the third operation means (for example, detection of ON or OFF of the RAM erase switch 122),
The change propriety determination means is
determining whether or not to shift to the changeable state when the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode (for example, ON) of the third operation means;
The confirmation propriety determination means is
When the operation mode detection means detects a second operation mode (for example, OFF) different from the first operation mode of the third operation means, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantage checkable state. A gaming machine 2 characterized by:

According to the gaming machine 2, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 0 or 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the opening/closing body is opened, the third operation means becomes operable, and the operation mode of the third operation means is detected by the operation mode detection means. Then, when the operation mode detection means detects the first operation mode of the third operation means, the change possibility determination means determines whether or not to shift to the changeable state, and the operation mode detection means detects the third operation mode. When a second operation mode different from the first operation mode of the operation means is detected, the confirmation propriety determination means determines whether or not to shift to the advantage confirmation possible state. As a result, there is an effect that it is possible to shift to either the changeable state or the advantage checkable state according to the operation mode of the third operation means.

The "second operation mode" may be any operation mode as long as it is different from the first operation mode. For example, when the first operation mode is pressed, the second operation mode is Operation modes other than pressing, that is, operation modes such as non-pressing, contact, and pulling are applicable.

In any one of the gaming machines 0 to 2,
The predetermined operation of the first operating means includes
An operation to change the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned off to the state in which the power of the gaming machine is turned on,
The change propriety determination means is
A gaming machine 3 characterized by being executed in a start-up process executed when the power of the gaming machine is turned on.

According to the gaming machine 3, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 0 to 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the predetermined operation of the first operation means corresponds to an operation of changing the state in which the gaming machine is powered off to the state in which the gaming machine is powered on, and when the gaming machine is powered on. During the startup process that is executed, determination is made by the change availability determining means. As a result, when changing the settings of the game machine, when the power of the game machine is turned on in accordance with the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the game machine, it is determined whether or not the state is shifted to the changeable state. can be determined. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the changeable state and set the gaming machine before the game control is executed.

In gaming machine 3,
The confirmation propriety determination means is
A gaming machine 4 characterized in that it is executed in the start-up process.

According to the gaming machine 4, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 3, the following effects are achieved. That is, similar to the change availability determination means, the determination by the confirmation availability determination means is performed within the start-up process executed when the gaming machine is powered on. Thereby, when confirming the setting of the game machine, when the power of the game machine is turned on according to the operation of the first operation means provided on the back side of the game machine, whether or not the transition to the advantage confirmation possible state is made. It is possible to determine whether or not Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to check the setting of the gaming machine by determining whether or not to shift to the advantage checkable state before the game control is executed.

In any one of gaming machine 0 to gaming machine 4,
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, the operation of the second operation means is made difficult, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the second locking means is operated. 2. The game machine 5 is characterized by comprising protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that enables operation of the operating means.

According to the gaming machine 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 0 to 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the second operation means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, while the second operation means is made difficult to operate when the opening/closing body is released from the support. An operating means is operably configured. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support and the decorative body is closed by the opening/closing body or the support, the opening/closing body is connected to the support while the second operating means is configured to be easily operable. When locked, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the second operation means, and the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the supporting body. There is

In the gaming machine 5,
Said protective means are:
A gaming machine 6, which is attached to the support.

According to the gaming machine 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protection means attached to the support makes it difficult to operate the second operating means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the first locking means, while the opening/closing body is released from the support. The second operating means is configured to be operable when there is. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support and the decorative body is closed by the opening/closing body or the support, the opening/closing body is connected to the support while the second operating means is configured to be easily operable. When locked, the protection means makes it difficult to operate the second operation means, and the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the supporting body. There is

At gaming machines 5 to 6,
Said protective means are:
A gaming machine 7 characterized by being made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine 7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 or 6, the following effects are achieved. That is, the protective means are made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the changing means from the back side of the game machine through the transparent or semi-transparent protective means, and it is possible to quickly detect fraud or defects in the changing means. has the effect of

<Five Group: Cover that protects parts that affect game specifications>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a large number of influencing means for influencing the outcome of a game are arranged on the back surface of the opening/closing body of a game machine composed of a support and an opening/closing body. While the opening/closing body is locked so that the influence means cannot be operated by the player, the opening/closing body is opened outside the opening hours of the hall, and maintenance work of the influence means is performed (for example, Patent Document 1 ( Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a game machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a possibility that the influencing means may be tampered with from the back side of the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The second group of inventions has been made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a game machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts on the influence means from the back side of the game machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
Influencing means (for example, setting key 501, main controller 110 or payout controller 111) mounted on the opening/closing body to influence the result of the game played by the player;
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, a part or all of the influencing means is covered, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the influencing means is covered. A game machine 0 characterized by comprising protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) that enables operation.

According to the game machine No. 5, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the supporting body, the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device, and the influence means mounted on the opening/closing body allows the player to play the game. influences the results. The protection means covers part or all of the influencing means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while the influencing means is protected against manipulation of the influencing means when the opening/closing body is released from the support. is allowed. Thereby, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the influencing means can be configured to be easily operable, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, part of the influencing means is provided by the protective means. Alternatively, it is possible to make it difficult to operate all of them, and to improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing member is locked with respect to the support member.

It should be noted that "affecting the outcome of the game" means, for example, the case of affecting by performing the main control of the game, or the case of affecting by changing or deciding the settings of the game. , and the case where it affects the payout of the game value.

In gaming machine 5,
The influencing means are
Main control means (for example, main control device 110) that controls the game;
Payout control means (e.g., payout control) for performing control in accordance with a game medium payout instruction output from the main control means based on establishment of a predetermined prize condition (e.g., winning of a ball into the first starting port 64a) a device 111);
Said protective means are:
A game machine 5 characterized by covering part or all of the main control means and part or all of the payout control means.

According to the gaming machine 5 th , in addition to the effects of the gaming machine 5 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, main control means provided as influence means controls the game, and payout control means also provided as influence means outputs game media from the main control means based on establishment of a predetermined prize condition. Control is performed according to the payout instruction. Here, the protection means covers part or all of the main control means and part or all of the payout control means. As a result, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the opening/closing body can be easily operated with respect to the main control means and the payout control means, while the opening/closing body is locked to the support. The protection means can make it difficult to operate some or all of the main control means and some or all of the payout control means. Therefore, with one member (protection means), there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the supporting body.

In game machine 5,
The main control means is
A main control board (e.g., main board) on which a microchip (e.g., MPU 201) that executes game-related processing is mounted;
a main storage means (for example, a board box 100) for storing the main control board;
a main sealing means (for example, a sealing unit 100c) that seals the main storage means in a difficult-to-open manner;
Said protective means are:
A game machine 5 characterized by covering at least the main sealing means.

According to the game machine 5, in addition to the effects of the game machine 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a microchip for executing game-related processing is mounted on a main control board provided in the main control means, and the main control board is housed in the main housing means. Then, the main storage means is sealed so as to be difficult to open by the main sealing means. Here, the protection means covers at least the main sealing means.

Conventionally, there have been fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the main control board due to the cutting of the main sealing means that seals the main storage means containing the main control board so that it is difficult to unseal, causing unforeseen disadvantages to the hall. There is a risk.

Therefore, according to the game machine 5, at least the main sealing means is covered by the protective means. As a result, by covering the main sealing means of the main storage means containing the main control board on which the microchip that executes the processing related to the game is housed with the protection means, fraudulent acts such as the illegal replacement of the main control board are prevented. However, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is closed.

In the game machine 5th or 5th,
The main control means is
game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value to the player based on the game result (for example, large opening opening/closing process (S103));
setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the probability of derivation of the game value to be given to the player by the game value giving means;
Said protective means are:
A game machine 5 characterized by covering at least the setting means.

According to the game machine 5-3, in addition to the effects of the game machine 5-1 or 5-2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined game value to the player, and the setting means can change the probability of deriving the game value to be imparted to the player by the game value imparting means. The protective means then covers at least the setting means. As a result, by covering the setting means capable of changing the probability of deriving the game value to be given to the player with the protection means, fraudulent acts such as illegally changing the setting contents are prevented, , there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved.

In any of the gaming machines 5 1 to 5,
The main control means is
A wiring attachment portion (e.g., connector attachment portion 100h) to which wiring is attached to output control information to other control means including the payout control means,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 5, characterized in that it covers at least the wiring attachment part.

According to game machine 5 4, in any one of game machines 5 1 to 5 3, wiring for outputting control information to control means including payout control means by wiring attachment part of main control means is attached, and the protective means covers at least the wiring attachment portion. As a result, by covering the wiring attachment portion to which the wiring for exchanging control information between the main control means and other control means is covered by the protection means, fraudulent acts such as attaching an illegal substrate to the wiring are prevented. However, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is closed.

In any of gaming machines 5 1 to 4,
The main control means is
a game performance information display means (for example, a base display device 401) for displaying game performance information indicating the performance of a game executed in the gaming machine;
Said protective means are:
5. A game machine 5 characterized in that the game performance information display means is not covered.

According to the game machine 5, in addition to the effects of the game machines 51 to 4, the following effects are produced. That is, the game performance information indicating the performance of the game executed in the gaming machine is displayed by the game performance information display means provided in the main control means, and the game performance information display means is not covered by the protection means. Configured. As a result, there is an effect that the game performance information can always be confirmed without the protection means preventing the game performance information from being confirmed.

In any of the gaming machines 5th to 5th,
The payout control means is
a payout control board (e.g., payout board) mounted with a microchip (e.g., MPU 211) that executes processing related to game medium payout operations;
payout storage means (for example, board box 101) for storing the payout control board;
Dispensing sealing means (for example, sealing portion 111a) for sealing the dispensing storage means in a difficult-to-open manner;
Said protective means are:
A game machine 5, characterized in that at least the payout sealing means is covered.

According to the game machine 5 6, in addition to the effects of the game machines 5 1 to 5, the following effects are produced. That is, the payout control board provided in the payout control means is equipped with a microchip for executing processing related to the payout operation of the game media, and the payout control board is accommodated in the payout accommodation means. Then, the dispensing/storage means is sealed by the dispensing/sealing means so as to be difficult to unseal. Here, the protection means covers at least the dispensing sealing means.

Conventionally, there have been fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of payout control boards due to cutting of payout sealing means that seals the payout storage means in which the payout control board is stored so that it is difficult to unseal, resulting in unforeseen disadvantages for the hall. There is a risk.

Therefore, according to the game machine 5 6, at least the payout sealing means is covered by the protection means. As a result, by covering the payout sealing means of the payout storage means containing the payout control board mounted with the microchip for executing the processing related to the payout operation of the game media with the protection means, the payout control board is prevented from being illegally replaced. There is an effect that it is possible to prevent cheating and improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing body is closed.

In any of the gaming machines 5th 0 to 5th,
Storage means (for example, RAM 203) for storing game information related to the game being executed;
Erasing means (e.g., RAM erasing switch 122) for erasing the game information stored in the storage means by performing a predetermined operation (e.g., pressing operation when power is turned on);
Said protective means are:
A game machine 7 characterized by covering at least the erasing means.

According to game machine 5 7, in addition to the effects of game machines 5 0 to 5 6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the memory means stores information about the game being executed, and the game information stored in the memory means is erased by performing a predetermined operation on the erasing means. The erasing means is then covered by the protecting means. As a result, by covering the erasing means capable of erasing game-related information with the protective means, fraudulent acts such as unauthorized erasure of game-related information are prevented, and when the opening/closing body is closed, the back side of the gaming machine is protected. There is an effect that the security performance can be improved.

In game machine 5,
The erasing means is
erasing the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied;
A game machine 8 characterized by updating the probability of deriving the game value when a second condition different from the first condition is satisfied.

According to the gaming machine No. 5, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine No. 7, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the erasing means erases the information stored in the storage means when the first condition is satisfied, and updates the probability of deriving the game value when the second condition different from the first condition is satisfied. be. As a result, the erasing means can erase the storage means and the probability can be changed by the setting means according to different conditions, and various settings of the game machine can be made with a small number of members, thereby reducing the manufacturing cost. There is

In any of the gaming machines 5th 0 to 5th,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 9 characterized by being attached in a cantilever form to any one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d).

According to game machine No. 5, in addition to the effects of game machines No. 0 to No. 8, the following effect is exhibited. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the protection means is cantilevered on any one of the plates. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the influencing means with a simple structure, and it is possible to improve the security performance on the back side of the game machine at a low cost.

In addition, the "cantilever shape" is a beam shape in which one end of the protection means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is in a free state.

In any of the gaming machines 5th 0 to 5th,
Said protective means are:
A game machine 10 characterized by being made of a transparent material or a translucent material.

According to the gaming machine 5 10, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines 5 0 to 5 9, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the protective means are made of a transparent or translucent material. As a result, when the opening/closing body is closed, it becomes possible to check the influencing means from the back side of the game machine through the transparent or translucent protective means, and to detect fraud or defects in the influencing means at an early stage. has the effect of

<Land group: Connect the covers on the back side of the pachinko machine>
Conventionally, a plurality of control means for executing various game settings and processes are arranged on the back side of the gaming machine, and when the opening/closing body on which each control means is mounted is closed, the player touches the control means. configured in such a way that it cannot On the other hand, hall personnel open the opening/closing body outside the opening hours of the hall to perform various settings and maintenance work for the control means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a game machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that the control means will be tampered with from the back side of the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Rikugun was made in view of the above circumstances, and aims to provide a game machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts on the control means from the back side of the game machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
First control means (for example, sound lamp control device 113 or display control device 114) and second control means (for example, main control device 110 or payout a controller 111);
a first protection means (for example, a back pack 92) provided on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body and covering at least part or all of the first control means on the back side of the game machine;
A second protection means (for example, a protective cover member 140) provided on the support and covering at least part or all of the second control means on the back side of the game machine,
A game machine land 0, wherein a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut against a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back side of the game machine.

According to the game machine land 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the supporting body so as to be opened and closed, and the first control means and the second control means for controlling the game are mounted on the back side of the opening/closing body of the game machine. At least part or all of the first control means on the back side of the game machine is covered by the first protection means mounted on the back side of the game machine of the opening/closing body. At least part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine is covered by the second protection means provided on the support. Here, a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut against a part of the second protection means in the direction of the back surface of the gaming machine. As a result, the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means covering the first control means and the second control means, respectively, is eliminated, and there is no room for wires or the like to enter the inside of the game machine from the back side of the game machine. There is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the machine can be improved. Further, when the opening/closing body is released from the supporting body by forming the first protecting means provided on the opening/closing body so as to overlap the second protecting means provided on the supporting body in the direction of the back surface of the game machine. Even so, since the first protective means of the opening/closing body and the second protective means of the supporting body do not interfere with each other, the security performance on the back side of the game machine is improved without increasing unnecessary maintenance work or the like. It has the effect of being able to

At game machine land 0,
The opening/closing body is
The first control means is installed above the second control means,
The first protection means is
a first protection section covering the back side of the gaming machine of the first control means;
A first protrusion (for example, a lower side protrusion) that is below the first protection part and protrudes to the back side of the gaming machine,
The second safeguard is
a second protection part covering part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine;
A second projecting portion (for example, an upper side projecting portion) that is above the first protecting portion and projects to the front side of the gaming machine,
The game machine land 1 is characterized in that the first protrusion is formed so as to overlap the second protrusion in the vertical direction of the game machine.

According to the game machine land 1, in addition to the effects of the game machine land 0, the following effects are exhibited. That is, in the opening/closing body, the first control means is arranged above the second control means. In addition, the back side of the game machine of the first control means is covered by the first protection part provided in the first protection means, and the first projecting part provided below the first protection part projects toward the back side of the game machine. Protruded. Furthermore, the second protective portion provided in the first protective means covers the back side of the game machine of the second control means, and the second projecting portion provided above the second protective portion projects toward the front side of the game machine. Protruded. The first projecting portion is formed so as to overlap the second projecting portion in the vertical direction of the gaming machine. As a result, the protruding portions of the first protective means and the second protective means are formed so as to be folded vertically, so that the gap between the first protective means and the second protective means can be eliminated. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wires and the like from entering from the back side of the game machine, and it is possible to improve the security performance of the back side of the game machine.

In the game machine Land 0 or Land 1,
The support is
Formed by combining multiple plates,
The second protection means is
The game machine land 2 is attached in a cantilever shape to any one of the plate bodies (for example, the right side plate 11d).

According to the game machine land 2, in addition to the effects of the game machine land 0 or land 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a support is formed by combining a plurality of plates, and the second protection means is cantilevered on any one of the plates. As a result, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts on the second control means with a simple structure, and it is possible to inexpensively improve the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine.

In addition, the "cantilever shape" is a beam shape in which one end of the protective means is fixed and the other end is not fixed and is free.

In the game machine land 2,
The first protection means is
A game machine land 3, wherein at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening/closing body in the form of a beam with both ends fixed.

According to the game machine land 3, in addition to the effects of the game machine land 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, at least one end and the other end of the first protection means are attached to the opening/closing body in the form of a beam with both ends fixed. As a result, even if the second protection means attached to the support in the form of a cantilever beam receives an impact from the back side of the game machine, the first protection means attached to the opening/closing body in the form of a beam with both ends fixed can be prevented. The means can compensate for the rigidity of the second protective means. Therefore, even if an impact or the like is applied from the back side of the game machine, it is possible to prevent the second protection means from being damaged.

In any of game machines land 0 to land 3,
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) that locks the opening/closing body and the support;
a game body (for example, game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with ball entry means (for example, first start opening 64a) for allowing game balls to enter;
A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting a game ball toward the game area;
A lottery information acquiring means (for example, a reserved ball storage area 203b) for acquiring lottery information based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means;
Determination means for determining the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means (for example, fluctuation start processing (S307));
game value imparting means (for example, large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result derived by the determining means;
a setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the probability of deriving the specific determination result by the determination means;
The second protection means is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated. A game machine land 4 characterized by:

According to the game machine land 4, in addition to the effects of the game machines land 0 to land 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device. A game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means for allowing game balls to enter. Further, the game ball is shot toward the game area by the shooting means, and the lottery information is acquired by the lottery information acquiring means based on the game ball shot by the shooting means entering the ball entering means. The determination means determines the lottery information acquired by the lottery information acquisition means, and the game value imparting means imparts a predetermined game value to the player based on the specific determination result derived by the determination means. be done. Here, the probability of deriving a specific determination result by the determination means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. The second protection means makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, while the setting means is operable when the opening/closing body is released from the support. configured as possible. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is controlled by the second protection means. There is an effect that the operation is made difficult and the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved when the opening/closing body is locked with respect to the support.

In any of game machines land 0 to land 4,
Engagement means for engaging a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support. Game machine land 5.

According to the game machine land 5, in addition to the effects of the game machines land 0 to land 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, when the opening/closing body is closed with respect to the support, the engagement means engages a part of the first protection means and a part of the second protection means. Thereby, the gap between the first protection means and the second protection means can be eliminated by engaging the first protection means and the second protection means when the opening/closing body is closed. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent wires and the like from entering from the back side of the game machine when the opening/closing body is closed, and it is possible to improve the security performance of the back side of the game machine.

In the game machine land 5,
The locking device is
It is configured to be operable from the front side of the game machine,
A game machine land 6, comprising an engagement release means for releasing the engagement of the first protection means and the second protection means by the engagement means when a predetermined operation is performed.

According to the gaming machine land 6, in addition to the effects of the gaming machine land 5, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the locking device is configured to be operable from the front side of the game machine, and the engaging means engages the first protective means and the second protective means by performing a predetermined operation by means of disengagement means provided in the locking device. is released. As a result, the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means can be released from the front side of the game machine. By performing a predetermined operation on the release means to release the engagement between the first protection means and the second protection means, there is an effect that the opening/closing body can be released from the support without any trouble.

In any of game machines land 0 to land 6,
The first protection means is
A game machine land 7 supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the opening and closing body.

According to the game machine land 7, in addition to the effects of the game machines land 0 to land 6, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the first protection means is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the opening/closing body. As a result, part of the first protection means overlaps part of the second protection means in the direction of the back of the game machine, preventing the first protection means from being opened in the direction of the back of the game machine when the opening/closing body is closed. It has the effect of being able to

<Lacquer group: 2 versions of 1 group>
an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
a game body (for example, game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with ball entry means (for example, first start opening 64a) for allowing game balls to enter;
A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting a game ball toward the game area;
game value imparting means (for example, large opening opening/closing process (S103)) for imparting a predetermined game value to the player based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means; In a game machine equipped with
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) capable of changing the setting of the game value imparted by the game value imparting means,
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated. A gaming machine lacquer 0 characterized by comprising protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for

According to the game machine Lacquer 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the support so as to be openable/closable, and the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device. A game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means for allowing game balls to enter. In addition, the shooting means shoots the game ball toward the game area, and based on the fact that the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means, the game value imparting means gives the player a predetermined game. value is given. Here, the game value imparted by the game value imparting means is configured to be changeable by the setting means. The protective means provided on the support makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device. A setting means is operably configured. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is difficult to operate due to the protective means. In addition, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the game machine can be improved when the opening/closing member is locked with respect to the support member.

<Sakugun: Higher version of Ichigun>
Conventionally, a game medium is shot by a shooting means into a game area provided with a plurality of winning holes, and when the game medium wins one of the winning holes, a predetermined number of There are gaming machines in which game media are paid out to players.

Among the gaming machines described above, for example, there is a gaming machine equipped with a function that enables hall personnel to change game settings such as acquisition conditions and acquisition details for the gaming value to be given to the player (for example, patent documents: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-024202).

In such gaming machines, there is a risk that game settings may be changed due to fraudulent activity, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing changes in game settings due to fraud.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
a game body (for example, game board 13) having a game area mounted on the opening/closing body and provided with ball entry means (for example, first start opening 64a) for allowing game balls to enter;
A shooting means (for example, a ball shooting unit 112a) for shooting a game ball toward the game area;
game value imparting means for imparting a predetermined game value to the player (for example, large opening opening/closing process (S103)) when the game ball fired by the shooting means enters the ball entering means; In a game machine that
A setting means (for example, a setting key 501) that can change the setting of the degree of advantage for the player in multiple stages,
The support is
When the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device, the setting means is made difficult to operate, and when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be operated. A game machine handling 0 characterized by comprising protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for

According to game machine handling 0, the opening/closing body is supported by the supporting body so as to be openable/closable, and the opening/closing body and the supporting body are locked by the locking device. A game body is mounted on the opening/closing body, and a game area is formed in which the game body is provided with ball entry means for allowing game balls to enter. Further, the game ball is shot toward the game area by the shooting means, and when the game ball shot by the shooting means enters the ball entering means, the game value imparting means gives the player a predetermined game value. is given. Here, the setting means can change the setting of the degree of advantage to the player in a plurality of stages. The protective means provided on the support makes it difficult to operate the setting means when the opening/closing body is locked to the support by the locking device. A setting means is operably configured. Thus, when the opening/closing body is released from the support, the setting means can be easily operated, and when the opening/closing body is locked to the support, the setting means is difficult to operate due to the protective means. can be Therefore, there is an effect that the security performance on the back side of the gaming machine can be improved when the opening/closing member is locked with respect to the support member.

The "advantage degree for the player" is, for example, the probability of the first symbol jackpot, the probability of selecting the jackpot pattern when the first symbol wins the jackpot, or the game state (for example, the probability fluctuation state) that is advantageous to the player. the probability of transition to , the number of prize balls in the case of winning the first prize hole, the driving time or driving mode of the movable accessory that changes the flow mode of the game ball, the inclination mode of the member that affects the flow mode of the game ball, It may be any member or process that influences a situation that is advantageous to the player when the player plays the game, such as the inclination of the gaming machine itself.

<Ku Gun: Lateral version of Group 2>
2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a setting means for performing various game settings is provided on the back side of a gaming machine, and when the opening/closing body on which the setting means is mounted is closed, a player cannot touch the setting means. It is configured. On the other hand, a person involved in the hall opens the opening/closing body outside the opening hours of the hall, and performs various maintenance work and setting work for the setting means (for example, Patent Document 1 (Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-024202)).

However, in such a game machine, even when the opening/closing body is closed, there is a risk that the setting means will be tampered with from the back side of the game machine, and there is still room for improvement in this respect.

The invention of Kugure has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing fraudulent acts on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening/closing body for performing various game settings;
a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the game machine is installed in the game hall, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable (for example, a fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d to install the pachinko machine 10 on the island equipment without gaps). A game machine Ku 0 characterized by:

According to the game machine No. 0, the opening/closing body is supported to be openable and closable with respect to the support, the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various game settings are performed by setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. done. The protection means protects the setting means. Here, when the game machine is installed in the game arcade, the protective means is configured to be non-detachable. As a result, the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various game settings is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the game machine when the game machine is installed in the game hall, thereby preventing fraudulent acts on the setting means. has the effect of being able to

an opening/closing member (for example, inner frame 12) that is supported to be openable and closable with respect to a supporting member (for example, outer frame 11);
a locking device (for example, a cylinder lock 20) for locking the opening/closing body and the support;
setting means (for example, a setting key 501) mounted on the opening/closing body for performing various game settings;
a protective means (for example, a protective cover member 140) for protecting the setting means,
When the opening/closing body and the support body are locked by the locking device, the protection means cannot be detached (for example, when the mounting surface 151 of the protective cover member 140 is in contact with the inner wall of the right side plate 11d). , a fixing screw 11g is inserted from the outside of the right side plate 11d).

According to the game machine No. 1, the opening/closing body is supported so as to be openable/closable with respect to the support, the opening/closing body and the support are locked by the locking device, and various game settings are performed by setting means mounted on the opening/closing body. done. The protection means protects the setting means. Here, when the support member and the opening/closing member are locked by the locking device, the protection means is configured to be non-detachable. As a result, the protection means for protecting the setting means for making various game settings is configured to be difficult or impossible to detach from the game machine in a state in which the supporting body and the opening/closing body are locked, thereby preventing fraudulent actions with respect to the setting means. It has the effect of being able to

In game machine Ku 0 or Ku 1,
The setting means
Having a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
A game machine 2, characterized in that, when the supporting body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the game machine faces the back side of the game machine.

According to the game machine Ku-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Ku-0 or Ku-1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it is constructed so that a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and when the support and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole faces the back of the game machine. . Thus, there is an effect that the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various game settings can prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means from the back side of the gaming machine.

In game machine Ku 0 or Ku 1,
The setting means
Having a keyhole into which a predetermined key can be inserted,
The keyhole is
A game machine 3, characterized in that, when the support body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the game machine is oriented to the side of the game machine.

According to the game machine Ku-2, in addition to the effects of the game machine Ku-0 or Ku-1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, a predetermined key can be inserted into a keyhole provided in the setting means, and when the supporting body and the opening/closing body are locked by the locking device, the keyhole is positioned to the side of the game machine (rightward or leftward). configured to face As a result, there is an effect that the protection means for protecting the setting means for performing various game settings can prevent fraudulent acts on the setting means from the side of the gaming machine.

For any one of the game machines A1 to A9, the game machines B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines B1 to B6, the above game machines A1 to A9, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines C1 to C3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines D1 to D6, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines E1 to E3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines F1 to F5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, I1 to I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines I1 to I4, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines J1 to J5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines K1 to K5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines L1 to L5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines M1 to M6, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines N1 to N5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machine O1, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1~I4, J1~J5, K1~K5, L1~L5, M1~M6, N1~N5, P1~P5, Q1~Q5, R1~R5, S1~S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1~ V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines P1 to P5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines Q1 to Q5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines R1 to R5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines S1 to S4, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines T1 and T2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, U1, U2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines U1 and U2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, V1- V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines V1 to V9, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines W1 to W7, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines X1 to X6, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines A1 to A9, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines A1 to A7, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, G1 to G 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines C1 to C5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, D1 to D3, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines D1 to D3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to A7, C1 to C5, E1, O2, F1, F2, K1 to K 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines E1 and E2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, F1, F2, G1 to G 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines F1 and F2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, O1, O2, Ki1 to Ki 3, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines G1 to G3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, 1 to 3, 1 to 6, 1 to 5, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines H1 to H3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines 1 to 6, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines Ko1 to Ko5, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines SA1 and SA2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Shi 1, Shi 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines 1 and 2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines S1 and S2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machine set 1 and set 2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, So 1, So 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines S1 and S2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines T1 and T2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, I 0 to I 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines H1 and H2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, I 0 to I 10, 2 0 to 2 8, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines 1 to 3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, I 0 to I 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines Te1 to Te3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1 to 3, 1, 2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, 0 to 7, 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

It should be noted that for any one of the game machines T1 and T2, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, 10 to 1 10, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines 10 to 10, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 20 to 28, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines 20 to 28, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, So 2, Ta 1, Ta 2, Chi 1, Chi 2, Tsu 1 to Tsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, I 0 to I 10, Part 0 to Part 7, Part 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the configurations of the gaming machines 0 to 7, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1, 2, 1 to 3, 1 to 3, 1, 2, 10 to 10, 20 to 28, 0 The configuration limited by any one of 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the above-mentioned game machines 0-7, the game machines A1-A9, B1-B6, C1-C3, D1-D6, E1-E3, F1-F5, G1-G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, G 1, G 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, 10 to 1 10, 20 to 28, 30 A configuration limited by any one of 3 to 7, 50 to 59, 0 to 7 land, 0 to lacquer, 0 to 0, 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any one of the game machines 50 to 59, the above game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, G 1, G 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, 10 to 1 10, 20 to 28, 30 A configuration limited by any one of 3 from 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 7, 0 to lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

For any one of the game machines Land 0 to Land 7, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, G 1, G 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, 10 to 1 10, 20 to 28, 30 A configuration limited by any one of 3 to 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, 0 to lacquer, 0 to 0, and 0 to 3 may be applied.

In addition, for any of the configurations of the gaming machine lacquer 0, the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, E2, F1, F2, G 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1~T3, T1~T3, T1, T2, 10~10, 20~28, 30~37 .

It should be noted that for any one of the configurations of game machine handling 0, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3 , I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2 , V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A9, A1 to B7, C1 to C5, D1 to D3, E1, E2, F1, F2, G 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, So 1, S2, T1, T2, T1, T2, T1~T3, T1~T3, T1, T2, 10~10, 20~28, 30~37 .

In addition, for any one of the game machines KU0 to KU3, the game machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1-H3, I1-I4, J1-J5, K1-K5, L1-L5, M1-M6, N1-N5, O1, P1-P5, Q1-Q5, R1-R5, S1-S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1-V9, W1-W7, X1-X6, A1-A9, A1-A7, C1-C5, D1-D3, E1, E2, F1, F 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Ko 1 to Ko 5, Sa 1, Sa 2, Si 1, Si 2, Su 1, Su 2, Se 1, Se 2, G 1, G 2, T 1, T 2, T 1, T 2, T 1 to T 3, T 1 to T 3, T 1, T 2, 10 to 1 10, 20 to 28, 30 A configuration limited to any one of 7, 0 to 7, 0 to 9, 0 to 7 land, 0 lacquer, and 03 may be applied.

In these cases, further effects can be obtained by applying each configuration.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, A 1 to A 7, U 1 to U 5, D 1 to E 3, O 1, O 2, Ka 1, Ka 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Co 1 to Co 5, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, T 1, T 2, C 1, C 2, C 1 Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, 0 to 7, 0 to 7, 5 0 to 5 9, land 0 to land 7. A game machine Y1 in any one of Lacquer 0, Saku 0, Ku 0 to Ku 3, wherein the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with variable display means for displaying the identification information in a fixed manner after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, As a result, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has passed, and the stop time and a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on the condition that the definite identification information of is the specific identification information. In this case, typical examples of game media include coins and medals.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, A 1 to A 7, U 1 to U 5, D 1 to E 3, O 1, O 2, Ka 1, Ka 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Co 1 to Co 5, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, T 1, T 2, C 1, C 2, C 1 Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, 0 to 7, 0 to 7, 5 0 to 5 9, land 0 to land 7. A game machine Y2 in any one of lacquer 0, sword 0, ku0 to ku3, wherein the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Above all, the basic structure of a pachinko game machine is provided with an operating handle, and in response to the operation of the operating handle, balls are shot into a predetermined game area, and the balls are ejected into actuating openings arranged at predetermined positions in the game area. For example, the identification information dynamically displayed on the display means is determined and stopped after a predetermined period of time, with the requirement of winning a prize (or passing through an activation opening). In addition, when a special game state occurs, a variable winning device (large winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the game area is opened in a predetermined manner to allow the balls to win, and a value corresponding to the number of winning Values (including not only prize balls but also data written to magnetic cards, etc.) can be given.

Gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B6, C1 to C3, D1 to D6, E1 to E3, F1 to F5, G1 to G3, H1 to H3, I1 to I4, J1 to J5, K1 to K5, L1 to L5, M1 to M6, N1 to N5, O1, P1 to P5, Q1 to Q5, R1 to R5, S1 to S4, T1, T2, U1, U2, V1 to V9, W1 to W7, X1 to X6, A1 to A 9, A 1 to A 7, U 1 to U 5, D 1 to E 3, O 1, O 2, Ka 1, Ka 2, Ki 1 to Ki 3, Ku 1 to Ku 3, Ke 1 to Ke 6, Co 1 to Co 5, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, C 1, C 2, T 1, T 2, C 1, C 2, C 1 Karatsu 3, Te 1 to Te 3, To 1, To 2, 1 0 to 1 10, 2 0 to 2 8, 0 to 7, 0 to 7, 5 0 to 5 9, land 0 to land 7. A game machine Y3 characterized in that in any one of lacquer 0, sword 0, ku0 to ku3, the game machine is a combination of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the integrated game machine is "provided with variable display means for confirming and displaying the identification information after dynamically displaying an identification information string consisting of a plurality of identification information, and an operation means for starting (such as an operation lever) The identification information starts to change due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined period of time has passed. a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player on condition that the fixed identification information at the time of stop is the specific identification information; the ball is used as a game medium; A gaming machine configured to require a predetermined number of balls at the start of dynamic display, and to pay out a large number of balls at the occurrence of a special game state.

In addition, the "ball" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the "game medium" or "game ball" in the claims, and the "accessory ratio" described in each of the above embodiments corresponds to the " Corresponding to the "ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the first winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means", the "continuous "Accessory ratio" corresponds to "the ratio of the number of game media paid out based on winning to the second winning port to the number of game media paid out by the payout means" in the scope of claims do.

10 Pachinko machines (game machines)
11 outer frame (part of support)
11d right plate (part of lateral part)
11e Mounting hole on cover (part of side insertion hole)
11f Cover lower mounting hole (part of side insertion hole)
11g fixing screw (part of fixing member)
12 inner frame (a part of the opening and closing body)
14 front frame (part of decoration)
20 cylinder lock (part of locking device, part of first locking means, part of second locking means)
63a 1st regular prize gate (prize gate)
63b 2nd regular prize gate (prize gate)
64a 1st starting gate (winning gate, 1st winning gate)
64b Second starting gate (winning gate, first winning gate)
65a Grand Prize Opening (Prize Opening, 1st Prize Opening, 2nd Prize Opening)
100 Substrate box (part of storage means, part of main storage means)
100c sealing unit (part of sealing means, part of influencing means)
100d setting part (part of changing part, part of exposed part (keyhole))
100e Setting part side wall (part of the immersion part)
100f bottom of setting part (part of immersion part)
100h Connector attachment part (part of wiring attachment part, part of influence means)
101 board box (part of payout storage means)
110 main controller (main control means, display control means, part of control means, part of influence means)
111 payout control device (payout means, part of payout control means, part of influence means)
111a sealing part (part of sealing means, part of influence means, part of dispensing sealing means)
112a ball launch unit (launching means)
122 RAM erase switch (predetermined operating means, information erasing instruction means, first operating means, part of third operating means, part of erasing means, part of influencing means)
140 protective cover member (part of protective means)
150 Cover mounting portion (part of mounting portion)
152 Upper mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
153 lower mounting hole (part of mounting insertion hole)
154 bending part (part of bending part)
160 upright (part of protective means)
170 cover part (part of protection means)
171 cover plate (part of protective means)
172 cover-side projection (part of projection)
173 key cover part (part of protection means)
200 registers 201 MPU (arithmetic means, part of microchip)
202e Award number table (payout information storage means)
202f Trigger information data (predetermined trigger information storage means)
203 RAM (storage means)
203b Reserved ball storage area (part of lottery information acquisition means)
203l Real-time base value data (part of game performance information storage means, 0th storage area)
203m Previous base value data (part of game performance information storage means, first storage area)
203n Second-last base value data (part of game performance information storage means, second storage area)
203o Second-last base value data (part of game performance information storage means)
203p New startup flag (new startup specifying means)
203x Area in used area (first storage means)
203x1 outside work area (first work area)
203x2 outer stack area (first stack area)
203x11 probability set value data (first storage means)
203×12 update probability set value data (second storage means)
203x16 RAM erase switch flag (storage means)
203y Out-of-use area (second storage means)
203y1 Outside work area (work area, second work area)
203y2 Outer stack area (stack area, second stack area)
203r Base value data (storage means)
203s Character product ratio data (storage means)
203t Error data (error history storage means)
207 Character ratio management chip (microchip)
207a inspection terminal (external device connection means)
208a First starting port switch (winning detection means)
208b Second starting switch (winning detection means)
208c 1st normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208d 2nd normal winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208e Big winning opening switch (winning detection means)
208g1 Inner frame open switch (part of open/close detection means)
208g2 Front frame open switch (a part of decoration open/close detection means)
211 MPU (Part of Microchip)
261 CPU (external device connection detection means, second calculation means, ratio calculation means)
263 first reading memory (second storage means)
264 second reading memory (storage means, third storage means)
267 capacitor (power supply means)
300 inspection device (external device)
401 base display device (game performance information display means, output means)
401a, 401b 7-segment display (segment display, second display means)
401c, 401d 7-segment display (segment display, first display means)
501 setting key (permission means, first operation means, part of setting means, part of change means)
502 Error display button (error history display acceptance means)
S103 Large opening opening/closing process (part of game value imparting means)
S152 (Payout number setting means)
S307 Fluctuation start processing (part of determination means)
S717 (power-off detection means)
S728 (Second storage control means)
S729 (judgment means)
S740, S741 (storage control means, ratio calculation means)
S723 (third storage control means)
S761 (storage control means)
S751 to S754, S771, S772 (output means)
S2022 (Saving means)
S2024 (stack pointer setting means)
S2025 (recovery means)
S2031 (first fixed value storage means)
S2041 (second fixed value storage means)
S3007 (confirmation display means)
S3008 (stop means)
S3208 (game performance information acquisition means, shift processing means)
S3302 (Special display mode display means)
S4004: Yes (first mode start-up means)
S4004: No (third mode start-up means)
S4011: Yes (Second mode start-up means)
S4011: No (fourth mode start-up means)
S4005 (change means)
S4210 (confirmation processing executing means)
S4213 (change process executing means)
S4301 (interrupt permitting means)
S4308 (detection means)
S4309 (detection means)
S4312 (interrupt inhibiting means)
S4401 (interrupt permitting means)
S4405 (interrupt prohibiting means)
S4407 (part of specific detection transition means)
S4408 (part of confirmation availability determination means)
S4412 (part of changeability determination means)
S4451 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4452 (part of confirmation transfer means)
S4453 (part of change transfer means)
S4454 (part of change transfer means)

Claims (1)

an opening/closing body that is supported to be openable/closable with respect to the support;
a first control means and a second control means mounted on the back side of the game machine for controlling the game;
a first protection means provided on the back side of the gaming machine of the opening/closing body and covering at least part or all of the first control means on the back side of the gaming machine;
a second protection means provided on the support and covering at least part or all of the second control means on the back side of the gaming machine;
A game machine, wherein a part of the first protection means is formed so as to overlap and abut against a part of the second protection means in the back side of the game machine.

Images